DISCOVERY REPORTS

VOLUME XXV

DISCOVERY REPORTS

Issued by the Discovery Committee and
National Institute of Oceanography

VOLUME XXV

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

1953

PUBLISHED BY

THE SYNDICS OF THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

London Office: Bentley House, n.w. i

American Branch : New York

Agents for Canada, India, and Pakistan: Macmillan

Note. On 31 March 1949 the Discovery Committee was wound up, and the Discovery
Investigations were taken over by the National Institute of Oceanography. The Institute
accepted responsibiHty for the publication of pp. 1 13-3 14 of the present volume, and will
continue to issue further parts in the Discovery Reports.

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge
(Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

CONTENTS

ANTARCTIC PYRENOCARP LICHENS (published ist April, 1948)
By I. Mackenzie Lamb, D.Sc.

Introduction

Historical Survey of Lichenological Work in the Antarctic

Geographical Distribution

Ecology

Systematic Account

List of Literature

Plates I-IV .

page 2,

3

9

10

II

28

folUmdng page 30

WHALE MARKING II. DISTRIBUTION OF BLUE, FIN AND HUMPBACK WHALES
MARKED FROM 1932 TO 1938 (published 31st May, 1948)
By George W. Rayner

Distribution of Whales marked
Blue Whales

Fin Whales
Humpback Whales
Plates V-XXII

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING

(published 29th September, 1948)

By H. F. P. Herdman, M.Sc.

Introduction

Sounding Equipment

Correction of Echo Soundings

Difficulties of obtaining Soundings ....
Slope Correction and the condition of the Ocean Floor
Terminology of Submarine Relief ....

The Scotia Arc

Detailed Analysis of the Sectors of the Scotia Arc .

Soundings during Hydrographical Surveys

Soundings off Antarctica in the Meridian of Greenwich

The Continental Shelf of Antarctica

Soundings in other Localities

Appendix I

Appendix II .

References

Notes on the Plates

Plates XXIH-XXXI

page 33
35
• • 36

37
following page 38

THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-39

page 41
42
48
50
52
60
61
68
77
85
86
88

95

98

102

105
following page 106

67554

vi CONTENTS

ON THE REPRODUCTIVE ORGANS OF HOLOZOA CYLINDRICA LESSON (published

25th March, 1949)
By Dr A. Arnback Christie-Linde page 109

Plate XXII following page 112

THE HABITS OF FIN WHALES (pubUshed 28th July, 1949)
By E. R. Gunther

Introduction ....

Appearance at the Surface .
Movements beneath the Surface
Comparison with Earlier Accounts
Summary and Conclusions .

References

Appendix. Tables 3 and 4

Plate XXXIII ....

page 115
116
127
131
135
135
137
following page 1 42

STATION LIST R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY' 1931-1938 (published 21st September, 1949)
Introduction P'^g^ ^44

Peru Coastal Current (Stations ws 576-748)
Trawling Survey, Patagonian Shelf (Stations ws 749-
Whale Marking Cruises: I (Stations ws 883-895)
II (Stations ws 896-922)

III (Stations ws 923-937)

IV (Stations ws 938-959)

Summarized List of Stations

Plates XXXI V-XXXVI I

I)

147
217
247

255
269
277
280
following page 280

ELLOBIOPSIDAE (published 20th December, 1949)
By Dr H. Boschma, F.M.L.S., C.M.Z.S.

Introduction

Review of the Literature of the Ellobiopsidae .

Amallocystis fagei Boschma

Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp. .....

Amallocystis capillosus Fage .....

The Characters of the Species of the Genus Amallocystis
The Genera of the Family Ellobiopsidae .
Geographical distribution of the Ellobiopsidae

Literature

Plates XXXVIII-XLI

page 283

294
302
307
311
312

313
following page 314

T

ANTARCTIC PYRENOCARP LICHENS

By I. Mackenzie Lamb, D.Sc.
(Plates I-IV; Text-figs. 1-4)

INTRODUCTION

HE number of species of Pyrenocarp lichens at present known to occur in the Antarctic is twenty,
the genera represented being Verrucaria, Thelidiim, Staiirothele, Microglae?ta, Dermatocarpon and
Mastodia. The genus Etidocarpon has also been recorded (see p. 26), but its occurrence is doubtful and
cannot at present be verified. Of these genera, Microglaena, Dermatocarpon and (technically) Staiiro-
thele^ had not been previously recorded from this region. The material upon which the present study is
based is mainly that collected by : {a) the Discovery Expeditions of 193 1-3, 1933-5, and 1935-7; (^) the
British Graham Land Expedition of 1934-7 ; ^^d (c) the Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey (during
the period 1944-6), with which I served in the capacity of Botanist. In addition, the material collected
by the following earlier expeditions has been revised and included in this paper: {a) James Clark
Ross's 'Erebus and Terror' Expedition of 1839-43 '> (^) the Belgian Expedition of 1897-9; ^tid (c) the
Swedish Expedition of 1901-3.

In connexion with these studies, I should like to express my thanks to the authorities of the following
institutions : {a) the British Museum (Natural History), London, for a grant of money and special leave
whereby I was enabled to study the material in the Vainio collection at Turku, Finland ; {b) Turun
Yliopiston Kasvitieteellinen Laitos, Turku, for all facilities placed at my disposal during my study of
the material of the Belgian Expedition there in 1937 ; and (c) the Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet, Stockholm,
for the loan of some of the specimens collected by the Swedish Expedition. I am also grateful to my
colleagues of the Falkland Islands Dependencies Survey, Major Andrew Taylor, Lieut. E. H. Back,
Lieut. D. James, and Capt. V. Russell, for assistance in the collection and observation of lichen
specimens during the sledging trips, and to my friend Dr Rolf Santesson of Uppsala for the benefit of
his help and advice on the ecological terminology of the marine species.

HISTORICAL SURVEY OF LICHENOLOGICAL
WORK IN THE ANTARCTIC

A good general account of botanical exploration in the antarctic regions has been published by
Skottsberg (1940). A brief survey of the lichenological field work done by the various expeditions is
appended here, and the map on p. 4 shows the localities in the Graham Land sector where lichen
collections have been made.

The first recorded collection of lichens from south of 60° lat. is that of James Eights, who visited the
South Shetlands in 1830. His scientific work there has been reviewed by Caiman (1937).

The ' Erebus and Terror' Expedition of James Clark Ross, which visited the Antarctic in the years
1839-43, was accompanied by the famous botanist J. D. Hooker. His antarctic collections were made
on Cockburn Island, a small island of basalt and agglomerate lying in the Erebus and Terror Gulf on
the east side of the Graham Land peninsula. A preliminary list of these lichens was published by
Hooker and Taylor (1844), and a more comprehensive enumeration of nine species, in Hooker's Flora
Afitarctica (1845-7).

^ Already recorded under the old comprehensive generic name Verrucaria by Hooker (1845-7).

DISCOVERY REPORTS

Dumont d'Urville visited Adelie Land in 1840, and landed on a rocky islet off the coast in the neigh-
bourhood of ' Pointe Geologie ' ; he collected rock specimens, but ' of vegetation nothing was seen '
(according to Fricker, 1900).

Fig. I. The Graham Land peninsula and adjacent islands, showing localities where collections
of lichens have been made.

A lapse of over 50 years now intervened until in 1895 Borchgrevink landed from the steam whaler
'Antarctic' on Possession Island and Cape Adare, in South Victoria Land, and collected one species of
lichen (see Fricker (1900), where further references are given).

The first comprehensive lichen collections were made by the Belgian Antarctic Expedition of 1897-9.
Fifty-five species of lichen were collected on the west coast of the Graham Land peninsula, and sub-

HISTORICAL SURVEY OF LICHENOLOGICAL WORK IN THE ANTARCTIC S

sequently classified by Vainio (1903). Twenty-eight of these species and one Uchen parasite proved to
be new to science, together with several varieties and forms.

The ' Southern Cross' Expedition of 1898- 1900, led by Borchgrevink, carried out scientific work in
South Victoria Land, and a few lichens were collected in what was then known as Geikie Land, not far
from Cape Adare. The official scientific report of this expedition was published by the British Museum,
and in it four species of lichen, all previously known, were recorded by Blackman (1902). This material
is preserved in the British Museum herbarium. Other lichen material collected by the same expedition
was submitted to Prof. Th. M. Fries, who also enumerated four species (1902), with one new form of
Lecanora chrysoleuca. This material is presumably in Th. Fries's herbarium at Uppsala.

In the year 1901 three independent expeditions left for the Antarctic: {a) the British National
Antarctic Expedition; {b) the Swedish South Polar Expedition; and (c) the German South Polar
Expedition.

The British National Antarctic Expedition of 1901-4 brought back a collection of lichens from the
region around the McMurdo Sound in South Victoria Land, partly from near the winter station of the
' Discovery' and partly from altitudes of 500-1600 m. on Mt Terror and in the West Mountains at the
head of the Ferrar Glacier. In this collection Darbishire (1910) identified twenty-four species of which
five were new to science. The material is preserved in the box collection of the British Museum.

The Swedish South Polar Expedition of 190 1-3 reached the South Shetlands in 1902, and lichens
were collected by the eminent botanist and phytogeographer Carl Skottsberg both there and along the
Gerlache Strait and the eastern side of the Trinity Peninsula. Unfortunately, much of the scientific
material was lost when the 'Antarctic' was crushed in the ice in 1903, but a number of specimens,
including lichens, were preserved, in conditions of great hardship and difficulty, throughout the en-
forced sojourn of the party on Paulet Island until they were relieved the following season. The lichens
were deah with by Darbishire (1912). Species from south of 60° lat. numbered forty-six (plus one
lichen-parasite), of which nine were new to science. This collection, apart from a few duplicate
specimens in the Kew Herbarium, is at the Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet in Stockholm. Some of
Darbishire's new species have been redescribed by Zahlbruckner (1917) and Magnusson (1929).

The German South Polar Expedition of 1901-3 visited Kaiser Wilhelm II Land in what is now the
Australian Antarctic Territory. Three lichens were taken from the Gaussberg, and were subsequently
identified by Zahlbruckner (1906), who found one of them to be the type of a new variety. They were
preserved at Berlin-Dahlem.

Simultaneously with the Swedish and German Expeditions, the Scottish National Antarctic Expe-
dition of 1902-4 was working at the South Orkneys, and several lichens were brought back from there
to be named by Darbishire, who recorded eleven species, one of which, a fruticulose Placoditim, was
considered to be new atthe time (Darbishire, 1905), but subsequently found to be identical with Vainio's
P. regale (Darbishire, 1912a). I have not succeeded in discovering the whereabouts of this collection,
but Prof. R. N. Rudmose Brown kindly sent to the British Museum a few previously overlooked
unnamed specimens gathered by this expedition, of which he was a member.

In 1903 Dr Charcot took the field with the first French Antarctic Expedition. This returned in 1905,
after wintering at Booth (Wandel) Island in the Kaiser Wilhelm II Archipelago. A small collection of
lichens was made and submitted to the Abbe Hue for identification. Of the sixteen species present
four (and a lichen-parasite) were considered to be new (Hue, 1908). I saw some of the type material at
the Museum d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris, in 1936.

At least one lichen was collected in the South Orkneys by a visitor named Edgar Szumla in 1904.
This information is derived from the recent publication by Frey (1936) of a new variety of Umbilicaria
Dillenii based 'on this collector's material from there, and present in the Berlin Museum.

6 DISCOVERY REPORTS

The next expedition to visit the Antarctic was Shackleton's first British Antarctic Expedition of
1907-9. A base was established at Cape Royds in McMurdo Sound, South Victoria Land. Mt Erebus
(about 4250 m.) was ascended, and both geological and botanical collections were made. These included
thirteen lichens, of which a list, including one new species, was published by Darbishire (1923). I have
not been able to trace this interesting collection.

Charcot's second French Antarctic Expedition of 1908-10 was organized with very complete pro-
vision for scientific research. Numerous landings were made along the western coast of the Graham
Land peninsula, and rich biological collections brought in. The lichens were subsequently examined by
Hue, whose report on them (1915) enumerates 112 species, of which no less than ninety were sup-
posedly new to science. This apparent preponderance of endemic species has since been found to be to
a large extent illusory, being due to Hue's inelastic conception of the species concept and his failure to
allow for ecologically conditioned variation. The material, for the most part brought back in situ on
large blocks, unfortunately appears to have been lost; a search for them at the Museum d'Histoire
Naturelle, Paris, in 1936 brought to light only a few of the smaller specimens which had been incor-
porated in the general lichen herbarium.

It is known that botanical specimens were collected in King Edward VH Land by Lieut. Prestrud
of the Norwegian Antarctic Expedition of 1910-12, but apparently no account of the lichens has ever
been published.

Scott's last British Antarctic Expedition of 1910-13 brought back seventeen species of lichen from
Cape Adare and Evans Coves in South Victoria Land. They were treated by Darbishire (1923 a) who
found eight of them to be new to science. They are preserved at the British Museum, partly in the
herbarium and partly in the box collection.

Mawson's Australasian Antarctic Expedition of 1911-14 carried out biological investigations in
Adelie Land and Queen Mary Land. According to Dodge and Baker (1938), the report on the lichens
still awaits publication.

In the years 19 14-17 Shackleton undertook his second, or Transantarctic Expedition. The party was
marooned on Elephant Island in the South Shetlands, and two lichens collected from there were named
by Darbishire (1923).

The Shackleton-Rowett Expedition of 1920-2 again visited Elephant Island, and a lichen was noted
on some of the rocks (Wild, 1923, p. 335). The specimen, now in the British Museum, is a Neiiropogon.

Mention should be made here of several small collections of lichens made in the South Orkneys and
Shetlands by A. G. Bennett on various occasions between 1913 and 1925, and presented by him to the
British Museum.

A series of Norwegian expeditions were made in the years 1926-37 under the direction of Consul
Lars Christensen, and the Antarctic coast was visited in various sectors. The scientific material
collected will, it is understood, be published by the Norwegian Academy of Science.

Adm. Byrd's first American Expedition of 1928-30 visited King Edward VII Land and South
Victoria Land. According to Dodge and Baker (1938), no report on the lichens has yet been published.

The British Australian and New Zealand Antarctic Research Expedition of 1929-31 worked mainly
on the subantarctic islands of the Southern Ocean, but landings were also made on the Antarctic
continent in Adelie Land and MacRobertson Land and some lichens collected there. The material is
being identified by Prof. Carroll W. Dodge.

Rich collections of lichens from the South Orkneys and Shetlands were made during three of the
expeditions of the R.R.S. 'Discovery II' in the years 193 1-3, 1933-5, and 1935-7, and were presented
to the British Museum. Some of them are dealt with in the present paper.

The second American Antarctic Expedition of 1933-5 visited Marie Byrd Land, King Edward VII

HISTORICAL SURVEY OF LICHENOLOGICAL WORK IN THE ANTARCTIC 7

Land, and South Victoria Land. An unusually large collection of cr\'ptogams was made by trained
biologists. The lichens were subsequently studied by Dodge and Baker, who (1938) identified eighty-
nine species, of which no less than eighty-four were new to science. This remarkable degree of endemism
(even allowing for reduced forms which may eventually prove to belong to already known species) may
seem surprising, but it must be remembered that most of the collections were made in hitherto unvisited
regions. The types are preserved at the Missouri Botanical Garden, St Louis, U.S.A.

The British Graham Land Expedition of 1934-7 worked along the western coast of Graham Land
south to Alexander Land, which was found to be much more extensive than was previously supposed.
Large and fine collections of lichens were made, and particular attention was paid to their ecological
relationships. The material has been presented to the British Museum, and has been used in the com-
pilation of the present paper.

In 1938 a German Antarctic Expedition, under the command of Capt. Ritscher, left Germany for the
Antarctic on the ' Schwabenland '. A staff of scientists was carried, and biological collections were made
on the Antarctic continent around the zero meridian, i.e. in the Queen Maud Land sector. The expe-
dition returned to Germany in April 1939. A preliminary account of the scientific results was published
in 1939 in the Annalen der Hydrographie und maritimen Meteorologie (according to the Polar Record,
IV, no. 31, 1946).

The third American Antarctic Expedition under Adm. Byrd spent the years 1 939-41 in the exploration
of the regions between Marie Byrd Land and Alexander Land. Two bases were established, a western
near Little America in the Bay of Whales, and an eastern on Stonington Island in Marguerite Bay, west
Graham Land. Several sledging parties traversed the Graham Land peninsula ; one of them followed
the east coast of the peninsula southwards to lat. 70° 51'. Another party reached the Eternity Range,
discovered by Lincoln Ellsworth. King George VI Sound was found to separate Alexander I Land
completely from the mainland. Botanical collections were made from both the western and the eastern
bases. Much of the material collected at the eastern base, however, had to be abandoned owing to the
emergency evacuation of the personnel by air, but a representative selection of botanical specimens was
taken. Lichens were also collected in the Melchior Islands in Dallmann Bay. The material is being
studied by Prof. Carroll W. Dodge.

Finally, the Falklands Islands Dependencies Survey,^ sponsored by the British Colonial Office,
established three bases in the Graham Land Sector in 1944-5: {a) at Deception Island, South
Shetlands ; {b) at Port Lockroy, Wiencke Island (in the Palmer Archipelago) ; and (c) at Hope Bay on the
Trinity Peninsula, a locality already visited in 1902 by the Swedish Expedition. Intensive collecting
and ecological work was done around the bases, and in 1945 two sledge journeys were made from the
Hope Bay base down the east coast of the peninsula to extend the survey of the Swedish Expedition.
Numerous botanical collections were made during these journeys, in many cases from islands and head-
lands discovered for the first time, and as yet unnamed. For this reason I will refer to these botanical
localities provisionally by station numbers, indicated on the accompanying map, and listed as follows:

St. 24. Headland in approx. lat. 63° 33', long. 57° 22'.

St. 25. Headland in approx. lat. 63° 38', long. 57° 34'.

St. 26. Headland in approx. lat. 63° 40', long. 57° 48'.

St. 27. Island in lat. 63° 37', long. 57° 19'.

St. 28. Island in lat. 63° 40', long. 57° 28'.

St. 29. Island in lat. 63° 40', long. 57° 35'.

St. 30. Island in lat. 63° 40', long. 57° 40'.

St. 31. Islet in approx. lat. 63° 43', long. 57° 37'.

1 Until the end of 1945 the Survey was known as 'Operation Tabarin'.

DISCOVERY REPORTS

Fig. 2. The east coast of the Trinity Peninsula, Graham Land, showing positions of the collecting stations (Based on
the survey made by Major Andrew Taylor, R.C.E., assisted by Capt. Victor Russell, R.E., m 1945.)

HISTORICAL SURVEY OF LICHENOLOGIC AL WORK IN THE ANTARCTIC 9

St. 33. Island in lat. 63° 45', long. 58° lo'.
St. 34. Headland in approx. lat. 63° 49', long. 58^ 20'.
St. 38. Islet in approx. lat. 63° 58', long. 58^ 36'.
St. 46. Islet in approx. lat. 63° 59', long. 57" 23'.
St. 48. Projecting headland on south side of Vega Island.
St. 51. Site of camp on shore of James Ross Island in Sidney Herbert Sound.
St. 52. Valley on coast of James Ross Island in Sidney Herbert Sound.
St. 62. A concealed fresh-water lake on the west side of James Ross Island.
St. 66. Headland on James Ross Island, west side, in Rohss Bay.

St. 73. Headland (perhaps formerly islet) adjoining the Naze, north coast of James Ross Island.
St. 75. Locality on James Ross Island on the west side of the bay forming the southern extension of Sidney Herbert

Sound.
St. 77. Headland in approx. lat. 63° 38', long. 57" 08'.

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION

It has long been known that the antarctic flora includes a considerable bipolar element, consisting of
species which occur also in the Arctic (with or without outlying occurrences at high altitudes in the
temperate northern hemisphere). The phenomenon has been fully treated in a recent paper by Du Rietz
(1940). Whether these species have originated in the Arctic and spread across the equator to the
Antarctic, or vice versa, is a matter for surmise. Du Rietz (1929) is of the opinion that the area of
greatest specific difl^erentiation of a genus is most likely to be that in which it originated. If this is so,
then certain predominantly antarctic and subantarctic bipolar lichen genera, such as Sphaerophorus ,
Placopsis and Neuropogon, must be of southern origin. In the Antarctic, the bipolar element is much
more strongly represented in the Graham Land region than in the Ross Sea sector, the only other area
of which the lichen flora is sufficiently well known to permit of any comparison. This may be due to one
or both of two factors : (a) the lesser distance separating the Graham Land sector from the adjacent
land masses ; and (b) the existence of a more continuous montane pathway of migration, along the
Cordilleran chain and the Rockies, than is available in the eastern hemisphere. There is actual evidence
of Cordilleran migration in the case of Neuropogon siilphureus (Lamb, 1939). Among the antarctic
Pyrenocarp lichens, the delimitation of the term ' bipolar ' presents some difficulties. At one end of the
scale there is Mastodia tesselata, very strictly bipolar in its distribution (subantarctic and antarctic
southern hemisphere, arctic eastern Siberia). Dermatocarpon intestiniforme is a good representative of
those bipolar species which also possess an outlying alpine areal in the temperate northern hemisphere.
Of the marine species, Verrucaria ceiithocarpa can be regarded as bipolar, although it penetrates
into temperate Europe and North America; with the other species, V. maura, V. microspora and
V. mucosa, the extension into the temperate zone is so marked that the term ' bipolar ' becomes hardly
applicable.

Species apparently endemic to the Graham Land peninsula and adjacent islands are V. cylindrophora,
V. dispartita, V. elaeoplaca, V.fameUca, V.psychrophila, V. Racovitzae, V. serpidoides and Microglaena
afitarctica. The only Pyrenocarp lichens known to date from the Ross Sea area^ are Thelidium
maequale and Th. parvum, both endemic to that region.

Apart from the doubtful record of the genus Endocarpon by Darbishire (1910).

1R

WOODS
HOLE.

lo DISCOVERY REPORTS

Verrucaria tesselatula is a subantarctic-bicentric, or perhaps circumpolar, species with an extension
into the antarctic in the Graham Land sector. Staurothele gelida is also subantarctic-antarctic in its
distribution, but apparently confined to the South American sector.

Consideration of these endemic antarctic and subantarctic species raises the question of vicarious
representation, which has been touched upon by Degelius in his studies of the relationships between
the lichen floras of Europe and North America (1940). He finds that in addition to vicarious species
which simply replace each other in the two areas under consideration, there is a second type, for which
he proposes the term ' subvicarious species', in which nearly related species almost, but not entirely,
replace each other in their distribution. It is interesting to find the same phenomenon among the lichens
of the northern and southern hemispheres. One of the best examples of such a subvicarious pair is
furnished by the two species oi Neuropogon, N. sulphureus and A'^. antarcticus (Lamb, 1939). The former
is the only representative of the genus in the Arctic ; the latter, very closely allied morphologically,
largely takes its place in both the Falklands sector and the Ross Sea area, but N. sulphureus is also
present, notably on the eastern side of the Graham Land peninsula. Instances of bipolar vicarious
and subvicarious species among the Pyrenocarp lichens can be tabulated as follows :

Northern hemisphere Southern hemisphere

Vicarious species • Vicarious species

Verrucaria striatula subsp. borealis Santesson Verrucaria striatula subsp. australis Santesson

(1939) (1939)

Verrucaria cataleptoides Nyl. Verrucaria Racovitzae Vain.

Staurothele clopima (Wbg.) Th. Fr. Staurothele gelida (Hook, and Tayl.) M. Lamb

Subvicarious species Subvicarious species

Verrucaria microspora Nyl. Verrucaria dispartita Vain. + I^- microspora Nyl.

Verrucaria ceuthocarpa Wbg. Verrucaria tesselatula Nyl. + V. ceuthocarpa Wbg.

Finally, one of the species. Derma tocarpon lachneum, appears to belong to the group to which the
name 'cosmopolitan' or 'ubiquistic' is applied.

ECOLOGY

In respect of habitat ecology, one group of Pyrenocarp lichens (comprising chiefly Verrucaria and
Arthopyrenia) is peculiar in being amphibious in the littoral zone (Santesson, 1939). Some of these,
like Verrucaria mucosa, are plants of the upper hydrohaline, intermittently submerged by the tide ;
others, of which V. maura is a good example, are more or less restricted to the lower hygrohaline or
spray zone, above the high tide level. V. mucosa has hitherto been regarded as one of the most marine
lichens, but in this respect it is now found to be surpassed by V. serpidoides (p. 20), a new species of
entirely marine habitat, never or only accidentally exposed to the air.

On land also many Pyrenocarp lichens are characteristic of wet situations (fresh-water species).
Such are also found in the Antarctic, but there, on account of the peculiar climatic conditions, may
be actually in contact with liquid water for only a short period in every season (especially V. elaeoplaca,
p. 15). Some of the antarctic species of this hydrophyte group are also markedly nitrophilous,
absorbing ammoniacal decomposition products in solution from the snowmelt water with which they
are periodically inundated.

ECOLOGY II

What is known of the habitat ecology of the various antarctic Pyrenocarp lichens is summarized in
the following table :

I. Terrestrial species:

(a) Non-hydrophilous species: Verrticaria famelica (nitvophilous),^ Thelidiimi inaeqiiale,^ Th. parvuin,^ Microglaena

antarctica (nitrophilous), Dermatocarpon lachneum, Mastodia tesselata (nitrophilous).
(6) Hydrophilous species:

i. Nitrophilous species. Verrucaria elaeoplaca, V. Racovitzae, V. cylindrophora.

ii. Non-nitrophilous species. Staurothele gelida, Dermatocarpon intestiniforme.

II. Marine species:

(a) Species of the lower Hygrohaline (salt-spray zone). Verrucaria ceuthocarpa, V. dispartita, V. tnaura,

V. tesselatula.
{b) Species of the upper Hydrohaline (intertidal zone): Verrucaria tnicrospora, V. mucosa, V. psychrophila.
(c) Species of the middle Hydrohaline (below the lowest ebb tide level): Verrucaria serpidoides.

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT

Order PYRENOCARPEi£

Family VERRUCARIACEAE .

Genus Verrucaria Wiggers, 1780^

Key to the species of Graham La7id and adjacent islands

I a. Excipulum entirely dark brown in section.

2a. Thallus blackish, thin, filmy, not rimose; continuous or in scattered patches.

3a. Spores cylindric V. cylindrophora

36. Spores ellipsoid.

4a. Perithecia (and usually thallus) minutely scabrid under x 10 lens ... ... ... V. dispartita

46. Perithecia and thallus smooth, shining ... ... ... V. microspora i. frisiaca

zb. Thallus rimose or areolate.

5 a. Thallus black or brown-blackish, finely cracked-areolate ; excipulum about 200/x diam. V. maura

^b. Thallus glaucous-olivaceous or buff coloured, rimose or reticulate-rimose; excipulum about

450/X diam. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V. Racovitzae

I b. Excipulum colourless in section.

6 a. Thallus continuous, smooth, effuse or in scattered patches or sometimes almost evanescent,
not rimose.

J a. Perithecia not or hardly prominent above surface of thallus ... ... ... V. mucosa

jb. Perithecia prominent.

8 a. Perithecia hemispherical to subglobose, o- 15-0-25 mm. diam.

ga. Spores 18-20 X7-5-8-0/X ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V.famelica

gb. Spores 7-12 X 4-5 /x ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V. microspora

8b. Perithecia truncate-subconical, 0-30-0-45 mm. diam. ... ... ... ... V . serpuloides

1 As far as one can judge from the remarks of Skottsberg (1912, p. 6).
^ As far as can be ascertained from the published observations of Siple (1938).

' In the Ust of species attributed by him to this genus Wiggers does not include any belonging to Verrucaria in the modern
delimitation.

12 DISCOVERY REPORTS

bh. Thallus rimose.

10 a. Cracks black.

iirt. Thallus uniformly tesselate-areolate with areolae 0-5-1 -o mm. diam. V. tesselatitla

1 1 h. Thallus not areolate, but with gaping cracks often reticulating to delimit irregular

areas of variable size (i-io mm.) ... V. tesselatula f. dermoplaca

[Thallus composed of confluent microthalli separated by blackish lines and
simulating large flat areolae ... ... ... V. elaeoplaca f. glaucoplaca]

loh. Cracks between areolae! concolorous with rest of thallus.

iia. Areolae up to i mm. diam. ... ... ... ... ... ... V . ceuthocarpa

1 1 h. Areolae larger.

12a. Thallus bufT-brown or olivaceous-glaucescent; spores usually 14-18 x S-ii/x;

fresh- water species ... ... ... ... ... ... ... V. elaeoplaca

izb. Thallus olive-blackish; spores 1 1-13 (-15) x 6-7/^1; marine species... V . psychrophila

Verrucaria ceuthocarpa Wahlenberg (Fig. 36).

apud Acharius, 1803, suppl. p. 22; Vainio, 1909, p. 163, 1921, p. 72; Zschacke, 1934, p. 194.

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago : Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet ; east and south-east sides of
islet, on basalt dykes about i m. above high-water level, in the rough weather spray zone; F.I.D.S.,
23. iv. 1944 (no. 1227); 28. xii. 1944 (no. 21 19); on granodiorite face slightly above high-water level,
in the spray zone; F.I.D.S., 23. iv. 1944 (no. 1222 pr. p.).

Forming effuse, indeterminate, discontinuous patches. Thallus thin, olivaceous-blackish, entirely
rimose-areolate, with areolae o-3-o-7 mm. diam. The specimens more or less correspond to the typical
form of the species (var. areolatodijfracta Vainio, 1909). Perithecia minute, not over 0-2 mm. diam.,
with prominent, almost hemispherical, black apex. Excipulum colourless below and at sides. Spores
9-12 X 6-7//.

Geographical Distribution. New to the Eu-antarctic zone ; previously recorded from northern
Europe, Spitsbergen, Bear Island, Novaya Zemlya, north-east Siberia, Bering Strait, Greenland,
North America (Maine and Massachusetts), and in the southern hemisphere, Kerguelen (Miiller
Argoviensis, 1884, p. 139^). According to Lynge (1937, p. 13), it is the commonest marine Verrucaria
in the Arctic.

Var. deformata Vainio
1909, p. 164.

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago: Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet; south side of islet, 0-5-
1-5 m. above high-water level, on granodiorite rock face in the rough weather spray zone; F.I.D.S.,
23. iv. 1944 (no. 1222); 25. iv. 1944 (no. 1223); 7. i. 1945 (no. 2190).

' Thallus sat crassus, areolatus aut areolato-diffractus, areolis difformibus, majoribus vel minoribus,
saepe leviter inaequalis et habitu quasi morbosus, olivaceo- aut pallide-olivaceo- et nigricanti-variegatus,
opacus' (Vainio, loc. cit.). I have not seen an authentic specimen of this variety, but if I am correct in
referring the present specimens to it, the ' morbose habitus ' and pale olivaceous variegation mentioned
by Vainio is due to numerous algal efflorescences on the thallus caused by proliferation of the thalline
gonidia. These scattered, olivaceous-greenish, soredia-like, erumpent, mealy-granulose outgrowths are
o- 1 5-0-30 mm. diam., and in sections through the thallus are seen to be masses of gonidial algae in a
state of rapid multiplication, forming pairs, tetrads, and octants, and rupturing the thalline cortex in
emerging. They are not accompanied by hyphal filaments, and hence cannot be classed as soredia.

1 Miiller, loc. cit., quotes the Kerguelen locality as being 2000 feet above sea level, which makes the record seem improbable.

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 13

Var. submembranacea M. Lamb, n.var.

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago : Port Lockroy, Goudicr Islet ; south side of islet, about
I m. above average sea-level, in the spray zone, on an almost vertical granodiorite face; F.LD.S.,
16. xii. 1944 (no. 1994).

Description. A forma typica differt thallo tenui {ad 0-13 mm. crasso), submembranaceo, fere contimio
(rimis paiicis angustissimis vel pr. maj. parte tantum lineolis nigr leant ibiis pariim conspicuis indicatis).
Thalliis plagtilas irregidares, ambitii saepe obsolete pallido-sonatas, demum sat late cotifluentes format;
passim sat crebre glomeridis sordide olivaceis [e ejflorescentia gonidiorum ortis) ad 0-3 mm. latis obsitus.

Thallus olivaceous-blackish in the living state, smooth, matt, with very few open cracks ; most of the
cracks appear to have closed up and are indicated only here and there by very fine dark lines. The
relationship to the typical form and the var. deformata, both of which occur close by, is unmistakable.
Perithecia scarce, up to 0-17 mm. diam., typical; spores 10-12 x 6-o-7-5/<.

I was unable to detect any zonational differences between these two varieties and the typical form.
They occur together with Caloplaca cirrochrooides (Vain.) Zahlbr. and another halophile Caloplaca not
yet determined. All of them become crusted over with salt-water ice to a thickness of 5 cm. in late May,
and remain thus encased throughout the winter.

Verrucaria ceuthocarpa is closely allied to V. tesselattda Nyl. (p. 21); the latter differs in the paler
thallus with somewhat larger areolae separated by conspicuous black cracks.

Verrucaria cylindrophora Vainio (PI. IV, fig. 4)
1903, p. 38.

Not found in the present collections, and known only from the type locality (west Graham Land :
Palmer Archipelago, Moreno Island). My reinvestigation of the holotype in herb. Vainio (Exped.
Antarct. Beige, no. 196 /)r. p.) gave the following information:

On non-calcareous fine-grained rock. Thallus extremely thin, a mere film, continuous, black, slightly
shining. No visible hypothallus. Perithecia very numerous, evenly scattered, minute, up to 0-15 mm.
diam., black, >, hemispherical, matt or slightly shhiing, not impressed or papillate at apex; ostiole
invisible. Paraphyses diffluxed, indicated by faint striae in the mucilage. Asci clavate, 20-27 >^ 8-io/<,
thin-walled. Spores 6-7 (-8 ?) in ascus, in vertical polyseriate arrangement, cylindrical, straight, rounded
at ends, thin-walled, io-5-i20 ;; z-s-yofi. Hymenial gelatine faintly pink with iodine.

The holotype occurred together with V. elaeoplaca, which indicates a habitat on fresh-water inun-
dation surfaces.

Verrucaria dispartita Vainio (Fig. 3/; PI. IV, fig. 6)
1903, p. 38.

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago : Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet ; south side of islet, on
vertical rock face just above high-water level, constantly drenched with spray in rough weather;
F.I.D.S., 23. iv. 1944 (no. 1222 pr. p.).

East Graham Land. Trinity Peninsula, south coast : Hope Bay; small islet in the bay, on steep rock
face in the spray zone about 0-5 m. above high-tide level; F.I.D.S., 20. xii. 1945 (no. 2564/)/-. p.).

The specimens agree well with the holotype specimen in herb. Vainio (Exped. Antarct. Beige,
no. 199), upon which the following description is based.

On fine-grained non-calcareous rock. Thallus represented by very scattered minute sooty patches
and spots 0-3-0-8 mm. diam., hardly o-i mm. thick. Surface of thallus matt, seen to be ver}' minutely
roughened (but not punctate) under x 12 lens. No hypothallus. Perithecia numerous on thallme

14 DISCOVERY REPORTS

patches, o-2 0-3 mm. diam., ± hemispherical, black, matt (shining only where rubbed), with minutely
scabrid surface like the thallus ; solitary or two to three crowded together and then often concrescent.
Ostiole indistinct, not papillate or impressed. Excipulum brown to dark brown in section, entire.
Paraphyses dissolved, indicated by faint striae in the mucilage. Asci cylindric-clavate, 30-40 x 8-1 2 /i,
thin-walled. Spores ellipsoid, 8 in ascus, 8-1 1 x 4-5-5-5 fi. With iodine, hymenial mucilage rose-pink,
asci and spores yellowed.

m

Fig. 3. Perithecial structure in Antarctic Pyrenocarp lichens. (Somewhat diagrammatic.)

a, Verrucaria Racovitzae. g, Verrucaria psychrophila. k, Staurothele gelida (with well

b, Verrucaria ceuthocarpa. h, Verrucaria microspora (f. frisiaca). developed thallus).

c, Verrucaria mucosa. i, Verrucaria elaeoplaca. /, Verrucaria dispartita.

d, Verrucaria tesselatula. j, Staurothele gelida (with poorly m, Mastodia tesselata.

e, Verrucaria serpuloides. developed thallus). w, Dermatocarpon lachneum.

f, Verrucaria famelica. 0, Dermatocarpon intestiniforme.

p, Microglaena antarctica.

This species comes very near V. microspora {i. frisiaca), differing only in the minutely scabrid, often
somewhat cracked thallus, usually slightly roughened perithecia and the somewhat darker excipular
wall. Its habitat ecology, however, is different, its occurrence being in the spray zone and not in the
intertidal belt, as is the case with V. microspora. No. 2564 pr. p. was associated with Caloplaca cirro-
chrooides (Vain.) Zahlbr., in the upper part of the spray zone. In our specimens the thallus forms
scattered spots or effuse, ± continuous patches of small extent, it is sooty or olivaceous-blackish, about
o-i mm. thick, continuous or with small sporadic disconnected cracks or (in no. 2564 /)r. p., which grew

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 15

in a drier position) with fine reticulately anastomosing cracks in the thicker parts of the thallus around
the perithecia. Gonidial algae bright green, 6-8 n diam. Excipulum spherical, (100-) 165-195 // diam.,
with wall 18-21// thick; inner 9// dark brown, the outer part pale brown. Spores 9-i2(-i3)x4-5-
6-o{-j) ju. The minute roughening of the thallus is very inconspicuous, not to be compared with the
punctate or wrinkled scabrosity of some other marine species {Vernicaria scotina, etc.).

Geographical Distribution. Previously known only from the type locality (west Graham Land :
Cape Anna, on the mainland coast between Cape Charles^ and Cape Renard).

Verrucaria elaeoplaca Vainio (Fig. 3/; PI. II, fig. 2; PI. Ill, figs, i, 2)

i903> P- 37. Pl- i. fig- 6.

Verrucaria glaucoplaca Vainio, 1903, p. 37, pi. i, fig. 5; Hue, 1915, p. 182.

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago : Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet ; near summit of islet, altit.
about 7 m. on granodiorite rocks irrigated intermittently by snowmelt water; F.I.D.S., 29. ii.1944
(no. 1151 ^r. p.); 26. iii. 1944 (no. 1179); 7. v. 1944 (no. 1234); 26. xi. 1944 (no. 1801); 28. xi. 1944
(no. 1833 pr. p.). Argetitine and neighbouring Islands: Berthelot Islands; on dioritic rocks; B.G.L.E.,
18. iii. 1935 (nos. 1081-18, 1081-25, 1090. 1094-9. 1094-10, 1094-14, 1094-46, 1094-73, 1094-84,
1095-2).

East Graham Land. Trinity Petiinsida, south coast: Hope Bay; near Boeckella Lake, altitude c.
60 m., on non-calcareous stones half submerged in a frozen shallow fresh-water pool; F.I.D.S.,
15- iv. 1945 (no. 2363).

The commonest Verrucaria in the Graham Land sector of the Antarctic. It is a very distinct species,
without obvious affinities.

The thallus covers large continuous areas, and is not effigurate at periphery, but often bounded by
a very narrow whitish zone, inside which is a thin brown-blackish line. There is no dark hypothallus.
Thallus (in the typical condition) verrucose-areolate, with ± tumid and convex, irregularly obtusely
angulose areolae i •2-2-0 (-3-0) mm. diam., separated by deep, incised, pale-edged cracks about 0-15 mm.
wide; thickness varies between 0-3 and i-o mm. (rarely up to 2-5 mm.). Surface matt, smooth, not
pruinose, usually pale dull buff-brown (corresponding to pi. xlvi, 17"", 19"" and 2i""b in Ridgway,
1912), in less exposed positions paler, grey-brown with a slight pinkish tinge (Ridgeway, pi. xlvi,
ij""d, 21"" d), or in very shady positions grey-greenish (Ridgway, pi. xlvi, 21"" b-d). In certain places
where the thallus is subject to heavy inundation with water strongly impregnated with nitrogenous matter,
it takes on a red tinge (Ridgway, pi. xlvi, 13"" 6; exceptionally pi. xxxix, g"'a-b), either entirely or
in scattered spots and patches. In the normal brown state the thallus has a reddish brown cortex 9-15 /<
deep, composed of iso-diametric, thin-walled cells 3-4// diam., in many places overlaid by a hyaline
amorphous necrotic stratum 6-iOfi deep. Inpale-colouredspecimensthereisnodistinct cortex. Gonidial
algae tend to form more or less vertical groups or row^s extending through almost whole depth of thallus ;
bright green, subglobose or irregularly angulose, thin-walled, 6-9 fi diam. Fungal tissue between gonidia
hyaline, paraplectenchymatic, of thin-walled isodiametric cells 3-4/<diam. Lowermost 25-30 //of thallus
is without algae, hyaline, with vertically oblong cells. Perithecia numerous, but not present in all areolae
of thallus ; i-4(-5) in an areola, with the convex or almost hemispherical, brown-black, matt or slightly
shining apex (involucrellum) prominent above the surface and 0-2-0-3 mm. diam. Thallus not darkened
around perithecia. Ostiole usually visible under lens as a fine central pore. Excipulum immersed, globose,
290-345// diam., with colourless wall 30-35// thick formed of tangentially running hyphae I-5-2-0//
thick; at the apex, where it merges into the involucrellum, the excipular wall becomes brownish,
i The northern extremity of Hughes Bay, in future to be called Cape Sterneck.

i6 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Involucrellum dome-shaped, lying directly over the excipulum, brown-blackish, of ± uniform thickness
(45-60 /<). Periphyses numerous inside ostiole and upper part of excipulum; their walls gelatinized,
only the slender lumina visible, simple or sparingly branched, 30-45 x i -5 fi. Usually no paraphyses are
present, but in some perithecia there are a few delicate branching hyphae i •5-5-0// thick traversing the
mucilage between the asci. Asci clavate or ventricose-clavate, 50-65 x 20-30//, with gelatinous walls
up to 5// thick. Spores irregularly 2-3-seriate in ascus, 8, with wall about o-6// thick, variable in size
and shape, ellipsoid to broadly ellipsoid, (12-5-) i4-i8(-2o) x (7-o-)8-ii (-13)//. Pycnidia indicated
by minute punctations or brownish spots, saccate or almost flask-shaped in section, simple, 180-240//
deep, 75-90// across, with colourless wall, not carbonized around ostiole. Fulcra exobasidial, subulate.
Pycnoconidia bacillar, straight, 3'0-3-5 x o-6-o-j fi.

Chemical reactions : surface of thallus and medulla KHO-, CaClaOg-, KHO(CaCl202)-, CgH4(NH2)2-,
I-. Hymenial mucilage I + wine-red, ascus-contents and spores yellowed.

Vainio's ' V err near ia glaucoplaca' represents an uncommon growth-form of the species, for which
reason I prefer to use ' elaeoplaca ' as the specific epithet, the type specimen of the latter being the normal
state. The designation V. elaeoplaca i . glaucoplaca (Vain.) M. Lamb, n.comb., may be used for the form,
occasionally met with in damper situations, in which the thallus is composed of a number of separate,
contiguous, juvenile and uncracked thalli separated by dark brown lines, giving the impression of a
thallus consisting of large dark-edged areolae. This is well shown on Vainio's pi. i, fig. 5. The F.I.D.S.
specimen no. 1801 from Goudier Islet is partly referable to this form.

In very wet situations the thallus is more continuous (the cracks not usually anastomosing to form
complete areolae) and usually with a pronounced red or pink tinge. In a fresh-water pool in the penguin
rookery at Hope Bay I was able to trace the transition from the normal brown areolate condition on
stones on the upper drier banks of the pool to the reddish more continuous state in the pool itself.

V. elaeoplaca is very characteristic of inundation surfaces wetted bv nitrogenous snowmelt water in
springtime. The photographs on PI. Ill, figs, i and 2, were taken on Goudier Islet. In fig. i it is seen
lining a natural gutter in the granodiorite rocks down which a steady seepage of water occurs during
the melting of the islet's snow cover. Fig. 2 shows it forming a zone around the margin of a snowmelt
water pool, and also bordering the run-ofl^ channel from the latter. The snowmelt water is highly
nitrogenous from the excreta of birds (gulls, skuas, Chmiis alba, etc.). Although the species is restricted
so closely to inundation surfaces, the duration of actual inundation during the year is comparatively
short, lasting from late October, when the snow accumulated during the winter commences to melt,
till about the end of November, when in normal years the upper part of the islet should have become
snowfree.

Geographical Distribution. Apparently endemic to the coast of Graham Land and adjacent
islands. Previously recorded from west Graham Land: Palmer Archipelago, Moreno Island, Bob
Islet (Vainio, loc. cit.) and Goudier Islet (Hue, loc. cit.).

Verrucaria famelica Darbishire (Fig. 3/; PI. IV, fig. 3)
1912, p. i8, pi. 3, fig. 33.

Not found in the present collections. Known only from the type locality: South Shetlands, Nelson
Island, coll. C. Skottsberg, 1 1. i. 1902. The following redescription of the species is based on a syntype
specimen preserved in the Kew Herbarium.

On non-calcareous fine-grained rock. Thallus interruptedly covering an area of 2-5 x 2-0 cm.,
brown-blackish, thin (up to o-i mm. thick), eflFuse, indeterminate, not continuous, but composed of
small confluent patches around the perithecia, with the substratum visible between ; continuous or here
and there slightly cracked, matt. A very fine blackish dendritic-reticulate hypothallus is visible with

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 17

the aid of a ^^ 10 lens here and there around the thalline patches. Thallus in section with ver}^ irregular
upper surface bounded by a brown-blackish cortical layer 6-8 // thick with indistinct, + round cells
3-5 n diam. Most of the fungal tissue between the gonidial algae is also dark. Gonidia extend through-
out whole depth of thallus, not in vertical rows ; bright green, i globose, 5-8 (-12)// diam., thin-walled,
multiplying apparently by binary fission. Perithecia up to 0-2 (-0-25) mm. diam., hemispherical to
subglobose, black, matt or slightly shining, clothed by thallus in lower half, or in young perithecia
almost to the ostiole. Ostiole apical, minute, not or only slightly impressed. Excipulum i globose or
slightly flattened, 145-210// diam., with faintly brownish or almost colourless wall 12-30/^ thick
composed of compacted, tangentially running hyphae about 2 ft thick. Involucrellum overlaying
excipulum and extending down to its base, brown-blackish in outer half to three-quarters, paler brown
inside; about 30 // thick near ostiole, up to 80// thick at base, not extending below the excipulum.
Periphyses numerous near ostiole, ±simple, 15-24X i •5-2-0//. Paraphyses soon diffluxed and evane-
scent. Asci clavate, 60-65 ^' 18-21 //, with colourless gelatinous wall up to 4(-5)// thick. Spores 6-8,
irregularly biseriate in ascus, elongate-ellipsoid, the ends rounded or sometimes bluntly pointed, thin-
walled, 18-20 < 7-5-8-0//. With iodine, hymenial gelatine, and sometimes ascus walls also, pale rose-
pink ; contents of asci and spores yellowed.

This species apparently belongs to the very critical group of V. aethiobola.

Verrucaria maura Wahlenberg

apud Acharius, 1803, suppl. p. 19; Vainio, 1903, p. 38; Zschacke, 1934, p. 179.

Not present in our collections ; the only antarctic record is that of Vainio, from west Graham Land :
Palmer Archipelago, Moreno Island.

Geographical Distribution. A widespread species, occurring on the coasts of Europe, North
America, Greenland, Iceland, Spitsbergen, Bear Island, Novaya Zemlya, Siberia, Bering Strait,
Japan, and, in the southern hemisphere, Fuegia, Patagonia, South Chile, Falkland Islands^ and New
Zealand.

Verrucaria microspora Nylander (Fig. 3 A)
1855. P- 175; Zschacke, 1934, p. 195.
Verrucaria microspora f. halophila Nylander, 1855, p. 175.
Verrucaria halophila Nylander, apud Branth and Rostrup, 1869, p. 275.
West Graham Land. Mainland Coast: Cape Renard; on non-calcareous rocks at about normal
high-tide level, constantly drenched by wave action during rough weather, together with V. mucosa
Wbg. ; F.I.D.S., 22. iii. 1944 (no. iijzpr.p.). Palmer Archipelago: Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet; south
side of islet on granodiorite rocks intermittently submerged by the tide; F.I.D.S., 23. iv. 1944
(no. 1220 pr. p.); east side of islet, on lower part of basalt dyke exposed only at low tide; F.I.D.S.,
23. iv. 1944 (no. 1228).

South Orkneys. Fredriksen Island: on non-calcareous rock; Discovery 193 1-3, 4. i- 1933 ("os. 1090
-19, 1090-28).

Sporadic and scarce. F.I.D.S. no. 1228 is the typical form, with entirely colourless excipulum; the
other specimens belong to the iorm frisiaca (Erichs.) Santesson, 1939, p. 41 (V. frisiaca Erichsen,
1930, p. 224), characterized by the somewhat pigmented, brownish excipular wall. Spores 8-12
X4-5//.

Geographical Distribution. New to the Antarctic; widely distributed on the coasts of Europe,
also recorded from North America (Maine), Greenland, Japan, and Chile.

1 Collected by me at Port Louis, Berkeley Sound, in Feb. 1946.

i8 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Verrucaria mucosa Wahlenberg (Fig. i c)

apud Acharius, 1803, suppl. p. 23; Zschacke, 1934, p. 192; Santesson, 1939, p. 4.

West Graham Land. Mainland coast : Cape Renard ; on non-calcareous rocks at about normal high-
tide level, constantly drenched by wave action during rough weather; F.I.D.S., 22. iii. 1944 (no. 1172
pr. p.).

Quite typical, although poorly developed. Thallus thin, in scattered irregular patches, continuous
or with a few sporadic cracks probably due to post mortem drying. Spores 9-13 ■: 6-7//.

Geographical Distribution. New to the Antarctic. Occurs on the Atlantic seaboard of Europe,
Iceland, Greenland, North America, Siberia; also in the subantarctic (Fuegia, Auckland Island,
Campbell Island); possibly in New Zealand (Santesson, 1939, p. 17).

Verrucaria psychrophila M. Lamb, n.sp. (Fig. 3^; PL I, figs, i, 3)

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago : Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet ; on granodiorite rocks and
boulders in the boat harbour and on the south side of the islet, intermittently submerged by the tide ;
F.I.D.S., 25. iii. 1944 (no. 1178, holotype); 21. iv. 1944 (no. 1219); 23. iv. 1944 (no. 1220).

Description. Thallus epilithicus, olivaceo-nigricans aut nigricans, madef actus leviter gelatinosus, con-
tiguus, late expansus, ejfusus, modice incrassatus (o-20-o-25 mm. crassus), laevigatiis, vix nitidus, reticulato-
rimosus vel plerumque grosse areolatus, areolis i •0-2-5 ^^- l^ii^> irregulariter angidosis, planis vel levissime
convexis, rimis acutis ad o-i mm. latis separatis; ad peripheriam tenuior, anguste pallidus (olivaceo-albidus),
hypothallomdlo ; stratum basale thalli hand fuliginosum. Gonidia laete vel fiavidoviridia, S-i ^{-20) ^diam.,
in seriebus verticalibus disposita. Perithecia immerosa, in quavis areola 2-20, immersa, apice alro, hand vel
paullum nitido, subconvexo, o- i-o-2 mm. lata leviter emergenti; ostiolo necpapillato nee impresso, indistincto.
Excipulum globosiim aut depresso-globosiim, 165-180 /^ diam., omfiino incoloratum, superne involucrello
carbonaceo-fiiligineo, later ibus leviter producto, 20-40// crasso, 210-245 ju lato obducttim. Paraphyses mox
dissolutae. Asci clavati, 40-50x12-18//, pariete aequaliter tenui. Sporae 8nae, in asco irregulariter
biseriatim dispositae, simplices, incolores, ellipsoideae, Ii-i3(-i5) x 6-7//. Pyctiidia numerosa, peritheciis
intermixta, maculis punctiformibus atris circ. 0-05 mm. diam. indicata, haud prominentia; pycnoconidia
bacillaria, recta aut rarius leviter curvata, 3-4X o-6-^o-7//. Thallus extus intusque KHO-, CaCljOg-,
C6H4(NH2)2-, 1-; gelatina hymenialis I + leviter roseo-rubescens vel-, ascis sporisque lutescentibus, strato
ascigero pallide caerulescenti .

The thallus has a rudimentary brown or olive-brown cortex J-iZju deep, formed from the pigmented,
concrete ends of the vertical thalline hyphae; the cells are thin- walled, 3 •0-4-5// diam. The gonidial
algae occupy the entire depth of the thallus, but are more concentrated and larger in the upper half;
arranged in distinct vertical rows ; bright green in living material, subglobose or irregularly angulose,
often ± horizontally flattened, thin-walled, multiplying by fission into 2's, 4's and 8's. Fungal tissue
between algae colourless, hyaline, compact, entirely paraplectenchymatic, with oblong, upright,
or ± cubical thin-walled cells 3-0-4-5 x 2-5-3-0//. Excipulum colourless, of even thickness all round
(18-30//), formed of tangentially elongated thin-walled cells. Involucrellum brown-black, slightly
convex, about 20 // thick round ostiole, 35-40 // thick at margin. Periphyses crowded on upper inner wall
of excipulum, simple, 12-30 x i -5-2^5//. Spores thin-walled, often with granulose contents but no
large guttules. Pycnidia globose or flask-shaped, 75-120// across, ioo(-30o)// deep, with colourless
perifulcrium ; ostiole surrounded by brown-black tissue like a small involucrellum. Fulcra exobasidial,
subulate.

This species appears to be related to V. ceuthocarpa, from which it differs in the much larger thallus-
areolae, extensive growth-habitus, and somewhat longer spores. From V. tesselatula Nyl. it is distin-
guished by the blackish, more regular areolae without darker edges. It is also ecologically distinct from

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT i,

these two species, occurring at a low level in the littoral zone which would correspond in the Northern
hemisphere to the Fiiais vesiculosus-Balanus belt.

Owing to the pronounced irregularity of the tides at Port Lockroy (they are seasonal rather than
diurnal) it is impossible to fix the position of the lichen in terms of 'high' or 'low' tide marks, and
difficult to assess the relative degrees of submergence and exposure. A series of observations was made
from 22 April to 24 May 1944; during this period exposure was noted only on 20, 21 and 22 May,
for a few hours daily. Towards the end of May the boat harbour froze over for the winter, and on
subsequent occasions, when the tide ebbed out sufficiently far to expose the lichen, the latter remained
covered by the ice layer. By the beginning of July the ice covering it was up to 75 cm. thick. After the
break up of the ice in late October a prolonged period of abnormally low spring tides set in, and the
lichen was regularly exposed for several hours each day.

In the summer months V. psychrophila is most conspicuous on the boulders in the boat harbour
of Goudier Islet, blackening them with what looks from a distance like a sooty coating (PI. I, fig. i).
Seen from close quarters the colour is greenish blackish or olive-blackish (Ridgway, 191 2, p. xlvii,
25""m, pi. li, 23""'m). It also occurs on the solid rock at the other (southern) side of the islet, at the
same level. In its vertical distribution it is restricted to the hydrohaline and does not appear to overlap
either the lower zone of the permanently submerged V. serpidoides or that of the upper spray-zone
species (V. ceiithocarpa). The brown alga Adenocystis iitricularis occurs at the extreme base of its
vertical range.

Santesson (1939) has pointed out that the degree of cracking in the thallus of the marine Verrucariae
is to some extent connected with the degree of submersion to which they are subject. The specimens
of V. psychrophila which I collected from the south side of Goudier Islet (no. 1220) have a much less
cracked thallus than those from the boat harbour ; the cracks are more sporadic, not joining up to
delimit distinct areolae. Although the vertical horizon is the same, it is possible that the lichen in this
relatively exposed position is more constantly wetted by wave action.

As in several other marine Verrucariae, the thallus becomes brown after some time in the herbarium.

Verrucaria Racovitzae Vainio (Fig. 3^; PI. IV, fig. 2)
1903, p. 38; Darbishire, 1923, p. 106.

Not present in our collections. It occurs in west Graham Land: Palmer Archipelago, Moreno
Island (Vainio, loc. cit.), and also, fide Darbishire (loc. cit), on Elephant Island in the South Shetlands.
I have not seen Darbishire 's specimen.

The holotype specimen in herb. Vainio (Exped. Antarct. Beige, no. 196 /)r. p.) is shown on PI. IV,
fig. 2. It is a small fragment of thallus about i cm. across, occurring together with V. elaeoplaca f.
glaiicoplaca, on fine-grained non-calcareous rock. Thallus o-i-o-2 mm. thick between the perithecia,
rimose or in places subcontinuous, the cracks (up to o-i mm. wide) occasionally reticulating to delimit
irregularly angulose areolae 0-5-1 -4 mm. diam. ; olivaceous-glaucescent or buff-coloured, i.e. approxi-
mately the same colour as the thallus of V. elaeoplaca, not changing when moistened ; surface smooth,
matt, not pruinose. A black hypothallus is visible in cross section, underlying the thallus. Cortex
present, pale brown or almost colourless, 9-14/^ deep, of ±isodiametric, thin-walled cells 2-3 /^ diam.
The whole depth of the thallus above the basal carbonaceous layer is filled with gonidial algae, which
are irregularly scattered, bright green, globose or angular, 8-1 1// diam., thin- walled. Fungal tissue
between algae hyaline, paraplectenchymatic, of thin-walled cells 2-3 /< diam. Perithecia numerous,
clothed by thallus almost to ostiole, forming hemispherical verrucae 0-7-0-9 mm. diam., with dark
brown or blackish circular apex o-2-o-3 mm. diam., slightly mamillate, with minute central pore. The
thallus clothing the perithecia contains a thin layer of gonidia. Excipulum globose or upright-oval in

DISCOVERY REPORTS
Tection about 4^0/. dmm., with entirely brown-blackish wall 25^35 /' thick, and covered to the base by
a massiVe carbonaceous involucrellum 75-00, thick which fuses with the hypothallme tissue below
Periphyses indistinct. No paraphyses. Asci clavate, 50-65 x 12-zo/., with colourless gel-tmous wall
up to la thick. Spores 8, irregularly biseriate in ascus, with granulose contents and wall abou 0-7/^
thick ellipsoid or occasionally broadly ellipsoid, i5-o-i6-5 x 9-1 1 A- Pycmdia indicated externally by
non-prominent, black, round or slightly elongated, ring-like spots about 0-15 mm. diam., compound^
consisting of several flattened intercommunicating chambers with colourless walls 6-9/^ hick; ostiole
surrounded by carbonaceous tissue. Fulcra exobasidial, simple. Pycnoconidia baciUar, straight,

^' Chemicd'relcdons : surface of thallus and medulla KHO- (or brownish), CaCUO,-, KHO(CaCl,0,)-,
C H.(NH,Y,-. Hvmenial gelatine pale wine-red with iodine. ., t^t 1

" L:L»/belongs \o ,he section Li,hoicea and appears ,„ be related to V. ca>alep,o,M Nyl.

Verrucaria serpuloides M. Lamb, n.sp. (F,g. ^e; PI. I, fig. 2; PI. II, fig. . ; PI. IV, fig. 8)

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago: Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet; on granod.or.te rocks west
of the boat harbour, below the level of the lowest spring tides and therefore pennanently submerged;
FIDS zy.viii. 1944 (no. 1250 />!■. />.); 19.x. 1944 (nos. 1321, 1322).

East Graham Land. Trinily Pmnmda, south coast: Hope Bay; in rock pool just below low-water
mark on occasion of low spring tides ; F.I.D.S., 21. xi. 1945 (no. 2565, holotype).

Description. ThaUm epiUihicm, piceo-niger {parlihus Icnmbus olivaceo-mgricans), effusus, umforrnis,

substratum late tcgcs, contiguus, ad 0-5 mm. crassus. ambttn tenuior et haui zmato-crcumscrtpus;

contiZ lacvigaL, ub,.UiL, statu madefacto sat gclalinosus, strata basali huudful.g,noso;gonui.aaete

ZZ ghbosa compressa^e, 6-o(^,a), dtam., seriebus vertualibus per totant crassttudtnem thall.

Zl / Perithecasa, numerosa, sparsa, thallo iumersa, aptce i,nvolucrello) bene prommenU tum.do-

tilri .el truncato-subconico. atro, saepe nUido, 0.30^0.45 -■ *-■■ ^"'^""^'tir "o'o T3 .

ccmcavo-mpresso; poro central! semper conspdato, 0.03-0.06 mm la,o E.c,pulum .**«y. 3°°-« ;

Mam., 3<^4S 1. crassum.basi lateribusque incoloratum. superne cum mvolucrello carbonaeeo 60-. .5 /- rrajso

tloumZd producto confluens. Paraphyses ntdlae. Asci cla.a,i aut -'"-"-'r''' '"7*8™.

gelaltnoso-incrassata. ». visibiU, 3-7 /< crassa. cavitate plusmophora 40-50 xx2-,8, «? J^J-'- •

1 asco subbisertatae, simplices. mcohres, ellipsoideae .el late ell.pso.deae, mcnbrana -'«" -*;';)•

(,3-) 14.0-5.5x8-0,. Pyaddia sparsa, extus baud vel vi. v,s.b,l.a. omn.,a> ••nmer» osttolohaud

carbonaeeo; pycnoeomdia bacillaria, recta. r^:<circ. 1-5 /<. Thallus ext,u .ntusque ^HO- CaClA-,

C,H.(NH,V Is gelatitm hymenealis I+sublilissime rosea vel-, parietibus ascorum .mmulatis, spom

^"Thluult'secion has a slightly developed light brown cortical layer up to to, th.ck^formed from
the end cells of the vertically fused thallme hyphae; cells thm-wa led, 3-4/; ^"'";- , ';™ f ' f « J
in well-marked vertical rows, larger and more crowded in upper (k^90/' «* thallus, often shghtly
horlontally flattened, multiplying apparently by bmary fission. Medullary «ssue M.ne, P-
plectenchymatic, of ± cubical thin-walled cells 3-5/- diam. No dark hypothallme ttssue presen
Exctulum formed of tangentially running compacted hyphae about 2, th.ck. Per.physes well
devTped on upper inner L of excipulum round the ostiole; embedded in hyf'™ -"'^S^^^^f '
or soarinriv branched 30-45 x 1.5-2.5;,. Asci spring from both base and sides of excpulum, the
t ::: otherswoll^n'and'high'y geUtinized walls can be distingu.shed only ^'-r treatment wr^
iodine, which tints the surrounding mucilage ±rose pink. The spores often contain a single moderate
guttuk. Pycnidia irregularly flask-shaped, about 60;, across, 150, deep. Perifulcrmm colourless.
Fulcra exobasidial, simple, subulate, 12-20 x i-^-z-oii.

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT ai

Quite distinct from V. mucosa, the only species with which it may be said to have any affinity, by the
much larger and prominent perithecia. It is of interest in being the only known marine lichen which
passes its entire existence under water. V. mucosa, hitherto regarded as the most truly marine of all
lichens, does not tolerate constant submersion; see in this connexion the remarks of Santesson (1939).
V. serpiiloides occurs at the same level as an encrusting calcareous alga {Lithophyllum sp. ?), and forms
with it a submarine association just below the lowest ebb-tide level. During the exceptionally low
spring tides at Port Lockroy on 2 and 3 November 1944, some of the uppermost patches of the cal-
careous alga-Verrucaria serpuloides-association were exposed for a short period^, but at the most
extreme ebb I could see the association running down on shelving rocks to a depth of several feet
below the surface, where it is certainly never exposed (PI. I, fig. 2). One also finds the association in rock
pools left by the receding tide, both the calcareous alga and the Verrucaria consistently keeping below
the water level. This is shown in the underwater photograph PI. II, fig. i, in which the Verrucaria is
seen as a black band the upper edge of which coincides exactly with the surface of the water in the pool
when the latter is left at ebb tide. This clear-cut upper limit is an indication that the submarine habitat
in V. serpuJoides is obligatory and not facultative.

Verrucaria tesselatula Nylander (Fig. 3^; PI. IV, fig. 9)

apud Crombie, 1876, p. 191; Miiller (Arg.), 1889, p. 172.

Verrucaria dermoplaca Nylander, apud Crombie, 1876 a, p. 234 (vide infra).

Verrucaria glaucoplacoides Darbishire, 1912, p. 18, pi. 3, figs. 34, 35; Cengia Sambo, 1926, p. 23.

South Orkneys. Inaccessible Islands: on schistose rock (non-calcareous); Discovery 193 1-3,
25- i- 1933 (nos. 1094-1, 1094-2).

Comparison of the holotype of Darbishire 's V. glaucoplacoides from East Falkland with a syntype
of Nylander's V. tesselatula from Kerguelen (in herb. Kew) showed them to be identical. This
species is closely related to V. ceiithocarpa, from which it differs in the lighter coloured thallus with
larger areolae separated by gaping black cracks. Darbishire 's photographs (loc. cit) show the habitus
well. The following data are derived from the syntype specimen from Swain's Bay, Kerguelen, coll.
Transit of Venus Expedition, 1874-5.

Thallus o- 1 5-0-20 mm. thick, even, tesselate-areolate with plane, angulose areolae 0-5 i-o mm. diam.
separated by conspicuous black cracks about 0-15 mm. wide; matt, not pruinose, pale buff-brovm.
No basal fuhginous layer. Gonidial algae subglobose, 9-1 5 /< diam., with a slight tendency to form
vertical rows in the thallus; ± bright green, muhiplying by binary fission, so that two are often seen
together in the same sheath, as mentioned by Nylander. Perithecia numerous, 1-6 in an areola, up to
0-2 mm. diam., with the black convex apex (involucrellum) rising slightly above thallus level, matt or
slightly shining, not impressed or papillate, with very minute ostiole. Excipulum globose, immersed,
165-180// diam., with colourless wall. The involucrellum, brown-blackish in section, forms a dome-
like roof over the upper part of the excipulum. No paraphyses. Asci clavate, about 40 x 12//, with
indistinct gelatinized walls. Spores about 11 ■: 7// (10-15 x 7-8// according to Nylander).

The specimens from East Falkland agree well with the Kerguelen type. The specimen from
Tierra del Fuego, Ushuaia, coll. Dusen, distributed in ' Lichenes austroamericani ex Herbario Reg-
nelUano', no. 377, and also one of the South Orkneys specimens (no. 1094-1) have in places more
isolated and less reticulating cracks, leaving small areas of the thallus continuous and unbroken ; they
show the first stages of a transition into the extreme state in which the thallus is not areolate, but divided
by a loose and irregular network of rhagadiose black-edged cracks into irregular islands of various size.

1 The parts of the calcareous alga thus exposed subsequently died.

22 DISCOVERY REPORTS

This State was described by Nylander on material from Fox Bay in West Falkland as ' Vernicaria
dermoplaca' and for practical purposes may be distinguished as V. tesselatula f. dermoplaca (Nyl.)
M. Lamb, n.comb. The South Orkneys specimen no. 1094-2 belongs to this form.

Apart from these differences in external habitus, the variability of this species is not great. The thallus
varies in colour from pale glaucescent buff (Ridgway, 1912, pi. xl, 19'"^) to a pinkish brown (pi. xlvi,
13""/), usually yellowish buff or brown-buff (pi. xl, ly'" li). Upper cortex present: brown, 9-15//
deep, composed of il rounded, thin-walled cells 3-0-4-5// diam. Fungal tissue between gonidial algae
hyaline, paraplectenchymatic. Perithecia up to 0-25 mm. diam., varying on the same thallus from
slightly convex-emergent to hemispherical. Excipulum variable in size, 165-270 (-300) /i diam., always
with hyaline wall at base and sides. Usually there is no trace of paraphyses, but occasionally a few
isolated hyphae are present in the mucilage around the asci. Asci up to 50 • 20//, with diaphanous
gelatinized walls up to 5/< thick. Spores 11-15 x 6-5-9-o/z. Hymenial gelatine rose-pink with
iodine.

V. tesselatula, like the related V. ceiithocarpa, is a marine species of the spray zone. I saw it at Port
Louis, East Falkland, forming extensive patches on shoreline rocks 0-5-1 -o m. above high-water level,
associated with V. maiira. The South Orkneys specimens occur together with Caloplaca cirrochrooides
(Vain.) Zahlbr., which is also a species characteristic of the upper spray zone.

Geographical Distribution. Subantarctic-antarctic, perhaps circumpolar; Kerguelen, Falklands,
Fuegia, South Orkneys.

Verrucaria sp.

South Orkneys. Inaccessible Islands: on schistose rock, together with V. tesselatula Nyl. ; Discovery
193 1-3. 25- i- 1933 (no. iog4-2 pr. p.).

A small patch of olive-blackish, rimose, minutely black-punctate thallus. Unfortunately, no mature
perithecia are present. The thallus indicates that it belongs to the antricola-aractina-Erichsenii-scotina-
Zschackeana group, none of which have as far as I know been recorded from the southern hemisphere.

EXCLUDED SPECIES
Vernicaria exqiiisita Darbishire, 1912, p. 17.
Re-examining the type material from South Georgia, I found it to be Lecidea Dicksonii (Gmel.) Ach.
in a very poorly developed condition, with minute juvenile apothecia about o-i mm. in diameter, in
their unexpanded state resembling perithecia. The upper part of the thecium was characteristically
aeruginose, and two spores were seen, 10-12 x 5-7 /<•

Genus Thelidium Massalongo, 1855

Three species attributed to this genus were found in Marie Byrd Land by the second Byrd Antarctic
Expedition, and described by Dodge and Baker (1938). One of them, Th. Caloplacae Dodge and Baker,
is a lichen-parasite with numerous spores in the ascus, and should hence be excluded from the genus.
The others, Th. inaequale Dodge and Baker, p. 524, pi. 38, figs. 1-5, and Th.parvum Dodge and Baker,
p. 526, pi. 62, figs. 393-395, the first occurring on schistose rocks and the second over the thallus of a
Parmelia on sandy loam, show some spore characters unusual in this genus. In Thelidium inaequale the
spores are dark coloured, i -septate with frequently unequal cells, 10-13 x 5-7 /<; in Th. parvum colour-
less, i-septate with unequal cells, 7*5-9'OX 3-0-3-5//. The thallus in both these species is extremely
reduced or evanescent, and the perithecia are of simple structure with entire dark walls of only a few
cell layers in thickness.

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 23

Genus Staurothele Norman
1853, P- 240.
Staurothele gelida (Hook. f. and Tayl.) M. Lamb, n.comb. (Fig. T,j, k)
Verrucaria gelida Hooker and Taylor, 1844, p. 639.

' Verrucaria umbrina' in Hooker, 1845-7, P- 54i) P'- cxcviii, fig. iv (non Wahlenberg).
Verrucaria umbrina var. monospora Nylander, 1855, p. 175.
Verrucaria monospora Malme, 1928, p. 9.

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago: Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet; near summit of islet,
altitude c. 7 m., on vertical south-facing side of basalt dyke; F.LD.S., 28. xii. 1944 (no. 2125); near
summit of islet, on old limpet shells; F.LD.S., 28. xii. 1944 (no. 2101). Argefitine and neighbouring
Islands: Berthelot Islands; on north-facing inland cliflp (non-calcareous); B.G.L.E., 18. iii. 1935
(nos. 1081-32, 1094-91).

East Graham Land. Croivn Prince Giistav Channel: Station 30 ; west side of island, on agglomerate
rocks in slope just above sea-level; F.LD.S., 12. xi. 1945 (no. 2841 pr. p.). Corry Island^; on agglo-
merate outcrop near sea-level at foot of scree slope; F.LD.S., 17. xi. 1945 (no. 2835 pr. p.). Persson
Island; north-west shore, at sea-level, on non-calcareous stones; F.LD.S., 21. xii. 1945 (nos. 2663,
2664). James Ross Island: St. 51 ; altitude c. 60 m., on basaltic stones irrigated in summer by snowmelt
water; F.LD.S., 23. xi. 1945 (nos. 2640, 2641 pr. p., 26^2 pr. p.). Cape Lachmann; altitudes. 30 m., on
non-calcareous stones near a fresh-water pond; F.LD.S., 21. xi. 1945 (no. 2673); altitude c. 60 m., on
basaltic rock; F.LD.S., 21. xi. 1945 (no. 2781). Seymour Island: western slopes of plateau in north
part of island, altitude c. 150 m., on a calcareous stone; F.LD.S., 30. viii. 1945 (no. 2477 /)r. p.).

Like St. clopima (Wbg.) Th. Fr., but spores constantly single in ascus and usually larger than in
St. clopima: (45-)6o-75 x (i5-)2i-32// (or up to 90// long, in Argentine specimens according to
Malme, loc. cit.).

The holotype of ' Verrucaria gelida ' from Cockburn Island in the Erebus and Terror Gulf was located
in the herbarium of Churchill Babington, now in the British Museum. In outward appearance it is
quite similar to Staurothele clopima, and like that species has bacilliform hymenial gonidia. Single-
spored asci are occasionally met with in St. clopima, but the uniformity of the character in all our
Antarctic material seems to justify the specific separation suggested by Malme.

In external morphology the range of variation is like that of St. clopima, that is to say, large. The
thallus may be reduced and scanty, consisting of a thin crust between the perithecial warts (as in the
Cockburn Island holotype) or up to i mm. thick and verrucose-areolate. In the former case a ring of
gonidia-bearing thallus tissue is often carried up and isolated on the sides of the perithecium (Fig. i;).
The colour of the thallus varies with exposure, from a medium brown (Ridgway, 1912, pi. xlvi,
13""^) in shaded south-facing positions, to brown-black (Ridgway, pi. xlvi, 17"" «) in some cases on
exposed stones (no. 2673). The excipulum is more or less globose, variable in size (200-300// diam.),
colourless or almost so when young, but becoming increasingly brown with age, until, in old perithecia,
it consists entirely of dark brown tissue hardly distinguishable from the apical brown-blackish involu-
crellum. The hymenial gonidia are cubical to bacillar, 3-9 < 2-5-3 -o//, P^le green. Thalline gonidia
bright green, iglobose, thin-walled, 6-o-io-5// diam.

Hooker's illustration in the Flora Antarctica shows the single spores still enclosed in the ascus.

Like St. clopima, St. gelida is particularly characteristic of positions seasonally inundated by fresh-
water rivulets, in this case derived from the melting of snow and ice. One finds it on lowlying ground
with good snow cover throughout the winter, and where during the heavy thaws of spring and early
summer it leads a purely aquatic existence. Its maximal development was seen on James Ross Island

1 Formerly Cape Corry.

DISCOVERY REPORTS

(no. 2640), where it formed a conspicuous association on flat stones lying in extensive rivulets and
seepage areas derived from an ice cap higher up.

Geographical Distribution. Outside the Graham Land sector of the Antarctic, this species is
known from Argentina and Chile. It and St. chpima are perhaps bipolar-vicarious species.

Genus Microglaena Korber, 1855
Microglaena antarctica M. Lamb, n.sp. (Fig. 3/); PL IV, fig. 5)

South Shetlands. Nelson Island: Harmony Cove, on fine-grained non-calcareous rock; Discovery
10^-^-=; 14 xii 1934 (nos. 1480--1, 1480-2, the latter the holotype). Deception Island: east coast, by
Ringed Penguin rookery, on agglomerate rock ;B.G.L.E., 16.1. i936(no. 1381^3); tuff cliffs above mam
Ringed Penguin rookery, altitude c. 140 m.; B.G.L.E., 20. i. 1936 (nos.
1399-4, 1400-13, 1400-38); south-west side of 'Neptune's Bellows', on
weathered agglomerate crags with fair sheker; Discovery 1933-5. lo- '■
1935 (nos. 1488-1, 1488-2 pr. p.). Desolation Island: on non-calcareous
rocks in gull rookery, altitude c. 20 m. ; Discovery 1933-5. §• i- ^935
(no. 1487-6).

Description. Thallus cnistaceus, imiformis, plagulas irregidares 0-4-2-5 p.^ ^ Microglaena antarctica
centim. latas inter alios lichenes formans, primo areolatus, mox verrncoso- M. Lamb. Spores.

areolatus aut congeste verrucosus, ad i (-2) mm. crassus, albidus vel impure

albidus vel sordtde ebttrneus, opacus, epruinosus; areolae seu verrucae o-3-i-o mm. dtam., rotrmdatae
angulosaeve, planae aut convexae, saepe convoluto-tuherculatae. Hypothallus nullus dMus; soredm
etisidia desunt. Gonidia cystococcoidea, globosa, 4-5-i5-o/^ diam., pallide aut sat laete vmdta,
pariete tenui Perithecia singulatim verrucis thallinis o-5-i-o mm. latis insidentia, thallo obducta, apice
denudato fusconigricanti, ostiolo punctiformi, minuto, saepe levtter papUlato. Excipulum rmmersrm
globosum 450-520/. diam., omnino incolorattm, stiperne involucrello fusconigncantt, latenbus hand vel
parum producto obtectum. Paraphyses persistentes, filiformes, haud ramoso-connexae, i •0-1-5/^ crassae,
sinuosae, in aqua facile separandae. Asci clavati, 135-210 ■: 30-4° /^ pariet^ ^^colorato yo-T5M crasso.
Sporae ^-nirarius S)nae in asco, uni- aut partim biseriatim dispositae, oblongo-elhpsotdeae aut elhpsotdeo-
fusiformae, muriformi-cellulosae {cellulis numerosis a^boideis), incoloratae vel levissime mfuscatae halone
nullo indutae,formammagnitudinemquehaudpmdlumvariantes, 42-90 < 13-35 li,plerumquearc. 60 x 25 /..
Pycnidia verrucis thallinis immersa, ostiolo nigricanti punctiformi o-i-o-3 mm. diam.; Jycnocomdia
filiformia, curvata rectave, 1 5-24 >< 0-6-0-8 /.. Thalhts extr^ et intus KHO- ../ sordrde fiavofr^scescens ,
CaCl O,- CfiHiNH,)^-, I- ; sporae plasmaque ascorum I+rubroftdvescentes.

There is no basal hypothalline layer, the thallus being attached to the substratum by the hyphae of
the lower medulla. Thallus corticate; cortex colourless, 15-34/' thick, of ±rounded, thm-walled cells
2-C-5-0/. diam., in places crushed and indistinct. Gonidial stratum 60-250/. deep, sometimes entirely
filling the verrucose areolae; the algae in the lower parts of the thallus are often dead and brown.
Medulla colourless, hyaline, composed of much branched and intricated hyphae i-5-3-o// thick. Ihe
brown-black apex (involucrellum) of the perithecia is 0-2-0-5 mm. diam., matt or shming, with central,
often lighter coloured ostiole. Excipulum colourless or with a faint yellowish tinge formed of com-
pacted tangentially running hyphae about i /. thick. Involucrellum consists of dark-walled cells
3-5/. diam., merging ±gradually into the surrounding colourless tissue. No hymemal gonidia.
Paraphyses about the same length as the asci, not capitate; septa visible after treatment with KHO
HCl and I, 9-18/. apart. Walls of asci not laminated, I-, with a thinner spot at the apex. Pycmdial
fulcra exobasidial, simple, 9-13 < 1-0-1-5/..

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 25

Perhaps related to M. subliirideUa (Vain.) Zahlbr. (Brazil), but differing in the much thicker,
verrucose, lighter coloured thallus, larger fertile verrucae, and larger spores. From the f. terrestris (Hue)
Zahlbr. of M. mtiscorum (Fr.) Th. Fr. it is distinguished by the thicker thallus, colourless excipulum,
number of spores in the ascus, and saxicolous habitat.

M. antarctica grows in small patches among other crustaceous lichens {Caloplaca, Buellia, etc.), and
appears to be a rather ornithocoprophilous species.

Family DERMATOCARPACEAE

Genus Dermatocarpon Eschweiler, 1824

Section Endopyrenium Stizenberger

Dermatocarpon lachneum (Acharius) A. L. Smith (Fig. 3?*)

191 1, p. 270, pi. 37; Vainio, 1921, p. 18; Lynge, 1928, p. 37.

Lichen lachneiis Acharius, 1798, p. 140.

Dermatocarpon hepaticiim var. lachneum Zahlbruckner, 1921, p. 217; Zschacke, 1934, p. 605.

Endocarpon nifescens Acharius, 1810, p. 304.

Dermatocarpon nifescens Th. Fr., 1861, p. 354; Zschacke, 1934, p. 602.

East Graham Land. Crozvn Prince Gtistav Channel: St. 28; west side of island, altitude c. 25 m.,
on sandy detritus on ledges in agglomerate cliffs; F.I.D.S., 16. xi. 1945 (no. 2792). St. 29; summit
plateau of island, altitude c. 130 m., on detritus between rocks and stones; F.I.D.S., 13. xi. 1945
(no. 2828).

The reddish brown squamules are 2-8 mm. across, becoming at maturity contiguous and variously
lobate, slightly concave and with conspicuously raised margins, which are for the most part eroded and
grey-whitish where the tissue has been killed off by exposure. Most of the black spots on the upper
surface are pycnidia, but a few perithecia are present; immersed, pyriform, up to 225// across and
360// deep, with faintly pink excipular wall. Involucrellum almost obsolete, dome-shaped, dark brown
in section, merging at the sides into the thalline cortex. No paraphyses. Asci cylindrical, with bluntly
pointed ends, 80-115 X9-i5/<, with gelatinous wall about 3// thick, becoming thinner at maturity.
Spores 8, uniseriate in ascus, ellipsoid, i3-5-i8-o x 6-0-8-5 fi. Mucilage of hymenium faintly pink with
iodine. Pycnidia immersed, globose, up to 33o(-48o)// diam., without distinct wall, filled with spongy
canaliculate sporogenous tissue consisting of the massed endobasidial fulcra ; pycnoconidia bacillar,
4X I//.

One of the few lichens which were present on the bleak summit plateau of St. 29, where there can
be no protecting snow cover during the winter on account of the completely exposed situation. It is
hardly surprising, therefore, to find necrosis of the raised margins of the squamules, due probably to
the eroding action of wind-blown powder snow, which can act like a sandblast in these regions.

Geographical Distribution. New to the Antarctic. A widely distributed species in the northern
hemisphere, where it has a very broad range of latitude : North Africa, the Ukraine, southern, central
and northern Europe, Iceland, North America from New Mexico to New England, and the Arctic
(Greenland, Spitsbergen, and Novaya Zemlya). It has also been recorded from northern India. I do
not know of any previous record from the southern hemisphere, but the closely related D. hepaticuni
has been recorded from Western Australia and New Zealand by Muller Arg., and it is possible that some
of the material may refer to the present species.

26 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Section Entosthelia (Wallroth) Stizenberger

Dermatocarpon intestiniforme (Korber) Hasse (Fig. i o)

1912, p. 46.

Endocarpon intestiniforme Korber, 1859-65, p. 42.

Dermatocarpon fliiviatile var. decipiens f. intestiniformis Vainio, 1921, p. 13.
' Lichen polyphylhis' in Wulfen, 1788, p. 142 (non Linnaeus).

Dermatocarpon polyphyllum Dalla Torre and Sarnthein, 1902, p. 504; Zsciiacke, 1934, p. 627; Magnusson, 1934,
p. 458; Lynge, 1938, p. 33.
East Graham Land. James Ross Island: The Naze; altitude c. 20 m., in a damp shaded overhung
crevice in side of agglomerate rock, north-west exposure; F.I.D.S., 26. xi. 1945 (no. 2784).

About 30 thalli, varying in size from i to 3 cm. in diameter, were present in the hollow of the rock.
They are of the polyphyllous-complicate type, with the lobes mostly convex with downrolled edges.
Upper side dull brown, but for the most part covered with a fine caesious-whitish pruina; under side
yellowish flesh-coloured to brown, ± wrinkled but not distinctly veined. The thallus does not become
green when wetted. Nearly all the individuals were fertile, but spores were rather sparingly developed,
IO-5-I2-OX 5-o-7-5/<, averaging 11-5 x 6-3//.

This species and D. miniatum (L.) Mann (var. complicatum (Lightf.) Hellb.) are very similar and
rather difficult to separate on morphological features. The chief difference is supposed to lie in the
spores, which in D. mimatam are somewhat longer, 8-14//, or even up to 20//, according to Lynge
(1938, p. 34). The average length/breadth coefficient is about 1-5 in D. intestiniforme and 2-0 in D.
miniatum (Lamb, 1940, p. 267). In the exsiccat Korber, Lich. sel. German, no. 397, which is authentic
material of D. intestiniforme, I found spores 8-5-io-5 x 5-0-6-5// with an average length/breadth
coefficient of i-6-i7. In the Antarctic material the coefficient works out at i-8. Apparently therefore
the difference in spore shape is not a very constant or reliable character, as in both species it fluctuates
within rather wide limits. D. intestiniforme has a rather typical growth form, implied in the name, and
noted by Santesson (apud Lynge, 1938, p. 34); the edges of the lobes are mostly rolled dowTiwards:
' sehr auffallend sind die darmformig verschlungenen, zur convexen Areolenform eingerollten mittleren
Lappen,doch auch im Umfange ist der Thallus bei aller Verflachung wenigstens an den Randern meist
noch eingeroUt' (Korber, loc. cit.).

The specific epithet polyphyllum (Wulfen) cannot be used for this species, because Wulfen (loc. cit.)
refers to Lichen polyphyllus Linn., which is Umbilicaria polyphylla (L.) Hoffm.

Geographical Distribution. A bipolar species, new to the southern hemisphere; it occurs in
central Europe (where it is alpine), Scandinavia, Iceland and the Arctic (Spitsbergen, Novaya Zemlya,
Greenland, Arctic Canada). Lynge (1938, p. 33) has found Dermatocarpon intestiniforme to be a more
northern species than D. miniatum, which it almost replaces in the Arctic. It has also been recorded
from U.S.A. : Arizona and California.

Darbishire, 1910, p. 9, recorded an unnamed species of the genus Endocarpon from South Victoria
Land: McMurdo Sound, Granite Harbour, collected by the British National Antarctic Expedition of
1901-4. The rock specimen referred to is preserved at the British Museum (Natural History), but no
Pyrenocarp lichen appears to be now present on it.

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT

27

Family MASTODIACEAE

Genus Mastodia Hooker f. and Harvey, 1847

Mastodia tesselata (Hooker f. and Harvey) Hooker f. and Harvey (Fig. 3 m ; PI. HI, fig. i ; PI. IV, fig. i)

apud Hooker, 1847, p. 499, pi. cxciv, fig. ii; Vainio, 1903, p. 36, pi. iv, figs. 33, 34, 1909, p. 156; Hue, 1909,

P- 315. %s. 1-5, 1915, p. 13; Darbishire, 1912, p. 41, pi. 3, fig. 36.
Ulvella tesselata Hooker f. and Harvey, 1845, p. 297.

Prasiola tesselata Kiitzing, 1849, p. 473; Hariot, 1889, p. 29, pi. 2, figs. 1-6; Knebel, 1936, p. 45.
Leptogiopsis complicatula Nylander, 1884, p. 211. •
Laestadia prasiolae Winter, 1887, p. 16 (fungus).
Guignardia prasiolae Reed, 1902, p. 150 (fungus).
Dermatomeris Georgica Reinsch, 1890, p. 425.

South Shetlands. King George Island : Admiralty Bay, Martel Inlet ; on fine-grained non-calcareous
rock ; Discovery 1933-5, 18. xii. 1934 (no. 1481-15); Esther Harbour, east side, slightly above sea-level;
Discovery 1935-7, 6. i. 1937 (no. 1949-3). Deception Island: north side of crater to west of the whaling
settlement, altitude c. 60 m., on andesitic stones on scree slope; F.I.D.S., 8. ii. 1945 (no. 2318 pr. p.).
Clarence Island: Cape Bowles; Discovery 1935-7, ^3- ^i- ^93^ (no. 1874-4).

West Graham Land. Palmer Archipelago: Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet; near summit of islet,
altitude c. 7 m., on granodiorite rocks; F.I.D.S., 29. ii. 1944 (no. 1151), 28. xi. 1944 (no. 1833),
14. i. 1945 (no. 2234 pr. p.), 18. i. 1945 (no. 2256 pr. p.) ; on weathered wooden deck of old whaling
scow on beach; F.I.D.S., i. iv. 1944 (no. 1214). Mainland coast between Cape Renard and Cape Bellue:
opposite Berthelot Islands; at foot of cliffs, on granitic rock; B.G.L.E., 27. vii. 1935 (no. 1188-1).
Argentine and neighbouring Islands : Berthelot Islands ; on north-facing granitic low sea cliff, altitude
5 m. ; B.G.L.E., 18. iii. 1935 (nos. 1094-34, 1094-45). Galindez Island; on non-calcareous rock;
B.G.L.E., 23. xi. 1935 (no. 1263-2). Trinity Peninsula, north coast: Cape Roquemaurel ; on north-east-
facing non-calcareous rocks, altitude 16 m. ; Discovery 1933-5, 20. i. 1935 (no. 1490-2).

East Graham Land. Trinity Peninsula, south coast : Hope Bay ; near Boeckella Lake, altitude c. 60 m.,
on non-calcareous rocks and stones; F.I.D.S., 15. iv. i945(nos. 2366, 2368/)r./)., 2369 pr./)., 2372 /)r./).);
on stones at side of frozen shallow freshwater pool in the penguin rookery; F.I.D.S., 15. iv. 1945
(no. 2363 pr. p.).

This organism has been classified by different authors as a lichen, an alga, and a fungus. The algal
component is Prasiola crispa.

It is the commonest Pyrenocarp lichen in the Graham Land sector of the Antarctic. Skottsberg (1912)
has observed its transition into the free-living Prasiola crispa, and I saw this also on Goudier Islet.
One of the features which speaks most strongly in favour of Mastodia being a true lichen is the vigour
of the dual organism, and in particular its ability to withstand desiccation better than the free-living
Prasiola. On Goudier Islet Mastodia tesselata covers large areas of the exposed smooth granodiorite
rocks, an arid habitat throughout the whole of the summer, except for an occasional light fall of snow
or sleet ; the plants are nearly always completely dry and brittle to the touch. Prasiola crispa, on the
other hand, ahhough it can become desiccated for short periods without injury, is much more dependent
on a supply of fresh water, and for this reason occurs only in hollows and crevices in the rocks where
water tends to flow or accumulate.

Both Mastodia and Prasiola are highly nitrophilous, occurring in rookeries or on bird-rocks where
an abundant supply of nitrogenous matter is available from bird excrement dissolved in snowmelt
water. P. crispa is one of the most nitrophilous plants known, occurring even around the nests in

28 DISCOVERY REPORTS

penguin rookeries. Mastodia avoids such extremely nitrogenous positions. In rock gutters, where a
trickle of strongly ammoniacal drainage seeps over periodically from a source higher up, its passage is
often intercepted first by a mat of the Prasiola, which apparently filters out the most highly concen-
trated constituents, solid matter, feathers, etc. ; the Mastodia, often grading into the Prasiola, occurs
on the side away from the source, thus encountering clearer and presumably less nitrogenous drainage
water.

Associated species are Caloplaca elegans, Xanthoria lychnea (often epiphytic on the Mastodia),
Biiellia spp., Lecania (Thamnolecania) Brialmontii and Verrucaria elaeoplaca. The latter species is more
hydrophilous, replacing Mastodia in the central portions of seepage channels (PI. Ill, fig. i).

M. tesselata has a preference for the harder types of rock (granodiorite, andesite, etc.). On Goudier
Islet I noticed that it avoided certain fine-grained patches, of acid composition, in the granodiorite.
An abnormal habitat was the weathered wooden deck of an old whaling scow which had lain on the
beach for many years.

Geographical Distribution. Bipolar. In the northern hemisphere it occurs in eastern arctic
Siberia (Pitlekai, Behring Straits), and is apparently altogether absent from the western Arctic; in the
southern hemisphere, Kerguelen, South Georgia, Graham Land and adjacent islands, and Fuegia.
The following is a list of the antarctic localities from which it has previously been recorded :

South Shetlands. Nelson Island {T)2t.rh\s\{\re, 1912).

West Graham Land. Trinity Peninsida, north coast: Astrolabe Island and small islet off the coast
(Darbishire, 191 2). Palmer Archipelago: Port Lockroy, Goudier Islet (Hue, 191 5); Bob Islet off
Wiencke Island (Vainio, 1903). Mainland coast betzveen Cape Charles and Cape Renard: Cape Van
Beneden (Vainio, 1903). Kaiser Wilhelm II Archipelago: Booth Island (Hue, 1909); Hovgaard Island
(Hue, 1915).

East Graham Land. Erebus and Terror Gulf: Paulet Island (Darbishire, 1912). James Ross Island:
west side, about lat. 64° (Darbishire, 191 2).

[South Georgia. Royal Bay (Reinsch, 1890); Maiviken (May Harbour) (Darbishire, 1912).]

LIST OF LITERATURE

ACHARIUS, E., 1798. Lichenographiae Suecicae Prodromus. Linkoping.
1803. Methodus qua omnes detectos Lichenes. Stockholm.

1810. Lichenographia Universalis. Gottingen.

Blackman, V. H., 1902. Lichenes. Report on the collections of natural history made in the Antarctic regions during the

voyage of the 'Southern Cross', p. 320.
Branth, J. S. D. and Rostrup, E., 1869. Lichenes Daniae eller Danmarks Laver. Bot. Tidsskr., iii, p. 127.
Calman, W. T., 1937. James Eights, a pioneer antarctic naturalist. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., 149th session, p. 171.
Cengia Sambo, M., 1926. / licheni delta Terra del Fuoco. Contrib. Scient. Missioni Salesiane Ven. Don Bosco.
Crombie, J. M., 1876. Lichenes Terrae Kergueleni. J. Linn. Soc. Lond., Bot., xv, p. 180.
1876 a. On the lichens collected by Professor R. O. Cunningham in the Falkland Islands, Fuegia, Patagonia, and the island of

Chiloe during the voyage of H. M.S. 'Nassau', 1867-9. J. Linn. Soc. Lend., Bot., xv, p. 222.
Dalla Torre, K. W. and Sarnthein, L., 1902. Die Flechten (Lichenes) von Tirol, Vorarlberg und Liechtenstein. Innsbruck.
Darbishire, O. V., 1905. The Lichens of the South Orkneys. Trans. Proc. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, xxiii, p. 105.

1910. Lichenes. [British] Nat. Antarct. Exped. 1901-4, Nat. Hist., v.

1912. The lichens of the Swedish Antarctic Expedition. Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed. Sudpolar-Exped. 1901-3, IV, Lief. 11.

1912a. The lichens of the South Orkneys. Rep. Sci. Res. Voy. S.Y. 'Scotia', 1902-4, iii, p. 24.

1923. Cryptograms from the Antarctic. J. Bot., lxi, p. 105.

1923a. Lichens. Brit. Antarct. ('Terra Nova') Exped., 19 10, Nat. Hist. Rep., Bot., Part in, p. 29.

Degelius, G., 1940. Contributions to the lichen flora of North America. L Ark. Bot., xxx a, no. i.

LIST OF LITERATURE 29

Dodge, C.W. and Baker, G. E., 1938. Lichens and lichen parasites. Second Byrd Antarctic Expedition — Botany. Ann. Mo. Bot.

Gard., xxv, p. 515.
DU RiETZ, G. E., 1929. The discovery of an arctic element in the lichen-flora of New Zealand and its plantgeographical consequences.

Rep. Austral. Ass. Adv. Sci., Hobart, 1928, p. 628.

1940. Problems of bipolar plant distribution. Acta Phytogeogr. Suecica, xni, p. 215.

Erichsen, C. F. E., 1930. Lichenologische Beitrdge. Hedwigia, LXX, p. 216.

EscHWEiLER, F. G., 1824. Systema Lichenum. Niimberg.

Frey, E., 1936. Vorarbeiten zu einer Monographic der Umbilicariaceen. Ber. Schweiz. Bot. Ges., XLV, p. 198.

Fricker, K., 1900. The Antarctic Regions. London.

Fries, Th. M., 1861. Lichenes arctoi Europae Groenlandiaeque hactenus cogniti. Nov. Act. Reg. Soc. Sci. Upsal., ser. 3, in.

1902. Lichenes antarctici. Nyt Mag. Naturvidensk., XL, p. 208.

Hariot, p., 1889. Algues. Miss. Scient. Cap Horn, 1882-3, ^< P- 3-

Hasse, H. E., 1912. Additions to the lichen flora of southern California. No. 7. Bryologist, xv, p. 45.

Hooker, J. D., 1845-7. The Botany of the Antarctic Voyage of H.M. Discovery Ships 'Erebus' and 'Terror', in the years

1839-43. I- Flora Antarctica. Part IL London.
Hooker, J. D. and Harvey, W. H., 1845. Algae antarcticae. J. Bot., Lond., iv, p. 293.
Hooker, J. D. and Taylor, T., 1844. Lichenes antarctici. J. Bot., Lond., iii, p. 634.
Hue, a., 1908. Lichens. Exped. Antarct. Fran9aise (1903-5); Sciences naturelles: Documents scientifiques, Botanique.

1909. Le Mastoidea tesselata Hook. fil. et Harv. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, LVI, p. 315.

1915- Lichens. Deux. Exped. Antarct. Fran9aise (1908-10) Sciences naturelles: Documents scientifiques.

Knebel, G., 1936. Monographie der Algenreihe der Prasiolales, insbesondere von Prasiola crispa. Hedwigia, lxxv, p. i.
KoRBER, G. W., 1855. Systema Lichenum Germaniae. Breslau.

• 1859-65. Parerga Lichenologica. Breslau.

KiJTZiNG, F. T., 1849. Species Algarum. Leipzig.

Lamb, L M., 1939. A review of the genus Neuropogon {Nees and Plot.) Nyl., with special reference to the antarctic species.

J. Linn. Soc. Lond., Bot., Lii, p. 199.

1940. Lichens from East Greenland, collected by the Wager Expedition, 1935-6. Nyt Mag. Naturvidensk., lxxx, p. 263.

Lynge, B., 1928. Lichens from Novaya Zemlya. Rep. Sci. Res. Norweg. Exped. Novaya Zemlya, 1921, no. 43.

1938. Lichefisfrom the west and north coasts of Spitsbergen and the North-East Land. I. The Macrolichens. Skrift. Norsk.

Vidensk.-Akad. Oslo, mat.-naturv. Klasse, no. 6.
Magnusson, a. H., 1929. A monograph of the genus Acarospora. Kgl. Svensk. Vetenskakad. Handl., ser 3, vii, no. 4.

1934- -^^w t"" interesting Swedish lichens. VHL Bot. Notiser, p. 457.

Malme, G. O. A., 1928. Lichenes pyrenocarpi aliquot in herbario Regnelliano asservati. Ark. Bot., xxii A, no. 6.

Massalongo, a., 1855. Frammenti lichenografici. Verona.

Muller (Arg.), J., 1889. Lichens. Miss. Scient. Cap Horn, 1882-3, v, P- 141-

Norman, J. M., 1853. Conatus praemissus redactionis novae generum nonnullorum lichenum in organis fructiflcationis vel sporis

fundatae. Nyt. Mag. Naturvidensk., vii, p. 213.
Nylander, W., 1855. Additamentum in floram cryptogamicam Chilensem. Ann. Sci. nat., Bot., ser. 4, in, p. 145.

1884. Lichenes novi e Freto Behringii. Flora, Lxvn, p. 211.

Reed, M., 1902. Two new ascomycetous fungi parasitic on marine algae. Univ. California Publ. Bot., i, p. 141.

Reinsch, p. F., 1890. Die Siisswasseralgenflora von Siid-Georgien. Internat. Polarforschung 1882-3. Die deutschen Expedi-

tionen und ihre Ergebnisse, n, p. 329.
Ridgway, R., 1912. Color Standards and Color Nomenclature. Washington.
Santesson, R., 1939. Amphibious pyrenolichens. I. Ark. Bot., xxix a, no. 10.
SiPLE, P. A., 1938. The second Byrd Antarctic Expedition-^Botany. L Ecology and geographical distribution. Ann. Mo. Bot.

Gard., xxv, p. 467.
Skottsberg, C, 1912. Einige Bemerkungen iiber die Vegetationsverhdltnisse des Graham Landes. Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed.

Siidpolar-Exped. 1901-3, iv. Lief. 13.

1940. Vdxtlivet i Antarktis. Fauna och Flora, Hafte 4, p. 145.

Smith, A. Lorrain, 1911. A Monograph of the British Lichens. Part 11. London.

Vainio, E. a., 1903. Lichens. Res. Voy. S.Y. 'Belgica', 1897-9; Rapports scientifiques, Botanique.

1909. Lichenes in viciniis stationis hibernae Expeditionis Vegae prope pagum Pitlekai in Sibiria scptentrionali a D:re E.

Almquist collecti. Ark. Bot., vni, no. 4.

1 92 1. Lichenographia Fennica L Pyrenolichenes Usque proximi Pyrenomycetes et Lichenes Imperfecti . Acta Soc. Fauna and

Flora Fennica, XLix, no. 2.
Wiggers, F. H., 1780. Primitiae Florae Holsaticae. Kiel.
Wild, F., 1923. Shackleton's Last Voyage. London. ^<t<^i i

H, ^
hole:,

MASS.

30 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Winter, G., 1887. Exotische Pilze. IV. Hedwigia, xxvi, p. 6.

WULFEN, A., 1788. Winterbelustigungen. Schrift. Ges. Naturforsch. Freunde Berlin, viii, p. 83.

Zahlbruckner, a., 1906. Die Flechten. Deutsche Sudpolar-Exped. 1901-3, vm, Heft i, p. 19.

igiy. Botanische Ergebnisse der Schwedischen Expedition nach Patagonien und dem Feuerlande 1907-9. VI. Die Flechten.

Kgl. Svensk. Vetenskakad. Handl., lvii, no. 6.

1921. Catalogus Lichenum Universalis. I. Leipzig.

ZscHACKE, H., 1934. Epigloeaceae, Verrucariaceae und Dermatocarpaceae. Rabenhorst's Kryptogamenfiora von Deutschland,

Osterreich, und der Schweiz, ed. 2, ix, Abt. i, Teil i.

PLATE I

Fig. I. Part of the boat harbour, Goudier Islet, Port Lockroy, seen at
low tide, showing blackish staining of the rocks caused by Verrucaria
psychrophila M. Lamb. Phot. I.M.L., 23. iv. 1944.

Fig. 2. Verrucaria serpuloides M. Lamb, forming black patches on sub-
merged granodiorite rocks off the shore of Goudier Islet, Port
Lockroy, belowthe lowest ebb-tide level. (Under-waterphotograph.)
Phot. I.M.L., 19. X. 1944.

Fig. 3. Close-up view of Verrucaria psychrophila M. Lamb, on a boulder
in the boat harbour of Goudier Islet, Port Lockroy, at low tide.
Phot. I.M.L., 4. xii. 1944.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE I

' 4

•ir^SHJ^^V

4^

^T^ uT^

-^PBT "**"

ji^^^

^ .'

>^

^dfti^d^

1^

3^

V

«K^^

t5

^r^f

■ *■

Sr

w

^ -^

PLATE II

Fig. I. Verrucaria serpuloides M. Lamb, associated with an encrusting
calcareous alga {Lhhophylluin sp.?) in a rock pool, Goudier Islet,
Port Lockroy. The Verrucaria is seen as a dark band, the upper
edge of which marks the level of lowest ebb tide. (Under-water
photograph.) Phot. I.M.L., 26. x. 1944.

Fig. 2. Part of an extensive patch of Verrucaria elaeoplaca Vain., on a
natural gutter in the granodiorite rocks of Goudier Islet, Port
Lockroy, periodically moistened by a flow of snowmelt water.
\ nat. size. Phot. I.M.L., 20. xii. 1944.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE II

^«:::^»*^«»82«S

PLATE III

Fig. I. A natural gutter in the granodiorite rocks of Goudier Islet, Port
Lockroy, showing growth of Verriicaria elaeoplaca Vain, and Mastodia
tesselata Hook. f. and Harv. Photo. I.M.L., 3. i. 1945.

Fig. 2. A small snowmelt water pool in a hollow of the granodiorite
rocks of Goudier Islet, Port Lockroy, with the water level bounded
by a zone of Verrucaria elaeoplaca Vain. The Verrucaria is also seen
lining the natural gutter which serves as a run-off from the pool.
Phot. I.M.L., 3. i. 1945.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE III

PLATE IV

Fig. I. Mastodia tesselata Hook. f. and Harv. growing on the + vertical
north-facing side of a bird-frequented granodiorite rock on Goudier
Islet, Port Lockroy. Above are seen stages in the transition into the
free-living alga Prasiola crispa, which replaces the Mastodia on the
zenith surface of the rock. Also present : Caloplaca elegans Th. Fr.
\ nat. size. Phot. I.M.L., 20. xii. 1944.

Fig. 2. Verrucaria Racovitzae Vain. ; holotype specimen (above). The
lower, coarsely rimose thallus is Verrucaria elaeoplaca f. glaucoplaca
(Vain.) M. Lamb, x 4.

Fig. 3. Verrucaria famelica Darbish. ; syntype specimen in herb. Kew.
X4.

Fig. 4. Verrucaria cylindrophora Vain. ; part of the holotype specimen.
X4.

Fig. 5. Microglaena antarctica M. Lamb ; part of the holotype specimen.

Fig. 6. Verrucaria dispartita Vain. ; part of the holotype specimen, x 4.
Fig. 7. Verrucaria psychrophila M. Lamb ; part of the holotype specimen.

x4-
Fig. 8. Verrucaria serpuloides M. Lamb ; part of the holotype specimen.

X4.

Fig. 9. Verrucaria tesselatula f. dermoplaca (Nyl.) M. Lamb; part of
syntype specimen in herb. Kew. x 4.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE IV

iP."iL'>> >»'.-■• ■'*•■' ■'■'.''■< -^.iK-.-^::-*.'.

P'^r^^;^^

WHALE MARKING II

DISTRIBUTION OF BLUE, FIN AND HUMP-
BACK WHALES MARKED FROM 1932 TO 1938

By George W. Rayner
(Plates V-XXII ; Text-fig. i)

THE progress and results of whale marking up to December 1939 have been described in a previous
report^ wherein is recorded the number of whales effectively marked and the details of the 203
marks then recovered. It was shown from this evidence that the striking feature of whale migration
was the manner in which whales of all the three species concerned were found year after year in the
same region of the Antarctic as that in which they were marked. This was quite rigidly so in the case
of Humpbacks and to a lesser degree with Blue and Fin whales, which are occasionally to be found at
more considerable distances from the positions where they were marked. It was also for the first time
proved by direct evidence that Humpback whales move from the Antarctic to tropical waters in very
definite migrations.

Whaling has only continued on a very subdued scale during most of the war years, but additional
marks have been recovered since 1939, all corroborating the results arrived at up to that time. In the
case of Fin whales we now possess marks recovered at every yearly interval up to thirteen, and in no
instance is the distance between the position of marking and the position of recovery greater than
already recorded in the above-mentioned report, which dealt only with marks recovered up to periods
of four years. Now that whaling in the Antarctic has recommenced on a considerable scale a greater
number of recoveries may be expected in the near future, but until this accrues it is felt that the time
has not yet come for a fresh analysis of the data. In the meantime since the previous report gave no
more than a rough indication of the distribution of marking (Plate XLV) it is considered useful to
publish a detailed record of the positions of markings. These fuller details will substantiate the data
already published, and perhaps clarify some of the conclusions reached. The positions of marking
show, for instance, the importance of negative results. If whales are marked in various regions over
a series of years a certain proportion of recoveries may be expected, and it would be of considerable
significance if no marks (or exceptionally few) were recovered from whales marked in substantial
numbers in some definite region on a particular occasion. In the same connexion the division of
Humpbacks into stocks off Enderby Land and off Queen Mary Land can be considered established;
if it were otherwise it is reasonable to conclude, in view of the number of markings off Enderby Land,
that whales from both regions would have been taken off North-west Australia.

It is not proposed to draw any new conclusions in this paper, which is intended simply to record
positions of marking; but studied in conjunction with the report of 1940 it will be of assistance to those
interested in the distribution and migrations of whales.

The positions of marking are now set out in a series of monthly plottings dealing with each of the
three important species (Plates V to XXII). Two charts drawn on a polar equidistant projection cover the
region from 90° W to 120° E in which whale marking has been carried out (see Text-fig. i). These charts
have been divided into quadrilateral areas bounded by one degree of longitude and thirty minutes of

1 Rayner, G. W., 1940, Whale Marking, Progress and Results to December 1939, Discovery Rep., xix, pp. 245-84.

34 DISCOVERY REPORTS

latitude, and it is upon these units of area that the plotting of distribution is based. These areas decrease
in size towards the south, and as the projection is not an equal area representation the actual areas of
the quadrangles are not strictly comparable, but may be taken as nearly so. One of the unit areas
comprises in latitude 55° S, approximately 1034 square miles, in latitude 60° S, 900 square miles, and
in latitude 65° S, 762 square miles. The number of whales marked in each area is represented by
symbols, a sohd circle indicating ten whales and an open circle one to nine whales. The full number of
whales marked is shown by these circles, but whales from which marks have been recovered are
additionally represented by crosses, each cross standing for one whale.

In the neighbourhood of the Shag Rocks to the north west of South Georgia this system has not
been followed in the case of Fin whales. There a circle of 70 miles radius has been drawn with the
Shag Rocks as centre, and all the Fin whales marked within the area circumscribed have been plotted

30°

0°

30°

\<^^

35°

^Sc^^

2^

50°

/\

DUVET

1 \

^^\A^j^^ \

eot

<

^

sd

,--v-v

^v^/>'.vf Y

X

^^^^^'X'^ % ^ \

"7^ V /"^iv^-ii^ >^

^ \

\ \ '■*■ \ v^ ^ \

aVi¥>^

\

\ \\ -%

< > i-Y

\ L-^

90

U z V

\ ^° y'''^

0 \ :) \

,^

\ ^'r-^ ^^'^^ /

\ ^ \^^^^^\j\s

' ^

\ 'S^r \ 1

\ ^ J^\ /

\

7>C / /

XJ^'^X /

/

^/\./ /

\y^ 0^ \ /

V-^

-^A^-V \/ /

1Z0° 150°

180°

150° 120°

Fig. I. Key chart showing place names and the two areas covered by Plates V-XXII.

together. The intense marking in this region was carried out from a hired whale catcher, and positions
of the marked whales are in some cases recorded in the logs in such a way that they cannot be plotted
so precisely as in other regions, although they do fall within the 70-mile circle. Also, it has been shown
(Rayner, 1940, p. 261) that Fin whales marked within 70 miles of the Shag Rocks do not thence
proceed directly to South Georgia, and there is thus some advantage in plotting them as a single unit,
separate from those found farther east.

In the earlier paper (loc. cit.) the numbers of whales given as effectively marked were Blue 668,
Fin 3915, Humpback 558, but the numbers used for the present paper are slightly lower, for they
include only those actually recorded as hits, together with the few which, though recorded as misses
or ' possibles ', were subsequently recovered. The previous report included ' half the remaining
possible hits' in the total, but these have now been disregarded. A few whales, viz. 16 Blues, 18 Fins
and 4 Humpbacks, marked by the R.R.S. 'William Scoresby' in December when approaching the
grounds fall a little beyond the boundaries of the charts used. Also some whales have been marked on

WHALE MARKING II

passages out and home and are not included; nor are those marked by R.R.S. 'Discovery 11', all of
which lie outside these charts. The numbers represented on the charts are :

Blue

Fin

Hump

W

E

W

E

W

E

Nov.

Dec.

Jan.

Feb.

Mar.

38
214
96
(I)
(7)

36
105
122

25

142

932

1366

187

46

151
286

431
302

(I)
16

(7)
33
12

84
265

105
(2)

Charts are omitted where the number of whales marked during the month does not exceed ten ; in
the table these occurrences are indicated by the numbers in brackets.

The marking seasons have been of very variable lengths. On the eastern grounds the ' William
Scoresby ' marked for three seasons (1934-5, ^935-6 and 1936-7), commencing early in December and
ending in March. On the South Georgia grounds the hired whale catcher started operations towards
the end of November or in December, and continued to mid-January or early February. The ' William
Scoresby's' season on the western grounds (1937-8) lasted from November to the latter half of
February. No single month is complete for every season and expedition.

DISTRIBUTION OF WHALES MARKED

I. BLUE WHALES
(a) Western Area

(i) November (Plate Va). A few Blue whales have been marked during this month east of
South Georgia on the grounds frequented by the whalers. The 'William Scoresby' in 1937 marked
a few odd whales to the eastward between latitudes 56 and 58° S.

(2) December (Plate Vb). Fair numbers were marked during this month south and east of South
Georgia, mostly in 1934 and 1935. No Blue whales were marked from South Georgia in 1936. The
'William Scoresby' marked a very few near the Greenwich meridian at the extreme point of an
easterly cruise.

(3) January (Plate VI). Few Blue whales were marked — less than half the December total — and
these, to the south-east, south and west of South Georgia, were virtually all marked in 1935.

In February only one Blue whale was marked, and that was to the west of Grahamland. Only one
Blue whale was marked in the South Georgia area during the season 1936-7.

(b) Easter 71 Area

The ' William Scoresby ' was never very successful in the pursuit of Blue whales, and on no occasion
were large numbers marked, the most successful season being 1936-7.

(i) December (Plate VII). A few were marked in this month in ones and twos, their distribution
showing the arrival of the vessel at the pack-ice edge south of South Africa at the beginning of the
season and the progress eastwards from there.

(2) January (Plate VIII). The small number of 105 marked in this month falls into an eastern group,
mostly marked in 1937, and a western group off Enderby Land, mostly marked in 193"^. The season
1935-6 yielded few Blue whales in this month.

36 DISCOVERY REPORTS

(3) February (Plate IX). A few more Blue whales were marked in this month than in January,
and these again fall into two similar groups, the western group lying farther to the westward. These
western whales were largely marked in 1937, and the eastern group entirely in 1936.

(4) March (Plate X). Operations in this month were always confined to the western part of the
area, as the ship was then lying conveniently for the commencement of the return voyage. Only a few
Blue whales were marked.

It is noticeable that two grounds with a blank area between them are clearly shown by the marked
whales. Very few Blue whales have been marked between 50 and 80° E and only two between 60 and
70° E.

II. FIN WHALES

(a) Western Area

(i) November (Plate XI a). Few Fin whales have been marked during November around South
Georgia. The whale catcher only worked in this month during two seasons and then for only a few
days ; and an attempt in 1937 by the ' William Scoresby ' to mark whales north of South Georgia during
this month was foiled by bad weather. Towards the end of the month a few were marked at the
beginning of a cruise to the eastwards. In 1934 a few Fins were marked to the south-east of South
Georgia, and in 1935 a few in the vicinity of the Shag Rocks.

(2) December (Plate XI b). Large numbers of Fin whales, distributed widespread around South
Georgia, have been marked in this month. Many were marked within 70 miles of the Shag Rocks,
most of them in 1936. Another area of heavy marking lies to the east of South Georgia where many
were marked in 1932, 1934 and 1935. A moderate number has been marked between 30 and 90 miles
south of the island. The 'William Scoresby' in 1937 continued cruising eastwards as far as the
Greenwich meridian, returning during the latter part of the month, but only moderate numbers of
whales were marked.

(3) January (Plate XII). This has always been a very successful month for marking Fin whales
around South Georgia. Large numbers, about 450, have been marked within 70 miles of the Shag
Rocks, most of them in 1937 but also many in 1933 and in 1935. In 1936 many Fins were marked to
the south-east of South Georgia. During the first half of this month in 1938 the 'William Scoresby'
marked fair numbers between the South Sandwich group and the South Orkneys, and in the second
half of the month small numbers to the west of the South Shetlands and Grahamland on a course into
the Bellingshausen Sea.

(4) February (Plate XIII). Around South Georgia marking in this month took place only for a few
days in 1937, resulting in a small number of whales being marked between the southern part of that
island and Zavodovski Island in the South Sandwich group. In 1938 the ' WilHam Scoresby' marked
a moderate number of Fin whales to the west of Adelaide Island in the eastern part of the Bellings-
hausen Sea and in the Bransfield Strait.

(5) March (Plate XIV). A small number were marked in this month between 5° E and 10° E in
1935 and 1937.

(b) Eastern Area

(i) December (Plate XV). Most of the Fin whales marked in this month — and they are only
a moderate number (169) — lie between 20 and 30° E where the ' William Scoresby ' usually commenced
operations on arriving at the pack-ice edge, as explained above under ' Blue whales '.

(2) January (Plate XVI). Only 286 Fin whales were marked in the eastern area this month. Those
between 57 and 97° E were mostly marked in 1937; greater numbers, between 42 and 55° E, off
Enderby Land were mostly marked in 1935.

WHALE MARKING II 37

(3) February (Plate XVII). This is the best Fin whale month in this region, with 43 1 whales marked.
These are spread out in a rather scattered manner from 35 to 105 ' E, but between 20 and 35° E quite
significant numbers were marked in 1935 and 1937. The most easterly whales were marked in 1936.
It is to be noted that very few Fin whales were marked in January and February between 60 and
90° E, and almost all these were in 1937. This region was traversed several times in February, and
in good weather, by the 'William Scoresby', but very few whales of any kind were seen.

(4) March (Plate XVIII). As mentioned above March was spent in the western part of the area
preparatory to turning homewards. Moderate numbers (302) have been marked between 08° E and
56° E with the major number between 19 and 48° E — a rather similar distribution to February. All
whales east of 20° E were marked in 1936, and those to the west of this meridian in 1935 and 1937.

III. HUMPBACK WHALES

(a) Western Area

The Humpback whale is now a rare animal in waters around South Georgia and the number marked
in the vicinity of the island is insignificant.

(i) December (Plate XIX). A very few whales were marked by the 'William Scoresby' in 1937 on
the easterly cruise.

(2) February (Plate XIX). Early in the month in 1938 when the 'William Scoresby 'was oflF Adelaide
Island a small number of Humpbacks were met and some marked. These may be the depleted
descendants of the large numbers of Humpbacks which early in the century frequented the channels
of the South Shetland and Palmer Archipelago, and which probably make their winter migration to the
west coast of South America.

(3) March (Plate XIX). A very few were marked in 1937 about 10° E.

(b) Eastern Area

(i) December (Plate XX). A few Humpbacks were marked in 1934, 1935 and 1936 between 24
and 34° E when the ship arrived on the grounds, and a few in 1934 about 95° E.

(2) January (Plate XXI). This was the best month for Humpbacks, 265 having been marked ; these
were nearly all between 85 and 98° E, and were mostly marked in 1937 with a smaller number in 1936.

(3) February (Plate XXII). Fewer were marked in this month (107)— almost all in 1936 on the
easterly grounds between 87 and 99° E.

The Humpback whale keeps to much more definite areas and to more definite routes of migration
than Fin and Blue whales, and the distribution of marked Humpbacks demonstrates distinct division
into an eastern and a western group. These points have been well proved by the recovery of marks
(Rayner, 1940). Humpback whales are more numerous on the eastern grounds around 95° E than in
the western area of concentration (about 20-40" E), but they are, to all intents, absent between these
two areas. No Humpback has been marked between 60 and 70" E and virtually none between
40 and 80° E. This separation of two groups largely holds good for Blue and Fin whales.

During the whale-marking cruises of the ' William Scoresby ', three of them in the eastern and one
in the western area, a widespread search has been made for whales and the vessel has not remained in
areas of proved or reputed abundance. It can, therefore, be accepted that the regions of concentration
or scarcity of marked whales, seen in Plates V to XXII, do in fact represent in a considerable degree
the concentrations or scarcities of the actual population of whales during the time of these cruises. On

38 DISCOVERY REPORTS

the Other hand, the area covered is immense for one vessel, and the finding of any large concentration
of Fin whales (in which thirty or forty whales might be marked in one day) is easily a matter of chance.
The marked whales do not therefore necessarily give a complete picture of the distribution of the
population. Weather is a factor of the greatest importance in this form of hunting (as demonstrated by
the experience of the whaling fleet in 1945-6), for bad weather, either in the form of poor visibility or
gales, easily obscures a present abundance of whales. In these regions, however, January and
February usually give good conditions with calm seas, good visibility and the long daylight so favour-
able to pursuit.

PLATE Va

Chart showing distribution of marked Blue whales, Western Area, for
November.

PLATE Vb

Chart showing distribution of marked Blue whales. Western Area, for
December.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE V

PLATE VI

Chart showing distribution of marked Blue whales, Western Area, for
January.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE VI

PLATE VII

Chart showing distribution of marked Blue whales, Eastern Area, for
December.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE VII

PLATE VIII

Chart showing distribution of marked Blue whales, Eastern Area, for
January.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE VIII

PLATE IX

Chart showing distribution of marked Blue whales, Eastern Area, for
February.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE IX

PLATE X

Chart showing distribution of marked Blue whales, Eastern Area, for
March.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE X

PLATE XiA

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Western Area, for
November.

PLATE XIb

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Western Area, for
December.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XI

PLATE XII

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Western Area, for
January.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XII

PLATE XIII

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Western Area, for
February.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XIII

PLATE XIV

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Western Area, for
March.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XIV

PLATE XV

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Eastern Area, for
December.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XV

PLATE XVI

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Eastern Area, for
January.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XVI

PLATE XVII

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Eastern Area, for
February.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XVII

PLATE XVIII

Chart showing distribution of marked Fin whales, Eastern Area, for
March.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XVIII

PLATE XIX

Chart showing distribution of marked Humpback whales, Western
Area, for December, February and March.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XIX

PLATE XX

Chart showing distribution of marked Humpback whales, Eastern Area,
lor December.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XX

PLATE XXI

Chart showing distribution of marked Humpback whales, Eastern Area,
for January.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XXI

PLATE XXII

Chart showing distribution of marked Humpback whales, Eastern Area
for February.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XXII

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY
INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-39

By H. F. p. Herdman, m.Sc.
(Text-figs. 1-19, Plates XXIII-XXXI)

INTRODUCTION

THE oceanic soundings taken by the R.R.S. 'Discovery', 'Discovery 11' and 'William Scoresby'
fromi926to 1932 have been dealt with in a previous report (Herdman, 1932). Most of the soundings
in that period were in the West Antarctic region, and the report included descriptions of the sounding
equipment then in use, an account of the Scotia Arc and its significance, comments on the bottom
topography of the Scotia Sea and neighbouring regions, and bathymetric charts of the Scotia Sea,
the vicinity of South Georgia, and the Bransfield Strait and adjacent waters. Between 1932 and 1939
many thousands of additional echo soundings (far more than in the period before 1932) were taken by
the ' Discovery II ', together with a small number of Lucas soundings taken on station by the ' William
Scoresby' and by the 'Discovery II' when her deep-water echo-sounding set was temporarily out of
order. These new soundings are spread over nearly all parts of the Southern Ocean (see Text-fig. 18,
p. 89); they greatly amplify the previous soundings in the West Antarctic region; and they throw
much new light on some areas of special interest. Owing to the dispersal of the Discovery Committee's
staff during the years of war this very large accumulation of data could not be analysed until now.

Although many unpublished oceanic soundings are available, the time has hardly come for a new
bathymetric chart of the Southern Ocean. Nevertheless, the data justify a review of the bottom
topography associated with the Scotia Arc, an account of soundings taken during various hydro-
graphic surveys, and an account of certain localities in which the bathymetric features are of some
oceanographical or geological significance. When deep-sea echo soundings are undertaken on a large
scale, especially in regions of much bad weather, many practical difficulties arise which have not been
adequately dealt with in previous publications. In the following pages, therefore, and in Appendix I
considerable attention is given also to technique ; and the interpretation of individual soundings and
continuous records is also discussed.

The present report is based on the Discovery Committee's data, but in the preparation of the
contour charts soundings from all available sources have been used, especially in the Ross Sea area,
where a considerable number of echo soundings were taken between the years 1933 and 1935 by the
second Byrd Antarctic Expedition. In the Scotia Sea area and in the Bransfield Strait we have used the
full results of the ' Meteor ' sounding programme, which agree well with our own observations. With
these exceptions the number of soundings from other sources in the areas concerned is almost negligible
and in most instances adds little or nothing to the information obtained from our own observations.
In fact, our intensive sounding programme has shown that either the position or depth of some of the
earlier soundings from other sources is quite unreliable.

Soundings taken by the ' Discovery II ' may be roughly classified in three main groups: (a) Routine
oceanic soundings, normally taken every hour when on passage, at every scientific station and when
steaming between stations, (b) Soundings taken during hydrographical survey work, and (c) Special
soundings taken on the occasions when a submarine ridge, bank or other interesting feature of the
ocean floor was being crossed. The routine soundings (a) were usually obtained under way at normal

42 DISCOVERY REPORTS

cruising speed, i.e. g knots. If, however, conditions were unsuitable for this and it was important
that the Une of soundings should be as complete as possible then the ship was either manoeuvred with
regard to sea and wind or hove-to for a few minutes until the sounding had been completed. For (b)
soundings were taken as often as the scale of the survey required, and in later years a continuous
record from the recording machines was our aim. At times this entailed twelve to fourteen hours
continuous running of the automatic recorders, which were fitted in recent years; but with the
exception of minor breakdowns these machines generally stood up well to the work. Special soundings
(c) were usually taken whenever any known ridge or bank was being crossed or when the hourly
sounding showed any marked change in depth. In the earlier years when only 'listening' sets were
fitted the spacing of the soundings was decided according to the condition of sea and weather, or to
the slope of the bottom. In recent years it was the practice to try for a continuous record over the
area concerned.

In this report prominence has been given mainly to oceanic and special soundings, since the detailed
soundings taken on hydrographical surveys have only a limited value so far as hydrological conditions
in the oceans are concerned. Nor are they of much value in the determination of major geological
features. The soundings taken during the survey of the South Orkney Islands have already been shown
on the chart published with a report on those islands by Marr (1935), but the intensive soundings
taken in the South Shetland Islands between 1934 and 1937 have not, as yet, been examined by us in
detail.

The positions of the soundings taken by the 'Discovery II' and discussed in this report were
determined as follows: From 1932 to 1935, by Lt. A. L. Nelson, R.N.R. ; from October 1935 until
June 1937 by Lt. R. Walker, R.N.R. ; and for the period of September 1937 to May 1939 by Lts.
L. C. Hill, O.B.E., R.N.R. and A. F. Macfie, R.N.R. The careful work and willing co-operation of these
officers has done much to assist me in the preparation of this report. From 1932 until early in 1936
all the soundings were plotted by these officers on large-scale charts, but from 1936, in order to meet
the wishes of the Hydrographer of the Navy, lists of soundings and their positions were prepared at
regular intervals, and plotting was thus discontinued except during survey work.

This report has been considered in manuscript by Mr J. M. Wordie, C.B.E., M.A. and the Hydro-
grapher of the Navy (Rear-Admiral A. G. N. Wyatt, C.B., R.N.); to them I am grateful for advice
and valuable suggestions. It has also been read by the Superintending Scientist of H.M. Underwater
Detection Establishment (Mr J. Anderson, O.B.E.) and several members of his staff. To one of
them, Mr J. H. Hayes, a pioneer of the earlier experimental work in deep-sea echo sounding, I am
much indebted for very helpful criticisms and advice on certain technical points.

In the preparation of the figures and contour charts I have received considerable assistance from
the Hydrographic Department of the Admiralty, especially from the Superintendent of Charts,
Captain E. H. B. Baker, D.S.O., R.N. Through his courtesy I have been able at any time to consult
our original survey charts and plans, now in the possession of the Hydrographic Department.

Finally, I should like to express my gratitude to Dr N. A. Mackintosh for the help he has so freely
given me at all stages in the preparation of this report. His practical experience of the sounding
routine in the ' Discovery II ' has materially assisted me in the presentation of what I hope is a balanced
account of our sounding work.

SOUNDING EQUIPMENT

When the previous report was written the ' Discovery II ' was fitted with Lucas and Kelvin machines
for wire soundings, and with deep and shallow echo-sounding sets of the ' listening ' pattern. A full
description of these instruments and their positions in the ship has been given already in the earlier

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 43

sounding report, and particulars appear also in the report on the R.R.S. 'Discovery II' by Ardley
and Mackintosh (1936, pp. 102-4). Though little used in recent years, the Lucas and Kelvin sounding
machines remained as part of our standard sounding equipment ; some amplification, however, of the
description of the echo-sounding sets given in the latter report is required, and details will be found
here in Appendix I (p. 95).

DEEP-WATER ECHO-SOUNDING SET
During the six years in which the 'Acadia' type recorder was used with the deep-water echo-
sounding set, little electrical or mechanical trouble was experienced with the recorder mechanism, and
records covering some 900 hours of running were made and stored. Very approximately this represents
a continuous survey of about 6000 miles of the ocean floor, from which a virtually permanent record is
available, but the recorder was used also on numerous occasions for short periods up to 20 minutes from
which the record itself was not kept, but from which soundings had been noted. The positions ot the
great majority of these oceanic records are shown in Text-figs, i and 2. A large proportion of the stored
records were taken during the running surveys of the South Shetland and South Orkney Islands and
the tracks of the ship at these times are shown in detail in Text-figs. 3 and 4 together with the tracks
of records taken at Tristan da Cunha, South Georgia, the Balleny group and other islands. A consider-
able number of continuous records were also obtained in open water and across such features as the
Burdwood Bank, the Kerguelen-Gaussberg Ridge and a newly discovered bank in 42° S, on the meridian
of Greenwich. The depths recorded varied from 25 fm. (46 m.), the average minimum depth at which
soundings could be read,i to just over 3000 fm. (5486 m.), which was the greatest depth at which we
obtained a clear record. A complete list of all records, with their positions, is given in Appendix II (p. 98)
to this report. In Appendix I (p. 95), which deals mainly with certain technical difficulties met with in
the operation of the echo-sounding sets, reference will also be found to the effect of extraneous noises
on the echo marking on these records. Water noises and the passage of the ship through pack-ice can
completely obscure the echo marking, but on the whole our records are very free from interference
from these sources.

SHALLOW-WATER ECHO-SOUNDING SET

The sonic pattern 'listening' set, described in our previous reports, was in use until 1935, and was
then replaced by an Admiralty System Magnetostriction set with a Mark XII D recorder. This is
a supersonic set (emitting soundwaves beyond the audible range) and it was manufactured and fitted
by Messrs Henry Hughes & Son Ltd. The principle of the British Admiralty system of supersonic
echo sounding with magnetostriction transmission is well known and has already been described in
considerable detail in the Hydrographic Review (1934, 1936 and 1937). It is sufficient, therefore, to
say that the range of this new set was 0-130 fm. (0-238 m.) on the slow or normal speed, with one
phase addition of 100 fm., making the total range 0-230 fm. (0-421 m.). On the fast speed soundings
were obtained in feet, with a corresponding range of 0-230 ft. (0-70 m.).

Few difficulties arose in the operation of this set, but there are certain technical points on which
fuller information appears desirable. This information, together with the details of the arrangement
of the transmitter and receiver in the hull of the ' Discovery II ', will be found in Appendix I (p. 95).

1 At depths less than 25 fm. (46 m.) the echo marking on the 'Acadia' record tended to merge with the transmission
band. Reduction of the sensitivity of the receiving circuit allowed the echo marking to be clearly distinguishable at lesser
depths but, to allow for greater accuracy in the shallower soundings, it was our normal practice to use the shallow machines
for soundings less than 50 fm. {91 m.).

DISCOVERY REPORTS

Fig. i(«).

150

170 E

/

<^/v/38

\ ^///36

y/38
^ \ BalLeny h.

110

130

Fig. 1(6).

Fig. I. Oceanic soundings. Positions between which continuous soundings were obtained with the 'Acadia' recorder.
(a) Near the Falkland Islands, across the Burdwood Bank and off the western entrance to the Magellan Strait. (V) In the
Ross Sea, approaching and leaving the vicinity of Adelie Land, and north-west of the Balleny Islands.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939

45

S-AFHICA

Fig. 2(a).

Fig. 2{b).

60" 70°

50°

\ te

p Hetguelen

50°

--\^

\

• <!» Heard 1.

f

\

XLJSTyJ^'M

XXXV///37

xxxixisy ^JT
XL/asV >fuil37

\ XXXVIII 1 37

J

■f5rf

^____-— — T XXXIX/37

~/~

60

\

/

6o° io" m°

Fig. 2(c).

Fig. 2. Oceanic soundings. Positions between which continuous soundings were obtained with the 'Acadia' recorder.
(a) In the area covered by the repeated cruises south and west of South Africa. (6) Off New Zealand and in surrounding
waters, (c) Across the Kerguelen-Gaussberg ridge.

Fig- 3 (c)-

Fig- 3id).

Fig. 3^ Soundings during hydrographical surveys: continuous records, (a) Tristan da Cunha group: approaching Falmouth
Bay Tristan da Cunha, and from thence to Nightingale and Inaccessible Islands, (b) Balleny Islands: running surveys of
1936 and 1938, together with contours, (c) South Orkney Islands: completion, in 1937, of the earlier running survey of 1933
(rf) Marion and Prince Edward Islands: 10 hr. continuous recording during an examination of these islands in 1935

Fig. 4(c).
Fig. 4. Soundings during hydrographical surveys: continuous records, (a) Deception and ^iving^ton Island^: re-^^^^
made during the running survey of the South Shetlands in :934-S. (*) Livingston, Greenw.ch and ^f ^"^^ ^^•^"'^^^^^^^^^^^
made during the running survey of the South Shetlands in 1934-5- (c) Nelson and Kmg George Islands, recordings made
during the running survey of the South Shetlands in 1934-5 and 1936-7.

48 DISCOVERY REPORTS

CORRECTION OF ECHO SOUNDINGS

As was stated in our earlier report, echo sounding saves a tremendous amount of time, and at
moderate or great depths it is more accurate than sounding by wire. The tables compiled for the
Hydrographic Department by Matthews for correcting the speed of sound in sea water have been
much amplified since our previous report, as a result of the acquisition of considerably more hydro-
logical data, and the new edition of 1939 contains a more accurate delineation of the increased number
of areas for which correction tables are now available. As this new information was not available for
use on board the ' Discovery II ' before the end of her last commission it has been of interest to note
that the original tables in use on board, most of which had been compiled from our own hydrological
observations, by the methods shown in the first edition (1927) of Matthews's tables, vary only slightly
from the more recent publication. The difference after correction by the new tables is in most instances
so small (usually not more than i or 2 fm. in 2500 fm.) that it has not been considered worth while
to re-calculate the many thousands of soundings involved, especially as an error of i , 2 or even more
fathoms may easily occur, either in reading off the soundings direct from the recorders or from the method
used for timing the echo of the old 'listening' receiver. In the latter instance it was not possible at
the greater depths to read to a greater degree of accuracy than ± 0-005 sec. — equivalent approximately
to an error of ±2 fm. This accuracy, however, was difficult to attain and it is probable that the
minimum error was more nearly ±4 fm. Since the accuracy of the soundings also depended greatly
on the speed of the machines or recorders, periodic checks were made with an accurate stopwatch,
and a rating error noted if the speed was greater or less than the normal. An error, however, which
was difficult or almost impossible to detect arose in reading off the depths from the recorders. This
reading off can be done in two ways : (a) The depths can be read directly off the wet paper as it passes
the scale on the recorder, or (b) the paper can be dried and the soundings read off at any time after-
wards with a special scale for the dry paper. Each method has its advantages but it was our practice
to use method (a) and enter the soundings in a special log-book. This enabled a complete check to be
kept on the exact time of the sounding, since the minute markings on the records could be compared
with a chronometer watch, and had the added advantage that an operator was always present when
survey work was in progress, to report any sudden irregularity or approaching danger. Method (b)
on the other hand did not require such a constant watch to be kept on the recorders, but had the
serious disadvantage in the 'Acadia' recorder that whether the paper was dried artificially by the
heater incorporated in the lower part of the tank face, or was allowed to dry naturally away from
a strong light, the shrinkage of the paper on drying was not always even. This was especially so when
the paper was dried artificially, and as a final check on the soundings was always required when they
were used for survey work, the heater was disconnected and the paper allowed to dry naturally before
storing. Even then there was the disadvantage that the final width of the dried paper might not
always be exactly the same, on account of the varying humidity and temperature of the air.

When soundings are being obtained on moderate or steep slopes it is, theoretically, possible to
correct for the errors thus set up. In practice, however, the problem is one of great complexity, and
will be discussed at length later in this report. It is sufficient here to say that in general it has not
been considered practicable to correct our soundings for slope error.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939

--

-_^

xx/37

^-

\

61°

'^f O'SBItN 1.

^'™.,n

^ )

50

^ \

Vi

^

Xlx/57______

Fig- 5(")-

Fig. sib).

Fig. 5. Soundings during hydrographical and other surveys: Continuous records. («) Aspland and Gibbs Islands: recordings
made during a running survey in 1937. (6) South Georgia and vicinity: various recordings made between 1933 and 1938.

50 DISCOVERY REPORTS

DIFFICULTIES OF OBTAINING SOUNDINGS IN BAD WEATHER
AND IN CERTAIN PARTS OF THE OCEANS

As a general rule the strength of the echo is inversely proportional to the depth of the water, but
the echo is very much affected also by the physical condition of the water and the nature of the bottom,
and it is specially important that the various causes of weak or inaudible echoes should be distinguished
so far as they are known. Weak echoes can be caused by defects in the sounding set, and in the earlier
years of our work it was assumed that weak echoes were generally attributable to such mechanical
defects. During the later voyages of the 'Discovery II', however, it was found that difficulties in
obtaining soundings could usually be traced to one or more of the following external causes: water
noises, aeration, layering of the water, a soft or badly reflecting bottom, or an irregular bottom.

In bad weather the echo is liable to be obscured by a background of water noise associated with the
ship's progress, and this may necessitate slowing down or heaving-to while sounding. In deep water,
however, the echo strength was usually impaired during a gale, and this weakening often persisted
for more than 24 hours after a severe gale had ceased and the water-noise background had subsided.
This efli^ect is probably due to the persistence of aeration in the surface water with consequent
blanketing of transmission and echo. Such conditions rendered it difficult to obtain soundings in
deep water even with the ship stopped.

Conclusive evidence that aeration can impede, or indeed completely cut off", the passage of super-
sonic sound in water was obtained on occasions when the ship's engine was put astern after letting-go
an anchor. This sets up considerable local aeration, especially in shallow water, and when the ship
moved over this patch of aerated water the echo trace on the M/S XII D recorder completely
disappeared, returning only when the turbulence and aeration had subsided. With the deep-sea sonic
set the strength of the signal appears to have been sufficient to overcome this local shallow area of
aeration in depths of less than 50 fm. (91 m.).

Difficulty in obtaining an echo was also noticed on many occasions in certain latitudes even when
weather conditions were such that perfect or almost perfect reception was to be expected. This applies
especially to the neighbourhood of the Antarctic Convergence. The Convergence (see Deacon, 1937,
and Mackintosh, 1946) is continuous round the Southern Ocean, and may be described simply as
the line at which the Antarctic surface water sinks below the less dense sub-Antarctic water. In lines
of soundings running for instance southwards it was usually found that the echo failed just north of
the Convergence, especially where the latter was well defined, and was commonly very weak for
a hundred or more miles to the south of it, even when it was ill defined. Deacon draws attention to
the area of mixed water which lies just north of the Convergence and it is in this area that echoes
become weak or have, on a few occasions, disappeared entirely. Further reference to Deacon (figs. 12,
13) shows that north of the Antarctic Convergence the discontinuity layers are well marked and have a
pronounced horizontal or oblique trend. It is thus extremely probable that not only is the greater pro-
portion of the outgoing soundwaves deffected by these layers of diff'ering densities, but that the echoes
from any soundwaves which may have penetrated in a direct line to the bottom are themselves
deflected on their upward journey. Text-fig. 6, which is a section showing the vertical distribution of
density in terms of (T,, is a good example of these conditions which prevailed on the Greenwich
meridian in February 1939, in positions where we noted a distinctly weaker echo. This diagram has
been prepared for me by Mr A. J. Clowes and will eventually form part of a further report on the
hydrology of the Southern Ocean.

It would appear that the weak echoes obtained to the south of the Convergence are attributable to
the composition of the bottom deposit. A bottom of rock or hard clay will return a strong, clear echo,

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 Si

but soft ooze will often fail to return more than a faint whisper, which only an operator with much
experience can distinguish from other noises. The strength of the signal returning from a hard or rock
bottom has often been sufficient to cause re-echoes, and many have been recorded from quite
considerable depths. In one instance, on 8 March 1938, at St. 2277 (65° 19-6' S, 81' 42' W)
a clear re-echo was heard at twice the observed depth of 2428 fm. (4440 m.). If the soundwave is of
sufficient strength to echo again between the hull of the ship and the bottom at this depth, and then
provide a clearly audible signal on its second return, it would appear that there should be ample
reserve of power to provide an echo even from a moderately soft bottom. Immediately south of the
Convergence, however, the deposit is almost pure diatom ooze and it apparently lies on the bottom as
a very soft covering, the upper part of which is flocculent and comparable to a very thick soup.
At St. 2519, in 51° 57-8' S, 19° 32' E, the bottom reversing water bottle of the deep hoist apparently
hit bottom and brought up an excellent sample of this liquid ooze from 2865 m. (1567 tm.).

Fig. 6. 0° Line, February-March 1939. Vertical distribution of density in terms of tr,.
Antarctic Convergence in, approximately, latitude 49° 33' S.

Generally, it may now be said that a belt of diatom ooze surrounds the globe in the southern hemisphere
and that its northern limit approximates closely to the northern limit of the Antarctic Convergence
(see Hart, 1934, pp. 185-6 and Deacon, 1945, pp. 11-20). We thus find in the neighbourhood of the
Antarctic'convergence that there may be two important factors which will cause weak echoes, i.e. the
horizontal trend of the discontinuity layers north of the line of the Convergence, and the bottom
deposit of diatom ooze to the south. For a short distance north of the Convergence, when that line
is displaced to its southern limit, it is therefore possible to have both factors, and under these
circumstances sonic soundings have been proved to be almost impossible to obtain. It seems probable,
however, that supersonic methods might be more satisfactory, as it is possible to obtain a better
concentration of the beam of soundwaves. The belt of diatom ooze eventually fades out to the south
into a belt of glacial mud from which it is possible again to hear a clear echo.

An area with faint or no echoes was also found by the second Byrd Antarctic Expedition, when their
ship the 'Bear of Oakland' was on passage between New Zealand and the Ross Sea; though the
latitude in which they were puzzled by the faintness of the echoes was south of any position in which
we found the echo regularly to disappear or become very faint. Roos (1937, p. 582), in commentmg
on this occurrence, suggests that it might be due to a very soft bottom or to heavy rolhng which, by

52 DISCOVERY REPORTS

producing an excessive angle between the ocean floor and the face of the hydrophone tank, made the
incoming echo less audible. The former explanation seems the more probable, for heavy rolling may
take place anyw^here in the Southern Ocean, and it was certainly not the cause of the faint echoes found
by the 'Discovery II' near the Convergence, for, as mentioned above, the rolling could always be
remedied by manoeuvring the ship to suit the weather.

Another local area in which only weak echoes were received was found by the 'Discovery II' on
the Greenwich meridian, south of the region of diatom ooze. It lay roughly between 54° S and 60° S
and from the number of soundings which we eventually obtained during a series of repeated cruises
in that area it seems likely that an extremely irregular bottom was the cause of our weak echoes.
Rapid changes in depth were experienced and on one occasion the depth shoaled by nearly 2000 m.
(1094 fm.) in 30 min., with the ship proceeding at normal speed. Changes of depth nearly of this
magnitude were by no means uncommon, and attempts to take a record of some of the slopes with the
' Acadia ' recorder were not very successful. On some occasions, indeed, the depth altered so rapidly
that it was impossible to get an accurate reading even on the old ' listening ' receiver. This problem of
echoes from steep slopes will be considered in more detail in the next section of this report ; but it
may be stated here that owing to the extreme irregularity of the bottom now known to exist in many
areas of the Southern Ocean, it seems probable that the weakness of echo strength reported often from
south of the Antarctic Convergence-ooze area is more than likely to be due to this cause.

SLOPE CORRECTION AND THE CONDITION OF THE OCEAN FLOOR

In general it appears to have been accepted that the soundwaves transmitted by sonic echo-sounding
apparatus are reflected from the bottom at the point nearest the ship. If this is established, then with
a level bottom, the depth recorded is the true depth at that point, but if the sea bed is sloping or
comprises irregular features then the echo depth obtained is not the true depth and will require
a correction for the angle of the slope. This correction is, of course, in addition to the normal
corrections for draught and the speed of sound in sea water in difl^erent areas. In discussing the
question of slope correction for sonic soundings, therefore, it is assumed that the expression ' echo
distance' is the recorded depth which has been corrected for the speed of sound, etc., and that, unless
otherwise mentioned, the soundwaves are reflected from the nearest point of the bottom.

The various methods of correction for slope have already been described at length in the Hydro-
graphic Reviezv, and Shalowitz (1930), Vanssay de Blavous
(1930, 1933) and Hayes (1933) are some of the most recent
contributors to this subject. Briefly it may be stated here that
either the echo distance must be corrected for the slope of the
bottom, or the position of the sounding must be moved up the
slope until the actual depth at the new position equals the echo
distance actually recorded. In a third method corrections
embodying both the above systems can be applied. Text-fig. 7
is a simple diagram to illustrate the first two methods, and it
will easily be seen that HA is the position at which the sounding
is taken then either the echo distance AB must be corrected for
slope by a plus correction to give the actual depth AC; or the
position of the sounding must be moved from ^ to ^' so that
the echo distance AB equals the actual depth A'C. In this figure it is assumed that the slope of the
bottom is regular ; if it is not then the angle of slope must be determined for the point of observation
and the correct echo distance or displacement calculated accordingly.

Fig. 7. Diagram to illustrate the theory of
slope correction.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 53

In general the angle of a slope can be determined approximately by plotting the series of echo
distances obtained, at right angles to the contour lines, and measuring the angle of slope with
a protractor.

In practice the echo distance can usually be assumed to be the actual sounding since, from the
navigational point of view, the primary object is to establish the ship's position when making a landfall.
Normally this implies fixing the ship's position with regard to the continental shelf, or charting her
approach to shallow water from deep and vice versa, and there are few slopes where the correction
for slope is sufficiently large to be shown on charts constructed on the scales usual for navigational
purposes. In shallow water the correction becomes negligible. It should also be remembered that if
soundwaves are reflected from the nearest point of the bottom, a ship approaching shoal water will
obtain soundings from a position fairly well ahead if the slope is steep or moderately so. This is of
distinct advantage to the navigator.

In the ' Discovery II ' soundings were normally taken at intervals of one hour (or approximately
9 miles) and in these circumstances an accurate correction for slope is not possible. In the open ocean,
however, the bottom is comparatively level and, even with soundings closely spaced, correction for
slope is negligible unless the rise is greater than i in 10. When a ridge or bank was being crossed,
however, we endeavoured to get as many soundings as possible, and, if the weather was favourable,
to obtain a continuous record with the ' Acadia ' recorder. Correction for slope then became possible,
but it must be remembered that considerable errors may occur in fixing a ship's position in mid-ocean;
in the most favourable circumstances it is doubtful whether accuracy can be greater than ± i mile,
and it is probable that the error is of the order ± i to i mile. This fact, together with the necessity for
plotting oceanic soundings on charts of a relatively small scale, makes it doubtful whether a correction
for slope, either by displacement of position or by an addition to the echo distance, is practicable. It
should be realized that a four-figure sounding, plotted on an oceanic chart of the usual scale and on
Mercator's Projection, may cover an area of as much as 40-50 sq. miles in the latitude of 60° S and
that this area increases to 100 120 sq. miles at the Equator. Thus it may not be possible to plot more
than a very small fraction of the soundings from a bank or ridge, and from the navigational point of
view correction for slope in oceanic waters is therefore of no value. To the geologist and geophysicist,
however, the correct outlines of a ridge may be of definite use, but it remains doubtful whether
correction for slope would greatly affect hydrological calculations on upwelling and the movements
of the water masses.

The form of the beam of sound projected by the transmitter of a sonic echo-sounding set is of
considerable importance in the interpretation of the soundings. It must be assumed that it is in the
form of a cone in which the energy is at a maximum along the axis and fades out at the periphery.
The amount of 'spread' or dispersal should vary inversely with the frequency of the soundwaves.

It is clear that an allowance must be made for a certain amount of spread. Hayes (1933, p. 154)
states that with a relatively high-frequency sonic transmitter (presumably at 2000 cyc./sec.) the
diameter of the beam at 2000 fm. (3758 m.) will be i mile. This is equivalent to an angle of spread of
14° and, presumably, is the limit of transmission of soundwaves of significant strength. Furthermore,
the multiple echoes picked up on the recorder (see p. 56) must be attributed to echoes received from
diflFerent directions. On the other hand, echoes were obtained from depths of more than 4000 fm.
(7515 m.), and re-echoes from lesser depths; and this could hardly be expected were it not that the
maximum sound energy is transmitted along the axis of the cone.

Some indication of the limit of dispersal of relatively high-frequency sonic transmissions is perhaps
afforded by a sounding record obtained on one occasion when the anchor was being hove-up from
40 fm. (73 m.). The record showed a strong echo from the bottom and, as is natural with a small

-. DISCOVERY REPORTS

S4

object, a faint echo from the anchor. This echo, however, disappeared when the angle of the trans-
mitter to the anchor was 48°, and a hmit of spread of the soundwaves of significant strength might thus
be indicated.

Difficulties in obtaining echoes from steep slopes may be due to the limited spread of the beam or
to scattering, dispersal or absorption of the echo owing to the irregular form of the bottom which
often prevails at moderate depths.

Before the advent of echo sounding deep-sea soundings were normally spaced some considerable
distance apart and profiles drawn from these observations differ considerably from those constructed
from lines of echo soundings at fairly close intervals. A good example of this is given by Sverdrup,
Johnson & Fleming (1942, p. 18) where a profile including South Georgia and the South Sandwich
Trench is shown, first as based on 13 existing wire soundings and then as constructed from 1300
echo soundings made by the German research ship 'Meteor' in 1926.1 Our results are comparable
to these, and in 1938-9, when a series of cruises was made between the latitude of 40° S and the
ice-edge, on the Greenwich meridian, the profiles drawn for each cruise varied considerably, although
the tracks were often within a few miles of each other. Two of these profiles are shown in Text-fig. 8
and for the latitudes between which they are comparable (i.e. 45-55° S) the tracks were within 3 miles
of each other. From these it will be seen that although the main characteristics are similar, there is
a considerable divergence in detail. These profiles, however, are again relatively simple when compared
with the continuous records representing soundings every 2I sec, and although the latter do not
cover a large area, they show a degree of irregularity in the sea bottom, especially to seaward of the
continental shelf around Antarctica, which makes correction for slope quite impracticable. A section
of such a record, which is typical of the sea bed in the neighbourhood of the Scotia Arc, is shown in
PI. XXVII, fig. I. It was taken in waters of approximately 125-340 fm. (229-622 m.) in the Palmer
Archipelago, off Graham Land, but in the interpretation of this it must be remembered that the
vertical scale is much exaggerated, and that, since the paper feeds through the recorder at a fixed
rate, the degree of exaggeration is dependent on the speed of the ship. To obtain the exact amount
of exaggeration the speed of the ship (in knots) should be multiplied by i -08. In this instance the speed
was 9 knots and hence the vertical scale is magnified 972 times. Records taken on the Kerguelen-
Gaussberg ridge and other such localities in the Southern Ocean show similar though less well-marked
irregular features.

Apart from these irregularities in the bottom there are, of course, the difficulties previously mentioned
in fixing the ship's position, and thus it has not been considered generally possible to correct our
soundings for slope. In certain isolated instances, however, this correction was possible, as for
instance when the ship's position could be accurately fixed from bearings on land which she was
approaching almost directly up a slope. Such an instance was our approach to Tristan da Cunha in
1933 (PL XXVI, fig. 2), and in Text-fig. 9 is shown the profile of the slope drawn to true scale,
together with the profile after correction for slope error. It is thought that on this occasion the ship's
course towards the land was nearly enough at 90° to the bottom contours to justify slope correction,
though this cannot usually be assumed without an adequate survey of the bottom.^ As can be seen
from the figure the correction is of little value for navigational purposes.

So far it has been assumed that echoes are only being received from one point on the bottom, but

1 We are not fully in agreement with this method of presenting a section of the ocean bed with such an exaggerated
vertical scale, since it tends to give a false impression of the relief of the ocean floor.

2 In 1937 the International Hydrographic Bureau at Monaco circulated a questionnaire which, among other queries,
asked the Hydrographic Departments of their member states whether their echo soundings were corrected for slope before
insertion on the charts. From the replies received it appeared that very few countries applied slope correction and that many
considered the practical error far to outweigh the advantages of such a correction.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939

1J — H

^ 3

Si t

3 '-3

^ P

C 3

S 6

2 s

SUOHiVJ 8 g

<u ^

5 5

h 2

rt

a

s

0

0

«

r

n

0

0

■J^

Lh

u

u

^

a< .>

-^

56 DISCOVERY REPORTS

in view of the diverse character of the sea bed, as revealed by the automatic recorder, and the assumed
spread of the soundwaves from the transmitter, it appears obvious that echoes may be received
simukaneously from more tlian one point. A large number of records from the 'Discovery IT show
such multiple traces (see Pis. XXVII-XXIX), and it will be obvious that this 'third dimension'
introduces further complications in the interpretation of the records. It would appear impossible,
except in certain isolated instances, to determine the relative positions of the points from which the
echoes are being received, since with the conical spread of the transmissions these multiple echoes may
be from points on the bottom ahead, astern, or on either beam of the ship. The few exceptions are the
records which only show two traces and which probably result from crossing a simple but well-defined
narrow valley or depression. As shown in PI. XXX, fig. 4, these traces appear on the record in the
form of ' crossovers '.

If it is assumed that the echo returns from the nearest point on the bottom, then a ship crossing
a depression of the form shown in Text-fig. 10 a will receive echoes at A from A^ , at C from Cj , and at B
from both B^ and Bo . It is probable (and is assumed here) that only one echo would be distinguishable

Fig. 10. Diagrammatic representations of sounding across a narrow valley, (a) Transmission and echo assumed to be narrow
parallel beams, (b) Transmission spreading, and two echoes being recorded as in actual practice.

as such with the ' listening ' gear, and it follows that echoes from the deepest part of the depression
would be missed, and the profile of the bottom could only be assumed to take the form represented by
the dotted line. The recorder however is more selective and sensitive than the human ear and it can
distinguish echoes from points at diff'erent distances. It seems very probable that the ' simple cross-
over ' of the kind shown in PL XXX, fig. 4, is in fact the result of crossing a depression of the type
shown in Text-figs. 10a and b. That is to say the 'crossover' is not a precise representation of the
actual profile of the bottom but almost certainly represents echoes received simultaneously from both
sides of a depression. In Text-fig. 10b positions A, B, C, D and E are presumed to be equally spaced
points on the ship's track. It must be remembered that in practice continuous soundings are being
taken between these points, but the points shown are sufficient to illustrate our theory. At position A
echoes are being recorded from A^ and Ao , the latter being weak. At C the echo strength from C^
and C, is nearly equal and at E the signal being received from E^ is now the secondary trace and
will probably be of just sufficient strength to give a recording under good conditions. From this
it will be seen that a rounded, or U-shaped, depression may be recorded as a V-shaped 'crossover'
as represented by the pecked lines in Text-fig. 10/;, and that analysis of such a 'crossover' may give
a more accurate representation of the shape of a depression on the bottom than can be obtained by
the ' listening ' gear.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 57

It should perhaps be pointed out that these ' crossovers ', or simuhaneous echoes from a valley, can
only be recorded when the two echo distances are within the range covered by the width of the record
paper which, in our recorder, was equivalent to a depth of 250 fni. (457 m.). If the difference is outside
these limits, ' phasing ' to bring the second echo on the record will only result in the loss of the one
originally being recorded. Normally the differences in echo distances at a ' crossover ' are small and
it is seldom that they exceed 150 fm. (274 m.). The average, for uncomplicated records, appears to be
from 50 to 100 fm. (91-183 m.) but many of them fade out within smaller limits. It seems probable,
therefore, that the simple ' crossover ' effect is obtained only when crossing a fairly shallow depression
or valley, which at the same time is comparatively narrow. It would seem also that the absence of
a secondary echo from a wider valley at moderate depths is further evidence of a possible limit to the
spread of soundwaves from a sonic transmitter.

In oceanic sounding with the recorder, multiple traces do not appear on the record from depths
much greater than 2000 fm. (3658 m.) and are seldom recorded from shallow water of less than 100 fm.
(183 m.), or from the continental shelf. On the other hand, records from various depths between
2000 and 3000 fm. (3658-5486 m.) mostly show the bottom as a flat plain; it is in the depths between
1000 and 2000 fm. (1829-3658 m.) that the greatest variety of bottom in the Southern Ocean is met.
These really interesting regions are mostly in mid-ocean and on known but ill-defined ridges, but
owing to the great irregularity of the bottom echoes are faint and difficult to record except in very fine
weather — a condition which is not normally satisfied in these parts — and thus we have not been able
to obtain more than a few good records. It is on these records, however, that the greatest number of
multiple traces is to be found (see PI. XXIX, fig. i), and it is probable that the failure to obtain good
results is for the most part due to the very steep slopes and to a diversity of features which causes
scattering of transmissions and echoes. Limitation in the angle of spread of the transmissions may be
a contributory cause when a slope is very steep and comparatively simple.

Soundings are not always difficult at intermediate depths, and some good records were obtained by
the 'Discovery II' on the Antarctic continental slope, especially on the Greenwich meridian in
March 1939 (PI. XXVI, fig. 3). Here the slope is peculiarly free from complexities, and it is further
discussed in a later section (pp. 86 to 88).

In the waters adjacent to the Scotia Arc an exception is found to the general rule that multiple
traces are not usually recorded from depths of less than 100 fm. (183 m.). Areas such as the continental
shelf around South America and the Falkland Islands, the Burdwood Bank, the approaches to South
Africa, Australia and New Zealand, and other shallow areas show, on the whole, a remarkably level
bottom sloping up gently towards the land. In the shallow water off the Scotia Arc conditions are
quite diflFerent, and the bottom is extremely varied, though perhaps not quite so irregular as in the
slopes at intermediate depths. ' Crossovers ' on sonic records are common but are of small extent, and
there are very many steep slopes. Instances, however, of more than two traces from these shallower
depths are rare.^ An example of this very varied bottom from the Palmer Archipelago has already been
mentioned (see p. 54 and PI. XXVII, fig. i), and more will be given when the running surveys of the
South Shetland Islands are dealt with (pp. 79 to 81).

1 A possible explanation of the absence of multiple traces on records from waters of less than 200 fm. (366 m.) in depth
here may be that the spread of the transmission at this depth is not sufficient for echoes to be recorded from other than the
nearest point of the bottom. It is probable that the bottom is no less varied than that of the intermediate depths between
200 and 2000 fm. (366 and 3658 m.) but at these greater ranges the spread in the transmission will allow features which are
not directly below the ship to be recorded.

58

DISCOVERY REPORTS

COMPOSITION OF THE BOTTOM

It is an established fact that the composition of the sea bed has an appreciable effect on the strength
of the echo. We have already mentioned the difficulty of obtaining soundings in deep water in certain
regions where the bottom is very soft, but with a hard bottom re-echoes can often be obtained down to
moderately great depths. An instance of this has also been quoted (p. 51) and there were many other
occasions when re-echoes were obtained from lesser depths. In deep water the automatic recorder
cannot record both echo and re-echo unless, by chance, the re-echo falls in the same phase as the
first echo, i.e. an echo from, say, 1050 fm. (1920 m.) and a re-echo at 2100 fm. (3840 m.) will fall in the
phases 1000- 1200 fm. (0-200 fm. on the phasing dial) and so be recorded simultaneously on the paper.
An example of this from soundings of 890 to 1000 fm. (1628 to 1829 m.) is shown in PI. XXX, fig. 2.
On the other hand an echo from, say, 1275 fm. would be picked up in the 200-400 fm. phase, and its
re-echo at 2550 fm. in the 400-600 fm. phase. In shallow water of 50 fm. (91 m.) or less, with a bottom
of rock or hard sand, as many as four re-echoes have been recorded with sonic transmissions. Similar
records have been obtained in shallow water with the M/S XII D recorder, though with the supersonic
transmissions the number of re-echoes does not appear to be so great. The reason for this is almost
certainly that the faces of both the deep-sea transmitter and hydrophone were exposed to the sea,
whereas the supersonic transmitting and receiving tanks were secured inside the hull plating, which
at this point was i in. in thickness.

For some years it has been known that supersonic transmissions in very shallow water could detect

an overlay of mud, silt or sand on rock. Records from many parts of the world have been obtained

with Messrs Henry Hughes and Son's machines, with the British Admiralty system of transmission,

but references to these in the meagre literature on echo sounding in this country appear to be scarce.

Among the few illustrations traced are portions of two very good records taken respectively in Canada

(Lake St Peter, Quebec) and Denmark (Aarhus). Portions of these records were published in Messrs

Hughes' private journal. The Hiisun Review (1936), but the reproduction is not sufficiently clear to

show the depths at which they were taken. It appears fairly obvious, however, that they were in very

shallow water. Another series, but with the depth scale clearly marked, shows overlays at 5-18 m.

(3 to 10 fm.), and forms the illustrations to a report on the survey of Lake Windermere in 1937 by

Mortimer & Worthington (1940). Chapman (1944) has shown echo-sounding records taken in water

of depths up to 10 fm. (18 m.). These were taken during a survey of the British Coasts, primarily to

determine the extent of the beds of the seaweeds of the genus Laminar io, but it might be expected

that some indication would be seen of the presence of more than one layer of bottom deposit.

Unfortunately from the echo-sounding point of view no depth scale is given, and this, together with

the difficulty of reproducing such records clearly, makes it doubtful whether these illustrations are of

much value for the determination of the composition of the bottom. Re-echoes are common but in

one instance only does there appear any possibility that the soundwaves have penetrated beyond the

surface of the bottom, and even this example (Chapman, pi. i, fig. i) is open to several interpretations.

As to work in other countries Th. Stocks (1935) has given an account of experiments in the Baltic, at

depths of 11-22 m. (6-12 fm.). The echo-sounding set used here, the Debeg 'Radiolot', differed from

the British Admiralty supersonic system in that the oscillation of a system of quartz plates was used as

the source of the transmissions, and the returning echoes were observed directly as spots of light on

a scale. It is claimed for this sounding set that the angular spread of the beam did not exceed 10°.

From the illustration in Stocks' paper (fig. 3) it would appear that multiple spots of light were

received, from a single transmission, over a portion of the scale covering a total depth of approximately

4 m. (13 ft.) and commencing at a reading of 15-5 m. (51 ft.). As the normal echo from one transmission.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 59

at a depth of 182 m. (100 fm.), gave a single spot of light on the scale equivalent to a depth of 1-5 m.
(5 ft.) these multiple spots have been interpreted as echoes from successive layers of the bottom deposit.
This may be correct, for the greatly increased frequency of the short-wave quartz transmitter
(slightly more than twice that of the Admiralty system) may allow of greater penetration, but without
the evidence provided by a permanent record there must remain an element of doubt in this assump-
tion.^ With the British Admiralty system of permanent recording there does not appear to be an
instance published of the soundwaves penetrating more than what is apparently a single overlay on
a harder bottom. Stocks (1935) and Rust (1935) have pointed out that the correct width of each layer
in the deposit could not be accurately assessed, since the velocity of sound in the respective media
was certain to show a difference from that determined for sea water. Theoretically this is true, but it
is doubtful whether the accuracy in reading off depths from a visual light scale would be in itself
sufficient to warrant an exact measurement being given for the extent of each layer. In practice it is
doubtful whether a change in velocity would have much effect even on the measurements obtained
by permanent recording at the very shallow depths mentioned, and it is probably true to say that the
measurements of the extent of an overlay, obtained from a permanent record, would not be far from
the actual figures. Confirmation of this could only be obtained from cores of the bottom deposit taken
at the time when the soundings are recorded.

Rust (1935) mentions that layering in the bottom sedimentation has been detected with sonic
transmissions but he does not give any particulars. No account of any such occurrence appears to
have been published in this country but it is known- that in 1935 H.M. Survey Ship 'Challenger'
obtained an excellent record of mud overlying rock near Trinidad, in the West Indies. The echo-
sounding set used was the ordinary Admiralty pattern sonic set for shallow water, but with the
addition of a recorder. The depth of water over the mud varied between 90 and 100 fm. (165 and 183 m.)
and the depth of the mud itself from 180 to 240 ft. (55 to 73 m.). The record, unfortunately, was not
retained after the completion of the survey. A careful examination of the many records we possess
from the ' Acadia ' recorder fails to show any such definite evidence that the soundwaves penetrated
the bottom deposit. Admittedly, the great majority of these records were made in depths of water
much beyond the range at which layering has hitherto been detected with supersonic equipment ; but
with the sonic transmitter and hydrophone both exposed to the sea it had been thought that if as many
as four re-echoes could be recorded from shallow water, then there was a reasonable chance of the
sound penetrating beyond the immediate surface of the bottom. The attenuation of the soundwaves from
the deep-sea transmitter, however, was very great, and as can be seen from some of the records shown m
Pis. XXVI-XXX the echo marking which thus results from a normal echo may easily cover any trace
of an echo from a harder layer below the surface of the bottom. Among the records which were closely
examined are certain peculiar recordings of fairly flat bottoms which might be considered as evidence
of layering. The spread of sonic transmissions, however, is such that these secondary traces may well
have their origin in other features of the bottom, at depths of more than 100 fm. (183 m.), and although
there remains an element of doubt in some instances, these records have generally thus been mterpreted.
We have been equally disappointed in such few records as remain from the M/S XII D recorder. The
great majority of these have faded (see Appendix I, p. 97) and although the contour of the bottom was
pencilled or inked-in shortly after the record was dry (see Plate XXXI, fig. 2), little else remains, except
1 Conversations with the Marconi International Marine Co., Ltd., confirm our doubts on this point. The Marconi Co.
have much experience of visual recording by light in conjunction with a quartz transmitter (or projector) and are not by any
means prepared to assume that multiple flashes on the scale are echoes from successive layers of the bottom. In fact, they
consider that the presence of such multiple effects (which to them is a well-known occurrence) is more probably caused by
attenuation of the reflected soundwaves, owing to a rough or confused bottom.
■^ Private communication to the author.

6o DISCOVERY REPORTS

on some records where there is an indeterminate marking below the hnes. On the few that have remained
on the whole fairly legible there is no definite evidence of layering, although in one or two instances it
is just possible that this has been recorded. Our records, however, were very seldom taken in waters
as shallow as those previously mentioned; shallow water to us usually meant depths of 30 to i;o fm.
(55-91 m.), and even in enclosed anchorages in the Antarctic, where an overlay of glacial mud could
reasonably be expected, we were mostly compelled, from lack of accurate information, to anchor in
depths of water varying from 25 to 40 fm. (46-73 m.). In addition it must be remembered that our
supersonic transmitter and receiver tanks were mounted inside the hull plating, with a consequent loss
of signal strength. In the instance quoted above of the survey of Lake Windermere the transmitter
and receiver used were protected only by a thin sheet of metal ; for the other records shown in The
Husun Review nothing is known about the thickness of plating below the tanks. It is probable that
the face of the quartz transmitter referred to by Stocks was in contact with the sea, but even if it was
protected it is unlikely that such protection was more than a very small fraction of an inch in thickness.
The loss of records through fading may thus be serious, for they cannot now be subjected to a
critical examination. Such work can scarcely be done during a running survey, for the logging of
soundings, either direct from the recorder or from the dried paper after the day's work, leaves little
or no spare time. It is therefore to be hoped that as the result of the experiments now being made,
a more permanent marking on the records will be achieved in future.

TERMINOLOGY OF SUBMARINE RELIEF

The need for a systematic nomenclature for the features of the sea bottom became apparent many
years ago and the first serious attempt to provide for such a need appears to have been made by
Petermann, in 1877. Between then and 1899 Agassiz (1888), Murray (1895) and Supan (1899)
contributed greatly to the subject, and in the latter year, at the Seventh International Congress of
Geographers in Berlin, consideration was given to certain principles to be applied in naming the
features of the sea bottom. These principles were formulated by Kriimmel and Mill on a geographical
basis and have become the foundation of most of the modern nomenclature. In 1932 Littlehales
described the first and second magnitude forms of the ocean bottom together with an appropriate
terminology which had by then attained international currency. In the same year the International
Hydrographic Bureau published their Terminology of Submarine Relief.

In 1936 an International Committee was formed to report on the 'Criteria and Nomenclature of
the Major Divisions of the Ocean Bottom ', and their findings were published by the Association
d'Oceanographie Physique (1940). The Committee considered many suggestions, but there is still
much confusion over some of the terms which should be applied to the relief of the ocean floor.
In the present report we have adhered generally to the terminology of Littlehales for the description
of the submarine relief, and for the nomenclature of the different divisions of the sea bed in the
southern seas to the terms hitherto generally adopted in the publications of the Discovery Committee.
Some of these terms were described by Mackintosh (1940) in his article for the International
Committee. We are not, however, altogether in agreement with the use of the term 'swell', which
now appears to be fairly widely used as the definition of a rise which separates two deep
basins, and which has a saddle depth of 4000 m. or more. The original word proposed by German
authorities to define such a feature of the bottom relief was ' Schwelle ', of which the literal translation
is 'siir, meaning a 'threshold'. It was to be additional to the terms 'ridge' and 'rise', which were
already well established. The use of the word ' swell ' as the alternative in English to ' Schwelle ' may
be intended to convey more accurately this conception of a slight rise or swelling of a few hundred
metres in the bottom relief at the greater depths, as opposed to a more definite rise of, say, 1000 m.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 61

The terms 'ridge' and 'rise', however, would appear to be sufficiently expressive to provide an
adequate description of the bottom relief between the deep basins of the various oceans, but if it is
considered really necessary to have this additional term we would then suggest that the word 'sill'
is much preferable as the English version of the term ' Schwelle '.

THE SCOTIA ARC (Plate XXIII)i

In our previous report on soundings (1932, pp. 214-9) rfiuch evidence was presented in support of
an arcuate connexion between Tierra del Fuego and Graham Land, by way of Staten Island, the
Burdwood Bank, the Shag Rocks, South Georgia, the Gierke Rocks, the South Sandwich Islands, the
South Orkney Islands, Elephant and Clarence Islands and the South Shetlands. Such a connexion
had long been forecast by some geologists, but evidence from rock specimens was scanty or even
contradictory and, prior to the work of the Discovery Committee's ships, very little information was
available from soundings.

The term ' Scotia Arc' was adopted on the suggestion of Mr J. M. Wordie (see Herdman, 1932,
p. 214) but does not appear to have met with universal approval; Mosby (1940, p. 96), for instance,
prefers the term ' South Atlantic Arc' and German authorities, such as Stocks (1937, 1939) and Wiist
(1933), have persisted in the view that their term 'South Antilles' is more correct. Reasons have
already been given (1932) for preferring the term Scotia Arc to that of the South Antilles and, as the
name ' Scotia Sea' is generally accepted for the area around which the major portions of the Arc are
grouped, it does not appear that the term South Atlantic Arc is a better alternative. In our opinion
this latter name is also slightly misleading, and in this report the name Scotia Arc will be retained.
Between 1932 and 1939 many thousands of additional soundings in this area were taken by the
' Discovery II ', and, by landings and dredgings, we have also been able to obtain relevant geological
material. Samples of rock were obtained from the South Shetlands, parts of Graham Land and the
off-lying islands to the north-west, Gibbs Island (near Clarence Island), and Saunders Island, in the
South Sandwich group. Dredged material from near the Shag Rocks, from Clarence Island, and from
four stations in the South Sandwich group completed the collection. Ahhough the evidence from the
South Sandwich group is inconclusive, Tyrrell's report on these specimens (1945) supports the theory,
favoured by Suess and others, of a tectonic connexion between South America and West Antarctica
along the Scotia Arc.

Tyrrell considers that the predominant basic lavas of the South Sandwich Islands show a closer
affinity with the comparable rocks of the Antilles of North America than with those of the Andes,
and he suggests that the South Sandwich Islands may not lie on the main line of the Scotia Arc, but
may form an easternmost ridge parallel to and in echelon with it. In support of this he notes the south-
eastward trend of the axis of South Georgia, and the northward extension of the 3000 m. contour
(shown in pi. xlv of our previous report of 1932) leading down to the South Orkney Islands. Since
the publication of that chart, however, further soundings have provided valuable evidence of a far
more prominent ridge which appears to connect the South Orkney with the South Sandwich Islands
(see pp. 73-4), and there seems little doubt that this represents the main line of the Arc. Unfortunately,
we have had no new soundings to the south-east of South Georgia but, in our opinion, those already
obtained are of sufficient density to preclude the possibility of a direct connexion between the South
Orkneys and South Georgia.

1 As in our earlier bathymetric chart soundings from sources other than the Discover}- Committee's vessels are shown in
Pis. XXIII to XXV as open circles. Our soundings up to May 1932 are shown as black dots; subsequent to that date crosses
have been used to indicate the positions of ' Discovery ' soundings. Since the scale is small it has not been possible to show
all the soundings taken when they were closely spaced, or when continuous soundings were being taken with the recorder.

62 DISCOVERY REPORTS

The existence of a continuous ridge between the South Sandwich and South Orkney Islands has
been queried by Wiist (1933, pp. 44-5)) on account of the percolation of Antarctic- Atlantic water
into the ' South Antilles Sea ', at a point half-way between the South Sandwich group and the South
Orkneys. His facts are deduced from the potential bottom temperatures and in his illustration
(pi. ii) he shows a break of approximately go miles in the ridge, centred about 34° W, where a depth
of more than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) is to be expected. From our line of soundings along this part of the
ridge in 1932 it would appear that if such a break does exist in this position then its maximum width
must be considerably less than that deduced by Wiist. Our observations show that in the neighbourhood
of the longitude in question there can only be a maximum distance of 20 miles over which depths of
more than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) can be expected; in fact, the horizontal distance between the 1000 m.
(547 fm.) contours is only some 40 miles at this point. It should also be pointed out that, in view of the
extremely irregular form of the Arc in general and especially of the known complicated area west of
40° W longitude, it cannot be said that this one line of soundings gives a complete picture of the ridge
at the point in question. It is, in fact, very probable that a system of parallel ridges will be found to
exist here, similar to those found between Clarence Island and the South Orkneys. Some further
observations on this subject have been made by Deacon (1937, p. m), who shows that from the
hydrological point of view the existence of low-bottom temperatures in the Scotia Sea may not
necessarily be evidence of an inflow of cold bottom water from the Weddell Sea, but may well be due
to the formation of cold bottom water in the deeper regions of the Scotia Sea which lie north and west
of the South Orkneys.

Considerably more detail in the delineation of the Scotia Arc has been made possible as the result
of the many further soundings taken by us in this area since 1932. The South Sandwich Trench,^
which is perhaps the outstanding feature of the Arc, was crossed a further seven times between
December 1932 and March 1937, and four of these lines of soundings were far to the south of any
crossings previously made. We had always suspected that the Trench might extend farther to the
south and west than the earlier soundings had shown, and it now seems certain that its south-western
limit is not far from a position in 61° S, 26° W, with its line of curvature lying almost parallel to the
line of the South Sandwich Islands. At the northern end soundings taken in December 1932, and
August 1934, show that the deepest portion of the Trench extends about 60 miles farther west than
hitherto determined, and that the 5000 m. contour now lies some 30 miles nearer to South Georgia,
extending almost to the 4000 m. contour. The length of the Trench can now be stated with fair
accuracy; at depths of more than 5000 m. (2734 fm.) it extends for approximately 650 miles and at
depths greater than 7000 m. (3829 fm.) the length is approximately 500 miles. The maximum depth
of 8264 m. (4519 fm.) obtained by the ' Meteor' in 1926 was not exceeded but, in December 1932, in
54° 57' S, 29° 26' W we obtained a sounding of 8200 m. (4484 fm.), which was 98 m. (179 fm.) in excess
of our previous record of 8102 m. (4430 fm.) in 56° 33' S, 24° 33' W. In all the seven crossings made
since 1932 we obtained fifty-five soundings of more than 5000 m. (2734 fm.) and of these thirty-one
were of more than 6000 m. (3282 fm.), thirteen of more than 7000 m. (3829 fm.) and one of more than
8000 m. (4376 fm.). From the evidence now available it appears reasonable to assume that the Trench
has a depth considerably in excess of 7000 m. (3829 fm.) for the greater part of its length, though it

1 It is considered that the name 'South Sandwich Trench', in accordance with Littlehales's terminology, is preferable to
'South Sandwich Deep'. We are not, however, in agreement with the suggestion made by Wiist (1940, p. 20) and others that
the deepest known parts of the Trench should be called Meteor Deep and Discovery Deep respectively. Since those soundings
of more than 8000 m. were obtained, the ' Discovery II ' has obtained a sounding of 8200 m. some 90 miles west of the 'Meteor's'
greatest depth and nearly 200 miles distant from the greatest depth previously determined by the 'Discovery II'. A more
complete survey of the Trench may well disclose even greater depths, especially if the recorder can be used, and it seems
premature to give names to the deepest parts which so far happen to have been found.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 63

will be noticed that at the southern end it narrows considerably. The distance between the 7000 m.
contours at the northern end varies between 17 and 30 miles, whereas south of latitude 57° S the
Trench gradually narrows from 15 to 4 miles in width between the same contours. It would have
been of the greatest interest if continuous soundings could have been taken across the Trench with
the recorder, but on no occasion was this possible. Four lines of soundings were run across it after
the recorder had been fitted (in 1934 (2), 1936 and 1937), but on the two earlier crossings (a zigzag, or
double crossing in April 1934, between the latitudes of 58° S and 59° 31' S) the instrument was out
of action, and on the later crossings, at the extreme northern and southern ends, bad weather precluded
records from such great depths.

60

50°

40

"

30°

\ Faiklo.y^d

T

\s,P3'

IslcLTids

50°

<;

W\

-

^

Sou

th.Ge>org(a /

\ \

%..

\

s d

la

^'< /

:!^^

r^

\

T 1

A

1' s e\a

Vs /
\^ /

\ ^/

^ A . • South.
J ^ ' Sanct\^icA

/

^^

p.

\ ^

\

\

/

V

\
\

_ — \

1

\ \

?/ — -_

J^ ^■' Islands

/

1

1 SouX f^Of^ri.
1 '^ Islands

^^.---''^

<o

5\ Ctarenrje

1 1

/""^^-^^C "^s /

\

/si

%rui

1

/ ^^^~~"-^ /

South \

.-^ '

'

/ ^ tC

..^ ^

».

SAefland\

/ ^ /^^

60°

\

-7

/ \ / ^
/ ^ /

\

50

60

70

60

50

40

30

20

Fig. II. Key chart showing positions of profiles in Fig. 12.

Another interesting feature of the soundings since 1932 is the discovery that the Burdwood Bank is
separated from the main Falkland-Patagonian shelf by much deeper water than was formerly supposed.
Eight additional lines of soundings were taken between the Burdwood Bank and the Falkland Islands
and these have resulted in a marked change in the contours of this area (see p. 68).

It is now possible to construct four new profiles of the bottom in the area comprising the Scotia
Sea and Arc (Text-fig. 11). Two of these cross the Scotia Sea from north to south and the remaining
two run in east-south-easterly and south-easterly directions respectively from South Georgia. One of
these (Text-fig. 12a), in approximately 45° W, extends for 620 miles and comprises 160 soundings.
It crosses the well-defined ridge west of the Shag Rocks, illustrates the extensive folding on the
northern side of the South Orkney Islands and shows the southward continuation of the South Orkney
shelf to approximately 62° S. It should also be noted that the bottom just south of the Burdwood
Bank-Shag Rocks ridge is likewise an area of considerable folding. The second cross-section (Text-
fig. 12 d), which is based on 107 soundings, runs from Cape Pembroke, Falkland Islands, to a position
in line with, but slightly east of, Clarence Island, a distance of 575 miles. It shows some similar
characteristics in that an area of considerable folding exists south of the Burdwood Bank — more

64 DISCOVERY REPORTS /

complicated indeed than in the area farther east — and in that the bottom rises steadily from the middle
of the Scotia Sea towards Clarence Island; there does not, however, appear to be any evidence of
folding just north of Clarence Island such as is a prominent feature of the bottom, for many miles east
and west, a few miles north of the South Orkneys.

On the eastern side of the Arc the two new profiles of the sea bed begin east of South Georgia and
north of the Clerke Rocks and, having crossed the Clerke Rocks-South Sandwich Islands section of
the Arc in approximately the same position, continue in an east-south-easterly and a south-easterly
direction. The profile shown in Text-fig. 12b commences in 54° 23-3' S, 35° 30' W, crosses the South
Sandwich group slightly to the north of Saunders Island and continues across the South Sandwich
Trench to 58" 50' S, 20° 05' W. There is a steady rise on the inside of the loop of the Arc to a well-
defined ridge at the South Sandwich Islands, and beyond this the bottom shows a marked irregularity
before dropping away abruptly into the Trench itself, across which a good line of soundings was
obtained. The remaining section (Text-fig. 12c) begins slightly south and east of that just described,
crosses the Arc in approximately 55° 15' S, 33° W and, continuing through the South Sandwich
Islands via the Douglas Strait, crosses the Trench in approximately 60° 30' S, 25° 15' W and finishes
at 61° 55-2' S, 20° 02' W. The soundings between the South Sandwich Islands and the Trench
unfortunately were few, owing to a breakdown of the transmitter, and although emergency repairs
enabled us to get six extremely valuable soundings across the deepest part of the Trench, there was
a further gap of some 60 miles in the line whilst repairs were again being effected. In the profile the
bottom is shown as a dotted line for those periods during which the transmitter was out of action.
A very good continuous record was obtained in the Douglas Strait on this occasion, though the
maximum depth recorded — 321 fm. (587 m.) — was nearly 100 fm. (183 m.) less than the greatest
depth determined here during our survey of the South Sandwich group in 1930. Douglas Strait,
which has been described by Kemp & Nelson (1931) in their account of our survey operations, lies
between Southern Thule and Cook Island and is, geologically, an extremely interesting feature. It is
a deep basin, with a maximum depth, so far determined, of 409 fm. (748 m.), and it is cut off at the
entrance on either side by a ridge, on which there is an average depth of water of about 14 fm. (26 m.).
There can be little doubt that Southern Thule and Cook Island originally were one large island and
that this basin is the crater of an extinct volcano, an eruption of which probably separated the island
into two. Our record in 1935 was taken on a line across the eastern side of the basin, and agreement
with the contours previously determined was good.

In both the profiles just described it can be seen that the connexion between the Clerke Rocks and
the South Sandwich Islands is not very clearly marked, although the deeper water of the western end
of the South Sandwich Trench can clearly be seen at the beginning of each section. From this deeper
water there is a well-marked rise to the line of the connexion, but of the connecting link itself there is
little evidence here other than a rise of some 300-400 m. (164-219 fm.). This, however, when considered
in relation to the extension of the Trench in a westerly direction, to a position north of the Clerke
Rocks, may be held to constitute a connexion here; especially as there is considerable evidence of
folding, such as is commonly found inside the loop on most of the other sectors of the Arc. The approach
to the South Sandwich Islands from the west, both in the middle of the Group and at the southern end,
is, however, an exception to the irregularity normally found inside the Arc. In each instance the
bottom rises steadily towards the connecting ridge, as in the approach to Clarence Island (Text-fig. 12 d),
and it is probable that similar conditions prevail over the greater part of the northern side of the ridge
between Southern Thule and the South Orkney Islands.

With the exception of those parts of the loop just mentioned it would appear that the slope of the
bottom inside the connecting ridges of the Arc is, in general, steeper than outside. This is most

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939

66 DISCOVERY REPORTS

noticeable in the region of the Burdwood Bank, around South Georgia, north-west of the South
Orkneys and north-east of Elephant Island. The slopes off the South Orkneys are among the steepest
we have met ; they are certainly among the steepest slopes of any length from which we have been able
to obtain a very good record, and we were fortunate to have fine weather in which to run the recorder
when leaving Coronation Island, in a northerly direction, in February 1937. The record (see PI. XXVI,
fig. i) covered 11 miles of the bottom, with a steady fall from the anchorage of 25 fm. (46 m.) to the
edge of the shelf in 148 fm. (271 m.) and then an abrupt descent to a depth of 1514 fm. (2769 m.). The
profile constructed from this record is shown in Text-fig. 13 a with the vertical scale exaggerated 25
times and in Text-fig. 136 on the true scale. Soundings every minute were taken off the record to
construct the latter, and the average gradient northward from the edge of the shelf, as determined
graphically, is approximately 20°. The maximum slope here is approximately 25".

Some shorter slopes of a similar magnitude have been observed on records taken in the channels
of the Palmer Archipelago, during the surveys of the South Shetland Islands and in various
channels leading seaward from Magellan Strait, but their length was generally only a fraction of
a mile, and since the angle of approach to the contours was usually unknown, accurate analysis

i

lOOQ

Fig. 13. Slope of bottom to the north, from Coronation Island, South Orkneys. Positions of soundings are marked
on the horizontal scales, (a) Vertical scale, x 25. {b) True scale, based on 65 depths from continuous record.

has not been possible. In certain isolated instances, however, the density of soundings is such
that a few contours can be drawn and the slopes which occur in these areas will be discussed m
more detail in a later section of this report which deals with soundings taken during hydrographical
surveys.

In these general remarks on the Scotia Arc it will be advisable, perhaps, at this point, to refer to
some recent bathymetric charts which include this area. Stocks (1937), in one of a series of bathy-
metric charts of the Atlantic Ocean included in the ' Meteor ' Reports, shows the contours of the
eastern end of the Arc on a large scale. The western limit of this chart is the meridian of 30° W and
the contours should, of course, be studied in conjunction with those of the area to the west; unfortu-
nately, this chart, which covers the remainder of the Scotia Sea, was not published in Germany until
1941 and we have not, as yet, been able to obtain a copy.^ The 'Meteor' soundings have, however,
been published as lists of soundings (Maurer & Stocks, 1933) and we have used these in the compilation
of our bathymetric chart. The depths obtained by the 'Meteor' which were shown on our original
chart were only a small selection of soundings which had been supplied to the Hydrographic
Department of the British Admiralty shortly after the return of the vessel.

In the eastern area which comprises the Arc, Stocks has based his contours mainly on one line of
soundings obtained by the 'Meteor' in 1926 and on a selection of our soundings (presumably those
which were published with our previous report or which have appeared in our Station Lists) together

" Since this was written we have obtained a copy of this chart. No contours are shown and most of the information was
already known to us, but some hitherto unpublished soundings, taken by the whaling factory ship ' Walter Rau ', provide
valuable confirmation of our interpretation of the topography of the bottom in the neighbourhood of the South Orkney
Islands.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 67

with the further selection of our soundings which has been inserted on the relevant British Admiralty
Charts. His interpretation of the outline of the northern and central portions of the South Sandwich
Trench agrees therefore fairly closely with ours, although it lacks the confirmatory detail supplied by
our more complete data. At the southern end, where all the soundings available are, with one
exception, from the ' Discovery II ', those used by Stocks, which are presumably those selected by the
Admiralty from our lists and inserted in proportion to the scale of the relevant chart, are not quite
sufficient in themselves to provide an adequate basis for bathymetric purposes. As we have shown in
PI. XXIII we consider that it is more probable that the 5000 m. contour, on the eastern side of the
Trench, follows the line of the Trench to the south-west and that it does not join up with the small
deep area of more than 6000 m. which lies approximately between the meridians of 22° and 23° W in
latitude 61° S. In general the topography of the sea bed in this area appears to be extremely irregular
and it is more likely that this secondary deep area, together with the area of more than 5000 m. in depth
lying between 22° W and 25° W, in 62° S, are further evidence of the system of parallel folds which is
so prevalent in other sectors of the Scotia Arc.

The Scotia Sea and South Sandwich Trench are also included in a bathymetric Map of Antarctica
(1939) produced by the Department of the Interior, of the Commonwealth of Australia. As in Stocks's
chart, this map is contoured in metres, and for the area in which we are concerned the contours in
general follow closely those of our previous bathymetric chart, but a considerable number of amend-
ments have been made to conform with our more recent work. This is most noticeable in the Burdwood
Bank-Shag Rocks section of the connecting link, though the lack of a 500 m. contour here tends to
give the impression that the Burdwood Bank is part of the continental shelf on which the Falkland
Islands lie, rather than an integral part of the Arc, as is shown clearly on our present chart. The
outline of the South Sandwich Trench agrees well with our latest interpretation of the soundings
here, and certain of our shallow soundings between the South Sandwich Islands and the South Orkneys
have been plotted. The wide shelf to the south and east of the latter group of islands is also well
defined. The complicated form of the link between Coronation Island (South Orkneys) and Clarence
Island is extremely well shown for the small scale used, as is also the trough which extends through
the Bransfield Strait to a position south of Clarence Island.

The third recent bathymetric chart is U.S. Chart No. 2562 produced by the United States
Hydrographic Office in 1943. This map, which comprises a wide area around the Antarctic Continent,
is contoured in fathoms ; it is not, therefore, so easily compared either with our own chart or with
those of Stocks and the Commonwealth of Australia. There are, however, certain discrepancies in the
Scotia Sea area (some of which are referred to in a brief review by Hinks & Mackintosh, 1943), and
these should be mentioned here, since it would appear that some of the data available have been
overlooked. Perhaps the most important discrepancy is in the representation of the South Sandwich
Trench, where the deep water at the north-western extremity is shown as lying mainly south of latitude
55° S with a pronounced south-westerly trend, and where also the width at the southern end is given
as some 60 miles between the 3500 fm. (6401 m.) contours. Between the 3000 fm. (5487 m.) contours
in the same latitude the width of the Trench is shown as approximately 80 miles. Both these widths
are far in excess of either our own or the Australian interpretation of the data then available. In
the neighbourhood of the South Orkneys the Bart Bank (in approximately 6i" S, 41" 20' W) is shown
as part of the ridge connecting these islands with the South Sandwich Group, but, if reference is
made to British Admiralty Chart No. 3176, the soundings there shown give little indication that this
bank is connected with the South Orkney shelf. In view of the previous evidence of multiple folding
in the various sectors of the Arc it is, in our opinion, more probable that this is an isolated bank
or part of a bank, which lies in an east and west direction and which is parallel to the main

68 DISCOVERY REPORTS

ridge.i Farther to the west the complexity of the ridge connecting the South Orkneys with Clarence
Island is not very clearly shown, and a ridge, the existence of which must be regarded as doubtful,
is shown as running north-west for some 220 miles from Elephant Island; our soundings here do
show a small area less than 2000 m. in depth some 75 miles from Elephant Island in the same
direction, but there appears to be little evidence in support of the connexion of this area with
the island. In the Bransfield Strait the outline of the comparatively deep basin is not well shown.
In part this may be due to the small scale of the chart but it would also appear that the compilers
have overlooked the data published in pi. xlvii of our previous report.

Certain banks shown on this chart are referred to as 'seamounts', a term which does not appear to
have been among those considered by the International Committee of 1936 (see p. 60). It appears,
however, in the terminology of submarine topography given by Sverdrup, Johnson & Fleming
(1942, p. 25), where a 'seamount' is described as 'an isolated mountain-like structure rising from the
ocean bottom '. In the present report the original term ' bank ' has been retained for all such features.

DETAILED ANALYSIS OF THE SECTORS OF THE SCOTIA ARC

TIERRA DEL FUEGO TO THE SHAG ROCKS

In pi. xlv in our previous report the contours of the Arc were drawn to fit as well as possible the
data then available. These contours need considerable modification in the light of subsequent
soundings, and it therefore seems worth while to examine the various sectors of the Arc as before in
some detail.

Very many more soundings have been taken in the vicinity of the Burdwood Bank, which is an
accepted feature of the Arc, with the result that the area of the bank, of less than 250 m. (137 fm.)
in depth, has been considerably reduced. Six lines of soundings were run across the bank between
1932 and 1938, one at the western end, two in the middle and three, in a southerly direction from
Cape Pembroke, at the eastern end. A series of soundings, crossing the north-west corner of the bank,
was also taken in 1936, in 54'^ S, as part of a line of soundings from South America to South Georgia.
A further line, approximately south-east by south from Cape Pembroke, was of great value in the
determination of the eastern limits. North of the bank these various lines have proved beyond doubt
that there is relatively deep water between the bank and the Falkland-Patagonian shelf. A large area
with depths greater than 500 m. (273 fm.) is found here and extends considerably west of the longitude
of the Falklands. Depths of more than 1000 m. (547 fm.) extend along almost the whole northern
side of the bank, the western limit of the contour being in, approximately, 60° 15' W. The 2000 m.
(1094 fm.) contour can now be shown to lie in about 58° 45' W and a corresponding alteration in the
3000 m. (1641 fm.) contour can also be made in view of this fresh evidence.

The separation of the Burdwood Bank from the continental shelf would now appear to be firmly
established and the profile running south from Cape Pembroke across the Scotia Sea, which we have

1 The soundings taken by the 'Waher Rau' and already mentioned in the footnote to p. 66 indicate that there is some
doubt about the existence of the Bart Bank, at any rate in the position at present assigned to it. The information available
from Stocks's map shows that the 'Walter Rau' obtained at least three soundings exceeding 3000 m. (1641 fm.) at or near
the position of the bank, and what is perhaps m.ore important, obtained further deep soundings between here and the Orkney
shelf. This latter evidence strongly supports our contention that if the Bart Bank does exist at or near the position now shown
for it, then it must be an isolated feature.

There is little information about this bank. It first appeared on British Admiralty Chart N0.3176 in 1941 and the authority
for its insertion was a Norwegian chart dated 1938 (private communication to the author from the Hydrographic Department
of the Admiralty). The only other references to the bank which can be found appear to be on U.S. Chart No. 2562 (referred
to above) and a very brief statement in the U.S. Sailing Directions for Antarctica, 1943 (p. 259) of the position and depths
found. No authority is quoted in support of this information.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 69

already shown (Text-fig. izd), illustrates clearly the gradual descent of the continental slope from the
Falkland Islands to a depth of slightly over 3000 m., the comparatively sharp rise to the hank itself
and the fairly steep slope away to an irregular bottom at an average depth of 4500 m. (2461 fm.).
South of the bank the contours as now drawn show that the slope is steeper than was supposed, though
the average gradient as determined from five crossings is not more than 3!°. Several good continuous
records were obtained here with the ' Acadia ' recorder and from these it can clearly be seen that one
of the most prominent features is the considerable irregularity of the bottom down the slope. This is,
perhaps, most clearly seen at depths of less than 3000 m. (1641 fm.). As we have already mentioned,
such irregularity of the bottom, just south of the connecting link, appears to be a well-marked feature
of this sector of the Arc.

Eastwards towards the Shag Rocks the recent soundings are in close agreement with those deter-
mined prior to 1932, and provide confirmation of the suggested line of the connexion. Nine more
soundings of less than 1000 m. were obtained between 51° W and 53° W on the line from the Burdwood
Bank towards South Georgia with a minimum depth of 581 m. (318 fm.). Farther to the east a series
of soundings between South Georgia and the Falkland Islands provides valuable evidence of the
extensions westward of depths of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.), to a position in approximately 53° S,
46" 40' W, and a formerly isolated sounding of less than 2000 m. is now linked up with the Shag Rocks,
some 170 miles to the east.

The soundings obtained on this east and west line have been corroborated by five lines of soundings
in a north and south direction, between the meridians of 43° W and 46° W. Agreement with the
previous results was again very good. As will be seen from PI. XXIII two of the lines in this series
were run in weather which allowed soundings to be taken at intervals of 30 min. (except for one gap)
or approximately every 4I miles, and there can be little possibility that any outstanding feature ot the
bottom was missed in this region.

Immediately south of the Arc, between 44° W and 45° W, and in the latitude of approximately
54° 30' S, there is an interesting deep fold, some 50 miles in length as at present known, where two
depths of more than 5000 m. were obtained. The western end was determined by the ' Meteor' m 1926
and was shown on our original chart as an isolated deep sounding. In November 1932 a line of
soundings on a southerly course crossed this fold about 25 miles to the east of the position of the
'Meteor' sounding. No sounding of more than 5000 m. was obtained, but four depths, rangmg
between 4879 m. (2668 fm.) and 4998 m. (2733 fm.) were determined over a distance of 7 miles between
the latitudes of 54° 30' S and 54° 37' S, in the longitude of 44'^ 36' W. This narrow trench is followed
by a sharp rise to a sounding of 2776 m. (1518 fm.) in a distance of 4I miles; equivalent, roughly, to
a slope of 1 5°. This is considerably steeper than the slopes normally found far from land. It is based on
only two soundings, and thus, although the angle cannot be less than 15°, the recorder m^ght well
show parts of it to be steeper, especially if the ship moved at right angles to the contours. This further
proof of parallel folding adjacent to the main ridge must be regarded as strong support for the theory
of the arcuate connexion.

In April 1934 the 'Discovery II' obtained a single sounding of 5088 m. (2782 fm.) at St. 1335
(54° 37-8' S, 44'' 12-6' W) to the east of the previous line. Later, unfavourable weather prevented us
from obtaining soundings on a line which crossed the fold from south to north, in approximately
45° 30' W, at a point where the soundings of the 'Meteor' suggest an extension of the fold to

the west.

In the immediate vicinity of the Shag Rocks the recent soundings show that the 500 m. (273 tm.)
contour to the west of the Rocks should extend some 25 miles farther to the west ; and the hmit of the
1000 m. (547 fm.) contour in the same direction can now be determined with fair accuracy.

^o DISCOVERY REPORTS

There still remains the gap in the Arc between the meridians of 48° W and 49^ W. It is now seen
that the width of this is considerably less than hitherto shown, though from the evidence of the
soundings alone its existence must be considered as certain. Hydrological observations do not either
confirm or deny its presence, although there is some slight evidence that a northward movement of
cold bottom water may occur at this point. Soundings, however, show the gap to be connected with
a narrow trough of moderately deep water which lies east and west, between the Arc proper and
a parallel ridge to the north. This parallel ridge, which extends east from the Falkland Islands for
some 600 miles, at depths less than 3000 m. (1641 fm.), and which has an area of 5000 sq. miles less
than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) in depth at its eastern end, is an interesting feature. It extends east to the
longitude of AV 30' W and there can be no doubt that from this position to some distance west of the
Falkland Islands it is completely separated over its whole extent from the main line of the Arc. The
trough which constitutes the separation is narrow, but for the greater part of its length is more than
3000 m. (1641 fm.) in depth. It can finally be traced, by the 500 m. (273 fm.) depth contour, to
approximately 53" 30' S, 63° 30' W; about 150 miles west of the mean longitude of the Falkland
Islands.

The soundings shown on our original bathymetric chart gave a strong indication that such a trough
existed, although the extent of the northern ridge, as determined by the 3000 m. (1641 fm.) contour,
was shown only to the longitude of 47° W. Our more recent soundings in this area, however, comprise
two lines between the Falkland Islands and South Georgia, five lines in a north and south direction,
and four on north-westerly and south-easterly courses. All these series of soundings cross this trough,
and four of the north and south lines and three of the others crossed completely the eastern end of
the Falkland Ridge. The area less than 2000 m. (1904 fm.) in depth, of which only the southern part
is shown on our present bathymetric chart (PI. XXIII), was thus fairly extensively sounded out and
its limits determined with reasonable accuracy.

Geologically, this ridge parallel to the Scotia Arc raises some interesting questions. For example,
the structure of the Falkland Islands bears not the least resemblance to any structure so far determined
in the various sectors of the Arc, and yet there can be no doubt of the connexion between the Falkland
Islands and the comparatively shallow area which lies some 500 miles farther east, thus forming a
parallel fold, such as is symptomatic of the Arc in general. It is not, perhaps, within the scope of this
report to discuss these implications, but it should be noted that soundings provide evidence of rather
similar conditions north-east from South Georgia, fuller details of which will be given when we
consider the soundings in that area.

SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SHAG ROCKS

Soundings taken since 1932 immediately to the west of the Shag Rocks have already been mentioned,
their effect on the contours here being quite marked ; but new soundings north and south close to the
Rocks, and eastwards to South Georgia, cause little alteration in our original conception of the contours
in this area. Two lines of soundings, however, which crossed this part of the ridge in a north-easterly
direction, enable us to complete the 2000 m. contour south of the ridge, which had been in doubt;
but the new contour follows closely the original tentative line. South of the Shag Rocks the 3000 m.
contour is found to lie some miles north of the line previously shown, thus reducing the width of the
ridge to a considerable extent.

Our soundings clearly show that the Shag Rocks constitute an important link in the Scotia Arc;
and it is of considerable interest to find geological evidence in support of this in Tyrrell's recent report
(1945). Stones dredged from a depth of 199 m. (109 fm.) at St. 474 (i mile west of the Shag Rocks)
showed a preponderance of greenstones which, from a close examination, Tyrrell considers to be

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 71

'congruous with the whole assemblage of rock types found in the Scotia Arc'. They are, in fact, very
similar to specimens from Tierra del Fuego and Clarence Island.

Recent work close around South Georgia itself has caused only minor alterations in our previous
delineation of the contours of the shelf surrounding the island. On the other hand, offshore soundings
beyond this shelf have been of some interest, especially in a north-easterly direction. Here we have
found a considerable area, probably of not less than 2500 sq. miles, which is centred about 180 miles
from land and where a number of soundings of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) have been obtained. The
minimum depth determined here so far is 887 fm. (1622 m.), in approximately 53" 04' S, 33" 27 .1' W.
Altogether, eleven soundings of less than 2000 m. were obtained from two lines across this bank,
which for convenience of identification we shall refer to as the North-Eastern Bank.

Directly north of Cape Crewe is another but considerably smaller area of less than 2000 m. in depth,
which was shown on our original chart. Recent soundings here do not materially alter the position of
the contours, and the connexion of this bank with the shelf around the island remains almost as
originally shown.

The American bathymetric chart previously mentioned is in near agreement with our conception of
the connexion of this latter bank with South Georgia, but the North-Eastern Bank is shown as a major
feature in a ridge termed the ' South Sandwich Swell ', stretching away from South Georgia in a north-
easterly direction for some 700 miles. We have not, as yet, been able closely to examine all our oceanic
soundings in this area, but it does not appear likely that this ridge exists as shown in the American
chart, and the North-Eastern Bank is certainly not connected to South Georgia at a depth less than
1500 fm. (2743 m.); our many soundings between this bank and the island show that depths of more
than 3000 m. (1641 fm.) are found here over a wide area. It seems much more probable that the
North-Eastern Bank is part of a ridge concentric with the loop of the Scotia Arc, a ridge which also
includes the small area of depths less than 3000 m. (1641 fm.) immediately to the east of the bank,
together with another recently discovered bank in a position centred approximately on 52° 45' S,
24° 30' W. This latter bank was only crossed once (October 1936) and the minimum sounding was
1012 fm. (1851 m.) in 54° 41' 48" S, 24° 09' 54" W. It is possible that this ridge is continued to the
south and east, linking up with the depths of less than 4000 m. (2187 fm.) shown there in approximately
the latitude of 55° S; and it may even connect with the shallower area far to the south again, in a
position centred approximately on 60° S, 20° W. We have drawn the 4000 m. and 3000 m. contours
to conform with this suggestion in so far as the banks to the north-east of South Georgia are concerned
but, in the absence of intermediate soundings between the various banks, this interpretation must
remain largely hypothetical.

If our theory is correct then, in view of the known structure of the Arc in general, and especially of
the prevalence of folds parallel to the main line, it appears that the shallower depths farther again to
the north-east (in approximately 50° S, 33° W, and from thence to approximately 47^° S, 37° W) will
not be connected to the North-Eastern Bank but form a further small fold also concentric with the
Arc proper. Much more work will be necessary before this point can be settled, but there remams
no doubt that the main line of the Arc lies as we originally suggested, and not through a parallel ridge
either north or south of South Georgia.

SOUTH GEORGIA TO THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS

The link between South Georgia and the Clerke Rocks was firmly established by our soundings

prior to 1932, but the evidence in support of a connexion between the Rocks and the South Sandwich

Group was not entirely satisfactory. Unfortunately our recent work does not provide much additional

information. It can be seen in PI. XXIII that although several new lines of soundings were taken in

DISCOVERY REPORTS
this area, there is' still a gap in the ridge between 30° and 31° 20' W. However, there is still room in
this gap for further soundings to reveal better evidence of a connecting ridge. Apart from this the
following facts may be cited in general support of the connexion between South Georgia and the
South Sandwich Islands.

(a) The profiles drawn in Text-figs. 12& and c show the typical irregularity of the bottom immedi-
ately south of the least depths (i.e. on the inner side of the loop), which is so marked in the Burdwood
Bank-South Georgia sector of the Arc.

{h) The area of less than 3000 m. (1641 fm.) centred about 32° W, with its revised and more
elongated outline (from west to east), may represent a crest on the ridge.

{c) A number of new soundings show that the northern end of the South Sandwich Trench extends
westwards as far as 33° 37' 48" W (see PI. XXIII). Since elsewhere the Trench is parallel to and
outside the Arc, it may be supposed that part of the ridge lies just south of this westward extension
of the 5000 m. (2734 fm.) contour.

Our original bathymetric chart showed the extension of the ridge on which the South Sandwich
Group is situated as running roughly north from Zavodovski Island and then to the west. In late
November 1932, soundings on a course approximately north-west from this island located a shallow
bank some 35 miles away from land. The minimum depth determined was 174 fm. (318 m.) and
altogether six soundings of less than 1000 m. (547 fm.) were obtained; four of these being less than
500 m. (273 fm.). Although this bank is close to the South Sandwich Group and therefore should,
perhaps, be considered as part of the island ridge, we might also suggest that by its position and depth
it is strong evidence of the trend of the connexion towards the Gierke Rocks and South Georgia.

SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS TO THE SOUTH ORKNEY ISLANDS
In PI. XXIII several new lines of soundings can be seen on, or crossing, the ridge connecting the
islands of the South Sandwich Group, and these give a much more accurate representation of the
general outline of the ridge, certainly on the western side. Here it will be seen that the 3000 m. (164 1 fm.)
contour lies, in general, much closer to the islands than we had hitherto supposed and that the depths
less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) have been more precisely determined. In our previous chart the six
southern islands (Saunders, Montagu, Bristol, and the Thule group— see Text-fig. 14) were shown as
being connected by a ridge at a depth of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.), but this has now been found to
be incorrect. The saddle depth of the ridge between Montagu and Saunders Islands is now found to
be greater than 2000 m., the least depth obtained being 1354 fm. (2476 m.), and although, so far as is
known, no soundings have yet been taken between Montagu and Bristol Islands, similar conditions
may well be found to exist here. The rise of the bottom to the saddle depth between Montagu and
Saunders Islands, or between Saunders and Candlemas Islands is, however, almost 1000 m. (547 fm.),
and is in itself sufficient evidence of the connecting ridge.

To the east of the South Sandwich Islands we have not gained so much information, except in the
vicinity of Saunders Island, where the 3000 m. (1641 fm.) contour can now be placed with some
accuracy. The two crossings farther south show a wider shelf at depths of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.),
with a consequent displacement of the deeper contours.

It will thus be seen that the connexion through the South Sandwich Group falls into three well-
marked areas. At the northern end there is a comparatively shallow submarine plateau surrounding
the islands, which stretches away in a north-westerly direction towards South Georgia. In the centre
we have Saunders Island, Montagu Island and, probably, Bristol Island, rising from slightly greater
depths. At this point also, the width of the ridge narrows considerably, the least distance between the
3000 m. contours being about mid-way between Candlemas and Saunders Islands. South of this the

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 73

ridge again widens and becomes more pronounced, the distance between the 3000 m. contours being
approximately 100 miles, as compared with the width of 25 miles at the narrowest part.

We now come to the most important results of our recent sounding work in the area of the Scotia
Sea and Arc ; that is, the determination of some 200
miles of the connexion which we believe to exist
between the South Sandwich Islands and the South
Orkneys. Prior to November 1932, the largest scale
British Admiralty chart for this area showed only
three soundings of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.). Early
in that year, however, the ' Discovery II ' had obtained
a good line of soundings across the ridge in 36° W,
with a least depth of 297 fm. (543 m.), and this was
shown in our previous chart. For a large part of the
year this region is covered by pack-ice, and it is
unfortunate that in subsequent years the ship was
not able to be there in the late summer when open
water may be expected. The ridge is thus still
inadequately explored, but one new line of soundings
was obtained in November 1932, when the ice was
farther south than usual for that month (see Mack-
intosh & Herdman, 1940, pi. Ixix), and this can be
seen in PI. XXIII as an irregular line running from
the South Orkney towards the South Sandwich
Islands. The line is irregular because the ship was
skirting the pack-ice throughout the passage. It would
at any time be difficult to lay a course between the
South Orkney and South Sandwich Islands which
would include soundings on unknown parts of the
ridge, but it happens that the course determined for
us by the pack-ice resulted in some very informative
soundings, especially between the meridians of 38^
and 32° W. Here four well-marked areas of less than
1000 m. (547 fm.) in depth were found and in two
of these the minimum depth was less than 500 m.
(273 fm.).

This line first ran south from the South Orkneys to the ice-edge in the latitude of 61° 57' S, and
then turned to the east to follow the ice-edge. The soundings obtained on the southerly run, together
with those at the beginning of the easterly course, show a remarkable extension of the South Orkney
shelf to the south and east.^ The first part of the eastward course must have lain south of any main
connecting ridge, for it was not until the ship turned almost north in 37^° W that the first bank was
located. Here six depths of less than 1000 m. (547 fm.) were determined and of these one was less than

1 Soundings taken here by the 'Walter Rau' have already been mentioned in the footnote to p. 66 and they confirm this
extension of the South Orkney shelf. Stocks's map, however, is on a comparatively small scale and it is probable that the
soundings attributed to the 'Walter Rau' represent only a fraction of those taken. Nevertheless, of those plotted, there are
25 of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) and 20 of less than 1000 m. (547 fm.). They are in close agreement with our soundings and
although it is not now possible to include them in our bathymetric chart (PI. XXIIl) their inclusion would have caused only
local variations in the general trend of the contours shown for the South Orkney shelf.

41 ZAVODOVSK

I.

4 LCSKOV I.

^ VI SOKOI I.

57-

VINOICATIO

4 1 'ti\ CANDLEMAS 1.

^' SAUNDERS 1.

58'

A MONTAGU 1.

59"

"""

>N>a> •■•^ BRISIDL 1.

THULe I. <#

BEUINOShAUSCH I.
OOK 1.

29° W

, ,¥• ^

'• ¥', ,

60'

Fig. 14. The South Sandwich Islands.

74 DISCOVERY REPORTS

500 m. (273 fm.); the minimum sounding was 373 m. (204 fm.) in 60° 53' S, 37° 13' W. Continuing
to the north-east for a distance of about 35 miles the hne of soundings then crossed the bank found on
the northerly run earlier in the year. Agreement with the previous results was good and it was found
that the hitherto isolated depth of 543 m. (297 fm.) could be linked up with a larger area. Four depths
of less than 1000 m. (547 fm.) were determined on this north-east line and these included one of
488 m. (267 fm.), in 60° 17' S, 35° 48' W, roughly 9 miles east-by-north of the earlier sounding of less
than 500 m.

From here the course still lay to the north-east, to the longitude of 35° 20' W, where it became
possible to turn east. Shortly after turning, and about 20 miles from the previous bank, another area
with depths less than 1000 m. (547 fm.) was located. In all, seventeen soundings were obtained here
and the minimum depth was 667 m. (365 fm.), in 62° 02-5' S, 34° 41' W. A number of these soundings
were taken in a small area at the extreme eastern end of this bank, but it has not been possible to show
all of them owing to the small scale of our bathymetric chart.

Not much farther to the east more shallow soundings were met with. Here ten depths of less than
1000 m. (547 fm.) were obtained over a distance of about 40 miles, the least being 602 m. (329 fm.),
in 60'' 00-5' S, 32° 30' W.

Between these last two shallow areas there exists a small gap, to which we have already referred in
our general discussion on the Scotia Arc. Only one sounding of more than 3000 m. was obtained here
(3807 m. (2082 fm.)), in 60° 03-5' S, 33° 33' W; the three remaining depths in the gap were approxi-
mately 1000 m. less.

The traverse of the ridge continued east from the 40-mile bank for about 30 miles. Unfortunately,
the ice began to trend in a northerly direction here and we were thus prevented from obtaining
soundings over the remaining distance of no miles to Southern Thule. The line now was directed in
general to the north-east, towards Montagu Island, but the soundings obtained were of considerable
value in the determination of the 3000 m. contour.

There still remains a wide area east of the South Orkney shelf where, so far as we are aware, no
soundings have yet been obtained, > and there is also the gap to the west of Southern Thule. However,
despite the lack of evidence from soundings in these areas, there can now be little doubt that the banks
discovered in 1932 form part of a well-marked connexion between the South Sandwich Islands and
the South Orkneys. Further evidence is provided by the indications of considerable folding at the
western end of the portion of the ridge just described. Here, between the meridians 36'' W and
38° W, is a complicated bottom of varying depths, such as is a common feature in other parts of the
Arc. Steep slopes are prevalent and we have one instance, in approximately 61° 10' S, 35° 03' W,
where a slope of 13° occurred between two soundings nearly 7 miles apart.

SOUTH ORKNEYS TO CLARENCE ISLAND AND THE SOUTH SHETLANDS
In our earlier report we stated that from the geological evidence then available the South Orkney
Islands did not appear to form an integral part of the Scotia Arc, although soundings indicated that
they were almost certainly a link in the chain. In January 1933 the 'Discovery II' made a running
survey of the islands, and in the course of the work rock samples were collected from seven localities
(Sts. 1089-1095) widely distributed among the group. These specimens were examined by Tilley
(1935), who reported that in their general relationships they bear a striking similarity to rocks from the
South Shetlands.

1 Three soundings of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) were obtained by the 'Walter Rau' between 60° 15' and 60° 25' S, and
in 39° to 39° 30' W, which suggest that the 2000 m. (1094 fm.) contour on the northern side of the ridge should lie considerably
north of the tentative line we have proposed in PI. XXOL The depths concerned are given as 1700, 1700 and 1800 m. (930,
930 and 985 fm.).

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 75

The connexion of the South Orkneys with Clarence Island was presumed before 1932, and we have
now presented evidence from soundings which strongly supports the theory of a direct connexion
between the South Orkneys and the South Sandwich Group. That the connexion is not likely to lie
north of the former islands can be seen from PI. XXIII; here we find more evidence of the folding
which, inside the loop of the Arc, appears as a prominent feature of the bottom west of the meridian of
40° W. About 30 miles north and west of Laurie Island (the most westerly of the Orkney Group) is
found the deepest area yet determined within the Arc; more than twenty soundings greater than
5000 m. (2734 fm.) have been obtained here by the ' Discovery II ', the maximum depth being 5548 m.
(3034 fm.) in 60° 16' S, 43° 26' W. It is also possible that this deep water extends farther to the west
than is at present shown.

On the southern side of this trench the slopes are comparatively steep ; one line of soundings in the
longitude of 44" 30' W gives an average slope of 16°, which is only 4° less than the very steep slope
away to deep water immediately north of Coronation Island (the largest of the Orkney Islands) (see
p. 66). To the north of the trench the bottom rises quite gradually to an extensive bank of depths less
than 2000 m. (1094 fm.), which appears to be roughly circular in shape, with a diameter of about
45 miles. To the east this bank cannot extend beyond the limit now shown but it is possible that there
may be a slight extension to the west. This, however, cannot be more than 20 miles as there is a well-
sounded deeper area, of more than 4000 m. (2187 fm.), between the bank and the nearest depths of
less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.) to the west.

The least depth obtained during our two crossings of this Orkney Bank was 1185 m. (648 tm.) in
59° 02-2' S, 44° 33' W. Altogether, nineteen soundings of less than 2000 m. were obtained.

These facts, together with the new geological evidence, provide almost certain proof that the South
Orkney Islands are included in the main line of the Scotia Arc.

We suggested, in 1932, that the extension of the Arc westwards from the South Orkneys might be
found to consist of two parallel submarine ridges, and this assumption now appears to be correct.
From the evidence then available we also inferred that the main ridge lay between Coronation Island
and Clarence Island. However, the many new soundings now available (especially east and south of
the line of connexion) make it almost certain that it is the southern fold which represents the main
line of the Arc, and that it connects the South Orkneys direct with the Trinity Peninsula of Graham
Land. The northern ridge, which comprises the South Shetland Islands, Elephant Island and Clarence
Island lies close to the main connexion, but at its eastern end fades out into deep water at the meridian
of 48° W. In the light of our recent work it also appears more likely that the two areas of over 5000 m.
(2734 fm.) in depth, which lie between the folds, are part of a continuous trough separating these
folds; they are shown thus connected on our present chart. The scale of this chart is small and all our
soundings in this area cannot be shown; we have, therefore, reproduced the South Orkney-Clarence
Island sector of the Arc on a scale which permits the insertion of all our soundings. This is shown in
Text-fig. 15, p. 76. The northern slope in the easternmost of the small 5000 m. trenches shown in this
figure is, perhaps, the steepest we have met. In approximately 61" 12' S, 48° W the depth altered
abruptly from 105 1 fm. (1922 m.) to 2874 fm. (5256 m.) in a distance of 3-8 miles. This is equivalent to
an angle of slope of approximately 40°. The deepest sounding obtained here was 3111 fm. (5689 m.),
about 8 miles to the north-west of the depth of 2874 fm.

Previously we described the South Orkney-Clarence Island sector as the last oceanic link in the
chain of the Scotia Arc, but it now becomes evident that we must consider as a whole the soundings
between the South Orkneys, the South Shetlands and Trinity Peninsula, together with the soundings
north of the South Shetlands.

Fifty miles north of these islands we again have evidence of folding. Two soundings of more than

76 DISCOVERY REPORTS

5000 m. (2734 fm.) were obtained here by the ' Discovery II ' and it is probable that these are connected
by a small trench. Forty-five miles approximately w^est-by-south of this is another small area where
depths of more than 5000 m. were obtained by the 'Meteor' in 1926. The area between these soundings
and those taken by us is completely unsounded and it is reasonable to suppose that further observations
will show that a long but narrow trench extends over the whole distance. North of our 5000 m.
soundings is a small bank, with depths of less than 2000 m. (1094 fm.). In fact, this area is very similar
in structure to the area north of the South Orkney Islands, except that the slope from the deep water
here appears to be slight but regular and the shelf to the north of the South Shetlands is fairly wide.

Fig. 15. The Scotia Arc. Positions of soundings and contours of the bottom for the section of the Arc
between the South Orkneys and Clarence Island.

Between King George Island and Elephant Island information is scanty, but such evidence as is
available no longer supports our original conception of a connexion here at depths of less than 250 m.
(137 fm.); it now appears more likely that the average depth of water on the ridge is less than 500 m.
(273 fm.), with a small bank of less than 250 m. in the centre. To the north of Elephant Island one
line of soundings, however, showed that the rise from 1872 fm. (3423 m.) to 151 fm. (276 m.) was at
an angle of approximately 13°.

If we now consider the contours of the Bransfield Strait in conjunction with those of the bottom west
of Clarence Island it will be found that the deeper water of the strait can be traced, by means of the
looom. (547 fm.) contours, to a position to the north of Coronation Island, South Orkneys. Admittedly,
the trough south of Clarence Island is very narrow, but there can be little doubt that it exists. The
average depth of water on the ridge south of the trough is less than 1000 m. for a large part of its
length; it seldom exceeds 2000 m. (1094 fm.) in depth and there is an extensive area south of Clarence
Island where the soundings are less than 500 m. (273 fm.). The least depth determined by us on this

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 77

southern ridge was 305 m. (167 fm.) in 61° 36' S, 53° 35' W. In tiie Bransfield Strait many new
soundings have made Uttle difference in the general outhnes of the bottom, but in our present bathy-
metric chart (PI. XXIV) we have introduced a contour at 1500 m. (820 fm.) in order to show more
clearly the deeper parts of the basin south of King George Island and south of Gibbs Island. It is
now apparent that the width of the trough south of Bridgeman Island is much less than we had hitherto
supposed, but there is no doubt of the continuity of the basin at depths between 1000 and 1500 m.

On the northern side of the Strait it will now be seen that the 250 m. (137 fm.) contour enters all the
bays and straits on the southern side of the South Shetland Islands; in two instances, depths of more
than 500 m. (273 fm.) occur just inside the entrance to a strait. Short slopes of considerable magnitude
exist off this side of the islands, and details of some of these will be given when we consider the
application of our soundings to the various surveys carried out by the 'Discovery II'.

Unfortunately we still lack evidence from soundings whether Bridgeman Island is connected with
King George Island (see Herdman, 1932, p. 230). Such further soundings as have been obtained
add but little to our previous knowledge, but in view of the opinion given by Tyrrell (1945), that from
its geological structure Bridgeman Island may be considered to be an island of the South Shetland
Group, we have now shown the 500 m. (273 fm.) contour as running south of this island.

SOUNDINGS DURING HYDROGRAPHICAL SURVEYS

The 'Discovery II' has been engaged mainly in oceanographical work, and little time could be
allotted to hydrographic survey. Usually about a month in each commission was available for
surveying in the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands, and it was often possible to spend a few days
in such work elsewhere when opportunities arose. In the Dependencies it was decided that the
method of ' running survey ' would be most suitable having regard to the time available, the imperfection
of existing charts, and the great extent of the coastline in the Dependencies. By this method a skilled
navigator can obtain excellent results, and much ground can be covered in a short time.

The immense value of echo sounding during this type of work was clearly demonstrated during the
running survey of the South Sandwich Islands by the 'Discovery IT in 1930. A full description of
this survey has already been given by Kemp & Nelson (193 1). In subsequent years the ' Discovery II '
carried out a complete running survey of the South Orkney Islands and made very considerable
progress with a survey of the South Shetland Islands by the same method — work which could not
have been attempted without continuous echo soundings, on account of the numerous off-shore dangers
common to nearly all islands in this part of the world.

At the time of the South Sandwich and the main South Orkneys surveys the 'Discover}^ 11' was
fitted only with 'listening' type echo-sounding equipment, with which the maintenance of a proper
sounding routine entailed long hours of tiring work. Although some preliminary work had been done
in 1929-30 the main South Shetlands Survey was not begun until December 1934, by which time the
automatic recorder had been fitted to the deep-water set. Shallow soundings during this season still
required the use of the ' listening ' gear, but its use could be restricted to the minimum necessary for
entering or leaving an anchorage or when shoal water was met with on passage round the islands.
When the survey of the South Shetlands was continued in December 1936 both deep and shallow
echo-sounding sets were fully automatic.

Since the fitting of the deep-water recorder other running surveys carried out by the ' Discovery II '
include work on the three northernmost of the Balleny Islands (in 1936 and 1938), the examination of
the neighbourhood of Tristan da Cunha and various passages through the lesser known channels of
Magellan Strait. Many little known or imperfectly surveyed Antarctic and sub-Antarctic islands were

78 DISCOVERY REPORTS

circumnavigated and deptlis approaching the Antarctic continent were determined, in March 1939,
in the meridian of Greenwich, when it was also possible to make a rough survey of the ice barrier and
coastline between this meridian and that of 4° E. Additions were also made to our previous work
around South Georgia. The lines of soundings in the Ross Sea in 1936, and between 1936 and 1939
across the Discovery Bank (in approximately 42° S, 1° E) cannot, perhaps, be classed strictly as
hydrographic surveys; reference to this work is made in a later section.

For the purpose of this report it is not necessary to describe the various surveys in their full detail.
A short account of the work in each of the more important regions will, perhaps, suffice to give some
idea of the value of echo sounding at these times.

SOUTH ORKNEYS SURVEY

A very complete account of the running survey of 1933 and of the preliminary work leading up to it
has been given by Marr (1935). The 'Discovery' made a short visit to Signy Island in 1927, and in
193 1 the 'Discovery II' made some observations on the west and north sides of Coronation Island.
The principal survey was undertaken by the latter ship in a period of 28 days beginning on 2 January
1933, during which about 2250 soundings were made, mostly with the Pattern 751 'listening' type
shallow-water set. Later on the ' Discovery II ' made two further short visits in April 1934 and
February 1937. On this last occasion (which was subsequent to the publication of Marr's report) the
south coasts of the islands were free from ice and in the nine days available much was done towards
the completion of the survey. Continuous soundings were taken with both recorders, and records
representing some 41 hours of steaming (or, approximately, 240 miles) were obtained. The various
tracks of the ship during this period of continuous sounding are shown in Text-fig. 3 c, p. 46. Each
record has a number, and reference to Appendix II of this report will provide fuller details.

For further details of the South Orkney surveys reference should be made to Marr. All that need
be said here is that the shelf surrounding these islands (where the majority of soundings were taken
with the shallow-water set) offers an interesting comparison with that of other islands comprising the
Scotia Arc. At South Georgia, for instance, depths on the western side of the island are comparatively
shallow over a fairly wide coastal shelf and the bottom is certainly more regular than on the eastern
side. Here there are a number of fjords and glaciers, and depths of considerably more than 250 m.
(137 fm.) are often found. The coastal shelf is narrower and much more irregular, with a greater
mean depth.

Of the various islands comprising the South Sandwich Group only one, Leskov Island, rises
sharply from moderate depths. At the remainder there is generally a narrow but shallow coastal shelf,
although in certain places where there are signs of comparatively recent volcanic activity, moderately
deep water is found close to land. The submarine crater in Douglas Strait, to which we have already
made reference, is, perhaps, the most interesting example of these exceptions.

The coastal shelf around the South Orkneys is, perhaps, the most outstanding example of the
varying features of these shelves in the whole Arc. The islands themselves are rugged in character
and it might well be expected that considerable variations in depth would occur in the various straits
and harbours, and off the coasts. With only a few exceptions such conditions are not found. In general
the coastal shelf, straits and harbours are shallow, although two small deeper areas exist south-east of
Signy Island and north of Larsen Island; the latter has a maximum depth, so far determined, of
348 fm. (636 m.) in a position approximately i mile north-east of Melsom Rocks (see British Admiralty
Chart No. 1775 — in Marr, 1935). On the northern side of the islands the coastal shelf, at depths of
less than 250 m. (137 fm.), extends at the most for some 3 or 4 miles and the slopes away to deep water
are considerable.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 79

On the southern side of the South Orkneys, however, we find a coastal shelf considerably wider
than is usual around the islands in the Arc. The shelf, as determined by the 250 m. (137 fm.) contour,
extends for some 15 or 20 miles south of the islands, but it is the extension beyond here of depths
between 250 m. (137 fm.) and 500 m. (273 fm.) which is, perhaps, one of the most interesting features
in these parts. The 500 m. contour extends south to the latitude of 62° S and, as will be seen from
our bathymetric chart (PI. XXIII) of the Scotia Arc, a wide area is thus included. Furthermore, there
is a very gentle slope from here to the 1000 m. (547 fm.) contour, and it is only then that a moderate
slope to the greater depths occurs.

The extent of the coastal shelf in relation to the South Shetland Islands, to the survey of which we
shall shortly refer, is again different to those already mentioned. To the north of the islands there is
a comparatively wide shelf where depths do not exceed 250 m. (137 fm.), but over almost the whole
length of the Bransfield Strait moderately deep water is found close to the south of nearly all the
islands. In the southern part of the straits which separate the various islands, and in Admiralty and
King George Bays, it will be seen (PI. XXIV) that depths of more than 250 m. (137 fm.) extend in
a northerly direction for some distance. In two instances the 500 m. (273 fm.) depth contour enters
the Strait and the slopes here are among the steepest we have met. Nearly all the islands appear to
be steep -to both on the southern side and in the various straits. Admiralty Bay resembles a fjord and
moderately deep water extends almost to its head, but King George Bay is in general much more
shallow. The shelf on the northern side of the group is generally flat, and the slopes away to deep

water are gentle.

SOUTH SHETLANDS SURVEY

In 1927 the 'Discovery' carried out some preliminary work on the survey of the South Shetlands,
but the number of soundings taken was small. Between December 1930 and March 193 1 the
' Discovery II ' was working in this area and considerable progress was made with a running survey of
Livingston and Snow Islands. A total of 1432 soundings was taken around the western end
of the South Shetlands and in the Bransfield Strait, to which reference has already been made
in our earlier report (Herdman, 1932). In December 1934 and January 1935 further work by
the same ship completed the survey of the islands, with the exception of the eastern half of King
George Island. Continuous soundings were taken whenever possible with the 'Acadia' recorder, and
the records obtained totalled 140 hours of steaming. The speed of the ship varied considerably
with the ever-changing conditions of this survey, but it can safely be said that during this time
we recorded soundings continuously over not less than 600 miles of the sea bed. In addition to these
soundings the 'listening' type shallow-water set was used when entering or leaving a harbour or
anchorage, and as a relief to the deep-water set when it became necessary to clean the hammer or
make a small repair. Every effort was made to do this in depths at which the shallow machine could
provide an alternative, but breakdowns did not always occur at perhaps the most convenient times.
Some 1600 soundings were taken with the shallow-water set during the thirty-one days occupied on

the survey.

The remaining work on King George Island was begun in December 1936 and, as before, continued
for a month. The weather was bad throughout and it was not possible to finish the survey, although
all that remained uncharted was a few miles of the north coast of the island. The part that remains
unsurveyed, however, would be difficult of access by ship, even in the best weather. In fact, it may be
said that a running survey along the northern coasts of the South Shetlands requires almost perfect
weather, and even with this it would be extremely difficult. The shallow-water echo-sounding set
was now fully automatic and continuous soundings were thus obtained from both shallow- and deep-
water instruments. The records totalled 120 hours of steaming and represent, very approximately,

8o DISCOVERY REPORTS

a survey of not less than 500 miles of the bottom. Owing to the thick weather prevalent this season
not all these runs could be used for the survey charts, but although they were not accurate enough for
a hydrographic survey certain sounding runs, made on dead reckoning, have been of considerable aid
in the construction of our present bathymetric chart of this area. The ship's tracks during the periods
of continuous soundings in 1934-5 ^^'^^ 1936-7 will be found in Text-fig. 4, p. 47.

With the exception of Nelson Strait, which is comparatively wide throughout its length, the straits
between the islands of the South Shetlands Group are usually narrower at their northern ends.
Moderately deep water is found in all the southern entrances, and throughout the straits, but the
northern entrances are all shallow. In some instances they are unnavigable even by small ships.
Rocks and reefs abound here, and there are strong currents.

In the straits themselves and around the southern coasts of the various islands there is little or no
coastal shelf of shallow water, and the slopes up to the land are considerable. In McFarlane Strait,
which lies between Livingston and Greenwich Islands, there are depths of more than 500 m. (273 fm.)
in the southern entrance, and the 250 m. (137 fm.) contour extends for some 7 or 8 miles towards the
northern entrance. Depths of more than 100 fm. (182 m.) were recorded for a further 3 miles in a
northerly direction and only in one place, off Yankee Harbour in Greenwich Island, is there any
resemblance to a coastal shelf. Here, a shallow shelf, with depths of less than 40 fm. (73 m.), stretches
out for about a mile from the harbour entrance, but the slope away from this to the deeper water is
considerable. The angle of descent averages from 15 to 18", with a maximum slope of 26^ Yankee
Harbour itself is of interest as, apparently, there is a bar at the entrance, with considerably deeper
water in the anchorage.

The southern part of English Strait, which separates Greenwich Island from Roberts Island, is not
more than i| miles wide, but the width increases towards the centre of the strait before narrowing
again for the northern entrance. A narrow trough, more than 250 m. (137 fm.) in depth, runs up the
strait almost to the numerous small islands which infest the northern entrance. The coasts of both
Greenwich and Roberts Islands fall away sharply into this trough for some miles, but with the widening
of the strait into Discovery Bay the deeper water continues north close to Roberts Island. The
average slope of the eastern side of this trough appears to be about 14°.

The topography of the bottom of Nelson Strait, which lies between Roberts and Nelson Islands,
differs considerably from that of the others. The strait is wide throughout, with a minimum width of
6i miles, and the coastal shelf on the eastern side of Roberts Island extends for some 3 or 4 miles.
The northern entrance, unlike those of the other straits, appears to be remarkably free from dangers,
although there are strong currents and some tide-rips. Depths of more than 250 m. (137 fm.) are
found on the eastern side of the strait, and this moderately deep trough then curves to the north-west
towards the coast of Roberts Island. The western coast of Nelson Island is steep-to, and in a position
a few miles south of Harmony Cove there is a small but moderately deep hole with a maximum depth,
so far determined, of 324 fm. (593 m.). The slope into this hole from the south-east is approximately

23r-

With the approaches to Fildes Strait, between Nelson and King George Island, there is a marked
change in the character of the bottom topography. South of Nelson Island there is a moderately wide
coastal shelf and, although it is penetrated by depths of more than 250 m. (137 fm.) in the approaches
to Fildes Strait and in Admiralty and King George Bays, this shelf continues along the whole south
coast of King George Island. In the approaches to Fildes Strait, which in itself is only navigable by
boats, and that with difficulty, depths of more than 250 m. (137 fm.) extend over a wide area, and are
found moderately close to both shores. The slopes here are slight.

Admiralty Bay, in King George Island, reverts more to the character of the straits at the western

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 81

end of the South Shetlands and closely resembles a fjord. A trough with depths of more than 250 m.
(137 fm.) extends almost to the head of the bay and although the 500 m. (273 fm.) contour along the
south coast of the island lies several miles south of the entrance, soundings of more than 500 m.
(273 fm.) have been obtained over a distance of 2 miles on a northerly course, just inside the entrance
to the bay. The slope down from the coastal shelf at the western side of the entrance is considerable.
On a course round Telefon Rocks into the centre of the trough the soundings increased from 35 to
220 fm. (64 to 402 m.) in 0-45 mile; this is equivalent to a slope of 25" and, since it is probable that
our course was not at 90° to the line of the contours, the actual slope may well be a few degrees
greater.

Farther to the east the 250 m. contour along the southern coast of King George Island swings north
towards King George Bay and there appears to be a comparatively narrow trough of this depth
extending about a mile into the bay. The slopes, however, are quite gentle and the greater part of the
bay appears to be reasonably shallow. Continuing round the coast of King George Island to Cape
Melville we find that the coastal shelf, with the exception of a few shallow indentations, remains fairly
wide. To the east of King George Island we had assumed (Herdman, 1932) that a ridge with depths
of less than 250 m. (137 fm.) existed between this island and Elephant Island (see p. 76). Our more
recent work makes this assumption doubtful, and it is now considered more likely that the 250 m.
contour swings north about 15 miles east of Cape Melville and then continues round the northern
side of the island.

On the northern side of the South Shetlands there is a wide submarine shelf of less than 250 m.
(137 fm.) in depth. It is generally quite flat, although the continuous sounding records occasionally
show a sharp submarine peak suddenly rising some 150 to 200 ft. from it. One such peak, near Table
Island, rose 198 ft. (Record XXX/34) from a level bottom of 57 fm. (104 m.) in less than a minute
and normal soundings of more than 50 fm. (91 m.) were again being obtained within i^ min. As the
speed of the ship was 3^ knots this was equivalent to an upward slope of nearly 42'. These peaks,
perhaps, are only to be expected, for, in sharp contrast to the southern side of the group, the northern
coasts of the South Shetland Islands are infested with small islets and sunken rocks. As we have
already stated, navigation is extremely difficult, even in fine weather, and for our running survey it
was normally necessary to keep well offshore. The term 'foul', used in many places on the British
Admiralty Chart of these regions (No. 3205), is an accurate description of these coasts.

The survey of 1936-7 finished with an examination of Gibbs, Aspland, Eadie and O'Brien Islands,
though these are not strictly part of the South Shetland Group. These islands lie in a group about
20 miles south-by-west of Elephant Island, and our survey in February 1937 showed that Aspland,
Eadie and O'Brien Islands lie together, in a north and south line, at the western side of the group.
Gibbs Island, which is the largest in the group, lies in an east and west direction. Narrow Island,
previously shown as a separate island near Gibbs Island, does not appear to exist. It is probable that
it has been confused with a low conical hill connected to Gibbs Island by a sand spit some 2 miles in
length which runs out in a south-easterly direction. Continuous soundings were taken around Gibbs
Island, and close to Aspland Island, for a total of 18 hr. in two days, and these represent a survey of
52 miles of the sea bed (see Text-fig. 5a, p. 49). Considerable alterations were made to the previous
conception of the outlines of the various islands comprising the group, and the soundings showed that
all the islands were steep-to. The slopes, however, were moderate in comparison with those generally
recorded in the South Shetlands.

82 DISCOVERY REPORTS

BALLENY ISLANDS

In the Discovery Committee's programmes hydrographic survey has been concerned mainly with
the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands, but when time and conditions permitted every opportunity
was taken to examine little known or badly charted land in other regions. Among the most important
of these miscellaneous running surveys was that of the three northernmost islands of the Balleny
Group. These islands, the more northerly of which is situated in about 66° 35' S, 162° 30' E, were, up
to 1936, very imperfectly known, and there was considerable doubt about their correct position. They
have been sighted on several occasions since their discovery in 1839 but, with the conditions of pack-
ice, fog and bad weather which normally obtain here, a close approach was not possible.

In February 1936, while returning from the Ross Sea, the ' Discovery II ' found the Balleny Group
clear of ice. A running survey was begun and an attempt made to land on Borradaile Island, but with
the onset of thick weather it became necessary to abandon both the survey and the attempt to make
a landing. There were no signs of improvement in the weather on the following day, and with fuel
running low it was essential to continue on passage to Australia. Continuous soundings, however,
had been obtained for 8 hr. during the clear weather, representing a distance run of 47 miles, and
the tracks of the ship during this period are shown in Text-fig. ^b, p. 46.

During the second circumpolar cruise of the ' Discovery II ', in 1937-8, a further attempt was made
to complete the survey of the Balleny Islands. Approaching the group from the direction of Adelie
Land, in January 1938, it was found that the northernmost islands were clear of ice, and as the weather
was fine the running survey was resumed at the point where it had been abandoned in 1936. On
this occasion the weather remained clear and it was possible to complete the circumnavigation of
Young, Borradaile and Buckle Islands. Pack-ice to the southward prevented us from reaching Sturge
Island, but the island was clearly visible at a distance of about 17 miles, and it was possible to fix its
position approximately with relation to the remainder of the group. As our circumpolar cruise was,
of necessity, being worked to a fairly rigid timetable, we were unable to remain at the Balleny Islands
for more than two days. In that time, however, the ship covered a distance of 145 miles in 29 hr. of
survey, and continuous soundings were taken throughout this period. As with the earlier work the
tracks of the ship are shown in Text-fig. 3 b, p. 46, together with an indication of the likely trend of the
more important depth contours.

The Balleny Islands lie approximately in a line from north-west to south-east, and form the crest of
a narrow ridge rising abruptly from the southern end of the Macquarie Rise, which connects the
Antarctic Continent with Australia.^ The general level of the bottom near the islands varies between
2500 and 3000 m. (1367 and 1641 fm.), and on the western side the slopes up to the group are consider-
able. One of our lines of soundings crossed the ridge about 3I miles north of Young Island, and the
angle of slope from the west was 13^°. So far as can be ascertained at present Young Island is steep-to
on both sides, and the slopes up to the land from 2000 m. (1094 fm.) correspond in the west to that
determined north of the island. To the east the slopes are much less, and from one of 11° at the
northern end decrease steadily to 6° off Cape Douglas.

1 On the U.S. Chart of Antarctica (see p. 67) a possible connexion between New Zealand and the Macquarie Rise is also
shown, the link having been based, apparently, on one sounding of 1244 fm. (2275 m.). From a close examination of our lines
of soundings in this area and a study of the hydrological data, it is not possible either to confirm or deny the existence of such
a link, although the evidence from the soundings would tend to show that this sounding is more likely to be an isolated peak.
Deacon (1937, p. 114), in his. discussion of the distribution of the bottom water, considers that the hydrological conditions
existing in the deep basin of the Tasman Sea may be due either to the basin being shut off by a ridge, or caused by the rugged
nature of the bottom topography in this region. On the evidence now available it appears, therefore, that the existence of
a connexion between New Zealand and the Macquarie Rise is doubtful.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 83

Buckle Island appears to lie athwart the ridge. At the south-western corner of the island the slope
to moderate depths is greater than off Young Island, ly"" being the approximate angle, and corre-
sponding to this we find that north of Cape Davis, on the eastern side, the slopes are approximately
I2|°. North and east of the island the descent to deeper water appears to be moderate.

No soundings were obtained on a direct line between Borradaile and Buckle Islands, but from the
evidence of the line of soundings a few miles to the east it may be suggested that the ridge is continuous
between these islands at depths of less than 500 m. (273 fm.). From the soundings obtained south-east
of Buckle Island it appears probable that there is also a similar connexion with Sturge Island.

TRISTAN DA CUNHA GROUP
(Tristan da Cunha 37° 06' S, 12° 18' W)

In November 1933 the 'Discovery II' approached Tristan da Cunha from the north. Continuous
soundings were taken with the 'Acadia' recorder from 36° 07' S, 12° 31-5' W to the anchorage,
a distance of 57 miles. At the beginning of the run the bottom was comparatively level at depths varying
between 2000 and 2100 fm. (3658 and 3840 m.), and this condition persisted to within a distance of
approximately 12 miles from the island. From this point soundings shoaled continuously, though at
times with considerable irregularity in the bottom, to a depth of approximately 1650 fm. (3017 m.).
The slope now became much steeper, and from a depth of 1079 fm. (1973 m.) the 100 fm. (183 m.) line
was reached in a distance of 2-9 miles; equivalent to an average slope of i8^°. A maximum slope of
25° was recorded over a distance of 0-4 miles, between the depths, approximately of 350 and 165 fm.
(658 and 302 m.). We have already referred to this slope (p. 54), which was one of the longest over
which we were able to obtain continuous soundings, and the profile of the last 33 miles of the approach
is shown in Text-fig. 9, p. 55.

On leaving the anchorage our course lay north-west, then west-by-south and, after reaching deep
water, approximately south (see Text-fig. 3^, p. 46). Continuous soundings were again taken and the
run continued to Nightingale Island and thence to Inaccessible Island, a total distance from Tristan
da Cunha of 45 miles. West of Tristan da Cunha the ' Discovery II ' passed just over i mile off-shore
and the minimum sounding obtained was 130 fm. (238 m.). Shortly afterwards the depth increased
rapidly from 171 fm. (313 m.) to 1044 fm. (1909 m.) and for the next 4 miles the bottom remained very
irregular at depths varying between 956 and 11 16 fm. (1748 and 2041 m.); there was then a gradual
rise towards Nightingale Island, where there is moderately deep water close off-shore. Between
Nightingale and Inaccessible Islands the bottom was again very irregular, with a maximum depth of
597 fm. (1092 m.) about mid-way between the two islands. The slope of the bottom in either direction
from here was moderately steep.

At Inaccessible Island depths of 100 fm. (183 m.) were obtained at a distance of 2-2-5 "^i^^s from
the land, both on the run across from Nightingale Island and on the line of departure to the south-west.

Tristan da Cunha, Nightingale and Inaccessible Islands are all steep-to, the two former to a greater
degree. At Tristan da Cunha, on the approach from the north, depths of 100 fm. (183 m.) were
reached at a distance of 1 7 miles from the land and on the departure to the north-west the edge of
this narrow coastal shelf lay at a distance of 1-3 miles off-shore. To the west of the Island, as we have
already stated, soundings were over 100 fm. at a distance of 1-15 miles from the land. Littlehales
(1932, p. 21) has stated that submarine slopes of 33^° have been found at Tristan da Cunha; we did
not record any slope of this magnitude but, in view of the evidence of our soundings about the nature
of the bottom to the north and west of the island, such slopes may well exist.

84 DISCOVERY REPORTS

MARION AND PRINCE EDWARD ISLANDS

(Marion Island, 46° 49' S, 37° 49' E;

Prince Edward Island, 46° 36' S, 37° 57' E)

In April 1935, the 'Discovery II' visited Marion and Prince Edward Islands, and during a partial
examination of the group continuous soundings were taken over a period of 10 hr., representing
a distance over the bottom of approximately 65 miles. The track of the ship during this work is shown
in Text-fig. 3^/, p. 46.

The islands appear to lie on a submarine plateau and are steep-to, with considerable slopes from
seawards at certain points; the maximum depth recorded over the distance of 12 miles between the
two islands was 142 fm. (260 m.). South of the south-west corner of Marion Island the sounding was
896 fm. (1639 '^O ^^ ^ distance of 3-5 miles from land, which is equivalent, approximately, to a slope
of 14°. From this position, on a course almost parallel to the south coast of the island, soundings
shoaled steadily to a depth of 174 fm. (318 m.) in a position 3 miles south of the south-east corner of
the island. This coastal shelf appears to extend for at least 3 miles east of Marion Island, but its full
extent was not determined.

East of Prince Edward Island the bottom is irregular and there are some very steep slopes. At one
point, parallel to the coast at East Cape, the depth increased from 19 to 197 fm. (35 to 360 m.) in
0-5 miles, which is equivalent to an average slope of I9|°; the major portion of this slope, however,
was at an angle of 28°.

BOUVET ISLAND
(54° 26' S, 3° 24' E)

During a series of cruises from Cape Town in 1938-9 further soundings were obtained at Bouvet
Island on two occasions. Altogether, continuous soundings totalled lof hr. and covered about 80 miles
of the sea bed. As we had already suspected from the soundings taken here in October 1930 during
a running survey and the search for Thompson Island (Herdman, 1932), the bottom was found to be
very confused and irregular at depths less than 1300 fm. (2377 m.). There is a sharp rise (in one instance
at an angle of approximately 20°) to a narrow submarine shelf of about 2 miles in width, from which
the island itself rises fairly steeply. A section of the continuous sounding record taken in 1938, when
approaching the island from the north, is shown in PI. XXIX, fig. i, and provides ample proof of the
varied bottom in this neighbourhood.

MAGELLAN STRAIT

Between November 193 1 and November 1934, the 'Discovery II' made eight passages through
Magellan Strait, but only on three occasions was the passage by way of the main channel throughout.
The Cockburn Channel entrance to the western part of the main strait was used three times (October
1932, March and November 1934) and the entrance by Otway Bay and Sea Shell or Abra Channel
once (December 1933). In October 1934 another route from the main strait to the Cockburn Channel
was examined ; this was by way of Pedro Sound, the Ackwalisnan Canal and Dynely Sound.

In December 1933 the 'Acadia' recorder unfortunately was out of action, but a full series of
soundings was obtained at intervals of about 4 min. with the ' listening' sets, through Otway Bay and
Sea Shell or Abra Channel. In March 1934 we were still without the recorder, but a good series of
depths was determined over the whole length of the Cockburn Channel and into the main strait. In
October of the same year the ' Acadia ' recorder was again in use and we were able to obtain a continuous
record over a period of io|- hr. during the passage from the main channel to sea via the Ackwalisnan
Canal. On our return a month later the recorder was used for a total of 14 hr. and continuous soundings
obtained from a position 55° 27' S, 73° 40' W to the main strait, via the Cockburn Channel.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY IN VESTK; AT I ONS, 1932-1939 85

All these channels are narrow and comparatively deep, with an extremely irregular bottom topo-
graphy. At the northern end of Pedro Sound a maximum sounding of 232 fm. (424 m.) was obtained
4 cables oflF-shore, in a position where the width of the sound was only 1-15 miles. In the Cockburn
Channel depths often exceeded 300 fm. (549 m.) and the maximum sounding of 377 fm. (691 m.)
which was obtained here in October 1932 was in a position where the channel is barely 3 miles in
width. The bottom here is extremely varied, and when the continuous record was taken, in November
1934, slopes of 10-15° were common; in one place the depth increased by 132 fm. (241 m.) in 3 min.,
which is equivalent, approximately, to a slope of 16°.

The entrance to the main strait by way of Otway Bay and Sea Shell or Abra Channel is very similar to
those already described. The seaward entrance is shallow but once among the numerous islands
through which the channel runs depths greater than 400 fm. (732 m.) were found over a considerable
distance. The maximum sounding obtained by the 'Discovery II' in December 1933 was 478 tm.
(784 m.), at a point where the channel is barely 2 miles in width. It is probable that the bottom here is
also very varied but, as already stated, we were not able to obtain a continuous record on this passage.

SOUNDINGS OFF ANTARCTICA IN THE MERIDIAN OF GREENWICH

Between July 1938 and March 1939 a series of cruises was made by the ' Discovery II ' to the south
and west of Cape Town (see Text-fig. 18, p. 89). By these cruises throughout winter and summer,
over the same area, it was hoped to obtain valuable information on the seasonal changes across the
Southern Ocean, between South Africa and the ice-edge. On each cruise the ship steamed to the
latitude of 40° S, on or near the Greenwich meridian and then southward as far as possible. She
then worked across the ice-edge to the meridian of 20° E and returned to Cape Town approximately
on this meridian. Routine soundings were taken on all cruises, since the course was never quite the
same for each cruise, and the recorder was used whenever possible. In the first five cruises the
'Discovery 1 1' was stopped by pack-ice far from the Antarctic Continent; but in the sixth cruise
(January 1939) she reached a point some 19 miles north of the 'barrier', and on the seventh (in early
March) she reached the barrier and sighted land.

On the sixth cruise a continuous record was begun in 68° 55-2' S, 02° 05-3' E at a depth of 2121 fm.
(3859 m.), and for a distance of 42 miles southward there was a slight but steady upward slope, not
exceeding 2°, which reached a minimum depth of 846 fm. (1547 m.) in approximately 69° 35' S,
02° 05' E, 3 miles north of the ice-edge. In this last 3 miles the bottom became more irregular, with
some increases in depth, but had begun to shoal again shortly before the ice was reached in 69° 37-9' S,
02° 07-8' E. Here the depth was 1052 fm. (1924 m.), and from the soundings obtained 18 miles south
of this position on the next cruise it would appear that this steady rise continues for some miles and
that there is finally a much steeper slope up to the continent.

On the last of the repeated cruises (in March 1939) the barrier was first sighted in 69° 15' S,
00° i2-i'E and the sounding close alongside the northernmost ice-cape was 11 14 fm. (2037 m.).
Continuous soundings had been commenced some miles north of this point, in a depth of 15 18 fm.
(2776 m.), and records were obtained along the barrier to a position in 69° 05' S, 04° 30' E, a distance
of 140 miles. The recorder was run for 28 hr. during two days and the track of the ship is shown in
Text-fig. 16 (p. 86).

The depth shoaled fairly rapidly towards the barrier in this longitude, the slope of the bottom from
seaward averaging gV, and this slope continued towards the land. In 69° 58-2' S, 01° 31-0' E the ship
was probably about 5 miles from land and the sounding was 105 fm. (192 m.). As will be seen from the
track in Text-fig. 16 the course then lay to the north-east and the depth increased rapidly. When the

86 DISCOVERY REPORTS

'Discovery II' turned east, in approximately the longitude of 01^45' E the sounding was 648 fm.
(i 185 m.) and when she stood away from the ice during the hours of darkness the depth was 795 fm.
(1450 m.) in 69° 47-8' S, 02° 2i-i' E. Soundings remained variable on the return to the barrier on
the following day, although there was a sharp rise in the bottom at one place of 328 fm. (600 m.) in
approximately 3-5 miles. This rise occurred between the depths of 815 and 487 fm. (1491 and 891 m.).

Fig. 16. Track of ship along ice barrier and coast of Antarctica, between the longitudes of
0° 10' E and 4° 30' E. Continuous recording of soundings throughout.

Shortly after the return to the barrier the ship was forced to the north by a field of bergs surrounded
by heavy pack-ice, and soundings reached a maximum of loiofm. (1847 m.) in 69° 54-8' 8, 03° 32-1' E.
From this position the soundings again shoaled rapidly towards the land and after a steady slope
a depth of 60 fm. (no m.) was obtained 3 cables off-shore, in 70° 04-6' S, 03° 49-2' E. Land was
again approached a few miles farther east and the least sounding obtained was 1 17 fm. (214 m.). Course
was then altered to avoid pack-ice and to stand off the coast during the dark hours, but the weather
deteriorated rapidly during the night and it was not possible to resume the survey.

THE CONTINENTAL SHELF OF ANTARCTICA

This short survey of 140 miles of the ice barrier revealed the interesting fact that over this distance
there was virtually no continental shelf in the sense generally understood. Unfortunately, the pack-ice
which surrounds the Antarctic Continent throughout the greater part of the year in most sectors makes
the approach difficult, and it is only during late summer or autumn that ships can expect to close the
land. It is not possible, without much more information than we now possess, to forecast, even
remotely, the incidence of pack-ice, and thus any approach to the continent will remain for some years
largely a matter of chance. Aerial reconnaissance, however, would be of considerable assistance in
a clear ice year.

The information which has already been obtained from various approaches to the Antarctic Continent,
and from running surveys of some short sections of the coast, leads us to believe that in some places
the continental shelf is almost completely absent; one such area has just been described. Similar
conditions are to be found in other parts of the Atlantic sector, and over considerable lengths of the
coast between the meridians of 5° E and 60° E. There appears to be a wide shelf to seaward of the
coasts of the Weddell Sea, and off the South Shetlands and South Graham Land there is a marked
shelf, some 60-70 miles in width, which becomes wider as it continues south-west into the Bellings-
hausen Sea. No ship has ever reached the land between here and the eastern side of the Ross Sea,

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 87

but soundings obtained on the Pacific ice-edge suggest that a wide continental shelf exists in this
sector. No land has been seen to the south from the various ships which took these soundings, and
it may therefore be assumed that the shelf has a minimum width of 15 to 20 miles.

Off Marie Byrd Land and as far west as Cape Colbeck the bottom rises abruptly to a narrow shelf
which widens out into the shelf which extends over the whole area of the Ross Sea (see PI. XXV).
At Cape Adare, at the north-western corner of the Ross Sea, the bottom again rises sharply from deep
water to a narrow coastal shelf, and these conditions prevail to the west as far as the meridian of 158^ E.
Between this meridian and that of 130° E there is a wide area to seaward of the land where shallow
soundings obtain, and in January 1938 off Adelie Land the ' Discover}^ II ' took continuous soundings
with the 'Acadia' recorder between 63° 53-1' S, 135° i6-8' E and 66° 13-8' S, 139° 46-4' E. The
distance run was 170 miles, in approximately 19 hr., and the true course was south-east. Unfortu-
nately, the weather during the last 12 hr. of this run was overcast and there were intermittent heavy
snow squalls ; these conditions, together with the unreliability of the magnetic compasses due to the
close proximity of the South Magnetic Pole, made it impossible to assign positions for the soundings
which would be acceptable for plotting on the charts. However, the accuracy of the positions, which
were obtained by dead reckoning, is sufficient to prove the existence here of a wide continental
shelf.

The run in to the land commenced at depths of approximately 2200 fm. (4023 m.) and the bottom
remained fairly level at this average depth for about 40 miles. In approximately 64 S, 135^ 30' E the
character of the bottom began to change and depths became very irregular. Soundings in general
shoaled gradually to depths between 1200 and 1300 fm. (2195 and 2377 m.) during the next 60 miles
of the run, and then remained approximately at this level for some 15 miles farther to the south-east.
The bottom was still very irregular and there was no indication of a slope up towards land when,
unfortunately, the magnetic coil in the head of the transmitter fused. A new coil was fitted and
continuous soundings were resumed within an hour, but by this time the depth was 712 fm. (1302 m.)
and it was obvious from the record that the slope up to the continental shelf had commenced. The
edge of the shelf was reached in a distance of 3-65 miles from the resumption of soundings, at a depth
of 247 fm. (452 m.). This represents a slope of just over 7° on a line of approach which was probably
at an angle of 45° to the lines of the contours; the actual slope, measured at 90^ to the contours, will
almost certainly be greater.

After passing over the edge of the shelf which, at this point, lay in 65° 17-3' S, 138'' 19-5' E (50 miles,
approximately, north of Adelie Land), depths gradually increased to a maximum sounding of 335 fm.
(613 m.) in 65° 39' S, 139 08' E. From this position soundings shoaled fairly rapidly to a depth of
244 fm. (446 m.) in 65° 45' S, 139° 22' E and continued near this level until the deterioration of the
weather forced us to abandon the approach in approximately 66° 14' S, 139° 46' E. The sounding in
this position was 265 fm. (485 m.).

West of Adelie Land, as far as the meridian of 100^ E, the line of the coast is in considerable doubt,
but there is some slight indication of a fairly wide submarine shelf to seaward of the land. Between
100° E and 60° E the presence of a continental shelf is in general well established ; its width is variable
but gradually narrows towards the west. In 98° E it stretches out for at least 130 miles from the
continent, but off Kemp Land, in approximately 60° E, the seaward limit of the shelf lies not more
than 30 miles off the land.

Profiles, based on the continuous sounding records, have been drawn for the approach to the
continent in the meridian of Greenwich and also for the run in to Adelie Land; they are shown in
Text-fig. 17 (p. 88) and, in conformity with the profiles across the Scotia Sea and Arc, the vertical
scale is magnified 25 times.

88 DISCOVERY REPORTS

We do not propose, in this report, to discuss in detail this question of the continental shelf
surrounding Antarctica. The presence of a well-defined shelf only in certain places may be found to
be related closely to the existence, among others, of features such as the Kerguelen-Gaussberg Ridge

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I

.1000
METRES

f

p MILtS

^ .

60 R

.1111

75

.1000

METRES

/

looa

.2000

~v

z
o

\-
<

JOOO

y

/

zooa

.4000

,/'

b

Fig. 17. Approaches to Antarctica. Vertical scale, x 25. Positions of soundings are marked on the horizontal scales.
{a) Towards Adelie Land, on a south-easterly course. Continuous record from point marked R. Note wide continental
shelf in this area. (6) In the meridian of Greenwich. Continuous record for 35 miles. Very narrow continental shelf, (f) In
the longitude of 3° E. Bottom rises abruptly to the land from a depth of 1000 m. (547 fm.).

and the Scotia Arc. On the other hand, the width of the shelf may depend on the geological structure
of the continent and the incidence of large glaciers. In order to arrive at any conclusion, however,
about the relationship of the shelf with the various ridges which approach Antarctica from seaward, it
will be necessary to examine the many thousands of oceanic soundings taken by the Discovery Investi-
gations around the continent; it will, perhaps, be more suitable to revert to the continental shelf of
Antarctica when we consider these soundings. It is hoped to begin this work in the near future.

SOUNDINGS IN OTHER LOCALITIES

The majority of soundings taken during the work of the Discovery Committee (and all of these
outside the Atlantic sector) are from the 'Discovery II'. The principal tracks of this ship between
1932 and 1939 are shown in Text-fig. 18 (p. 89), and since soundings were taken at intervals of 8 or
9 miles throughout nearly all of these routes, it will easily be understood that they provide a very large
number of new oceanic soundings south of 40° S. These soundings, added to the existing data, might
justify the construction of a new bathymetric chart of the Southern Ocean. It is hoped to prepare
such a chart later on, but in view of recently published charts and the prospects of additional data,
it is thought better not to include it with the present report.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 89

30°

'■'''''■'"'■''^'''V''''''''"''^'' ''F

■'''■''''''''t

"T=T

60

90

/SOUTH
lERlC/

./ '■ 1^

JSTRALIA

■.■\ rr\'. .■\^.M..M'\'-'^'\TVT-^r^,-r-V-S' ^■^^ s\'sz

150°

W 180°E

150°

Fig. 18. Oceanic tracks of R.R.S. ' Discovery II ' between May 1932 and March 1939. With the exception of a few unimportant gaps these

tracks may be taken to represent lines of soundings.

90 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Certain features in our general oceanic sounding work, however, deserve attention in this report,
and among these are the recently discovered bank in the latitude of 42° S, close to the Greenwich
meridian, and a series of soundings in the Ross Sea. We should also mention the soundings on the
Kerguelen-Gaussberg Ridge.

DISCOVERY BANK

(Text-fig. 19)
The Discovery Bank was first located by the ' Discovery IT in May 1936. It was then crossed from
north to south after a sounding of 560 fm. (1024 m.) had been reported in a position 41 ° 50' S, 00° 01 7' E.
This comparatively shallow sounding followed a depth of 2287 fm. (4182 m.) obtained about 17 miles
to the north. Soundings were then taken more frequently and a bank of less than 1000 m. (547 fm.)
in depth was traced to the south for some 30 miles, the minimum depth obtained being 367 fm. (671 m.)
in 42° 05' S, 00° 06-2' E. Later in the same year a good line of soundings was obtained with the
recorder 14 miles east of the previous line. In the following year only one sounding, of 628 fm. (i 148 m.),
was obtained on the Bank,

The repeated cruises made by the ' Discovery II ' to the south and west of Cape Town in 1938 and
1939 (see p. 85) presented further opportunities to obtain soundings on this bank. On the seven
cruises which comprised this series the bank was crossed from north to south on five occasions and an
attempt was made to run a line of soundings from west to east, to obtain evidence of the probable
existence of two peaks, separated by moderately deep water. Unfortunately, bad weather prevented
the completion of this line, but reference to Text-fig. 19 will show that a north to south line run
subsequently leaves little doubt that two such peaks do exist. On the seventh cruise a line of soundings
was attempted from north to south, in the longitude of 02° 30' E, and, although soundings could not
be obtained underway, conditions were such that any depths of less than 1000 fm. (1828 m.) should
have been recorded.

The Discovery Bank lies in a stormy latitude and conditions are usually a severe hindrance to echo
sounding. In consequence there are some unavoidable gaps in our lines of soundings but despite the
adverse conditions agreement between the various lines was generally good.

Within a few weeks of our final run across the bank, the German ship ' Schwabenland ', on her
passage north from the ice barrier, obtained a series of soundings on the Discovery Bank, almost on
the meridian of Greenwich. Through the courtesy of the Hydrographer of the Navy we have now
obtained a list of these soundings, but unfortunately the positions given for the soundings in the
critical area are noted by the ship as not being entirely reliable, on account of bad weather. When
plotted, these soundings are not in agreement with our line of May 1936, which lies in approximately
the same longitude, but from a close examination of all the available data it is probable that, on account
of bad weather, our positions at this time are also not fully reliable, and that south of latitude 41° 30' S
our line should be plotted from 2 to 4 miles to the west of the position now shown. It seems likely
that the positions given for the ' Schwabenland ' soundings, between the latitudes of 43° S and 41° 30' S,
are some 3 to 4 miles north of their true position. Displacement to the west of our soundings and to
the south for the German observations would bring these results into line with the remainder of our
work on the bank but, with the exception of increasing slightly the north to south dimension of the
area less than 500 m. (273 fm.) in depth, to conform to that determined by the ' Schwabenland ',
there would be little to be gained by moving our line, especially as we lack the necessary data from
the ship's log-book to check further on the ' Schwabenland 's' positions.

In Text-fig. 19, which has therefore been compiled from our soundings only, the actual depths are
not given but the positions of the soundings are shown as dots. In most instances the contours, which

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 Qi

are in metres, have been determined directly from the 'Acadia' recorder, but it should be understood
that, when continuous soundings are thus being taken, many more depths than those shown could
have been plotted. For convenience in reading off the soundings from the record and determining
the positions, soundings have been plotted at intervals of five minutes of time, over such distance as
the record has been legible. It should, however, be remembered that with varying weather the speed
of the ship was not necessarily the same for each crossing and, consequently, that the distance between
soundings on different lines, being based on a fixed time interval, varies considerably.

Fig. 19. Discovery Bank, contours in metres. Positions of soundings shown as dots.

The rise of the bottom on the northern side of the Discovery Bank is fairly steep, the average slope
being approximately 10°. The maximum slope so far determined is approximately 12". On the southern
side the fall away to deep water is much less marked, the slope from the 1000 m. to beyond the 4000 m.
contour averaging approximately 3!°. The maximum slope barely exceeds 4°. The extent of the shallow
water on the western half of the bank appears to have been determined with reasonable accuracy and
depths of less than 1000 m. (547 fm.) cover an area of about 700 sq. miles. Two small areas with
depths of less than 500 m. (273 fm.) and a minimum so far determined of 457 m. (250 fm.) have been

92 DISCOVERY REPORTS

found on this side, and further soundings here may well show that these are part of a continuous ridge
across the top of this part of the bank, although, as noted above, the ' Schwabenland's' observations
suggest that this area of less than 500 m. (273 fm.) in depth may be more of a plateau than a ridge.
We have not obtained sufficient information to determine the extent of the shallow water on the
eastern half of the bank, though it seems probable that it extends some miles farther to the east. The
least depth found here was 390 m. (213 fm.).

Two attempts were made to dredge on the Discovery Bank and the second, in November 1938, was
successful. This was at St. 2493, in 42° 03-9' S, 00° 03-5' E, where three large rocks, a large number
of smaller rock fragments and a mass of pebbles were obtained from a depth of 472 m. (258 fm.).
Many of these pebbles were round and waterworn. All living organisms were smashed by the weight
of rocks and pebbles but it was evident that a large species of sea-urchin and two or three species of
Crinoid were common.

THE ROSS SEA
(PI. XXV)

Soundings taken by Rear-Admiral Byrd's ship the ' Bear of Oakland ' between the years 1933 and
1935 and by the 'Discovery II ' in 1936 have provided much valuable information on the topography
of the bottom of the Ross Sea. Prior to the work of these two ships our knowledge of the outlines of
the sea bed here was scanty, and the few bathymetric charts available were based on a small number of
scattered soundings, most of which were near the land on the western side, or were adjacent to the
Ross Ice Barrier.

The most recent bathymetric chart of the Ross Sea, on a scale comparable to that of our present
chart, is that of the American Geographical Society (1928). This map, of which sheets 3 and 4. cover
the Ross Sea, includes a depth contour at 500 m. (273 fm.). Maps of a more recent date which include
this area have been published, but they are on a much smaller scale, and the lack of a 500 m. contour
in the Australian map of Antarctica (see p. 67) for instance, prevents the inclusion of most of the
interesting features of the bottom topography of the Ross Sea. The U.S. Chart of Antarctica (see p. 67)
also shows no depth contour above 500 fm. (914 m.), but more use appears to have been made of
soundings taken by the ' Bear of Oakland '}

Most of the soundings taken by the ' Bear of Oakland ' were obtained during direct passages to and
from the Bay of Whales and while cruising to the north and east of Cape Colbeck. The list of soundings
also includes observations made during a cruise to meet the 'Discovery 11' (in approximately 72"" S,
171° W). Further soundings available from the same source were taken on the return of the ' Bear of
Oakland' from New Zealand in 1935, when a cruise was made towards McMurdo Sound and thence
south to Ross Island. From here the line of soundings ran across to the Bay of Whales, following
closely the face of the Ross Barrier.

The soundings obtained by the 'Discovery II' in 1936 are shown in black in PI. XXV and their
location was determined largely by the necessity for quick passages, to and from the Bay of Whales,
through the belt of pack-ice to the north of the Ross Sea. Some scientific work, however, was possible
near the Bay of Whales and in the neighbourhood of Ross Island, and the soundings thus obtained
have been of material aid in linking up our work with that of the ' Bear of Oakland '.

Our soundings are mostly in excellent agreement with those of the ' Bear of Oakland ' where the
two ships covered the same ground ; but they also provide new information which, when added to the

1 It is possible that the compilers of the Australian map did not have access to the full list of echo soundings taken by the
' Bear of Oakland '. These were published in manuscript form only, by the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, in October
1935. Reference in literature to this list does not appear to have been made other than by Roos (1937).

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 93

previous data, calls for some modifications of Roos's interpretation (1937) of the ' Bear of Oakland's'
soundings. Roos refers to the ' Pennell Bank' as extending right across the Ross Sea from north-west
to south-east; he also refers to the ' Iselin Bank', an isolated feature in approximately 72^ S, 177' W.
The conception of a shallow bank stretching across the Ross Sea from north-west to south-east
appears to have originated with the American Geographical Society's bathymetric map of 1928, and
the name 'Pennell Bank' for this feature was proposed by Griffith Taylor (193 1). From the evidence
now available it does not appear that this bank is continuous at depths less than 500 m. (273 fm.) across
the whole width of the Ross Sea. There is probably a wide area in the north-western part of the Ross
Sea where depths of less than 500 m. will be found, and it is highly probable that this is separated by
a distance of about 60 miles from two moderately long but narrow areas of less than 500 m. in depth
in the south-eastern part of the sea. Both ships obtained a few soundings of slightly less than 500 m.
(273 fm.) in this gap, but reference to our present bathymetric chart (PI. XXV) will show that there
can be little doubt of the break in the continuity of the 500 m. contour. At the same time there can be
no doubt that the general level of the bottom in the gap is above that of the south-western part of the
Ross Sea.

At the eastern side of the larger bank to the north-west of the Ross Sea there is a narrow ridge,
some 60 miles in length, where the soundings do not exceed 250 m. (137 fm.). Both the ' Discovery II '
and the ' Bear of Oakland ' ran along this ridge, the latter ship obtaining a minimum depth of 106 m.
(58 fm.) in 74° 27' 45" S, 179° 58' W. Since the existence of the original continuous bank across the
Ross Sea now is doubtful, we propose that the name 'Pennell Bank' can be appropriately used for
this Hmited area of less than 250 m. (137 fm.) in depth.

In our interpretation of the bottom relief in the region of the so-called ' Iselin Bank' we are of the
opinion that this feature is not an isolated bank as suggested by Roos. It seems more probable that it is
part of a considerable extension to the north, and finally to the north-east, of the wide shallow area in
this part of the Ross Sea.

The main axis of this large and comparatively shallow region now appears to lie more in a south-west
and north-east direction. To the west, between the bank and the Victoria Land Coast, there is a gully
with an average depth of between 600 and 700 m. (328-383 fm.) and to the south-west depths of over
750 m. (410 fm.) are found north of Ross Island; these depths continue east for some miles along the
face of the Barrier and it may well be that greater depths exist under the ice shelf itself.

It is, perhaps, on the eastern side of the Ross Sea that the greatest value attaches to the soundings
of the ' Bear of Oakland '. Before the work done by this ship the information available in this area
consisted of six soundings north of the latitude of 73° S and a few isolated depths of less than 300 fm.
(549 m.) off-shore between Discovery Inlet and Biscoe Bay. Consequently, our knowledge of the
topography of the bottom here was largely guesswork, but two excellent lines of soundings direct to
the Bay of Whales, and the run up north to meet the ' Discovery II ' in 72° S, have now provided
sufficient evidence on which to draw a series of depth contours.

It is now evident that, at its seaward limit, the Ross Sea shelf runs approximately in a north and
south direction between the latitudes of 72° S and 76° S. Over this distance the shelf is wide and the
slope from seaward is only moderately steep. Southward from the latitude of 76° S the trend of the
contours is almost in an east and west direction and the width of the shelf is reduced considerably;
there is also a marked increase in the angle of slope between the 2000 m. and 500 m. contours. Further
work by the 'Bear of Oakland' to the north-east of Cape Colbeck shows, as already noted by Roos,
that the shelf is reduced in width to barely 15 miles, with an even sharper slope from seaward.

There still remains much work to be done in the Ross Sea before a more accurate conception of the
bottom relief can be provided. Many more soundings are required between the latitudes of 73" and

94 DISCOVERY REPORTS

76° S, west of the meridian of 179° E, and there is a serious gap to the east of the Pennell Bank. Here,
between the 500 m. (273 fm.) and 3000 m. (1641 fm.) depth contours there is only one sounding in the
distance of about 100 miles which separates the lines of soundings taken by the ' Discovery II ' and the
' Bear of Oakland '. North of the Ross Barrier there is a large area, triangular in shape, where there are
no soundings between the series obtained by the 'Discovery IT in 1936.

Few soundings have been obtained oflF the coasts of Victoria Land. Such as have been taken,
however, suggest that this is a region of considerable interest, for in many places where the land slopes
steeply down to the sea the bottom appears to descend rapidly to the 500 m. (273 fm.) contour or
below. There is little or no shallow water for any distance from the coast, and just south of Terra Nova
Bay (in approximately 73° S) a depth of 350 fm. (640 m.) is shown on British Admiralty Chart No. 3206
approximately zh miles from the land. From the same source another sounding, near Cape Roberts
(in approximately 77° S), shows a depth of 313 fm. (572 m.) only 3 miles off-shore. OflF the Drygalski
Ice-tongue existing soundings indicate the existence of a narrow trench, with a depth of slightly over
1000 m. (547 fm.).

Despite these gaps it is probable that the main features of the bottom relief of the Ross Sea are
now tolerably well known ; yet the results of our hydrological and biological observations made in
the southern part of the sea are difficult to reconcile with our present interpretation of the bottom
topography.

Deacon (1937, p- 115) in his remarks on the hydrological observations in this area supports the
conception of a relatively shallow ridge, at depths less than 500 m. (273 fm.), between Cape Adare and
King Edward VII Land, but he also suggests that there can be no channel through this ridge near the
coast of Victoria Land. We have already shown that a continuous ridge at this depth across the Ross
Sea almost certainly does not exist, but soundings in the gap indicate that the depth here is generally
100 to 150 m. (55-82 fm.) less than that of the area immediately to the south-west. This rise from the
moderate depths of the southern part of the Ross Sea is probably sufficient to prevent the escape to
sea of the cold bottom water, but on the present evidence from soundings it is difficult to agree with
Deacon's suggestion that there is no deeper channel along the coast of Victoria Land. There can be
little doubt now that such a channel can be traced as far north as the latitude of 73° S, and although
there are only a few soundings north of this point it seems improbable that there can be any shallow
connexion between Victoria Land and the 500 m. bank between here and Cape Adare.

KERGUELEN-GAUSSBERG RIDGE

The Kerguelen-Gaussberg ridge extends over a wide area, in a south-easterly direction from the
island of Kerguelen to the Antarctic Continent. Rising on the average some 2500 m. (1367 fm.) above
the general level of the ocean bottom on either side, the ridge separates the Atlantic-Antarctic and
Australian-Antarctic basins. It exerts a profound influence on the hydrology of these regions of the
Southern Ocean.

Between Kerguelen and Heard Island the ridge is comparatively steep-to on the western side and
slopes away to deep water more gently in the east. South of latitude 55° S these conditions are
reversed and it is on the eastern side of the ridge that the slopes become abrupt. From this latitude
to that of 60° S the topography of the bottom is varied and there are two well-marked shallower areas.
One of these is Banzare Rise, on the western side of the main ridge, which was discovered by the
B.A.N. Z. Antarctic Research Expedition in 1929. The minimum depth determined by them, during
two crossings of the rise, was 351 fm. (642 m.), in 58° 50' S, 77° 44' E. The U.S. Chart of Antarctica
(No. 2562) and the Australian map of Antarctica both show a sounding of 103 fm. (188 m.) on the
Banzare Rise; the source of this information, however, is not known to us.

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-1939 95

On the extreme eastern side of the main ridge, south of latitude 55^8 there appears to be a fairly
well-defined narrow crest at depths less than 1000 fm. (1829 m.), and from the information now available
it seems likely that this crest extends from a position a few miles south of Heard Island to the latitude
of 58° S, following the line of the eastern side of the main ridge. At the extreme south-eastern end of
the Kerguelen-Gaussberg ridge there is another well-marked shallow area, the Gribb bank (discovered
by the whale-catcher 'Gribb' in 1937), which appears to rise sharply in approximately 62° S, 88"" E;
but owing to lack of soundings on the eastern side of the ridge, between this bank and the crest
mentioned above, we cannot state whether Gribb bank is an isolated feature or whether it is part of
a possible continuation of the crest south of latitude 58° S. It seems probable, however, that Gribb
bank will be found to be connected with the crest and that it forms part of a shallower portion of the
main ridge extending from Kerguelen to the latitude of 62° S.

The ' Discovery II ' crossed the Kerguelen-Gaussberg ridge while skirting the pack-ice from west
to east in April 1932, November 1935 and December 1937. Unfortunately the northern limit of the
ice differed only slightly on each occasion and all three crossings were consequently made within a few
miles of each other. In 1932 soundings were being obtained with the 'listening' type deep-water set,
at intervals of distance varying with the weather, but which were between 2-5 and 4-5 miles; the
minimum sounding was 956 fm. (1784 m.), in 56° 39-5' S, 78° 37' E. In 1935 continuous soundings
over a distance of 75 miles were obtained with the 'Acadia' recorder, between 57° 27-5' S, 74° 38-6' E
and 56° 55*2' S, 76" 46-7' E, and the minimum depth recorded was 1217 fm. (2226 m.) in 57° 047' S,
76° 08-7' E. Routine soundings at intervals of approximately 4 miles were then resumed, at a depth
of 1397 fm. (2555 m.), but the depth again shoaled and a sounding of 1044 fm. (1909 m.) was obtained
in 56° 32-8' S, 78° 24- 1 ' E. The deep water of the Australian-Antarctic basin was reached in 56° 59-5' S,
81° 23-6' E, at a depth of 2548 fm. (4660 m.).

Continuous soundings for a distance of 275 miles were possible during the crossing of the Kerguelen-
Gaussberg ridge in 1937 and a zigzag course was followed between 57° 26-6' S, 74° o6-6' E and
56° 56-5' S, 80"^ 287' E (see Text-fig. 2c). Depths generally were less than 3000 m. (1641 fm.) over
the whole distance, and were under 2000 m. (1094 fm.) between 56° 53-2' S, 78° 01-2' E and 57° 18' S,
80° 13-2' E. The minimum sounding recorded was 910 fm. (1664 m.) in 57° 31' S, 79° 38-8' E. It will
be of interest, perhaps, to mention here that at the point where the 1937 line crossed the 1932 line of
soundings (in 56° 50' S, 77° 54-5' E) the sounding recorded in 1937 was 1164 fm. (2129 m.), which is
only 15 fm. (28 m.) less than the sounding of 1 179 fm. (2154 m.) obtained i-2 miles north-east of this
position in 1932. With the varied condition of the bottom prevailing here such agreement is gratifying.

The recorder charts for 1935 and 1937, especially the latter, showed by the multiple echoes recorded
at many points that the bottom on the Kerguelen-Gaussberg ridge was extremely irregular at depths
greater than iioo fm. (2012 m.). At depths less than this conditions were the exact opposite; there
was a completely regular bottom and no signs of any multiple echoes.

APPENDIX I

DEEP-WATER ECHO-SOUNDING SET
In 1933 an ' Acadia ' type recorder was fitted to the deep-water echo-sounding set in the ' Discover)' II '.
This recorder, the scale of which was graduated in fathoms from 0-250, had an unlimited range, with
phasing by 100 fathom steps: i.e. it was possible to ' step-back ' or 'step-on' the transmissions so that
the echo would always appear on the record. The principle of this recorder was quite simple: a trans-
mission was sent out by the hammer normally at every complete revolution of the phasing switch.

96 DISCOVERY REPORTS

i.e. ever}- 2| sec. The returning echo was detected by a carbon-granule hydrophone, ampUfied,
rectified and recorded on sensitized paper traversed by a stylus pen driven by the transmitter switch.
The paper, which was supplied dry, had been sensitized during manufacture with a solution of starch
and potassium iodide and, in the 'Acadia' pattern recorder, was wetted for use by passage over
a wick which was fed from a tank behind the paper. When the stylus was traversing the paper and an
echo or signal was received, the current at that moment passing through the stylus electrolysed the
starch-potassium iodide solution in the wet paper and the iodine thus set free made a stain which
commenced at the precise moment when the echo was received. As the paper travelled only at
approximately 1 1 in. per hour past the stylus, the spacing of the returning echoes was so close that
an almost continuous echo line was produced. In bad weather it was sometimes difficult to distinguish
the echo mark from the other marks caused by extraneous noises in the hydrophone, especially in
depths of more than 500 fm. (914 m.). Passage of the ship through brash ice, or pack-ice, had a similar
eflFect (see PI. XXX, fig. i). It was possible to adjust the strength of the echo current by increasing
or decreasing the sensitivity of the amplifier, but this had the disadvantage of having a similar effect
on the strength of the water noises set up in the hydrophone. Therefore, in rough weather, it was often
necessary to plug in the headphones to the telephone circuit and listen for the returning echo, marking
it on the record, if necessary, with the electric pencil provided. Difficulty was also met when the
returning echo coincided with an outgoing transmission, since the band, or mark, set up on the record
by the transmission was of such intensity that an echo might be blanked out for a distance representing
some 20 or 30 fm. on the record. A switch, however, was provided whereby it was possible to cut
out any required number of transmissions without interference to the receiving circuit, and by careful
manipulation of this switch it was possible to trace the line of the echoes through the transmission
band. A typical example may be seen in PI. XXXI, fig. i. Without the use of the switch this trans-
mission band would have completely obscured the echo at a depth of 1000 fm. (1829 m.). This cut-out
switch was also used in determining the correct phase for soundings in waters of unknown depth.
It will be appreciated that since the phase switch or dial was graduated only from o to 1000 fm., and
that since a transmission was made automatically each time the phase switch arm passed zero, then
an echo which appeared on the paper at a scale reading of, say, 200 fm., might equally represent
200, 1200, 2200, etc. fm. The correct phase, however, could easily be determined by cutting out all
transmissions after the first, listening on the telephone circuit, and watching the number of times
the phase switch arm had rotated before the echo was heard.

The recorder mechanism was driven by a governed electric motor, the speed of which required
checking and adjustment as the set warmed up. A careful check with an accurate stopwatch was
made therefore during long runs and the rate noted at intervals for the subsequent correction of the
soundmgs. A note also was required, on the actual record, of any correction to the timing. If, for
example, the motor ran fast by, say, 1% for 600 min. (which was quite a common period during
survey work) the minute markings automatically recorded on the paper would at the end of the run
be 6 mm. ahead of the correct time and all the soundings recorded would be 1% too deep. This error
m depth was negligible in soundings less than 100 fm. (183 m.) but, as we were usually approaching an
unknown or imperfectly surveyed anchorage at the end of such a run, it was imperative for the
subsequent plotting of the soundings that the correct time should be known for each depth plotted.
Eventually it was found that nearly correct running ensued if the case containing the mechanism was
left open ; such mmor corrections of speed as were then necessary could be applied by means of a
sliding resistance which we fitted in addition in the ordinary governor circuit.

Throughout the whole period in which the recorder was in use, few repairs were needed apart from
small mechanical and electrical adjustments. On one occasion there was a complete breakdown in

APPENDIX I 97

the amplifier due to a defective rectifier. Since spares were not readily available it was necessary to
return the amplifier to the makers for repairs, and for some months only the ' listening ' gear could be
used. The only other serious trouble met with was the failure of the H.T. dry batteries to maintain
a correct voltage. During survey work it was necessary to keep open the door to the echo cabinet and
chart room, and the deterioration of the batteries is attributable to unavoidable exposure to much
cold and damp weather. Some deterioration, however, also took place in new batteries stored on
board. Eventually it was found best to replace the dry batteries with accumulators, and these were
charged up every night during periods of surveying.

The old ' listening' type receiving gear needed little attention, but the transmitter (or hammer) gave
considerable trouble, and eventually broke down in December 1934, during a survey of the South
Shetland Islands. Temporary repairs were carried out by the ship's engineering staflF, but the hammer
was found to be worn out, and a new one was installed on the existing base plate some months later.
This unit worked on the whole satisfactorily until 1939, and no replacements were required other than
a new balanced head in 1938. The deep-sea hydrophone gave a certain amount of trouble in 1935 but
a new unit was fitted at sea, through the sluice-valve provided, and from then until 1939 no further
serious trouble was experienced. When the old unit was removed in 1935 it was found that the probable
cause of the trouble was damage to the face by careless chipping of the adjacent hull plating in dr>'-dock.
Precautions were then taken at other occasions of dry-docking to prevent a recurrence of such damage.

SHALLOW-WATER ECHO-SOUNDING SET
As stated on p. 43 a magnetostriction echo-sounding set, with a Mark XII D recorder, was fitted
in the 'Discovery II'. The tanks containing the oscillators forming the transmitter and receiver were
fitted to port and starboard of the centre line of the ship in No. 2 double-bottom freshwater tank.
This position was 55 ft. from the fore perpendicular, and about 6 ft. forward of the position originally
used for the Admiralty Pattern 751 sonic type receiver. The bridge instruments were fitted in the echo
cabinet on the port side of the chart-house ; the recorder, amplifier and contactor unit occupying no
more space than that originally provided for the sonic receiving gear. H.T. and L.T. supply were
arranged from the accumulators already in use for the deep-water set. No trouble was ever experienced
with the transmitter or receiver, and when the author of this report had occasion to visit the ship during
the course of his war-time duties with the Admiralty it was found that after 5 1 years immersion in
a double-bottom water tank the transmitter and receiver were still functioning correctly. The recorder
gave little mechanical or electrical trouble except for some difficulty with the change-speed gear box.
Finally, to avoid their frequent renewal the train of gears for the high speed was removed and the
machine solely used for sounding in fathoms. A serious defect, however, was the rapid fading of the
records. In contrast to the 'Acadia' records which, after storage for as much as 14 years, have lost
nothing of their clarity, the records from the Mark XII D recorder were liable to fade within a matter
of hours, and it thus became essential to ink in the pertinent information as soon as possible. Some
few records which were made in 1936, and stored unedited, are now quite illegible. The fading of
the Mark XII D records (while the 'Acadia' records remain more or less permanent) is probably
attributable to differences in the chemical impregnation and method of wetting in the two instances,
the Mark XII D rolls being pre-wetted and supplied in sealed tins. Fading troubles experienced with
early pre-wetted paper have since been largely overcome.

The maximum depths for which this set was designed were not achieved by us in practice and it is
possible that the thickness of hull plating of the ' Discovery II ' had a serious effect in diminishing the
strength in both the transmission and reception of the soundwaves.

DISCOVERY REPORTS

APPENDIX II

PARTICULARS OF RECORDER CHARTS, 1933-1939

Note. The abbreviation ' (N.C.) ' in the remarks column has been used whenever the run was interrupted for any appreciable
time (such as for stations or when coming to anchor during a survey); after October 1935 it has also been used to denote
those records where charts from both the Acadia and the M/S XII D recorders comprise the run. The time occupied by
interruptions has not been included in the totals for the various runs.

Run in

Date

Record No.

Locality

hours

Remarks

22-23. X. 33

1/33

47° 427' N, 06° i8-8' W to 45° 27-2' N, 07° 55-5' W

I2|

Max. 2600 fm.

23-24. X. 33

n/33

45° 05-9' N, 08° 45-2' W to 42° 12-2' N, 09° 56-5' W

12

—

14. xi. 33

ni/33

30" 57-5' S, 13° 49-5' W to 31° 17-2' S, 13° 44-5' W

2

—

15-16. xi. 33

IV/33

36° 07-9' S, 12° 32' W to anchorage at Tristan da Cunha

5f

Ver)' steep slope

18. xi. 33

V/33

Tristan da Cunha to Nightingale and Inaccessible
Islands

1\

Very steep slope

27- X'- 33

VI/33

53° 407' S, 37° 07-3' W to 54° 03-5' S, 35° 25' W

7

—

28. .\i. 33

Vn/33

54° 20-2' S, 35° 25-2' W to 54° 22-2' S, 35" 53-4' W
and approaches to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia

3

(N.C.)

4. xii. 33

VIII/33

Sts. 1208-1209-1210

4i

(N.C.)

9. xii. 33

IX/33

62° 05-5' S, 59° 21-2' W to Bransfield Strait, via Nelson
Strait

3l

"

9- ™- 33

^':U

Approaching Deception Island and through entrance, to
anchorage

li

■

28. xii. 33

XI/33

53° 43-2' S, 58° 58' W to 55° 10' S, 59° 59-2' W

10

—

29. i. 34

1/34

Approaching East Cape, North Island, New Zealand

li

—

13- »• 34

n/34

Cook Strait, New Zealand

2i

—

20. viii. 34

ni/34

Simon's Bay to Cape Town

4i

—

9. ix. 34

IV/34

61° 55' S, 60° 37' W to (approx.) 62° S, 61° 30' W

3i

—

16. ix. 34

V/34

53° 17-5' S, 75° 45-5' "W to 52" 50' S, 75° 04' W

3I

(N.C.)

25-26. ix. 34

VI/34

54° 47-3' S, 56° 37' W to 55° 22-9' S, 56° 04-1' W

A 3
44

(N.C.)

6. X. 34

VII/34

Entrance to Cumberland Bay, South Georgia

I

—

9. X. 34

VIII/34

South Georgia, Grytviken to Leith Harbour

I|

—

10. X. 34

IX/34

53° 40-6' S, 38° 32-5' W to 53° 26' S, 40° 21-8' W

8

Multiple trace

13-14. X. 34

X/34

51° 55' S, 54° 45' W to 51° 42-8' S, 57° 32-5' W

10

—

24-25- X- 34

XI/34

Magellan Strait to sea, via Pasa O'Ryan, Ackwalisnan
Canal and Cockburn Channel

loi

(N.C.)

19-20. X. 34

XII/34 \
XIII/34I

55° 27' S, 73° 40' W to Magellan Strait, via Cockburn

16

(N.C.)

Channel

6. xii. 34

XIV/34

61° 51-3' S, 61° 50' W to 63° 07' S, 62° 55' W

8|

(N.C.)

6-7. xii. 34

XV/34

Schollaert Channel, entrance to Neumayr Channel and
return to Melchior Harbour, Palmer Archipelago

4i

Very irregular bottom

7. xii. 34

XVI/34

Melchior Harbour to (approx.) 63° 50' S, 62° 30' W

4

—

8. xii. 34

XVII/34

McFarlane Strait, from entrance to Yankee Harbour

3J

South Shetlands
survey

II. xii. 34

XVIII/34

Survey of McFarlane Strait

6i

South Shetlands
survey

12. xii. 34

XIX/34

McFarlane Strait to English Strait, via Bransfield Strait

7l

South Shetlands
sur\'ey

13. xii. 34

XX/34

English Strait to Yankee Harbour, via Bransfield Strait

7i

South Shetlands
survey

14. xii. 34

XXI/34

Yankee Harbour to Harmony Cove (Nelson Strait), via
Bransfield Strait

5f

South Shetlands
survey

15-16. xii. 34

XXI 1/34

Harmony Cove to Admiralty Bay

S\

South Shetlands
survey

17-18. xii. 34

XXIII/34

Admiralty Bay to Harmony Cove

6i

South Shetlands
sur\-ey (N.C.)

19. xii. 34

XXIV/34

Fildes Strait

If

South Shetlands

19-20. xii. 34

xxv/34

Fildes Strait to Admiralty Bay

3i

sur\'ey
South Shetlands
survey

21. xii. 34

XXVI/34

Admiralty Bay to Fildes Strait

4?

South Shetlands
survey

APPENDIX II

99

APPENDIX II {cont.)

Run in

Date

Record No.

Locality

hours

Remarks

22-23. xii. 34

XXVII/34

Fildes Strait to Deception Island

12

South Shetlands
survey

26. xii. 34

XXVIII/34

Deception Island to Yankee Harbour, via Livingston
Island

loj

South Shetlands

survey

27. xii. 34

XXIX/34

Yankee Harbour and McFarlane Strait

li

South Shetlands
survey

30. xii. 34

XXX/34

McFarlane Strait to Table Island, via north side Green-
wich Island

bl

South Shetlands
survey (N.C.)

31. xii. 34

XXXI/34

English Strait

i

South Shetlands
sur\'ey

i-i-35

1/35

Coppermine Cove to Harmony Cove, via Bransfield
Strait

8

South Shetlands
survey

2-i-35

n/35

Harmony Cove to north side. King George Island

3i

South Shetlands
survey

3- i- 35

ni/35

North side, King George Island

5i

South Shetlands
sur\'ey (N.C.)

4- i- 35

IV/35

North side. King George Island to Harmony Cove

3i

South Shetlands
survey

5-i-35

V/35

Harmony Cove to north side, Greenwich Island

8

South Shetlands
survey

6. i. 35

VI/35

North side, Greenwich Island

I

South Shetlands
survey

6. i. 35

VII/35

North end, McFarlane Strait to Desolation Island

li

South Shetlands
survey

7- i- 35

VIII/35

From Desolation Island along north side, Livingston
Island

(>i

South Shetlands
survey

8- i- 35

IX/35

North side, Livingston Island to Desolation Island

3i

South Shetlands
survey

9- i- 35

X/35

Desolation Island to Deception Island, via north side
Livingston Island

10^

South Shetlands
survey

II. i. 35

XI/35

De Gerlache Strait

1

—

19- i- 35

Xn/35

Port Lockroy— Pehier Channel— De Gerlache Strait

7J

—

20. i. 35

XIII/35

Approaching Cape Roquemarel, Trinity Peninsula

li

20. i. 35

XIV/35

Cape Roquemarel to Astrolabe Island

3I

20. i. 35

XV/35

Leaving Astrolabe Island

1

2i.i.35
10. ii. 35

XVI/35

Passing Bridgeman Island

XVII/35

Douglas Strait, South Sandwich Islands

a

Submarine crater

7- iv. 35

23- IV. 35

23-24. IV. 35

XVIII/35
XIX/35

XX/35

Marion and Prince Edward Islands

22° 31-2' S, 40° 257' E to 22° 17-6' S, 40° 28-8' E

18° 12' S, 41° 41-1' E to 17° 52' S, 41° 44-2' E

10
2

Near Europa Island

Mozambique Channel

(N.C.)

Red Sea

Red Sea

Red Sea

Red Sea

Red Sea

Red Sea

5-v. 35
7-8. V. 35

XXI/35
XXII/35

Off Cape Gardafui

12° 54' N, 43° 17' E to 13° 37' N, 42° 59' E

3
4

8. V. 35

XXIII/35

Zubair Islands

I

8. v. 35

XXI V/35

Jebal At Tair

I

ii-v. 35

XXV/35

Daedalus Reef

I
,1

ii-v. 35
11-12. V. 35

XXVI/35

XXVII/35

The Brothers

Straits of Jubal and Gulf of Suez

2i

19- V. 35

XXVIII/35

Malta Channel

1 4

20. V. 35

XXIX/35

Passing Cape Bon, Mediterranean

I

20. V. 35

XXX/35

Passing Cani Rocks, Mediterranean

2

20. V. 35

XXXI/35

Passing Pantellaria, Mediterranean

2

29. V. 35

XXXII/35

Approaching Cape St Vincent

2

Ii

2|
2

-1

30- V. 35

XXXIII/35

Off Cape Espichel

30- V. 35
5-x- 35

XXXIV/35

XXXV/35

Passing The Burlings
Across Hurd Deep

Near Channel Islands

10. X. 35

XXXVI/35

South from Ushant

10. x. 35

XXXVI 1/3 5

North Coast of Spain

5t

10. x. 35

XXXVIII/35

Dacia Bank

3

28. xi. 35

XXXIX/35\
XL/35 /
XLI/35

Across Kerguelen-Gaussberg Ridge

7h

(N.C.)

30. xii. 35

Approaching Foveaux Strait, New Zealand

3i

—

30-31. xii. 35

XLII/35

Foveaux Strait

10

10. i. 36

1/36

70° ss' S, 178° 19-4' W to 70° 59-7' S, 178° 10' W

I

Re-echoes

14. i. 36

n/36 \
111/36/
IV/36

72° 30-2' S, 178° 03-2' W to 73° 08-4' S, 179° 52' W

4

14. i. 36

74° 17-1' S, 179° i8-s' E to 74° 44-8' S, 179° 55' E

3

DISCOVERY REPORTS

APPENDIX II [cont.)

Date

i6. i. 36

25. i. 36

26. i. 36
2. ii. 36

3- "• 36
3- »• 36
5- ii- 36

18. V. 36

19. V. 36

20. V. 36
17. ix. 36
19. ix. 36
14. X. 36

23.x. 36
12-13. xi. 36
5- xii. 36

18. xii. 36

19. xii. 36

5- i- 37
6. i. 37

7- i- 37

9- i- 37

10. i. 37

ii.i. 37

12.
13-
14-15-
15-
18.
19.
20.

37

37

37
•37
■37
•37
-37
-37
-37
-37

-37

• 37

• 37
1-37
••37
'•37
1-37

i-37

Record No.

Locality

Run in

hours

V/36 \

VI/36/

VII/36

VIII/36

IX/36

X/36

XI/36

XII/36

XIII/36

XIV/36

XV/36

XVI/36

XVII/36

XVIII/36

XIX/36
XX/36
XXI/36
XXII/36
XXI 1 1/36

1/37

n/37

in/37

IV/37

V/37

VI/37

VII/37
VIII/37

IX/37

X/37

XI/37

XII/37

XIII/37

XIV/37

XV/37
XVI/37

XVII/37
XVIII/37

XIX/37

XX/37

XXI/37

XXII/37

XXIII/37

XXIV/37

78° 00-9' S, 169° 04' W to 78° 26' S, 164° 11' W

Off Ross Island

75° 39-2' S, 173° 50' E to 75° 22-3' S, 176° 18-5' E

From approx. 66" 01' S, 164° 45' E towards Balleny

Islands
Approaching the Balleny Islands
Leaving the Balleny Islands

65° 32-9' S, 160° 54-4' E to 65° 14-7' S, 160° 55-8' E
33° 50-5' S, 17° 28' E to 33° 50-4' S, 17° 10-7' E
33° 50-5' S, 14° 59-4' E to 33° 50-4' S, 14° 43;i' E
33° 42-5' S, 10° 25' E to 33° 41-6' S, 10° 02-2' E
33° 54-4' S, 11° 15-3' E to 33° 54-3' S, 11° 12-5' E
33° 41-5' S, 02° 12' E to 33° 39-2' S, 01° 29-9' E
54° 20-9' S, 35° 16' W to 54° 27-6' S, 35° 45-4' W

thence toward Cumberland Bay

Approaching Willis Island, South Georgia
64° 01-4' S, 53° 13-3' W to 61° 20-8' S, 54° 04-2' W
Approaching South Georgia from Port Stanley
Round Willis Island to Undine Harbour, South Georgia
Undine Harbour to Bird Island, South Georgia

Bridgeman Island to North Foreland, King George

Island
North Foreland to Penguin Island anchorage

Penguin Island to Lion's Rump, via Admiralty Bay

Lion's Rump to Penguin Island

Penguin Island to Lion's Rump

Lion's Rump to Penguin Island

Penguin Island to Lion's Rump

Lion's Rump — Cape Melville — Lion's Rump

Penguin Island to anchorage near Esther Harbour

Anchorage to Esther Harbour

North Foreland — Bolinder Beach and to sea

Towards anchorage, Penguin Island

Penguin Island to Visca anchorage. Admiralty Bay

Visca Anchorage to North Foreland

North Foreland to sea and hove-to

Cape Melville to Admiralty Bay

From approx. 61° 35' S, 57° 23' W

Ridley Island to O'Brien Island

O'Brien Island — Gibbs Island — Aspland Island

Off Gibbs and Aspland Islands, on survey

Off Gibbs Island and to Clarence Island

Clarence Island to Cornwallis Island

Approaching South Orkneys

Scotia Bay to Graptolite Island

4?
4

3l

3l

44
i7i
61

6|

3

3*

4i

Remarks

7i
4

64

64
12

9!
8

9

54
4f

(N.C.) ^

Remainder unde-
cipherable

2700 fm.

2700 fm.

2600 fm.

(N.C.)

(N.C). courses various

approaching South

Georgia
(N.C.)
(N.C.)

(N.C.)

(N.C.) South Shet-
lands survey

(N.C.) South Shet-
lands survey

(N.C.) South Shet-
lands survey

South Shetlands
survey

South Shetlands
survey

St. 1952 intervenes.
South Shetlands
survey

South Shetlands
survey

(N.C.) South Shet-
lands survey

(N.C.) South Shet-
lands survey

South Shetlands
survey

(N.C.) South Shet-
lands survey

South Shetlands
surs'ey

South Shetlands
survey

South Shetlands
survey

South Shetlands
survey

South Shetlands
survey

(N.C.) See ship's k

(N.C.)

(N.C.)
(N.C.)
See note on record re

berg
South Orkneys survey

APPENDIX II

APPENDIX II (cont.)

Date

Record No.

Locality

Run in
hours

Remarks

12. ii. 37

XXV/37

Graptolite Island to Signy Island

13

South Orkneys survey

13- "• 37

XXVI/37

Approaching and leaving Borge Bay

4f

(N.C.) South Orkneys

H- ii- 37

XXVII/37

Approaching Sandefjord Bay

2

survey
South Orkneys survey

15- »• 37

XXVIII/37

Sandefjord Bay to North Coast Coronation Island

5^

(N.C.) South Orkneys
survey. Very steep
slope

21-22. iv. 37

XXIX/37

32° 53' S, 00° 06-4' W to 32° 02-2' S, 00° 22-2' W

4

Shallow ridge

13- X. 37

XXX/37

Josephine Bank

4l

H- X. 37

XXXI/37

Approaching Madeira

2

19. X. 37

XXXII/37

Approaching St Vincent

if

I. XI. 37

XXXIII/37

Approx. 18° S, 3° E

I

(N.C.) 3000 fm.

3- xi. 37

XXXIV/37

Approx. 24° S, 9° E

I

2600 fm.

4- XI. 37

XXXV/37

Approx. 28° S, 12° E

li

2600 fm.

5- XI. 37

XXXVI/37

29° 05-2' S, 13° 32-4' E to 29° 34-5' S, 14° 03' E

4i

—

29. XI. 37

XXXVII/37

57° 59'5' S, 56° 00-8' E to 58° 14-1' S, 56° 43-1' E

3

2900 fm.

30. .xi. 37

XXXVIII/37

59° 31-2' S, 60° 42-3' E to 59° 42-3' S, 61° 13-5' E

2 J

2900 fm.

I. xii. 37

XXXIX/37

60° 06-4' S, 66° 17-3' E to 60° 07-6' S, 66° 58-5' E

4

2600 fm.

3- xii. 37

XL/37

57° 26-6' S, 74° 06-7' E to 56° 18-2' S, 76° 30-4' E

124

Kerguelen-Gaussberg

Ridge
Kerguelen-Gaussberg

Ridge : courses vari-

3-4- xii. 37

XLI/37 1
XLII/37J

56° 13-7' S, 76° 39-2' E to 56° 56-5' S, 80° 28-7' E

22

ous, see ship's log

18-19. xii. 37

XLIII/37

Approaching Fremantle, West Australia

2f

—

30. xii. 37

XLIV/37

34° 25' S, 1 14° 35' E to 35° 15-3' S, 1 14° 45' E

6

—

14. i. 38

1/38

61° 51-1' S, 131° 04-6' E to 61° 58-1' S, 131° i8-8' E

Ii

2400 fm.

15-16. i. 38

11/38

63° 53"i' S, 135° 16-8' E to 66° 13-8' S, 139° 46-4' E

23

(N.C.)

16. i. 38

III/38

66° 14' S, 139° 50' E to 65° 18' S, 139° IO-6' E

5

—

19. 1. 38

IV/38

64° 15-6' S, 153° 58' E to 64° 26-7' S, 154° 14-7' E

H

—

19. i. 38

V/38

66° o6-8' S, 156° 42-2' E to 66° 55-6' S, 157° 59-5' E

6

—

20-21. i. 38

VI/38

Balleny Islands

9i

See Text-fig. (N.C.)

21-22. i. 38

VII/38

Balleny Islands

13I

See Text-fig.

26-27. i- 3S

VIII/38

54° 59-3' S, 167° 54-2' E to 53° 46-2' S, 168° 41-2' E

9

—

27-28. i. 38

IX/38

52° 59-2' S, 169° 00' E to Campbell Island

7*

Includes harbour

(N.C.)

7-8. ii. 38

X/38

Dunedin (N.Z.) to 46° 03-2' S, 171° 22-5' E

4

9-10. ii. 38

XI/38

Antipodes Island

4*

Circuit of island

26. ii. 38

XII/38

69° II-8' S, 123° 26-7' W

i

Shallow soundings

14. iii. 38

XIII/38

55° 35' S, 60° 14' W to 54° 44-8' S, 59° 36-8' W

4

Burdwood Bank

28. iii. 38

XIV/i8

55° 32-1' S, 36° 07-4' W to South Georgia

3i

—

19. iv. 38

XV/38

64° 47-3' S, 07° 37-8' E to 64° 48-5' S, 08° 02-1' E

I

2400 fm.

7. vii. 38

XVI/38

41° 54-2' S, 01° 17' E to 42° 20-1' S, 01° 18-7' E

2i

Discovery Bank

10. vii. 38

XVII/38

50° 53-1' S, 00° 27-7' E to 51° 02-2' S, 00° 26-4' E

I

Shallow soundings

25. vii. 38

XVIII/38

41° 25-2' S, 19° 32-2' E'to 41° 09-6' S, 19° 27-9' E

4

2900-2700 fm.

II. viii. 38

XIX/38

41° 52-1' S, 00° 18-2' E to 42° 19-3' S, 00° 17-8' E

3

Discovery Bank

16. viii. 38

XX/38

54° 30' S, 00° 15-7' E to 54° 50-3' S, 00° 17-4' E

2

Shallow soundings

20. ix. 38

XXI/38

41° 57' S, 00° 38' E to 42° 12-7' S, 00° 39' E

li

Discovery Bank

23. X. 38

XXII/38

41° 50-5' S, 01° 17-4' E to 42° 09-9' S, 01° 20-5' E

3

(N.C.) Discovery Bank

28. X. 38

XXIV/38

54° 58-8' S, 02° 14-9' E to 54° 45-8' S, 02° 33-4' E

2|

Bouvet Island

28. X. 38

XXV/38

54° 38-4' S, 02° 39-9' E to 54° 19' S, 03° 25' E

4

(N.C.) Bouvet Island

29. xi. 38

XXVI/38

42° 02-6' S, 00° 55-4' W to 42° 04-9' S, 00° 48-6' E

9

Discovery Bank
(W to E)

9- i- 39

1/39

35° 58*8' S, 1 1° 42-5' E to 36° 08-3' S, 11° 13-4' E

2l

2700 fm.

17- i- 39

11/39

Bouvet Island

4

(N.C.)

21-22. i. 39

in/39

68° 50-2' S, 02° 05-4' E to 69° 37-9' S, 02° 07-8' E

4i

(N.C.) Approaching
Continental Shelf

29. i. 39

IV/39

62° 33-9' S, 19° 43-3' E to 62° 24-3' S, 19° 44-1' E

I

2700 fm.

21. ii. 39

V/39

41° 40-8' S, 00° 48-2' E to 42° 31-7' S, 00° 50' E

5i

Discovery Bank

24. ii. 39

VI/39 {

51° 07-6' S, 01° 06' E to 51° 17' S, 01° 06' E
51° 35' S, 01° 04-4' E to 51° 43-1' S, 01° 03-7' E

:}

Shallow soundings

4. iii. 39

VII/39

69° 14-8' .S, 00° 18-2' E to Barrier and thence along

'5J

Courses various, see

coast of continent to 69° 47-8' S, 02° 2i-i' E

13/

sounding log for

5- iii- 39

VIII/39

Continuing along coast of continent

details

DISCOVERY REPORTS

REFERENCES

Agassiz, a., 1888. Three Cruises of the Blake. Chap, iv, Topography of the Eastern Coast of the North American Continent,

pp. 93-108, figs. 55-61, 4 charts. Boston.
Ardley, R. a. B. and Mackintosh, N. A., 1936. The Royal Research Ship ' Discovery IF, Discoven^- Reports, xiii, pp. 76-106,

pis. iii-xiii.
Association d'Oc^anographie Physique, 1940. Report of the Committee on the Criteria and Nomenclature of the Major

Divisions of the Ocean Bottom, Publ. Sci. No. 8, 1-124, 3 charts. Liverpool.
British Admiralty Silent Supersonic Echo Sounder {various types), 1934. Hydrog. Rev., XI-2, pp. 36-8.
Campbell, S. A. C, Moyes, M. H. and Oom, K. E., 1939. Soundings. B.A.N. Z. Antarctic Research Exped., 1929-193 1,

Reports — Series A, in, pt. I, pp. 1-21.
Chapman, V. J., 1944- Methods of Survey of Laminaria Beds, Journ. Mar. Biol. Ass. U.K., xxvi, I, pp. 37-60, pis. i-iv.
Deacon, G. E. R., 1937. The Hydrology of the Southern Ocean, Discovery Reports, xv, pp. 1-124, pis. i-xliv.
1945. Water Circulation and Surface Boundaries in the Oceans. Quart. Journ. Met. Soc, LXXi, Nos. 307-8, January-
April, pp. 11-25.
Echo Sounding— XVII, 1937. Hydrog. Rev., xiv-2, pp. 211-26.
Hart, T. J., 1934. On the Phytoplankton of the South-West Atlantic and the Bellingshausen Sea, 1929-193 1. Discovery

Reports, viii, pp. 1-268.
Hayes, J. H., 1933. Report of Sea Trials of Deep Water Echo Sounding Gear in H.M.S. ' Challenger' and ' Ormonde' {in April,

July and October, 1932). Appendix, Depth corrections due to Gradient. Hydrog. Rev., x-2, pp. 154-9.
Herdman, H. F. p., 1932. Report on Soundings taken during the Discovery Investigations, 1926-1932. Discovery Reports,

VI, pp. 205-36, pis. xlv-xlvii, charts 1-7.
Hinks, a. R. and Mackintosh, N. A., 1943. A New Chart of the Antarctic. Geog. Journ., cii. No. i, July, pp. 29-34.
The 'Husun' Review, 1936. Henry Hughes and Son Ltd., Husun Works, Barkingside, Essex, Nov. i6th.
The Hydrographic Department, Admiralty, London, 1930. The Antarctic Pilot {with supplement No. 12, to December 315?,

1945)-

1937. List of Oceanic Depths received at the Admiralty, 1936. {H.D. 327). Soundings by s.s. 'Thorshavn', pp. 17-24.

1941. Chart No. 3176 (Antarctic Regions between Latitudes 60° S and 75° S, and Longitudes 52° W and 2° E).

International Hydrographic Bureau, 1932. Terminology of Submarine Relief. Hydrog. Rev., v-2, pp. 9-24.

Kemp, S. W. and Nelson, A. L., 1931. The South Sandwich Islands. Discovery Reports, in, pp. 133-98, pis. xi-xxxi.

Krummel, O., 1899. Die Einfiihrung einer Einheitlichen Nomenklatur fiir das Bodenrelief der Oceane. Seventh International

Geographical Congress, Berlin, 2, pp. 379-86.
Littlehales, G. W., 1932. The Configurations of the Oceanic Basins. Nat. Research Council (U.S.A.) Bull. 85, Physics of

the Earth, Oceanography, pp. 13-46.
Mackintosh, N. A., 1940. Nomenclature of the Major Divisions of the Southern Seas. Ass. d'Oceanographie Physique, Publ.

Sci. No. 8, pp. 93-4. Liverpool.
Mackintosh, N. A., 1946. The Antarctic Convergence and the Distribution of Surface Temperature in Antarctic Waters.

Discovery Reports, xxiii, pp. 177-212, pis. i-xiv.
Mackintosh, N. A. and Herdman, H. F. P., 1940. Distribution of the Pack Ice in the Southern Ocean. Discovery Reports,

XIX, pp. 285-96, pis. Ixix-xcv.
Map of the Antarctic, 1928. Am. Geog. Soc, New York, 4 sheets.
Map of Antarctica, 1939. Department of the Interior, Commonwealth of Australia.

Marr, J. W. S., 1935. The South Orkney Islands. Discovery Reports, x, pp. 283-382, pis. xii-xxv, i chart.
Matthews, D. J., 1939. Tables of the Velocity of Sound in Pure Water and Sea Water for use in Echo-sounding and Sound-
ranging. H.D. 282, H.M. Stationery Office, London.
Maurer, H. and Stocks, T., 1933. Die Echolotungen des 'Meteor'. Wiss. Ergebn. d. Deutsch. Atlant. Exped. 'Meteor',

1925-1927, II, pp. 1-309. Berlin und Leipzig.
Mill, H. R., 1899. On the Introduction of a Systematic International Terminology for the Forms of Sub-Oceanic Relief. Seventh

International Geographical Congress, Berlin, 2, pp. 387-92.
Mortimer, C. H. and Worthington, E. B., 1940. A new Application of Echo-sounding. Nature, cxlv, pp. 212-14, London.
Mosby, H., 1940. Nomenclature of the Submarine Features of the Southern Seas, Ass. d'Oceanographie Physique, Publ. Sci.,

No. 8, pp. 95-9.
Murray, John, 1895. Voyage of H.M.S. 'Challenger'. Summary of Results, pts. i, 2, p. 1463, pis. lA, iB, iC.
New British Admiralty Recorder Echo Sounders, 1936. Hydrog. Rev., XIII-2, pp. 78-87.
Petermann, a., 1877. Die Bodengestaltung des Grosser Ozeans, Pet. Mitt., 23, pp. 125-32.

REFERENCES 103

Roos, S. Edward, 1937. Some Geographical Results of the Second Byrd Antarctic Expedition, 1933-1935. Part I, The Submarine
Topography of the Ross Sea and Adjacent Waters, Geog. Rev., pp. 574-83, October, 1937. New York.

Rust, H., 1935. Mehrfach-Reflexionen heim Echoloten auf Weichem Griind. Die Naturwissenschaften, Heft 24, pp. 3S7-9.

Shalowitz, a. L., 1930. Slope Corrections for Echo Soundings. Hydrog. Rev., vii-i, pp. 82-7.

Stocks, Th., 1935. Erkundungen iiber Art und Schichtung des Meeresbodens mit Hilfe von IIochfrequenz-Echoloten. Die
Naturwissenschaften, Heft 24, pp. 383-6.

1937- Morphologic des Atlantischen Ozeans. Part IV (i), Grund-Karte der Ozeanischen Lotungen, 1:5 millioncn, Blatt

SII2. Wiss. Ergebn. d. Deutsch. Atlant. Exped. 'Meteor', 1925-1927, 111, part I, i chart. Berlin und Leipzig.

1939- Stand und Aufgraben einer Grundkarte der Ozeanischen lotungen ein Massstab 1:5 millionen. Geol. Rundschau,

XXX, Heft 3/4, pp. 373-81, I chart, Berlin.

I94I- Grund-Karte der Ozeanischen Lotungen, i :5 millionen. Atlantischen Ozean, Blatt SII^. Wiss. Ergebn. d. Deutsch.

Atlant. Exped. 'Meteor', 1925-1927. Berlin und Leipzig.
SuPAN, A., 1899. Die Bodenformen des Weltmeeres. Pet. Mitt., 45, pp. 177-88, pi. 12 (chart).
SvERDRUP, H. v., Johnson, M. W. and Fleming, R. H., 1942. The Oceans. Their Physics, Chemistry and General Biology.

pp. 1-1087. New York.
Taylor, Griffith, 193 i. Antarctic Research and Adventure. New York and London.
TiLLEY, C. E., 1935. Report on Rocks from the South Orkney Islands. Discovery Reports, x, pp. 383-90.
Tyrrell, G. W., 1945. Report on Rocks from West Antarctica and the Scotia Arc. Discovery Reports, xxiii, pp. 37-102.
United States of America, Navy Department, Hydrographic Office, Washington, D.C, 1943. Chart No. 2562

(Antarctica).

1943- Sailing Directions for Antarctica. H.O. 138.

Vanssay de Blavous, P. DE, 1930. Slope corrections for Echo Soundings. Hydrog. Rev., vii-2, pp. 50-63.

1933- Slope corrections for Echo Soundings {with tables and diagrams). Hydrog. Rev., x-i, pp. 41-5.

Wood, A. B., Smith, F. D. and McGeachy, J. A., 1935. A Magnetostriction Echo Depth-recorder. Journ. Inst. Elec. Eng.,

Lxxvi, No. 461, May. (Reprinted in Hydrog. Rev., xiii-2, pp. 87-106.)
WusT, G., 1933. Schichtung und Zirkulation des Atlantischen Ozeans. Das Bodenwasser und die Gliederung der Atlantischen

Tiefsee. Wiss. Ergebn. d. Deutsch. Atlant. Exped. 'Meteor', 1925-1927, vi, part I, pp. 1-107, pis. i-viii, Berlin und

Leipzig.
■ 1936. Die Gliederung des Weltmeeres. Pet. Mitt., 82, Heft 2, pp. 48-50.

1940. Appendix to letter of i6th November 1937. Ass. d'Oceanographie Physique, Publ. Sci., No. 8, pp. 19-22.

Liverpool.

NOTE ON THE PLATES

Plates XXVI-XXXI are collotype reproductions of selected sections of
sounding records, all reduced to one-half the original size. The order of
sounding is from left to right. In colour and intensity they approximate
to the originals, which vary a little in these respects. Reproduction has
involved a slight loss of contrast but virtually no loss of detail. Even
where the line of the sea floor becomes confused and lost, almost no details
can be seen in the originals which cannot be seen in the collotypes.

DI5COVERV nnPORTS, VOL, XXV,

PLATE XXI U.

;>ISCOVERV REPORTS, \ OU \X\

PLATE XXIV.

The positions of soundings taken by the Discovery Invesiigalions prior to May,

/ 932. are shoivn as black dots ; the positions of those taken subscqtiently arc marked

with crosses. Soundings from other sources are shown as circles.

PISCOX ERV HEPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XXV.

]:1 ;;;'r

PLATE XXVI

Fig. I. Slope of bottom north from Coronation Island, South Orkneys.
Phasing by loo fathom steps. Speed of ship, 9 knots. Vertical scale,
X 972. From 60° 26' S, 45° 55-5' W to 60° 21-5' S, 45° 59-3' W.
(Part of Record XXVIII/37.) See Text-figs. 3 (c), p. 46, and 13,
p. 66.

Fig. 2. Slope of bottom approaching Falmouth Bay, Tristan da Cunha,
from the North. Phasing by 200 fathom steps. Speed of ship,
9-5 knots. Vertical scale, x 10-26. From 36"^ 56-8' S, 12° 19-3' W
to anchorage at Falmouth Bay. (Part of Record IV/33.) See
Text-figs. 3 (a), p. 46, and 9, p. 55.

Fig. 3. Approaching Antarctica in the meridian of Greenwich ; confused
bottom at 900 to 1000 fm. (1646 to 1829 m.), followed by a steady
rise to a depth of 170 fm. (311 m.) close to land. Virtually no
continental shelf. Speed of ship, 9 knots. Vertical scale, x 9-72.
From 69° 37-4' S, 00° 41' E to 69° 43-6' S, 00° 50-3' E. (Part of
Record VII/39.) See Text-figs. 2 {a), p. 45, and 17, p. 88.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE XXVI

r^

r>^-

1

!2^

"li

PLATE XXVII

Fig. I. Varied bottom, at depths between 125 and 340 fm. (229 and
622 m.) in the Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. Speed of
ship shown on record. Vertical scales: at 3 knots, x 3-24; at 9 knots,
X 9-72. Note interference to the mains supply caused by induced
current from ship's W/T apparatus. (Part of Record XV/34.)

Fig. 2. Moderately irregular bottom in the Bransfield Strait, South
Shetlands, on a course from Fildes Strait to Deception Island.
Section of record shown lies about 4 miles south-east of the coast
of Roberts Island. Speed of ship, ca. 3-5 knots. Vertical scale,
X ca. 3-8. (Part of Record XXVII/34.) See Text-fig. 4 (6), p. 47.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE XXVn

PLATE XXVIII

Fig. I. Approaching Adelie Land from the north-west. This recording
shows the compHcated structure of the bottom at depths between
1 170 and 1320 fm. (2140 and 2414 m.), at the point where the
steeper slope up to the continental shelf begins. Speed of ship,
9-5 knots. Vertical scale, x 10-26. From 64° 56' S, 137° 38' E to
65" 04' S, 137° 50' E. (Part of Record II/38.) See Text-figs, i {b),
p. 44, and 17, p. 88.

Fig. 2. Complicated slope from coastal shelf to deeper water, off Otago
Harbour, New Zealand. Record begins at 230 fm. (421 m.), on
change over from shallow water set and records a maximum depth
of 600 fm. (1097 m.). Speed of ship, 9-65 knots. Vertical scale,
X 10-42. From 45° 50-4' S, 171° 04-4' E to 45° 58-2' S, 171° 13' E.
(Part of Record X/38.) See Text-fig. 2 (b), p. 45.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE XXVIII

1,

■{anp

cm ^ '

- s?

» ■ g- at

^j r^

.'.!XZ 3T/.

PLATE XXIX

Fig. I. Extremely irregular bottom recorded when approaching Bouvet
Island from the south-west. Speed of ship, lo knots. Vertical scale,
X 10-8. From 54° 33-4' S, 02° 50-3' E to 54° 27-1' S, 03° 04' E.
(Part of Record XX\738.) See Text-fig. 2 (a), p. 45.

This is a typical example of the difficulties met in obtaining echo
soundings from moderate depths on the line between the latitude
of 40° S and the ice-edge, on the meridian of Greenwich. On this
occasion conditions were good since the sea was calm, wind only
force 2 and there was little swell.

Fig. a. Irregular bottom at depths varying between 1220 and 1450 fm.

(2231 and 2652 m.) on the outer slope of the Scotia Arc, 75 miles

NW X W of Bird Island, South Georgia. Speed of ship, 8 knots.

Vertical scale, x 8-64. From 53° 59' S, 39° 54' W to 53° 28-3' S,

40° 00-8' W. (Part of Record IX/34.) See Text-fig. 5(6), p. 49.
Fig. 3. Passing Europa Island, Mozambique Channel. Irregular bottom

and moderate slope. Soundings range between 406 and 1000 fm.

(742 and 1829 m.). Speed of ship, 8-8 knots. Vertical scale, x 9-5.

From 22° 247' S, 40° 26-8' E to 22° 18-2' S, 40° 28-8' E. (Part of

Record XIX/35.)

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE XXIX

! 2

I

I h-

L--

PLATE XXX

Fig. I. Passage from open water through brash ice and loose pack, off

the ice barrier in Long. i° E. Sea, calm; wind, force 2. Speed of

ship, 9 knots. Vertical scale, x 972. In loose pack the echo, even

at this shallow depth, is almost obliterated by the noises set up by

the scraping of ice across the face of the hydrophone. This record

shows part of the sea floor which is relatively free from irregularities.

Position (at 1030 hr.) 69° 50-2 'S, 00' 567' E. (Part of Record

VII/39.) See Text-fig. 2 (a), p. 45-

Fig. 2. Re-echoes at 1780-2000 fm. (3255-3658 m.) from soundings

between 890 and 1000 fm. (1628 and 1829 m.) during the survey

of Clarence Island. Speed of ship, ca. 4-5 knots. Vertical scale,

xc«. 4-9. (Part of Record XXVIII/37.) See Text-fig. 3(c), p. 46-

Fig. 3. Section of record showing the effect of a rising wind and sea on

the echo, at a depth of approximately 270 fm. (494 m.), on the

Discovery Bank. Section begins with recording at a speed of ship

of 2 knots, which increases to 8-5 knots at the point indicated.

Wind was NW, 22-27 knots and sea, NW, force 5 ; there was also

a moderate North-westerly swell. Ship's course, W. Weather was

deteriorating rapidly. Vertical scales : at 2 knots, x 2- 16 ; at 8-5 knots,

x9-i8. From 42° 03-9' S, 00° 03-5' E to 42° 04-1' S, oo°ii'E.

(Part of Record XXVI/38.) See Text-fig. 2 {a), p. 45.

Fig. 4. Simple 'crossover' at a depth of 215 fm. (393 m.). Speed of

ship, 9-5 knots. Vertical scale, x 10-26. Position, approx., 14 miles

N 63° W of C. Finisterre.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE XXX

1-

fca*;»pu.^5'\>-''

izfr* s/mc.

X'tg"

<^ ;m

&5 O-^ {b_ ,

J ti-

PLATE XXXI

Fig. I . Example of the elimination of the transmission band, by means
of the ' cut-out ' switch, to allow the echo to be recorded at depths
varying between 990 and laiofm. (1810 and 2213 m.). In this
instance a fault in the transmission, known as ' double-knocking ',
also is seen recorded. This trouble normally was caused by the lack
of sufficient 'back-pressure' through the reducing valve, which
prevented the sharp return of the hammer to the magnetic valve.
It could also be caused by the partial failure of the magnetic air
valve in the head of the hammer, when a second blow would be
struck before the supply of H.P. air was properly cut off. Speed of
ship, ID knots. Vertical scale, x io-8. (Part of Record XXXVI/37.)

Fig. 2. Typical record from M/S. XII type shallow water recorder.
Record made during survey of NW coast of Coronation Island,
South Orkneys, in 1937. Pencil markings were inserted as soon as
the record was dry, in order to facilitate the plotting of the soundings
should the record fade. Time scale automatically marked every
3 minutes. Speed of ship, 7 knots. Vertical scale, x 7-56. (Part of
Record XXVIII/37.) See Text-fig. 3(c), p. 46.

DISCOVERY REPORTS VOL. XXV

PLATE XXXI

t1

-I ti

^ i f

P-^V

'-^

[It

S'50. -

ON THE REPRODUCTIVE ORGANS OF
HOLOZOA CYLINDRICA LESSON

By Dr A. Arnbiick Christie-Linde
(Plate XXXII)

IN the Magellan region Lesson (in 1830) collected a peculiar Polycitorid species of Ascidian which
he described under the name of Holozoa cylindrica.

This find was long forgotten, and when several specimens were later collected in Antarctic waters,
this same species was described under different generic and specific names. This fact has been pointed
out by previous authors. Caiman's J/z/m/a australis and Herdman's Distaplia ignota, likewise Sluiter's
Julinia ignota, which have all been collected in the Antarctic, are no doubt representatives of Holozoa
cylindrica.

With regard to the external form and shape of the colonies, as well as of the zooids, the previous
descriptions agree in essential points. I will return to a discussion of this matter in another paper, in
which additional conmients may be made. The reproductive organs only will be dealt with in this
preliminary note.

The common view is that the colonies and the zooids in them are gonochoristic, i.e. either male or
female. But Caiman's statement (1895) as to this character is not quite clear. He writes: ' In all the
individuals examined several ova were found in various stages of development. . . ' (loc. cit. p. 10);
and further at the bottom of the same page : ' In nearly all the specimens examined hardly a trace of
testis could be found, although the vas deferens was usually full of spermatozoa. In one or two cases,
however, the testis was developed ' (p. 1 1). And further, on the same page : ' No definite relation between
the states of maturity of ovary and testis such as would suggest the occurrence of protandry or proto-
gyny could be demonstrated.'

Michaelsen has pointed out that Herdman's Distaplia ignota is no doubt identical with H. cylindrica
Lesson, though he has accepted the generic name Julinia proposed by Caiman. He writes in his
description that the colonies of the species in question seem to be either male or female. 'Julinia
scheint wie Colella — getrennt geschlechtliche Kolonien zu produzieren' (1907, p. 41).

Hartmeyer, too, is of the same opinion. He has had abundant material at his disposal, and the
result of his investigation is that the colonies examined by him are gonochoristic.

With regard to Caiman's description Hartmeyer (191 1) remarks : ' Immerhin scheint mir nach allem,
was Caiman iiber die Geschlechtsorgane sagt, sein Material nicht giinstig genug gewesen zu sein, um
aus seinen Beobachtungen einen sicher begriindeten Einwand gegen die von Michaelsen und mir auf
Grund gewichtigen Tatsachenmaterials angenommene Eingeschlechtlichkeit der Kolonien her-
zuleiten' (loc. cit. p. 484).

I now have reason to return to the subject, having had occasion to examine colonies of Holozoa
cylindrica collected by the Discovery Expeditions and also a few colonies brought back by the British
Graham Land Expedition (with the 'Penola'). The Discovery material was taken by dredge in the
mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia, 200-234 m. (St. 149), 10 January 1927, and that from
the British Graham Land Expedition was taken at Stella Creek, surface, 5 December 1935.

The result of this investigation refutes the above-mentioned view of Hartmeyer and Michaelsen,
and gives proofs for an opinion opposite to that of these authors, for, as will be shown below, the species
in question prove to be hermaphrodite.

no DISCOVERY REPORTS

The figures given here (Plate XXXII) of zooids from the above-mentioned material support in an
indisputable way the view of the hermaphroditism of//, cylmdrica. As is shown in Plate XXXII, fig. i,
illustrating an individual from a colony collected by the Discovery Expedition, in January, the female
and the male reproductive organs are both present. They are situated on the right side of the body,
on the bend of the intestine. The testis is placed to the side of the ovary. A large brood-pouch is
developed on the dorsal side of the thorax.

In the zooid figured the ovary consists of two large eggs. In some zooids two to three large eggs
have been observed at the same time. The oviduct is thin-walled, long and broad, running along the
ascending part of the intestine. The distal part is narrow. In the figure the oviduct is seen entering
into the brood-pouch with its distal narrow part. As mentioned above, the brood-pouch is well
developed. It is in the form of a large rounded sac.

The testis is well distinguished, though not very much developed in the individual in question. It
consists of small rounded glands, which seem more or less emptied of their contents. The vas deferens
is represented by a wide duct of considerable length and with several windings. It is situated on the
external side of the oviduct and runs up along the intestine and the rectum. It opens at the side of the
anus, and its distal part is seen in the figure given.

The individual illustrated in Plate XXXII, fig. 2, is from a colony dredged by the British Graham Land
Expedition at Stella Creek, in December. In this zooid the male reproductive organs are in a highly
developed stage. The testis consists of a great number of glands, of rounded or oval shape, forming
a large mass of mulberry-like aspect. The vas deferens is still a narrow tube, sinuous, but shorter,
being without the deep windings seen in the Discovery sample described above. It accompanies the
ascending branch of the intestine.

Of the female reproductive organs, however, only rudimental traces are to be seen. Three small
follicles of whitish colour situated on the external side of the testis (cf. Plate XXXII, fig. 2) represent no
doubt the ovary. The oviduct could not be distinguished. A rudiment of the brood-pouch is distinctly
to be seen, though it is only little developed.

The facts pointed out above prove that H. cylindrica is hermaphrodite. The colonies and the zooids
are not either male or female, as is the view of several previous authors. But whether the male and
the female reproductive organs attain their full development at the same time or at different seasons
is another problem.

If we consider the states of maturity of the reproductive organs in the zooids figured and the
difference in season when the material was collected, certain conclusions may be justified.

The zooid shown in Plate XXXII, fig. 2, is from a colony taken in December, the last month of the
year, i.e. early in the Antarctic summer. The zooid shown in fig. i is from a colony taken in
January, the first month of the year, i.e. in the full summer in the Antarctic region.

In the first-mentioned individual the male reproductive organs are highly developed, and the testis
seems to have attained its full maturity. The vas deferens is a long sinuous tube. The female repro-
ductive organs are in a rudimentary stage. The ovary is represented by three small ova, and the
oviduct is not to be seen. The rudiment of the brood-pouch is in the form of a small vesicle.

In the individual from the colony dredged in the Antarctic summer the female reproductive organs
are in their full development. The ovary consists of large ova, the oviduct is distinctly differentiated,
and the brood-pouch is represented by a large rounded vesicle attached to the body by means of
a narrow neck. The male reproductive organs seem to be in a reduced stage. The testis consists of
a small number of thin follicles lying at the side of the ovary, but the vas deferens is still a duct of great
length and width, winding up along the intestine and the rectum.

From the state of maturity of the reproductive organs mentioned above it is apparent that the male

ON THE REPRODUCTIVE ORGANS OF HOLOZOA CYLINDRICA LESSON iii

organs attain their full development early in the Antarctic summer, and the female organs later during
the full Antarctic summer. The former are thus mature in advance of the female. The conclusion
which might be drawn from these facts seems thus to point to the occurrence of protandry in
H. cylindrica.

According to Hartmeyer and Michaelsen, and also Van Name (1945) other Polycitorid genera too,
for instance Sycozoa and Sigillina, are gonochoristic, the colonies and the zooids from the same colony
being either male or female (see Bronn's Tier-Reich). The fact that Holozoa cylindrica is herma-
phrodite raises the question whether these genera in fact also possess this peculiar character.

In his paper Ascidiae Krikobranchiae von Neuseeland, den Chatham- und den Auckland-Inseln (1924),
Michaelsen has in some degree receded from this opinion. In the above-mentioned paper of his
he proposes to unite the nearly allied forms Holozoa and certain species of Sycozoa under a common
generic name Distaplia. — Holozoa and Distaplia are considered by Hartmeyer as identical (loc. cit.
p_ 1437). — In his diagnosis of the genus Distaplia Michaelsen mentions as one of the generic cha-
racters 'Personen zwittrig oder Kolonien getrennt geschlechtlich ; ein enggestielter Brutsack vor-
handen, i Embryo oder deren mehrere enthaltend' (loc. cit. p. 297). 'In der Gattung Distaplia s.s.
kommen dagegen sowohl Arten mit getrenntgeschlechtlichen Kolonien vor, sowie solche mit Kolonien,
deren Personen zwittrig sind' (loc. cit. p. 321). According to this author the species of this genus are
thus either gonochoristic or hermaphrodite. In Distaplia {Holozoa) cylindrica and the ' cerebriforme-
Gruppe ', the colonies and the zooids are of the same sex, but in other species of Distaplia they are
hermaphrodite.

Taking into consideration what has been adduced above, it is evident that until further evidence is
forthcoming by way of thorough investigations nothing can be stated for certain, whether certain
Polycitorid forms are in reality gonochoristic, or whether, just as in Holozoa, an investigation of suit-
able material collected in various seasons might prove them to be hermaphrodite.

LITERATURE

Calman, W. T., 1895. On Julinia; a new geniis of Compound Ascidians from the Antarctic Ocean. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,
new sen, xxxvn. London.

Hartmeyer, R., 1909-11. Ascidien in Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des Tier-Reichs. in, Suppl. Leipzig.

191 1. Die Ascidien der Deutschen Siidpolar-Expedition i()oi-i<)02. D. Sudp.-Exp. xn. Berlin.

Michaelsen, W., 1896-1907. Tunicaten, in Ergebnisse d. Hamburger Magalhaensischen Sammelreise 1892-1893, i. Ham-
burg.

. 1924. Ascidiae Krikobranchiae von Neuseeland, den Chatham- und den Auckland-Inseln. Vidensk. Meddel. fra Dansk

Naturh. Foren. Lxxvn. Odense.

Van Name, W. G., 1945. The North and South American Ascidians. Bull. American Mus. Nat. Hist. Lxxxiv. New York.

hhlH ,\o .81 X .able
aev ,Vkc ;8iJ89i ,i ;d3firnc

PLATE XXXII

Fig. I. Holozoa cylindrica. Zooid, seen from the right side, x i8.
al, atrial languet ; bp, brood-pouch ; o, ovary ; od, oviduct ; st, stomach ;
/, testis; vd, vas deferens.

Fig. 2. H. cylindrica. Zooid, seen from the right side, x i8. al, atrial
languet; bp, brood-pouch; o, ovary; st, stomach; t, testis; vd, vas
deferens.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL XXV.

PLATE XXXIl

st

UO'LOZOA CYLINDRICA LESSON

I

THE HABITS OF FIN WHALES'

By E. R. Gunther
(Plate XXXIII; Text-figs. 1-7)

INTRODUCTION

N the present paper various observations of whales, as they have been seen at sea, have been put

together in the hope that they will contribute to a broader understanding of the relations of the
living whale to its environment. The observations were made from a modern whale catcher, the
Skua, while engaged upon whale-marking work'^ in the neighbourhood of South Georgia during the
two months 11 December 1936 to 9 February 1937. The author had a stop-watch but no cinemato-
graph camera, and in consequence many of the conclusions made in the following pages are open to
amendment.

The difficulties of making observations on living whales are many. They show themselves above
water for only brief periods, and their specialization for life in the water renders direct comparison
with the behaviour of land mammals hazardous. Opportunities of watching them at close quarters
have usually been restricted to vessels engaged in whaling ; on board which life has to be lived to be
understood. True (1903), who has used a camera on board a catcher, has remarked ' . . .the difficulty
of getting the picture itself is so great that one's faculties are entirely absorbed in the proceeding and
there is little opportunity for observing particulars. The pitching and rolling of the steamer in the
restless waters is very disconcerting, and not less so the fact that the point at which the whale will
appear is uncertain and the length of time it will remain in view very brief.' It is noteworthy that
True's photographs were secured in calm weather.

A research ship has certain advantages over the commercial catcher. She is on the whaling grounds
for longer periods, and when following a school, the chase does not terminate when one whale has
been hit. While the firing of marking guns has a disturbing effect upon whales, the noise is not to be
compared with the report of a commercial harpoon gun and probably gives correspondingly less shock.
The motion of a catcher is, of course, the same whether she is actually used for catching whales or not.
She completes a roll in 4 sec. and this means that the opportunity to fire marks occurs momentarily
every 2 sec. when the ship is either at the crest or the trough. Another factor making for great dif-
ficulty in the collection of scientific data in the Sub-Antarctic is the incessant spraying of cold water
over the gun platform so that on many days it is impossible to use pencil and paper.

The report is divided into three parts and it concerns only the habits of the Fin whale {Balaenoptera

1 This paper was nearly completed by the late Mr Gunther in 1939. His death on active service, however, took place in
1940, and the MS. was not available until after the war. The text and illustrations are printed almost as he left them, except
for two passages which seemed to need revision. Thus the first sentence has been written in place of three short opening
paragraphs, and on p. i2i the two paragraphs beginning, 'Over all the periods of observation. . .', and ending, 'breathing
intervals of different whales', replace a passage equivalent to rather less than a page of text (together with three text-figures)
in which the data on the frequency of blowing were further discussed. It is believed that these two paragraphs summarize
the author's line of thought. He could no doubt have adjusted both the original passages by a few amendments, but to revise
them now in full might involve a departure from his intentions. Elsewhere in the text only trivial editorial work has been
needed. Among the illustrations the author had provisionally chosen nine photographs. Of these the six reproduced in
Plate XXXni are the most suitable for reproduction and seem to meet the author's requirements.— f^^.

2 See Rayner, 1940.

„5 DISCOVERY REPORTS

physalus). Part I, as far as permitted by the nature of the observations, is an account of the whales
as they have been seen at the surface. Inferences of what goes on below the surface, and comparisons
with the observations of earlier authors, are left as far as possible until Parts II and III.

I. APPEARANCE AT THE SURFACE

Opportunities of observing cetacea occur both when they are under water near the surface and when
they break surface to blow.^ They have also been known to break surface without blowing. As,
however, they are usually blowing when they are seen, it will be convenient first to consider various
ways in which they come up to breathe.

Breaking surface to breathe

The length of time a mature Fin whale shows above water usually varies from 3 to 6 sec. and some-
times lasts for as long as 7I sec. ; calves show for shorter periods of 2-2^ sec. The time is divisible into
two periods : the first a very short period of little more than i sec. during which the head emerges and
submerges again, and then a period of variable duration, of from 2 to 6| sec. during which the rest of
the body follows. The first period seems to vary comparatively little. The length of time the whale
shows above water depends then mainly upon the length of the second period, and this depends very
largely on what he is doing.

For simplicity of treatment three examples may be chosen to illustrate the different methods employed
in breaking surface. They are discussed in later pages but it may be well here to bear in mind that no
one of the methods need be rigidly adhered to.

(i) Slow. A whale breaking surface to blow very leisurely, approaches the surface horizontally and
swims slowly (Fig. la). Its upward motion, in a more or less horizontal position, resembles the action
of a submarine and can be watched for several seconds before it breaks the surface. The head and back
break surface almost simultaneously and the whale blows. At the slowest speed the snout seems mostly
to remain beneath the surface. The blowing over, the head is lowered as the dorsal fin emerges, so
that for a split second both show above water (Fig. ib\ PL XXXIII, figs, i, 2). The whole body
then sinks, and the whale, still comparatively horizontal, submerges. This leisurely blowing (7I sec.)
gives a smaller target than the hurried movement.

(ii) Medium speed. Whales may be considered to be breaking surface at medium speed (5|-6| sec.)
when, as frequently happens, they approach the surface at an angle of 25-35° 5 ir^ this action they can
also be seen for some moments before emergence and at this angle their attitude bears some resemblance
to a tadpole gulping air at the surface of a pond. The tip of the snout is first seen and an appreciable
extent (say one-third to one-half or more) of the lower jaw emerges (fig. id, e, and also True, 1903,
plate XXIV, fig. 2). In head-on view the white chin and the ventral grooves are plainly visible from
the catcher's bows. As soon as the blowhole is free the whale blows ; but as it does so the head is
dipped. As the head becomes horizontal, the upper jaw and, if visible, the whale-bone plates, are
above the surface but the lower jaw is awash. The eye appears to be hidden by the wash which the
lower jaw sets up. Further dipping of the head bends the anterior part of the body into an arc and as
the whale moves forward the blowhole disappears from view (Fig. if, g ; Plate XXXIII, figs. 3, 4). All
this has happened in a surprisingly short time and constitutes stage i .

The tip of the dorsal fin may break surface before the back is wholly out of the water, but the fin
and blowhole are seldom visible together (Fig. i^). The whale illustrated in Plate XXXIII, fig. i,
while showing both blowhole, fin and peduncle, appears to be swimming more horizontally and rather

1 The word ' blow ' is used throughout this account for the act of expiration and inspiration. It is synonymous with ' spout '
which, however, is open to confusion with the traditional idea of a spouting column of water.

APPEARANCE AT THE SURFACE 117

slower than the whale in fig. 2 of the same plate. As a result of further flexure, which can sometimes
be seen to be effected by muscles of the back, the mid part of the body travels through the arc set by the
head and neck (Fig. i h). As the whale travels forward, the trunk and fin rise out of the water (Fig. i /,
andy); then, giving place to the caudal peduncle, the trunk begins to sink (Fig. \k, I). The general
effect after the dipping of the head is that of a wheeling motion of the back out of the sea and into it
again. But the fin, having wheeled out of the water, acquires a cam-like action and having reached its
zenith, the wheeling motion stops. The outstanding parts now slowly sink, travelling forwards slowly.
The caudal peduncle submerges, together with the posterior part of the trunk, and the fin is generally
the last to disappear from view (Fig. i m). The fin and caudal peduncle often disappear simultaneously,
but the peduncle seldom by itself and then only when the angle of diving is unusually steep. A whale
blowing in this manner offers the best target not only because the movement is comparatively slow
but also because the head, trunk and caudal peduncle are well elevated.

Fig. I. Diagrams illustrating the appearances of Fin whales at the surface; based on photographs and notes, and on a drawing
by J. F. G. Wheeler (Mackintosh and Wheeler, 1929). a-c, whale blowing leisurely; d-m, at medium speed; n-p, fast.

The whale may go through these motions faster or slower, a period of 40—6 sec. elapsing between the
act of blowing and the disappearance of the dorsal fin (5I-7 sec. overall). A whale in a hurry blows off
air before reaching the surface and a dome of silvery bubbles momentarily appears over the back of the
neck. According to the speed of blowing depends the splash. A whale shooting its head out of the
water fast, sometimes lets it down fast and the surface splash, accompanied by waves, spreads several
yards to right and left. Disappearance of the fin and caudal peduncle, however, is unattended by
splash.

Here it may be convenient to refer to the so-called 'oily patch' (or 'slick'. True, 1903) left by the
whales at the surface after their disappearance. The smoothness of these patches resembles closely
the wake of a steamship, and the welling which is observed in them is doubtless produced by the tail
flukes and affords useful evidence of their action.

(iii) Fast. When blowing is brisk, the whale appears and disappears so quickly (3-3! sec.) that the
details of its movement are hard to pick up and whales breaking surface in this way have not, during
this whale-marking commission, been spotted beneath the surface beforehand. The whale appears
suddenly and simultaneously blows. The tip of the snout is again the first part to emerge and the head
shows above water for little more than a second as before. The movements are probably similar to
those undergone in breaking surface at medium speed, but carried out with greater impetus. The body

ii8 DISCOVERY REPORTS

is thrown into an arc of small radius and moves high out of the water so that an unusual depth of
flank is momentarily visible (Fig. iw; Plate XXXIII, fig. 5). The amount of wheeling motion appears
to be curtailed and the downward sinking comes on sooner, sometimes with lateral splashing. The
fin and caudal peduncle are again the last to disappear (Fig. 1 0, p).

Breaking surface without breathing
On various occasions whales have been seen to break surface without blowing. On 22 December,
the dorsal fins of two were seen above the water. The whales were leisurely, and on approach of the
ship the fins submerged slowly. On 1 1 January, while whales were feeding upon krill close to the
surface, tail flukes (either right or left) and flippers often broke surface, and the former waved in the
air as though in execution of swimming movements. The significance of this will be referred to in the
notes upon feeding (pp. 124 and 133). On 31 January a whale beneath the surface, a point or two off
the course, made straight for the ship's stem and only averted collision by a sudden dive beneath the
keel when a yard or two away. As he did so, the dorsal fin and the caudal peduncle were momentarily
thrust out of the water. On 7 February, two other whales broke surface in much the same way. One
showed the caudal periduncle as it dived ; the other seemed to be on the point of blowing but apparently
changed its mind, the head and neck broke surface in the act of dipping, but most of the back remained

covered.

Swimming

A view of whales swimming close to the surface is usually distorted by waves and wavelets, and the
movements are hard to determine. As in their other activities, the larger rorquals look stately when
they swim because of a majestic ease of motion, even when they are keeping abreast of a ship steaming
at 10-12 knots. Seen from above, the flippers slope backwards but are spread out from the sides.

An idea of the rhythm of the tail flukes could be formed if it were possible to measure the distance
between the ' oily patches '. It will be remembered that these are produced from the action of the
flukes through the upward gush of water. At speeds of 10-12 knots, these patches appeared to be
separated by 5-10 yards and as many as six or ten in series sometimes became visible when a whale
was near the surface. According to these data, which are very rough, the flukes beat once every i or 2
sec. When a fluke is waved from side to side above the surface of the water, its rhythm appears rather
faster but was not timed.

No whale was seen to swim twice as fast as the ship at full speed. The Skua was not able to steam
faster than 12 knots, but the whales seemed, on occasion, to spurt half as fast again, and this would
bring their speed for short distances up to 16-18 knots.

Frequency of blozving

Data on respiratory rhythm have been collected by timing the blowing of whales with a stop-watch.
As often as opportunity offered, the observations were taken in unbroken series but often they had to
be curtailed and then they consisted of no m.ore than one or a few breathing intervals. Thus the ob-
servations may be looked upon as of two kinds, A and B. The first (A) at a distance from the ship
spread over longer periods and the second (B) of supplementary observations on individual whales
nearer the ship.

In the serial observations A, the stop-watch was started at the first sign of blowing and stopped at
the next, and in order to secure continuity of record, was immediately re-set and restarted. While,
therefore, the first observation in each series represents the time from blow to blow, the succeeding
observations represent the same less the time taken to read the watch which was about 2-15 sec, and
the data as given in Table 3 (p. 137) have been suitably adjusted.

APPEARANCE AT THE SURFACE "9

The data fall short of what is required in many ways. In addition to the difficulties mentioned

earlier in the paper, the stop-watch was out of action for some weeks, and the following circumstances

have also to be considered before the data are subjected to scrutiny. Serial observations were seldom

10'

15'

?0'

2
3
4
5
6^

0B5.42

-55

JXP-

J\^

DBS. 69-77

XPUL

2-
3
4
5
6
7-1

0B5.97-1O3

J-LKJ-

0B5. 107-123

_puju_u

en

0B5. 189-200

j_puq_

-1 1 1 1

20'

5' 10' 15

Fig. 2. Sequence of blowing and sounding intervals in minutes. The intervals are proportional to
the minimum length of breath.

possible for periods longer than 20 min. A whale that might be sighted by the ship at a distance of
4-5 miles would be reached in 25-35 min., but might be disturbed considerably earlier. Evidence of
such disturbance will shortly be examined. After this, observations were interrupted by markmg
work. Thus the observations were made as and when the marking programme permitted.

The tendency of Fin whales to swim in pairs or in schools, means that few, if any, of those appearing
at a distance to be alone, are without doubt known to be unaccompanied: indeed, the data listed in

I20 DISCOVERY REPORTS

the Tables give evidence that more than one whale was under observation in each of the series of
timing records made. This is most easily seen in the maximum numbers of whales blowing simul-
taneously, a datum which indicates with a high degree of probability the number of whales in the
school .

Kemp and Bennett (1932, p. 174) have pointed out that 'If, as often happens, several whales are
in company, they will generally rise to the surface and blow simultaneously. When whales are not
plentiful it is possible to be reasonably certain that the same school is being kept under observation ;
but when they are abundant the difficulties are greatly increased.'

If the tendency to blow together could be relied upon, and the whales could be timed as a school,
interpretation of these data (A) would be straightforward. Unfortunately, however, the appearances
of the whales at the surface show a good deal of overlap and though the school often does blow to-
gether, irregularity is frequent. In view of the likelihood of confusing the blowing of one whale with
that of another, the results would appear to lend themselves to almost any interpretation. But analysis
shows that this is not so. The data show certain features which cannot be regarded as fortuitous : and
some of these features are confirmed by the supplementary observations (B). These latter consist of
isolated observations of whales close to the ship and they are important because they are believed, with
a fair degree of certainty, to represent the behaviour of individual whales. The two classes of obser-
vations will therefore be considered together.

In series B, whales were commonly observed to blow at intervals of about 24-28 sec. about five or
six times in succession, whereupon they sounded for a longer period. On 7 February, for example,
a whale blew five times at more or less regular intervals in the course of 100 sec. and then disappeared.
On 1 9 December, blowing went on at short intervals for 115 sec. in one instance and 140 sec. in another
before the animal sounded. On occasion, when larger schools have been watched, the school has
risen more often, but not every whale has come to the surface at every blowing.

Parallel instances of such rhythm in series A occur among the tabulated data and selected examples
are shown in Table i. They are illustrated in Fig. 2.

Table i . Comparing the lengths of the periods of sounding (/ mid IT) zvith the interim period
during which blowing intervals were noted

Date

Serial no.

of

observation

Duration

of
sounding I

Interim

period

Duration

of

sounding II

Estimated
no. of
whales

No. of

blows

observed

Duration

No. of
blowing
intervals

min. sec.

sec.

min. sec.

■

14. xii. 36

42-49

2 28

125

6

6 23

2

8

22. xii. 36

49-55
69-77

97-103

6 23
I 27

7 30

155

lOI

100

6

8

7

3 27
I 38
3 18

2

2
2

7

lO.'

7-

27. xii. 36

107-117
1 17-123
189-200

4 27
2 52
2 52

130
132
144

10

6

10

2 52
9 02
I 17

2
3

10.'

8}

20?

The absence of this particular rhythm (of blowing and sounding) among others of the data listed
in Table 3 may be due to the fact that some or all of the whales were behaving differently. Evidence
of different rhythm is given by the whales timed on 27 December. They were first observed more than
a mile off; they were approached, passed, and finally left on the starboard quarter. The observations
nos. 189-200, while the whales were far off, have the rhythm illustrated in Fig. 2, but the subsequent
observations, nos. 201-261, show no trace of it.

APPEARANCE AT THE SURFACE i2i

A similar though more remarkable change in the respiratory rhythm was obser\^ed (series B) in
a school of six or seven whales on 3 February. At 11. 15 hr. whales were sounding for long periods
(4-6 min.) and between whiles were blowing a few times at short intervals in apparent unison.
After many and tisually fruitless attempts had been made to approach them, at 12.15 hr. they suddenly
altered their behaviour in a stampede towards the south. They no longer remained below for long
periods and as we slowly overhauled them, hopes of marking rose. At 13.00 hr., however, their be-
haviour again changed. Their complacence returned and they sounded for lengthy periods.

The rhythm demonstrated in Table i confirms the belief that individual behaviour may be studied
in collective behaviour, for their sounding together would be unlikely if the whales' actions were
unrelated. It may be helpful to compare the lengths of time the whales remained below water when
sounding (interval of sounding) and the interim periods during which breaths were taken (i.e. the
total of the periods occupied by successive intervals of blowing). The probability of being able to
distinguish an interval of sounding from an interval of blowing is likewise important.

Two records of the latter already cited (B), were 115 and 140 sec. and they compared with sounding
periods of 3 min. 8 sec, 3 min. 35 sec, 4 min. 10 sec. and 4 min. 23 sec. These figures imply that
sometimes at least the sounding periods exceed the length of the interim periods.

For the purposes of comparison, an arbitrary length of time may be chosen to distinguish between
the ' interval of sounding' and the ' interval of blowing'. On the basis of the data collected during the
observations of 19 December, according to which the whales blew several times during the course of
140 sec, an arbitrary limit of i min. is liberal as an allowance for the single ' blowing interval' and any
longer period of submergence may be regarded as a ' sounding interval '. When classified into intervals
of less than a minute and of more than a minute, and summed, the data (A) in Table 3 give the following

Interval of blowing : Interval of sounding : : 64 min. : 103 min.
(<imin.) (>imin.) (38%) (62%)

Over all the periods of observation, therefore, whales were ' sounding ', according to this empirical
definition, for 62 % of the time. The rhythm demonstrated in Table I suggests that, as often as not,
the respiratory needs of the animals were similar ; and although they did not always blow synchronously,
they chose the same periods to visit the surface and the same periods to sound. It follows that a pair
or school of whales may be expected to act in unison, in this sense, for at least 62 % of the time
(or more if the normal ' blowing interval ' is less than i min.). The timing data are therefore shown
not to be vitiated by whales blowing out of time.

It became of interest to know whether the shorter and longer intervals were physiologically distinct
or whether they are merely length variants of the same process. If the latter we might expect the
longer and shorter intervals to merge and the intervals of medium length to be in the majority. The
frequencies of the observed intervals are given in Table 2, showing the greatest frequency among
the short intervals and a diminution with increasing length of interval. The figures suggest no obvious
discontinuity between the shorter and longer breaths but that the intervals of blowing merge
imperceptibly into intervals of sounding. If a distinction can be drawn between the two, the normal
limit of the former is likely to be between 40 and 50 sec. A curve made up of eight-second groupings
of the frequencies of the intervals of breathing is given in Fig. 3. The peak which shows at 50-54 sec.
suggests that this is a frequent and well-defined interval. Intervals of 24-28 sec. were frequently
found in the isolated observations (B). An interval of 18 sec. may represent a true interval of blowing,
but the intervals of shorter length almost certainly do not, for the manoeuvre of breaking surface
alone takes 4-7 sec. The shorter intervals are probably brought about by the overlapping of the
breathing intervals of diff"erent whales.

DISCOVERY REPORTS

Table 2.

Frequency

distribution of ititervals of bloz

mig and soundi?ig

IntcrvEl

Total

Frequency of 4 sec. groups

8 sec.

2 min.

(sec.)

frequency
(2 sec.)

groups
frequency

groups
frequency

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

Total

1-2

—

3-4

—

15

5-6

7-8

II

14

~

6

4

5

15

9-10
11-12

25
25

3

29

12

6

50

81

13-14

21

15-16

10

3

22

3

3

31

17-18

24

8

26

6

I

41

66

19-20

17

21-22

18

6

13

2

4

25

23-24

7

25-26

13

27-28

14

II

10

2

4

27

33

29-30

5

4

I

_

I

6

31-32

I

33-34
35-36

5
3

3

3

—

2

8

13

37-38

2

3

I

_

I

5

39-40

3

41-42

—

I

I

43-44

I

2

45-46

—

I

I

47-48

I

49-50

I

3

I

4

51-52

3

9

53-54
55-56

3
2

—

3

I

I

5

57-58

I

I

59-60

—

I

(min.)

0
I

220
7

227

2

7

II

3

4

4

2

4

5

2

6

4

5

7

I

8

—

J

9

I

Note, (i) Frequency of series i and 3 (vide Table 3).

(ii) Frequency of series 2, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 13 and 15.
(iii) Frequency of series 11.
(iv) Frequency of series 6, 12, 14 and observations 78-79.

The response of whales to marking
Whales are disturbed by the sound of the ship, by the report of whale-marking guns and by the
impact of the marks. At the sound of the ship they usually moved off gently, but at the report of
a marking gun, or when hit with a mark they sometimes bolted to a safe distance and then slowed
down.

APPEARANCE AT THE SURFACE 123

The most timid took flight on approach of the ship : they swam off in a set direction or erratically,
but keeping well out of range of the guns. A ship of 10-12 knots has no hope of overtaking these
whales and they were usually abandoned by us after an hour's chase.

The less timid took flight on approach of the ship but allowed themselves to be overtaken after
pursuit.

On 3 January when the whales were inclined to be on the timid side, schools of two to four allowed
the ship to come within range after perhaps 10-30 min. chasing, but went out of reach immediately
one of their number had been hit. On the same day a gun was accidentally discharged at a distance
of 100-200 yards behind a school of 9-10 and the whales became unapproachable.

At other times a school may allow the ship at close quarters, though after every round of hitting
the whales take temporary flight. Some whales grow less approachable, others more so under this
treatment.

100-1

80-

^60-

kJ

a

Ld

0140-

LL

20-

24 32 40 48 56

LENGTH OF INTERVAL IN SECONDS

64

72

BO

Fig. 3. Curve illustrating the frequency distribution of blowing intervals, with data lumped into 8 sec. groups.

In contrast to the occasions when whales fled from the whale-marking vessel, are the times when
they took no notice of her and when they even seemed attracted. These occasions were few and as
the circumstances suggest that the whales were in the act of, or had been, feeding, they will be
considered later.

Another response, especially characteristic of the larger schools, is a tendency to split up into smaller
groups. On 29 December, for example, a school of probably fifty split into halves. The half pursued
soon split again so that no more than a dozen whales or so could be chased as a body. Later, these
in turn dispersed into smaller schools of threes, fours, fives or sixes. Such splitting was frequent.

Whales very often seemed to wince on being hit by a mark : indicated by a twitching of the dorsal
fin (28 December), and sometimes by a quivering of the muscles of the flank as in a horse (21 January),
or by a kick with one of the tail flukes (11 January). The fluke would flick out of the water, beating
about with the flourish of an irritated animal, and send up an awesome splash, sometimes wetting the
ship's forecastle.

Whales not hit have also been seen to kick with a fluke at the report of a gun, though the mark
that was fired was aimed at another whale and had missed it (7 February). And whales that have come
towards the surface with the evident intention of blowing have, at the report of a gun, dived again.

124 DISCOVERY REPORTS

This reaction suggests a change of mind and it has usually happened well in advance of the need to
break surface; but sometimes it has happened when emergence was inevitable, as two or three times
when the caudal peduncle, and once the neck region, was thrust out of the water in the act of diving
(31 January and 7 February, sec p. 128).

Feeding
On 1 1 January, whales in the act of feeding came under direct observation. A heavy concentration
estimated to number 100 200 whales was centred over a patch of whale food in an area of about
4-5 square miles.

The krill {Euphausia superba) could be seen in a layer no more than 3 m. below the surface, and in
places it affected the colour of the sea. An easterly gale the previous day had left a very heavy swell,
but the wind had since moderated and waves were no longer breaking. The sky was grey and the bad
visibility was reduced from time to time by patches of mist. The sea was grey too, but in places the krill
imparted to it a barely noticeable tinge of ochre. In one place where the krill was unusually thick and
might have been closer to the surface, a patch of half an acre or so had a brick-red tinge. The krill was
irregularly spread over the whole region with large gaps between the swarms ; some measured a few
feet across and had an indefinite contour like that of a gorse bush, and others extended in long wavy
bands from one to several feet or even metres in width. The krill did not seem as dense as patches of
it often are, and it looked as though it had been broken up by the recent gale and had been depleted
by the depradations of the whales.

The whales were banded together in small schools of from two to five or six or more ; but the schools
were probably mixing. The animals were blowing leisurely, and sounding for short periods. In the
early part of the day and late in the afternoon they showed a disposition to run away from the ship ;
but in the middle of the morning, when they seemed to be feeding most actively, they took little heed
of us and marking was comparatively easy.

The most conspicuous feature of their feeding was the tendency to swim on one side.^ From afar,
the white ventral surface shone beneath the water so that its blueness was momentarily thrown up.
There would appear to be no need to look for any other explanation of this than that it is a method of
turning sharply to one side (see p. 131). Whales sometimes turned out of a normal act of blowing on
to their side before submerging and sometimes turned while under water; if close to the surface,
flipper or fluke broke surface and waved in the air.

A point to be emphasized was the supreme indifference with which the whales accepted the marking
and the presence of the marking vessel when actively feeding. They blew leisurely, sometimes swimmmg
towards us, beneath us and by our side, and they seemed to be preoccupied with the question of
their meal.

The salient facts in these observations, for purposes of future comparison, are as follows:

(i) The whales were feeding,
(ii) They were close to the surface,
(iii) They were concentrated together,
(iv) The schools were of varying size,
(v) They were blowing leisurely and at short intervals,
(vi) Their unconcern for the ship gave an appearance of preoccupation.
A rather similar state of things was observed north-west of the South Sandwich Islands on
22 January. During the morning the ship had been pursuing whales, but marking with only partial
success, for the schools were unapproachable and one after another had led the ship a run of 30-40
1 I am informed by Mr G. W. Rayncr that Norwegian whalers have the word 'boltering' to describe this habit.

APPEARANCE AT THE SURFACE 125

miles. In one of these chases at 13.00 hr. the ship came upon an area of about a square mile where
ten to thirty whales were blowing leisurely. No krill was to be seen but a concourse of blackfish and
dolphins crossed the area during our work. The whales were swimming close under the surface, came
within a stone's throw of the ship and allowed themselves to be marked ; they seemed to be crossing
and rccrossing the area. When the ship passed on to another region, the whales there showed the
timidity of those we had seen earlier in the day.

Although no krill was visible, the presence of dolphins and blackfish presumes an abundant food
supply: and though there is no direct evidence that the whales were feeding, their behaviour bore
a resemblance to that of the whales met with on 1 1 January and contrasts with that of others in the
immediate neighbourhood but outside this concentration, which were seen at almost the same time
and under the same weather conditions.

The salient points may be thus tabulated :

(i) The presence of food is inferred from the concourse of the smaller as

well as of the larger cetacea.
(ii) The whales were close to the surface,
(iii) The schools were of varying size,
(iv) They were blowing leisurely and at short intervals,
(v) The whales were quite unconcerned.

On 8 January around the Shag Rocks, in the middle of the day from 10.00 to 16.00 hr., the whales
showed an unconcern for the ship which was in marked contrast with their usual behaviour. Chasing
was begun at dawn in fine calm weather. Whales were plentiful and schools, varying in size from
three or four to ten or twenty individuals, were discerned on various cjuarters of the horizon. Marking
efforts were not unsuccessful, for as many as three or four hits in a school of six or seven were sometimes
recorded before the school in question split and those whales took to prolonged flight. The whales
were not sounding for more than 2-3 min. and, until disturbed, they were blowing leisurely.

Between eight and ten o'clock the attitude of the whales changed: they became scarcer and were
more difficult of approach. Marking all but came to an end. The schools seemed to have scattered
and apparently regardless of the operations of the ship, the whales seemed to have split up into twos
and threes. They were remaining down for long periods (5-7 min.), and when they came up they
were usually up to half a mile from the ship and blowing, if unhurriedly, also a trifle stertorously. The
ship takes about 3 min. to steam half a mile ; but however leisurely the whales were blowing— and they
blew at least five or six times — 3 min. was ample for their purpose. The ship was invariably on the
scene too late and the whales sounded just before a shot was possible.

The whales paid no particular attention to the ship ; when blowing they swam on a straight course
and they did not deviate as we approached them. When they next appeared, they again had ample
time to blow five times before the ship could reach them ; as it did so they sounded.

In the evening, between 16.00 and 18.00 hr., whales again tended to coalesce and again allowed them-
selves to be pursued, and an average of one to two hits in a school of three to five whales was scored.
The whales remained below for shorter periods (2-4 min.), and when on the run sounding lasted for
still shorter periods (1-2 min.).

Later still, the whales had gathered into even larger schools. At 20.00 hr., a school of some twenty
had been formed. They were continually breaking surface and blowing, and appeared to be disporting
themselves. At first marking was easy, the whales swimming round without heed. At the sound of
the guns they began to make off, but those we chased played around the ship as do dolphins ; they
leapt high though not completely out of the water, appeared now on the starboard bow, now on the

J26 DISCOVERY REPORTS

port ; then they would streak ahead jumping high, sometimes in pairs, sometimes in threes and some-
times in unison, and then came closer to the ship again. Soon they split again, and the fewer they were
the more wary they became and the harder to mark.

This one day was particularly memorable as giving us whales in three distinct moods : in early
morning and late afternoon the schools of medium size which allowed pursuit and approach ; before
and after noon, the very small schools that were indifferent; in the late evening, the sportive whales
in a large gathering. One or other of the same moods was recognized on other occasions also.

If a disposition to be preoccupied indicates that whales are feeding, as the observations on 1 1 and
22 January have been interpreted, then their aloof manner at noon on 8 January points to the same
conclusion. Here, their behaviour had the following characteristics:

(i) The whales were widely scattered,
(ii) The schools were very small,
(iii) They were blowing leisurely at long intervals,
(iv) The whales were preoccupied,
(v) The hour was round about noon.

The most noticeable way in which behaviour on 8 January differed from that on 1 1 and 22 January,
was the greater depth to which the whales may be inferred from (iii) to have been sounding, and the
very small size of the schools. The former is thus a sign that the krill were at some considerable depth
while the smallness of the school seems in some way connected.

The gathering into larger schools towards evening, the high spirits and the attention to the ship, go
to indicate that the work of the day was over. We came to regard the evening as a time when whales
were likely to be more markable ; and in the opinion of the writer the change of attitude affords circum-
stantial evidence that earlier in the day, good feeding had been found at considerable depths.

Through the night, the whales may equally have been feeding or resting. What they were doing
at dawn did not become apparent either. In the early morning, the schools were usually bigger and
less restive, and the whales still easier to mark than later in the day.

Off South Georgia on 16 January, three whales provided, in another locality, an excellent example
of the aloofness with which feeding in deep water has come to be identified. For a good hour, the ship
had been hanging round the first of these whales and the prospect of marking it seemed hopeless— the
animal sounded for long periods and always rose out of reach. At last at 17.10 hr. the miracle happened :
the whale reappeared close to us and swam on a course which must cross our path. In many circum-
stances it would have turned away, but in holding its course and in diving to avoid collision it showed
itself to be preoccupied, and in the light of other observations, the conclusion is irresistible that it was
busy feeding.

A second example was a pair of whales met with shortly before sunset which in turn detained the
ship for over an hour. When at last at 20.00 hr. by a stroke of genius, the captain manoeuvred the
ship into their line of advance, the whales, instead of fleeing, continued in their courses and the pair
was marked in two consecutive shots (mark nos. 7006 and 701 1).

Gambols and eccentricities of behaviour
Beyond suggesting that whales take part in pursuits usually termed 'play', the following note is
inconclusive. That whales have shown excitement after a day's feeding has been mentioned. A
gathering of them in much the same mood was met close to the surface at 13.00 hr. on 29 December.
They were estimated to number about fifty and were blowing in succession with a continuity suggestive
of a rocket display. The school did not seem to be feeding at the moment of our arrival, for almost

APPEARANCE AT THE SURFACE 127

immediately it split and the whales we pursued split up again, allowing themselves to be chased late
into the afternoon. Some seventeen hits only were scored. Had the animals been feeding, they would
not, presumably, have allowed themselves to be chased 20 miles from the site of their food and might
have been expected to show a certain indifference to the ship. The fact that they were not more ap-
proachable probably argues that they were not surfeited. Their gathering in such numbers at noon is
an unexplained incident.

A similar concentration of about fifty whales was also met at 09.50 hr. on 27 December. Again,
their numbers split immediately on our arrival. The visibility was not good and at 13.00 hr., after
nineteen hits had been recorded, the original concentration was lost in mist.

Sometimes whales indulge in superfluous splashing when in flight. On 13 or 14 December, a school
of maybe ten whales were chased at 11-12 knots. One or more of the leaders, whenever coming up
to blow, slapped the surface with its head, raising sheets of spray for yards to right and left. Similar
splashing has been noticed on other occasions, conspicuously in a Fin whale chased by the William
Scoresby on 24-25 January 193 1 : this whale was not sounding, however, and was running away at an
estimated speed of more than 12 knots.

On 21 January a single Blue whale was consorting with four to five Fin whales (mark no. 7078).
The school fled, but periodically allowed the ship to overtake it and seemed to show some interest in
the ship ; in the course of an hour or two several were marked. The Blue whale detached itself from
the school and swam within a few feet of us. It took no notice of the firing, leaping high though not
clear of the water, now to the right and now to the left of the bows, and often within arm's length.
The antics could not have been watched at closer quarters, but the fading light and the quickness of
jumping made a detailed view of the movements impossible.

Whales have not infrequently flicked a tail fluke out of the water in the final act of diving — a man-
nerism very similar to but apparently distinct from the kicking movement after being hit, for it has been
observed far from the ship. Certain whales were given to it more than others; some seemed prone to
lift the right fluke, others the left.

Another eccentricity was shown by one whale on 22 December and by two whales on 7 January
which blew without showing the dorsal fin.

Sei whales were always very difticuh of approach. They took more erratic courses than Fin whales
and kept well out of range ; when they reappeared after sounding they were usually far away and moving
in any but the direction in which the ship was heading. They were met with on few occasions.

II. MOVEMENTS BENEATH THE SURFACE

Various details in the movement of the whale as it breaks surface throw light upon the motions of the
body beneath the water, though the mechanical and hydro-dynamical principles underlying these
actions must at present remain undetermined.

Breaking surface
Comparison of the slow, medium and fast methods of breaking surface suggest that the three
following relations are often found :

(i) The degree of curvature of the body varies inversely with the period spent above water.
(ii) The depth of body showing above water also varies inversely with the period spent above water,
(iii) The period spent above water seems to vary inversely with the swimming velocity.
From these observations it may be argued that whales without momentum have some difficulty in
leaving the surface, and it may be noted that the respiratory process occupies but a small fraction of

,28 DISCOVERY REPORTS

the total period spent above water (p. 1 16) ; the rest of the time seems to be devoted to getting below

again, which usually takes much longer than coming up.

A whale at the surface probably has two primary mechanical disadvantages to contend with, the
surface drag and the insufficient purchase which a thin surface layer affords to the action of the flukes.

A whale at rest, or swimming slowly at the surface, in a more or less horizontal posture (Fig. 4), is
probably at this disadvantage, and submergence by means of the forward motion usually observed
probably means that submergence is most easily effected gradually.

The impetus acquired by whales blowing more quickly would thus appear to have a purpose in
preventing a situation from arising which would be mechanically weak and would retard submergence.
The movements of such whales beneath the surface appear to be as follows.

The appearance of the head and neck when the whale has broken surface, together with such a view
of the body as may be gained while still beneath the water, suggests that the whale has, at first, a
straightened back (Fig. 5 a). Towards the end of the action, on the other hand, the caudal peduncle
is strongly curved and the body is presumably arched (Fig. 5^).

The whale breaks surface with a high forward velocity which then decelerates until eventually the
exposed portions at the hind-end have very little forward motion, but instead a marked vertical
component.

b a

Fig. 4. Diagrams illustrating the posture of Fin whales engaged in breaking surface and submerging leisurely.

The shape of the animal appears to the writer to be particularly suited to this act of submergence.
An outstanding characteristic of the Fin whale's back anterior to the dorsal fin is its breadth, and the
head especially is flattened. This is a fact that has frequently been noted, though its function appears to
have been overlooked (Scammon, 1874, p. 34; Millais, 1906, p. 243). The dorsal fin itself and the
caudal peduncle behind it, as remarked by Collett (1886, p. 247), Olsen (1913, p. 1076), Gray (1936,
p. 199) and others, is sharply acuminate. Gray has pointed out the value of such a peduncle to the
normal swimming actions of fast-swimming forms, but among rorquals it seems to have a further
advantage. It will be seen that when the whale approaches the surface its action conforms most closely
to the normal swimming — the body is straight and it travels forwards with high velocity — but that
when leaving the surface, the body loses forward movement, arches and takes on vertical movement
in a dorsoventral plane for which, in section, the fin and peduncle are well shaped.

In considering the implications of these movements, the following observations are also of assistance.

The oily looking patch left on the surface where the whale submerges, indicates that the last beat
of the flukes is in an upward direction (Fig. 5^-;). Such action would of course be necessary to drive
the whale downwards. But it follows that the penultimate beat is in a downward direction (Fig. 5e-/).
A downward beat of the tail flukes would tend to lift the posterior part of the trunk unless the latter
were able to carry out some other compensatory movement. In this connexion, the observations shown
in Fig. i^d-g are probably significant since they show that while the body is arching, the back rises
out of the water. Compare with this also the actions of the whales noted on 3 1 January and 7 February
which dived suddenly while still beneath the surface with the hind-end of the body as they did so ;
one thrusting the dorsal fin and the other, both fin and peduncle out of the water (p. 124).

It would appear that the movement of the whale after it has blown, is to dip the head and the tail
(Fig. 5<i, e). The action of the muscles near the neck and shoulder have been noted, and at this time
the whale is still travelling forwards. The arching of the body in the region of the dorsal fin shows that

MOVEMENTS BENEATH THE SURFACE 129

the tail is also being flexed, and its rising out of the water, as noted in the figures, may be regarded as
a consequence. The resuhing posture probably resembles that shown in Fig. 5^, and the whale would
appear to have gained a position of mechanical advantage : almost as much is hinted by Racovitza
(1903, p. 36). In this position, the flukes are sufficiently buried to have purchase for the final dive,
while the flattened head and the broad shoulders reaching downwards afford a bearing against which
force can be transmitted.

Fig. 5. Diagrams illustrating the posture of Fin whales in ten stages while breaking surface and submerging at medium speed.
The arrows in e-i indicate the supposed direction of the beat of the tail flukes.

The head, dorsal fin and caudal peduncle

The head in rorquals may thus function as a vane and may perhaps be compared to the outstretched
hands of a diver or to the elevators of a submarine. In the vertical plane its effects would thus appear
analogous with those shown by Gray (1933, pp. 115-24) to result from lateral turning of the head
in fish.

Authors have usually found difficulty in ascribing an appropriate function to the Balaenopterid
dorsal fin, and Howell (1930, p. 59), while suggesting its possible use as an equilibrator, also points
out the difficulty of accepting this conclusion about an animal swimming by a vertical motion of the

tail.

The fact observed above that the fin is usually the last part of the body to sink beneath the surface
and that it makes no splash, suggests strongly that it is streamlined for the purpose and that it facili-
tates submergence. Closer examination shows that the leading edge of the fin is normally set at an
angle of about 150° to the back anterior to it, but the angle is greatly increased when the back is arched
so that the edge of the fin tends to come into line with the curve of the back. The broad lines of the

I30 DISCOVERY REPORTS

back in the bent position thus taper until the tip — not of the tail — but of the fin is reached, and as
they submerge together, the whole sinks obliquely forwards with remarkably little disturbance to the
water.

The caudal peduncle should be considered together with the dorsal fin because it seems to share the
same function and has similarity of shape. Its structure has been frequently misrepresented (Scammon,
1874, p. 37 and plate 11, fig. 2; True, 1904, plate 48, fig. i ; Millais, 1906, plate 59, figs. 2, 3 ; Lillie,
1915, plate VII, fig. I ; Allen, 1916, plate 10, etc.).

Fig. 6. Diagrams illustrating the posture of Fin whales swimming at high speed.

The point in need of particular emphasis, is the insertion of the flukes on the peduncle. The majority
of authors have shown the plane of the flukes to lie more or less midway between the dorsal and ventral
contours of the peduncle, whereas in fact it is very distinctly nearer the ventral edge. In Fig. 7 a,
which is based on photographs published by True (1904, plate 11, fig. 4 and plate 14, figs, i, 2),
two-thirds of the peduncle are shown dorsal to the plane of the flukes and in southern Blue and Fin
whales it is approximately the same (Plate XXXIII, fig. 6; Fig. ^b). Collett (1886, plate XXV, fig. i)
and Olsen (191 3, plate CXI, fig. 7) have respectively shown the same thing for the Sei whale and
Bryde's whale.

dorsal edge

/

caudal
peduncle

notch of

fluke

rigint fluke
nr (sectioned)

dorsa
ed ge of
peduncle

sft fluke (sectioned)

Q

L left fluke

'^ (sectioned)

Fig. 7. Diagrams of the caudal peduncle, a, viewed from the left side {Balaenoptera viusculus, from True, 1904). b, viewed
from behind and from the right side, as in Plate XXXIII, fig. 6 {B. physalus).

When whales dive at unusually steep angles they submerge the fin before the peduncle and the
streamline form of the latter in transverse section is then seen to best advantage. By its great depth —
4 ft. in a 65 ft. whale (Howell, 1930, p. 204) — the flukes are kept well beneath the surface as long as
possible.

In considering the eflFects of the flattened head and its mobility, the streamlined dorsal fin and the
caudal peduncle, it would be interesting to know more about the habits of other whales. The Right
whale is also a plankton feeder and visits the surface to breathe but is said to be slow in its movements.
In this whale the maxillae are laterally narrow and dorsoventrally curved ; mobility of the head is
reduced by extensive fusion of the cervical vertebrae and it has no dorsal fin. Killer whales and dol-
phins which feed upon active prey have very much larger dorsal fins placed farther forward. The

MOVEMENTS BENEATH THE SURFACE 131

possible advantage of this to an organism in need of turning sharply to right and left is suggested by
the results obtained by Harris (1936) on the dorsal fins of fish, and it seems probable that the fins of
rorquals are in no way analogous to the fins of these other cetaceans.

As compared to the ease with which rorquals are able to turn sharply upwards or downwards,
their movement from side to side appears to be restricted. This is suggested both by the structural
arrangement of the fins, flukes and flippers, and also by the behaviour of Fin whales when feeding.
Their habit of turning on to their sides when moving about among small patches of food has often
been recorded (Millais, 1906, p. 255), and Andrews (1909, plate XL, fig. i) has photographed a whale
in this position. This seems most probably to be a turning movement. The very localized and irregular
distribution of the krill must demand a twisting motion which is probably beyond these whales in their
normal swimming position. The flattened head and laterally extended flukes, while they are evidently
well adapted for the purposes of turning upwards or downwards to and from the surface, seem in-
capable of giving an equally sharp turn to right or left : like an aeroplane it has to bank.

III. COMPARISON WITH EARLIER ACCOUNTS
True (1903) and Allen (1904) give brief descriptions of Finbacks off Newfoundland which agree well
with the type of movement described on pp. 1 1 6, 1 1 7. True, however, reports having seen little or nothing
of the back behind the dorsal fin, although the whales are described as having come up to the surface
obliquely and as exhibiting strong curvature (p. 92). On some points, however, True's photographs
differ from the text. In his plate XXV, fig. i , a relatively short length of back shows above water as
its curvature and the position of the head clearly indicate. The fin is still well submerged ; yet True
states that ' The whole upper surface of the body from about the middle of the head to the dorsal fin
is above water. . . '. The text suggests that in fig. 2 the dorsal fin is hidden by a wave, but the position
of the whale shows clearly that the fin itself is outside the picture and is probably still below water.

Both True and Allen note the lowering of the head and the arching back, but neither draws attention
to the fact that the back rises out of the water, nor that the wheeling motion slows down. Millais
(1906, p. 268), however, states 'The Finback simply lifts itself a little higher and goes down smoothly
and silently and goes down at an oblique angle', and Andrews (1909, p. 216) makes a similar remark.

Racovitza (1903) distinguishes between two types of action at the surface, the one concerned with
the longer and deeper dive which he terms ' La Sonde ' and the other with ' Les plongements inter-
mediaires '. According to Racovitza, inspiration and expiration are deeper before and after sounding
than before the intermediate dive, but comparative data are not given. Again, the intermediate dives
last a few minutes, whereas sounding seldom lasts less than a quarter of an hour, but more precise
data are not given. The whales are also said to dive more shallowly intermediately than when sounding,
though how the depth of the whale was judged during the minutes it was out of sight is not made
clear. And lastly, the curvature of the back is held to be greater before sounding than before the
intermediate dive. Racovitza ascribes a regularity to these movements which the present writer
finds impossible to accept ; they will be considered in further detail.

His first point (p. 6) that ' L'expiration se produit exactement au moment ou le sommet de la
tete, . . . arrive a la surface ' does not reckon with the habit Fin whales sometimes have of blowing oflF
air while the blowhole is still submerged (see p. 117), which appears also to have been noted by Howell
(1930, p. 91). And his claim that ' C'est la bosse de I'event qui signale I'animal' can be accepted only
for those whales which approach the surface in a more or less horizontal position. Such whales
appear to have been observed by Allen (1904, p. 615).

Racovitza has allowed 5-6 sec. for the duration of the blowing, which is greatly in excess of our

132 DISCOVERY REPORTS

estimate. According to direct observations made during the course of the present work, httle more
than I sec. elapsed from the first appearance of the head above water to the submergence of the blow-
hole. This is astonishingly short and is rather shorter than an estimate of the time made by indirect
methods, according to which the blowing might perhaps take 3 sec, but even this is half the time allowed
by Racovitza.

We are agreed with the view that the time taken over inspiration is shorter than the time taken over
expiration which immediately precedes it. Racovitza, however, maintains (p. 12) that 'La bosse de
I'event est toujours la seule partie qui apparait a ce moment sur I'eau', whereas numerous photographs
of living whales have shown other parts of the head and neck also above water. On p. 13 he notices
the neck bend, but for the intermediate dives he states that ' chez les Balenopteres la dorsale ne se
montre pas '. In the present series of observations, the dorsal fin showed above water after almost
every act of blowing seen (see p. 127).

Whether it is possible to infer from the attitude of a whale whether it is making an intermediate dive
or whether it is sounding, may be questioned, as indeed may so many of Racovitza's assertions.
Andrews (1909), whose ideas are evidently modelled to a considerable extent upon Racovitza and
Millais, touches upon the subject but gives little that can be looked upon as corroborative evidence.
The posture of a whale diving at a steep angle is admittedly different from that of a whale swimming
horizontally, but whales have frequently been seen by the writer to dive at a steep angle during inter-
mediate dives.

The view expressed by Andrews (1909) and Allen (1916) that the 'slick' left by the whales is due
to the counter-currents produced by the displaced water as the whale comes to the surface and with-
draws; or that it is ' incontestablement une couche de graisse extremement mince, qui s'etent a la
surface de I'eau et qui lui donne cet aspect bien connu du miroir ' (Racovitza, 1903, p. 15) ; or yet again,
the theories elaborated earlier leave out of account the fact that the patches often appear in series
when the whale does not break surface. They seem far more likely therefore to represent a gush of
water propelled upwards by the tail flukes.

Respiratory rhythm

Racovitza's estimate of the time taken over an intermediate dive ' plus ou moins longtemps, mais
sans jamais depasser un petit nombre de minutes' (p. 13), like his estimate of sounding 'rarement
inferieure a un quart d'heure' (p. 14) are far longer than our own.

Owing to their limited number, our observations by no means exclude the probability that whales
can and do remain below for very much longer periods than we have been able to show. The estimates
of 15 min. made by Millais (loc. cit. p. 268) and of 23 min. by Andrews (1909, p. 225) are by no means
unreasonable and are to be expected from our data. But periods of over a quarter of an hour are certain
to be exceptional as compared to the frequency of sounding for shorter periods.

In this our results confirm the observations of Allen (1904, p. 615) ' They rose to spout about once
in every 12 to 15 seconds with great regularity for perhaps twelve times, after which they dove for
a much longer stay of several minutes. The precise length of the longer periods was not accurately
determined, but could hardly have been more than five or ten minutes.'

The mean of seven instances of such rhythm given in Table i shows the schools to have been blowing
at 16 sec. intervals seven to eight times and then to have been sounding for about 4 min. Individual
whales were blowing less often, however ; the figures gave an average of four to five times at intervals
of 26-27 sec. between each sounding. When feeding at the surface, or in flight, whales did not show
this rhythm and sounded less, so that the respiratory rhythm reflected to some extent their occupation.
Andrews (1909, p. 224) also has observed 'that Finbacks, when feeding, often rise to respire with

COMPARISON WITH EARLIER ACCOUNTS i33

considerable regularity, but in general the time the animals will remain submerged is most uncertain'.
Whether this has any connexion with the depth of the food is not known and it was unfortunately
impracticable on the Skua to tow nets with the object of locating it.

Feeding

Dudley (1725, p. 262) has made a suggestion that has often been copied by later writers (Buchet,
1895 ; Racovitza, 1903) that Fin whales 'with a short turn, cause an Eddy or Whirlpool by the Force
of which, the small Fish are brought together into a Cluster ; so that the whale with open Mouth, will
take in some Hundreds of them at a Time '. The practice has not been seen by the writer.

The swarming habit of Euphausia superba, the staple of whale food around South Georgia, is a
characteristic to which Hardy & Gunther (1935) have already drawn attention. Patches of krill at the
surface of the sea, similar to, but more pronounced than, those noted on p. 124 have been observed by
the writer in areas marked by a conspicuous absence of whales, which need not be instrumental,
therefore, in bringing the swarms about. The belief would seem to have arisen as a fisherman's
explanation of the swarming and its frequent association with 'boltering' whales (see p. 131).

Millais (1906, p. 255), who also passes the story on, states 'After one or two subsidiary circles to
drive their prey together, they give a sudden start forward, at the same time turning on their side and
erecting the pectoral fin'. Erection of the flipper has been noted on p. 124 and is also figured by
Andrews (1909, plate XL, fig. i). It would §eem likely to help the whale both to turn on to its side
and to lessen the radius of its track.

Gambols

Compared to the Humpback, Fin whales are described as seldom indulging in gambols or other
antics, though movements that are not habitual are sometimes noted. Scammon (1874, p. 35) writes:
' It frequently gambols about vessels at sea, in mid-ocean as well as close in with the coast, darting
under them, or shooting swiftly through the water on either side ; at one moment upon the surface,
belching forth its quick ringing spout, and the next instant submerging itself beneath the waves, as
if enjoying a spirited race with the ship dashing along under a press of sail. ' But this author is alone
in noting that the Fin whale sometimes heaves its flukes out. The present writer is able to confirm an
observation made by Allen (1916, p. 194) that one or other but never both flukes leave the surface.

Millais (1906, p. 218) has referred to an observation that when a party of Killers were attacking
a Common Rorqual, the main herd of whales about a mile to windward, began lashing about on the
surface to give the alarm, and were seen then to make off at great speed in all directions. Later (p. 268)
he states that the flukes never leave the surface, so that the lashing might have been with the head or
flipper.

Allen (1916, p. 194) states that 'The Finback whale seems but rarely to leap out of water'. One is
reported to have done so after it had sustained injury upon some rocks, and he quotes another instance
of breeching reported by Prof. W. Kukenthal.

Breeding habits

The available descriptions of courting and of other breeding habits admit of the possibility of a
variety of methods by which union of bull and cow or cow and calf might be effected, but all writers,
so far as is known, have omitted to stress the principles underlying the manner of approach of the
partners to one another (Dudley, 1725, p. 260; Haldane, 1906, p. 133; Southwefl 1906, p. 195; and
others).

As bodies floating in the water and unpossessed of prehensile limbs, they lack the purchase on terra
firma by means of which animals on diy land are able to make physical contact. This disabihty would

134 DISCOVERY REPORTS

seem most easily overcome when whales have steerage way, and in fact, pilots know well the nice
adjustments of which craft are capable provided they have sufficient way on. Animals so well adapted
to the water as whales, which swim for almost every breath, might reasonably be expected to swim for
their other essential functions; and the suggestion by Anderson (1746), Pontopiddan (1752), Brown
(1868) and Millais (in respect of the dolphin, 1906, p. 220) that cetacea adopt a vertical position, or
by Lillie (1910, p. 791) that they make several dashes at one another, seem unlikely both on account
of lack of good evidence and on account of the principles noted above.

Whales with calves were observed on various dates but never seen to suckle. Whether the calf takes
the teat between the extremity of the jaws (Scammon, 1874, p. 45) or whether in the corner of the
mouth (Haldane, 1906, p. 133) remains an open question, and the way in which the apparently rigid
lips are able to take milk to the exclusion of salt water is also an undecided question.

Whales with calves were usually timid. They were noted on 12 and 23 December, 7, 12, 30 January
and 7 February. On 22 January a whale with a very young calf showed an unusual unconcern for the
ship and swam close to her; this was an occasion when the whales were judged to be feeding (p. 124).
The whale of 7 February was attended by two calves and was brought within range. The mother (?)
and one calf were marked (nos. 7348 and 7370 (cow) and 7369 (calf)), but though the family were
chased for an hour and a half the second calf got away unmarked. Their rates of blowing for a period
of 8 min. are noted in Table 4.

Intercommunication between whales

The behaviour of the school leaves no doubt that intercommunication is remarkably efficient, but
as to the means nothing is definitely known. The precision with which four and five whales will blow
together, and the way in which schools half a mile or so apart readily join up, or when scattered over
a very much wider area, coalesce, are instances that may be witnessed every day. The senses of sight,
smell, taste and hearing may each have their part.

Whales in close formation are doubtless able to see each other, for in deep water and at night they
probably leave a trail of luminescence behind them, induced in the planktonic organisms. Such
luminescence is known to be produced by dolphins but as an effective recognition signal it can hold
for only short distances.

Little is known about the whale's olfactory sense. As regards airborne smell, it is of interest that
a whale's breath may be detected at a distance of at least 200 yards to windward, but this may be
excluded for purposes of communication because scent is not usually detected on the surface of water.
Waterborne smell is a possibility that might affect the whale through some such organ as Jacobsen's
organ, or through taste.

The problem of locating food has application here, for if a sense of smell or the taste buds of the
tongue subserve this purpose, they may also enable the whales to trace one another. On the other hand,
the presence of food may be detected physically by means of the bristles of the head which have been
shown to be highly innervated.

The hearing of whales is remarkably sensitive. The report of a small charge of gunpowder in open
ocean against wind and at a distance of several yards, has put whales beneath water to flight (see also
p. 122). Norwegian whalers believe that whales hear the shout of a man in the crow's nest. A sensitive
ear or equivalent sense in the bones of the head, implies use and raises the question of what sounds
may be produced by whales.

Their blowing on a calm day can be heard half a mile away, but we do not know whether the noise
is transmitted to water. On two occasions the low vibrant quality of the note was accompanied by
a higher. An observer on board ship can never be sure that an unusual note coinciding with a whale's

COMPARISON WITH EARLIER ACCOUNTS i35

appearance has not had its origin on board. Apart from these, and in spite of the close attention that
has been paid to the subject during this commission, no other noises have been identified with the
whales.

Asymmetrical pigmentation of Fin whales

An account of the pigment distribution in Fin whales has been given by Mackintosh and Wheeler
(1929), and attention is directed to the asymmetrical arrangement of pigment on the jaws (p. 354). The
report also makes an interesting speculation on the possibility that Fin whales might swim slightly on
their right side while under the water.

The suggestion is based, presumably, on the analogy of Thayer's ducks, according to which the
shadowed and the highly lit aspects of an animal are differently pigmented ; or ahernatively there is
the theory that the more exposed portions of the whale may be pigmented as a protection against the
action of the sun's rays. In either case a regular turning on to the right side might reasonably be
expected.

Of the many whales watched, a vast majority broke surface and sounded on an even keel. Moreover,
of the whales which turned on to their sides when ' boltering ' or when raising a single fluke above the
surface, some were on their right side, others on their left. As far as they go, the observations give no
evidence of habitual twisting in the water and the asymmetrical distribution of pigment remains a
problem.

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

1. The habits, swimming manoeuvres, bodily movements, respiratory rhythm and reactions of fin
whales have been noted during a programme of whale marking operations near South Georgia. The
observations were made between Dec. loth and Feb. 9th, 1936-7. At this season the whales are
knovm to be feeding.

2. An observed reaction to the presence of the ship has been an alteration in the respiratory rhythm,
but other changes of behaviour are likely. Difficulties of observing whales at a distance are pointed
out and the view obtainable from the decks of a catcher might give rise to a wholly erroneous picture
of the ways of the unmolested animal. With these reservations the following deductions have been
made.

3. The way the whale breaks surface to breathe and submerges again is analysed into its component
movements. In the process of submergence the body may travel forwards with the body extended,
or downwards with the body doubled. The latter was the most usual and the structure of head, dorsal
fin, peduncle and flukes are shown to be particularly adapted for this action. Breathing requirements
impose a need to overcome mechanical difficulties not met with by fish. Quick visits to the surface
would seem to involve certain mechanical difficulties which these adaptations are designed to overcome :
and this specialization for dorsi-ventral turning has resuhed in the peculiar habit of feeding on the side.

REFERENCES

Allen, G. M., 1904. Some observations on rorquals off Southern Newfoundland. Amer. Naturalist, xxxvni, no. 453, pp. 613-23.

1916. The whalebone whales of Nezv England. Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., viii, no. 2, pp. 107-322.

Anderson, ]., 1746. Nachrichten von Island, Gronland und der Strasse Davis. Hamb., Frankft. u. Leipzig.

Andrews, R. C, 1909. Observations on the habits of the Finback and Humpback whales of the eastern North Pacific. Bull.

Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., xxxvi, pp. 213-26.
Brown, R., 1868. Notes on the history and geographical relations of the Cetacea frequenting Davis Strait and Baffin's Bay.

Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., xxxv, pp. 533-56.
Bucket, G., 1895. Ouelques observations sur les Balenopteres des eaux islandaises. Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xx, pp. 30-1.
CoLLETT, R., 1886. On the external characters of Rudolphi's Rorqual (Balaenoptera borealis). Proc. Zool. Soc, pp. 243-65.

J36 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Dudley, P., 1725. An essay upon the natural history ofzvhales, mth a particular account of the ambergris found in the Sperma Cetl

whale. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, Abridged, vii, pp. 78-84.
Gray, J., 1933. Directional control of fish movement. Proc. Roy. Soc. London., ser. B, cxiii, pp. 115-24.

1936. Studies in animal locomotion, vi. The propulsive powers of the dolphin. Journ. Exper. Biol., xiii, pp. 192-9.

Haldane, R. C, 1906. Whaling in Scotland. Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., no. 59, pp. 130-7.

Hardy A. C. and Gunther, E. R., 1935. The plankton of the South Georgia whaling grounds and adjacent waters, 1926-7.

Discovery Rep., xi, pp. 1-456.
Harris, J. E., 1936. The fins in the equilibrium of the sidmming fish. i. Wind tunnel tests on a model of Mustelus canis. J. Exp.

Biol. Edinburgh, 13, pp. 476-93.
Howell, A. B., 1930. Aquatic tnammals, their adaptation to life in the water. Springfield, Illinois.
Kemp S. and Bennett, A. G., 1932. On the distribution and movements of whales on the South Georgia and South Shetland

whaling grounds. Discovery Rep., vi, pp. 165-90.
Lillie, D. G., 1910. Observations on the anatomy and general biology of some members of the larger Cetacea. Proc. Zool. Soc.

Lond., pp. 769-92.

1915. Cetacea. British Antarctic ('Terra Nova') Expedition, 1910. Zoology, i, no. 3, pp. 85-124.

Mackintosh, N. A. and Wheeler, J. F. G., 1929. Southern Blue and Fin ivhales. Discovery Rep., i, pp. 257-540.

Millais, J. G., 1906. The mammals of Great Britain and Ireland. Vol. in. London: Longmans Green & Co.

Olsen, 0., 1913. On the external characters and biology ofBrydes whale (Balaenoptera brydei), a new rorqual from the coast of

South Africa. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., pp. 1073-90.
PONTOPIDDAN, E., 1751-3. Norviges Natural Historie, etc. 2 vols.

Racovitza, E. G., 1903. Cetaces. Resultats du Voyage du S.Y. 'Belgica' en 1897-9, PP- 1-142-

SCAMMON, C. M., 1874. The marine jnammals of the North-Western coast of North America. San Francisco and New York.
Southwell, T., 1906. Newfoundland Fin whale fishing in 1905. Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist., no. 60.

True, F. W., 1903. On some photographs of living Finback whales from Newfoundland. Smithson: Misc. Coll., XLV, pp. 91-4.
1904. The ivhalebone whales of the western North Atlantic. Smithson. Contr. Knowl., xxxiii, no. 1414, pp. 1-132.

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

Table 3. List of blozving intervals timed by stop-watch

Series
no.

Serial no.

of
observation

Date

Corrected
interval

No. of

blows

observed

Notes

13
14
15
16

17
18

19

23
24

25
26

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

41

42
43
44
45
46

47
48

49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

12. xii. 36

14. xii. 36

14. xii. 36

min. sec.

25
27
27
25
52
32
29

2 27
48

2 02

51

5 02

26

19

27
35

29

40

28
28
16

23
10

44
17
13
30
55
32
17
19

6 02
6 02

39

2 28

38
30
27

17

13

6? 23

33
25
II

52
34

3 27
19

2 15

Two whales

Abandoned chase of dis-
appearing whale

138

DISCOVERY REPORTS

Table 3 (cont.)

Serial no.

No. of

Series

of

Date

Corrected

blows

Notes

no.

observation

interval

observed

min. sec.

58

22

59

18

I

60

25

I

61

22

I

62

09

63

? 22

2

4

65^

14. xii. 36

35

I

> I whale

66

22

I

67

I 19

I

68

20

I

69

I 27

I

70

17

2

71

17

72

13

73

7

74

19

75

7

76

21

2

77

I 38

1

Remainder disappeared

78

14. xii. 36

7

after marking

79

22

? joined group | mile off

5

80

15. xii. 36

12

I

81

14

I

82

12

2

83

16

I

84

12

2

6

85

18. xii. 36

15

I

I

Two whales approached

86

27

slowly and fled in calm

87

3 47

weather, light breeze,
sun and mist

7

95
96

97
98

99

22. xii. 36

7 30

?

22
16
19

Loitering | mile distant

100

12

2

lOI

19

102

12

103

3 18

104

24

8

105
106
107
108
109
no
III

112

113
114

115
116
117
118
119

12

50

4 27

28

14
8

9
14
10

H

19

2 14

52
54
22

120

22

2

121

21

2

122

13

123

9 2

1 No. 64 omitted in M.S.— Ed.

APPENDIX

Table 3 (cont.)

139

Serial no.

No. of

Series

of

Date

Corrected
interval

blows

Notes

no.

observation

observed

min. sec.

124

57

10

185

27. xii. 36

15

3

3 Fin, I mile

186

IS

3

187

17

I

188

17

I

189

2 52

I

190

25

3

191

27

3

192

II

I

193

13

2

194

8

I

19s

9

2

196

II

I

197

13

2 (or 3)

198

27

2

199

?

.' I interim blow

200

I 7

I

201

19

3 or 2

202

26

3

203

H

2

204

15

I

205

10

2?3

206

19

I

207

26

2

208

34

I

209

17

3

210

19

3

211

15

I

212

II

3

213

17

2

214

21

3

]— J mile

215

22

2

216

26

2

217

34

3

218

9

I

219

21

I

220

12

I

221

12

2

222

18

2

223

18

2

224

II

I

225

12

2

226

14

2

227

19

2

228

9

I

229

7

I

230

II

2

231

15

I

II

232

13

4 min. after last record : 3

233

9

whales swimming paral-

234

19

3

lel to ship and left on

23 s

25

3

starboard quarter

236

8

I

237

8

1

238

13

2

239

17

I

f mile

240

22

?i

241

25

3

242

9

I

243 1

17

I

DISCOVERY REPORTS
Table 3 {cont.)

Series
no.

14

Serial no.

of

observation

244
245
246
247
248
249
250

251
252

253
254
255
256

257
258

259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272

273
274

275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283

286
287
288
289
290
291
292

293
294

295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302

Date

27. xii. 36

Corrected
interval

9

7
17
10
24

9
54

7

35
37
30
37
17

9

6

27
17
17

13
9

55
10

14

39

9

54

7
26

7
14
50
28

23
22
26
18
34
13

No. of

blows

observed

?3

Notes

I mile

2 miles

4 whales
?2 miles
.H mile

\ mile

Ship recedinc

i I mm. 34 sec.
}2 miles off

APPENDIX
Table 4. Timmg observations of an adult and two calves

Serial no.

Observed appearances

Supposed appearances

Series

Corrected

no.

of
observation

Date

interval

Adult

Calves (nos.)

Calf

Calf

min. sec.

min. sec.

min. sec.

min. sec.

min. sec.

15

303
304
305

7- ii- 37

00
29
10

39

29 (I)

306

18

28 (I)

p

57

307

19

37

308

19

38 (I)

I 6

I 6

3°9

28

?47

?28 (I)

310

23

23

311

28

28

312

18

18

I 9 (I)

I 37

313

24

24

24 (2)

24

I 33

314

23

23

23 (I)

23

315

12

12 (I)

35

316

9

9 (I)

21

317

IS

15 (I)

24

318

I 42

2 18

I 42 (2)

I 57

I 42

319

18

18

320

9

27 (I)

27

321

14

23

322

I 42

I 56 (2)

I S6

2 23

PLATE XXXIII

Fig. I. Fin whale blowing leisurely, with blowhole, dorsal fin, and
dorsal edge of the caudal peduncle visible above the surface. The
appearance of the peduncle suggests that the body is exceptionally
horizontal. (See Fig. 1 6 in the text.)

Fig. 2. Fin whale blowing fairly leisurely, with blowhole and dorsal fin
both visible. The 'spout' is just visible above the back, and the
head has moved forward (to the right) during inspiration. (See
Fig. I b in the text.)

Fig. 3. Fin whale blowing at medium speed. The whale is moving away
from the observer, and the open blowhole can be seen. (See Fig. 1/
in the text.)

Fig. 4. Fin whale blowing at medium speed. The back is flexed and the
blowhole now submerged. (See Fig. ig in the text.)

Fig. 5. Fin whale blowing at high speed. (See Fig. i« in the text.)

Fig. 6. View of Fin whale from the rear, to show height of dorsal edge
of caudal peduncle. The whale is lying on its left side. The plane
of the flukes is more nearly in line with the ventral than with the
dorsal edge of the peduncle. The outer parts of the flukes have
been cut off. (See Fig. 76 in the text.)

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL XXV

PLATE XXXIII

FIN WHALES

[Discovery Reports. Vol. XXV, pp. 143-280, Plates XXXIV-XXXVII, September, 1949]

DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS
STATION LIST

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'
1931-1938

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PERU COASTAL CURRENT (STATIONS WS 576-748) .

TRAWLING SURVEY, PATAGONIAN SHELF (STATIONS WS 749-882)

WHALE-MARKING CRUISES : I (STATIONS WS 883-895)

II (stations WS 896-922)

III (stations WS 923-937)

IV (stations WS 938-959)

SUMMARIZED LIST OF STATIONS ....
PLATES XXXIV-XXXVII

y

page 144

147

217

247

255
269

277
280
following page 280

p

DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS

STATION LIST

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'

1931-1938

(Plates XXXIV-XXXVII)

INTRODUCTION

ARTicuLARS of the earlier observations made by the R.R.S. 'William Scoresby' up to St. WS 575
(26 March 193 1) were included in the Station Lists already published in vols, i, iii and iv of the
Discovery Reports. Subsequent lists contained only particulars of observations made by the R.R.S.
'Discovery 11' between October 1931 and May 1939 {Discovery Reports, vols, xxi, xxii and xxiv). The
present list gives particulars of the observations made by the 'William Scoresby' between April 1931
and February 1938.

In the early part of this period (from April to September 1931) the 'William Scoresby' carried out
an oceanographical survey of the Peru Coastal Current, during which many stations (WS 576-748)
were (with a few exceptions) worked off the coasts of Chile and Peru. This work on the Peru Current
was followed by a trawling survey of the Patagonian Continental Shelf (Sts. WS 749-882, from
September 1931 to April 1932) — the third trawling survey carried out by the 'William Scoresby' in
these waters. Particulars of the earlier surveys have already been given in the Station Lists published
in vols. I and in.

From 1934 to 1938 the 'William Scoresby' was engaged in marking whales in the Antarctic. Four
commissions, each of approximately seven months, enabled the ship to spend about four months on the
pelagic whaling grounds each season. Opportunities for oceanographical work were few, but a certain
number of hydrological observations, to a depth of 400 m., were made during the first three com-
missions. A limited number of biological observations, mainly with towed nets, were also made
throughout all the whale-marking commissions. These biological and hydrological observations were
recorded under station numbers in the usual way.

In the ' William Scoresby ' lack of adequate facilities normally prevents chemical analysis of water
samples on board. It would be impossible at any time to carry out the full series of analyses which are
part of the normal routine in the ' Discovery II ', but, for the period of the Peru Coastal Current Survey,
temporary arrangements were made so that estimations of phosphate and dissolved oxygen could be
carried out on board. These arrangements were not, however, wholly satisfactory and the results ob-
tained should be used with caution. It is probable, though, that in most cases the errors are slight. On
the other hand, samples taken for the determination of salinity can be kept almost indefinitely and
those taken during the Peru Survey were therefore stored on board and titrated in a shore laboratory
at a later date. The accuracy of the figures for salinity conforms, therefore, to our normal standard.

The abbreviations which denote the nature of the bottom are those now used by the Hydrographic
Department of the Admiralty.^ Of these the following appear in this station list:

fine
gravel
green
grey
hard
light

— placed above the figure for the sounding indicates that bottom was not reached.

An asterisk following the figure for the sounding indicates that the depth was obtained by echo sounding.
1 See Chart No. 501 1, Explanation of signs and abbreviations as shown on the charts issued by the Hydrographic Department,
Admiralty. Hydrographic Department, Admiralty, 1946.

144

b
bl

blue
black

f
G

br

brown

gn

c

Cy

d

coarse

clay

dark

gy

h

It

M

mud

Sh

shells

Oz

ooze

sk

specks, speckled

P

pebbles

Sn

shingle

R

rock

St

stones

S

sand

V

volcanic

INTRODUCTION
In conformity with our later practice (see Station Lists, vols, xxi, xxii and xxiv) the force of the wind
is given as the velocity in knots. The state of the sea is expressed as a number in the Douglas Sea Scale,
which is as follows:

STATE OF SEA

Scale number

Description

o

Calm

I

Smooth

2

Slight

3

Moderate

4

Rough

5

Very rough

6

High

7

Very high

8

Precipitous

q

Confused

The following symbols are used to denote the state of the weather :

b blue sky whether with clear or hazy atmosphere, or sky not more than one-quarter clouded.

be sky between one-quarter and three-quarters clouded.

c mainly cloudy (not less than three-quarters covered).

d drizzle or fine rain.

e wet air without rain falling.

f fog.

fe wet fog.

h hail.

m mist.

o overcast sky (i.e. the whole sky covered with unbroken cloud).

p passing showers.

q squalls.

r rain.

rs sleet (i.e. rain and snow together).

s snow.

V unusual visibility.

Time is expressed in the 24-hour system ending with midnight (0000). The difference of ship's
time from Greenwich mean time (GMT) is noted in the 'Remarks' column, this difference holding
good until another entry is made. Times in heavy type refer to biological observations made between
sunset and sunrise.

The following symbols are used for nets, apparatus, etc. :

BNR Russiyrs bottom tow-net. A i m. stramin net (N 100) on a rectangular frame attached to skids which raise

it clear of the bottom. , • /

BTS Small beam trawl. Beam 8 ft. (2-45 m.) in length: mesh at cod-end h m. (1-25 cm.).

DC Conical dredge. Mouth 16 in. (40-5 cm.) in diameter, with canvas bag.

H Horizontal.

KT Kelvin sounding tube.

LB Leather bucket.

LH Hand lines.

^ '^"JX Nets of 4. mm. (o-i6 in.) or 7 mm. (0-28 in.) mesh attached to the back of trawl.
N 7— T) T \ II

NCS-T Tow-net of coarse silk (16 meshes to the linear inch) attached to back of trawl.

N-T Net (mesh not specified) attached to back of trawl. .

N =;o so cm. silk tow-net. Mouth circular, 50 cm. (19-5 in.) diameter: 200 meshes to the hnear inch

N70 70 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular, 70 cm. (27-5 in.) diameter: mesh graded, at cod-end ot silk with 74
meshes to the linear inch.

145

INT;RODUCTION

N 100 I m. tow-net. Mouth circular, i m. (3-3 ft.) diameter: mesh graded, at cod-end of stramin, with 10-12

meshes to the hnear inch.

NH Hand net. , , r r, j

NHP A modification of Harvey's phytoplankton net.^ The apparatus measures the volume of water hltered

through a small sleeve-shaped silk net of 200 meshes to the linear inch.
OTC Commercial otter trawl. Head rope 80 ft. (24-5 m.) long: mesh at cod-end i,\ in. (3-8 cm.).

TYF Young fish trawl. A bag of stramin, with 10-12 meshes to the linear inch, attached to a circular frame 2 m.

(6-6 ft.) in diameter. With bucket at cod-end.
V Vertical.

To the symbols for tow-nets (N 100, N 70, N 50 and TYF) B, H or V is always added to indicate
whether the haul was made obliquely, horizontally or vertically. For determining the depths of hori-
zontal and oblique nets, Kelvin sounding tubes were used. Their use is indicated by the appropriate
symbol in the ' Remarks ' column ; where the tube failed to register the depth was estimated and is
noted as such. When the depth of termination of an oblique haul is written (-0) it should be understood
that the net failed to close at some intended intermediate depth and fished all the way to the surface.

At the end of the list (p. 280) will be found a Summary of the Stations made by the R.R.S. ' William
Scoresby' from April 1931 to February 1938, with references to the charts (Plates XXXIV-XXXVII)
on which the station positions are marked.

1 See Harvey, H. W., 1934, Measuremeiit of Phytoplankton population, Joum. Mar. Biol. Assoc, N.S. xix, pp. 761-73.

146

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'

PERU CURRENT

STATIONS WS 576-748

17. iv. 1931 — 16. ix. 1931

147

WS 576—591

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

u ~.

Air Temp.
°C.

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weatllcr

ll

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
btJb

Wet
bulb

WS576

5i°35'S, 57=49-8' W
Berkeley Sound, East
Falkland

1931

17 iv

0816
0950

34*
24*

SW

4-6

-

0

or

1023-9

7-2

6-7

-

WS577

51' i3-6'S, 57° 45-4' W

20 iv

2200

86*

WxS

4-6

w

2

c

IOI5-I

6-7

6-5

low long WxS swell

WS578

51° 14-8' S, Gz^so'W

21 iv

2105

16S*

NW

17-27

NW

4

c

1008-9

9-4

8-3

mod. av. WxN
swell

WS579

52' 19-6' S, 67° 47' W

22 iv

2022

79*

NNW

1 1-16

NNW

3

c

996-9

lO-O

8-3

low long swell

WS580

53° 04-8' S, 70" 407' w
Magellan Strait, off
PuntaArenas(Magellanes)

23 iv

I4IO

102*

SW X w

7-10

SW

I

c

1001-9

IO-8

7-8

no swell

WS581

53° 39' S, 70° 49' W
Magellan Strait

30 iv

I I 24

—

SW

34-40

SW

3

be

1004-5

lO-O

8-3

mod. short SW swell

WS582

53° 42-5' S, 7o°55"W

Port Famine, Magellan
Strait

30 iv

1420
1436
145 I
1504
1520
1700

1 10*
223*
198*

112*

12*

SW

1 1-16

SW

3

c

1007-5

8-6

8-3

low av. SW swell

WS583

53°39'S, 70° 54-5' W
Magellan Strait

2 V

0657
0730

62*

78*

WxN

7-10

w

1-2

c

999-3

lo-o

7-8

—

WS584

53° 55' S, 71° 16' W
Magellan Strait

2 V

II34

—

WNW

34-47

WNW

4

omrq

991-9

7-2

6-7

mod. short WNW
swell

WS585

53° 31-3' S, 72° 39-3' W
Magellan Strait

4 V

134°

—

SW

4-6

SW

o-i

or

1007-0

4-4

3-9

—

WS586

48° 27-5' S, 74° 23-5' W
Connor Inlet

8v

1800

22*

-

0

-

0

be

1008-3

5-6

5-0

-

WS587

46° 14-5' S, 75° 55-6' W

10 v

2000

-

s

7-10

S

4

be

1023-1

7-2

6-7

mod. long S swell

WS588

42° 42' S, 75° 2l'W

II V

2000

-

E

1 1-16

SE

3

be

I03I-4

8-9

8-9

mod. av. S x E swell

WS589

38° 04' S, 73° 52' W

15 V

2000

-

W

4-6

—

0

b

I02I-5

I i-i

8-3

low long S swell

WS590

I \ cables E of Naval
Pier, Talcahuano Har-
bour, Chile

16 v

1400

8

NE

1-6

- .

0

b

1020-0

100

8-3

-

WS591

3S°47'S, 72''39"W

18 v

1258

27
f.gy.S

0

0

0

1022-9

12-2

lO-O

low long SE swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 576—591

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

WS591

28

8-6o

9-80

8-36

7-90

8-02

8-i8

0

1 1-70

0

12-73

0

10-67

0

1 1 -20

5

I 1-20

0

1 1-70

10

I 1-20

20

11-45

34-25
34-32

34-25

3449

9-76

26-24

26-17
26-23

26-08
26-31

0-38

1-24
1-37

1-41

1-48
1-33

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

OTC

N70B

N 100 B

N 100 B
N70B

N 100 B

N50 V

N70B

NiooB
N50V

N70B
NiooB

N50V

N70B

NiooB

BTS
LH
NH

BTS

N70B

NiooB

N70B
NiooB

N50V

LH
NH

N70B
NiooB
N50V

N50 V
N70B
N 100 B
NiooB

N50V
N70B
N 100 B

N70B
N50B

N70H
NiooH
N50H

91-0

1 60-0
128-0
1 00-0

79-0
70-0

90-0
1 00-0

14-78

84-0

/ 1 40-0
90-0

78-0
1 00-0

1 00-0
1 00-0
265-100

1 00-0
91-0

7-0
7-0

0-5

0-5
0-5

0840

2223

2113
2147
2224

2037
2115

1422
1453

143^'
1700
1700

1148

1353

1422

1800
1800

2020
2058

2013
2035
2035

2009
2025

1400
1413

132I
1322
1325

2243

2128
2207
2226

2057
2II7

1444

1455

1531
1800
1800

1413
1424

2200
2200

2041
2100

2015
2055
2105

2011
2044

1402
1415

1341
1340
1327

+ 3 hours. Sandy bottom

+ 4 hours
KT. Suspected of fishing
near bottom

KT

KT

KT. +5 hours

KT

KT. Strong wind and much
lateral drift

Trawl did not appear to
have fished on the bottom

Hand net used frequently
during this period

Muddy bottom

KT

KT

Stray on wire

Hand net used frequently
during this period

KT

Depth estimated
Depth estimated

KT

149

WS 592—598

R.R.S. William Scorcshy

Direction Force

WS592

WS593

WS594

WS595

35° 46' S, 72° 42-5' W

35°36'S, 72°44'W

3S°36'S, 72°so'W

35° 35-2' S, 72°56'W

1931
i8v

60*

1622

1748

NWxN

Lt airs

Lt airs

WS596

35° 35-6' S, 73° 07-5' W

18-19 V

369
d.M

Lt airs

WS597

35° 397' S, 73° ig-s'W

0630

1593
d.gy.M

NNE

35°43'S, 73°32'W

2308
G.gn.M

NNE

4-6

0-3

NWxN

1 1-16

NNE

NNE

be

12-8

I022-6

IO-6

1022-6

low long SW swell

low long SW swell

low long SW swell

1022-6

low short to low long
E swell

mod. av. SW swell

1027-3

150

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 592—598

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

Station

(days")

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

S'/„o

■"

P.
mg. atom

0,

litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS592

I

O

I 1-46

34-39

26-24

2-83

_

N50V

50-0

1359

1360

lO

11-32

34-41

26-28

2-60

N70B

j ..-«

1429

1449

KT

20

I 1-30

34-4S

26-34

2-59

N 100 B

3°

11-27

34-49

26-34

2-57

40

11-23

34-55

26-41

2-41

50

I 1-20

34-56

26-41

2-64

WS593

I

0

11-45

34-11

26-02

2-05

5-'6

N50 V

40-0

1629

1630

10

11-45

34-45

26-28

2-32

—

N70B

1 30-0

1700

1720

N 100 B touched bottom

20

1 1-40

34-50

26-33

2-41

2-39

NiooB

30

11-38

34-52

26-35

3-14

—

37-5

11-37

34-53

26-36

3-33

2-o8

WS594

I

0

1 1-69

34-43

26-23

2-41

—

N50V

40-0

1755

1757

10

11-60

34-43

26-24

2-30

—

N70B

1 58-0

1832

1855

KT

20

11-60

34-45

26-25

2-79

—

N 100 B

1 ^

30

11-51

34-45

26-27

2-66

—

40

11-45

34-51

26-33

2-30

—

50

1 1-40

34-53

26-36

3-14

—

WS595

I

0

11-62

34-43

26-24

1-98

3-95

N50V

1 00-0

1943

10

11-59

34-40

26-22

2-22

—

N70V

50-0

20

11-56

34-38

26-21

2-32

3-73

,,

100-50

—

2015

30

11-48

34-46

26-28

2-41

—

N70B

\ 88-0

2043

2103

KT

40

11-42

34-53

26-35

2-53

I-I2

N 100 B

50

1 1-40

34-58

26-40

2-97

60

11-41

34-60

26-40

2-97

0-50

80

11-26

34-64

26-47

3-14

100

11-02

34-63

26-50

3-14

0-29

WS596

I

0

ii-8s

34-29

26-08

2-41

—

N50V

1 00-0

2210

2212

10

11-89

34-30

26-08

2-41

N70B

1 91-0

2348

0008

KT

20

11-80

34-30

26-10

2-41

NiooB

30

11-56

34-40

26-22

2-66

—

NiooB

240-90

2348

0020

Depth estimated

40

11-42

34-47

26-31

2-66

50

11-51

34-51

26-32

2-79

60

11-31

34-55

26-39

2-79

80

11-28

34-60

26-43

2-79

100

11-27

34-53

26-38

2-66

150

10-90

34-65

26-54

2-97

200

10-23

34-64

26-65

2-66

300

8-83

34-59

26-85

2-66

WS597

2

0

12-36

34-23

25-94

1-35

5-66

N50V

1 00-0

0643

0645

10

12-38

34-23

25-93

1-35

N70B

\ 75-0
210-75

0902

0921

KT

20
30

12-35
12-05

34-24
34-33

25-96
26-07

1-43

1-43

5-58

N 100 B
N 100 B

0902

0931

Depth estimated

40

11-70

34-49

26-26

1-46

1-40

5°

1201

34-68

26-36

3-33

60

12-02

34-72

26-39

2-97

0-32

80

11-99

34-73

26-40

3-33

100

11-48

34-70

26-47

3-14

0-38

15°

11-35

34-72

26-51

3-33

200

11-05

34-73

26-58

2-97

0-41

300

9-42

34-61

26-77

2-97

400

8-18

34-52

26-89

2-79

I-I2

600

6-11

34-39

27-08

2-05

800

4-74

34-36

27-22

2-40

2-58

1000

4-06

34-43

27-34

2-53

1500

2-98

3460

27-59

2-57

3-91

WS598

,

0

12-12

34-22

25-97

1-46

—

N50V

1 00-0

II56

1158

10

12-18

34-34

26-07

1-46

N70B

\ 66-0
190-65

I 24 1

1259

KT

20

30

12-03
I 1-96

34-32
34-36

26-08
26-12

1-50
1-90

—

N 100 B
NiooB

1241

1310

Depth estimated

151

WS 598—601

R.R.S. William Scoresby

o3
13 'I
cn-b

WS598

cont.

35° 43' S, 73° 32' W

WS599

35° 41-5' S, 73°43'W

WS600

35° 40' S, 73° 55'W

WS601

35° 30-5' S, 74° i8'W

1931
19 V

1406

3264
gn.M

ESE

ESE

1915

sw

sw

SSE

be

12-8

mod. short to mod.
av. SW swell

low long SW swell

low short to low long
S swell

152

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 598—601

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

(d^s")

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
"C.

s°/„

ac

p.

mg. atom

0,

Utre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS598

2

4°

II-S9

34-47

26-27

2-53

corit.

5°
6o
8o

lOO

150

200
300
400
600

800

1000
1500
2000

11-49

11-48
11-48

1 1-26
10-92

10-25

8-95
7-23
4-98
4-19
361
2-6s
2-16

34-55
34-60

34-69
34-70
34-69
34-66
34-61
34-43
34-34
34-39
34-50
34-61
34-64

26-36
26-39
26-46
26-52
26-56
26-66
26-84
26-95
27-18
27-31
27-45
27-64
27-70

2-47
2-66
2-97
2-97
2-97

2-97
3-80

3-55
3-33
3-14
3-14
3-55
3-33

WS599

2

0

12-87

34-13

25-76

1-63

5-80

N50V

100-0

1550

1552

10

12-82

34-15

25-80

1-63

—

N70B

1 84-0

1754

1816

Depth estimated

20

12-59

34-19

25-87

1-77

5-35

N 100 B

1

30

12-58

34-20

25-87

1-90

NiooB

230-85

1754

1822

Depth estimated

40

1200

34-12

25-93

1-90

4-89

50

11-61

3407

25-96

1-77

60

1 1-36

34-31

2619

2-53

403

80

10-74

34-30

26-30

2-79

100

10-68

34-49

26-45

2-79

0-87

150

10-30

34-58

26-59

3-14

200

g-60

34-58

26-71

3-33

2-51

300

8-32

34-50

26-85

3-33

400

6-9S

34-41

26-98

3-33

600

5-31

34-26

27-07

3-33

800

4-38

34-31

27-22

3-80

3-88

1000

3-77

34-43

27-38

3-80

1500

3-04

2000

2-55

34-46

27-51

3-80

2500

1-92

34-67

27-73

3-80

3-i8

3000

I -80

WS600

2

0

13-57

33-97

25-50

1-98

—

N50V

lOO-O

2100

2102

10

12-78

34-11

25-77

2-22

—

N70 B

1 99-0

2150

2210

KT

20

12-20

34-10

25-87

2-22

—

N 100 B

30

12-29

34-17

25-91

1-90

—

NiooB

265-100

2150

2216

Depth estimated

40

11-31

34-20

26-1 1

2-53

50

11-06

34-21

26-17

2-66

60

10-91

34-31

26-27

2-79

80

1082

34-42

26-37

314

100

10-75

34-49

26-44

3-55

ISO

10-40

3458

26-58

3-80

200

967

34-73

26-82

3-80

300

8-38

34-52

26-86

3-80

400

7-01

34-40

26-96

3-80

600

5-27

34-28

27-10

3-55

800

4-38

34-33

27-23

3-33

1000

3-80

34-36

27-32

3-33

1500

2-83

34-49

27-51

3-33

2000

2-24

34-61

27-66

3-14

2500

1-93

34-64

27-71

3-14

3000

1-84

34-67

27-74

3-14

WS601

2

0

13-65

33-87

25-41

0-36

3-14

NH

0

0130

0430

Hand net used frequently

10

1356

33-87

25-43

036

—

N50V

100-0

0250

0252

throughout station

20

13-3°

33-91

25-51

0-51

5-78

N70 B

} 87-0

230-85

0454

0517

KT

30
40

13-05
i2-8o

34-02
34-15

25-65

25-80

0-51
0-80

5-59

N 100 B
NiooB

0454

0527

Depth estimated

5°

12-68

60

12-53

34-22

25-89

0-87

5-38

80

10-72

34-11

26^15

0-87

153

WS 601—605

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS601

cont.

WS602

WS603

35"3o-5'S,74°i8'W

32°04-8'S, 7i°34'W

32° 05' S, 71° 40' W

WS604

32° 05' S, 7i°4S-5'W

WS605

32°o5'S, 71° 50'W

1931
20 V

28 V

Sounding
(metres)

1308

28 V

28 V

28 V

75
Sh

1655

gy.M

2037

1297
gy.M

ssw

sw

Force
(knots)

4-6

4-6

4-6

4-6

SxW

1019-8

mod. long to hea\'A'
short WSW swell

mod. long WSW
swell

heavy long WSW
swell

heavy long WSW
swell

154

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 601—605

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

s7oo

at

P.

mg. atom

o,

litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS601

^

lOO

lo-gS

34-30

26-25

1-46

2-15

Position of ship changed

cont.

200
300
400

10-62
9-8o
8-48
7-II

34-57
34-44
34-49
34-36

26-53
26-57
26-82
26-92

1-54

1-62

1-56
1-22

I -06
4-42

600

5-86

34-30

27-04

1-22

—

—

—

—

800

4-91

34-33

27-17

1-35

4-77

—

—

—

1000

4-11

34-35

27-29

1-35

—

—

—

—

1500

3-22

—

—

—

—

—

■Heavy stray on wire

2000

2-62

34-59

27-62

1-50

—

—

—

—

2500

2-13

34-66

27-71

1-50

2-92

—

—

—

3000

1-79

34-68

27-75

1-35

—

—

~

WS602

I I

0

14-02

34-24

25-62

0-68

5-59

N50V

50-0

1335

1357

10

13-20

34-24

25-79

—

—

N70B

} 65-0

1358

1418

KT

20

12-30

34-30

26-00

i-i8

3-06

N 100 B

30

12-17

34-36

26-08

40

i2-o8

34-38

26-1 I

1-50

4-24

50

1 1-92

34-43

26-18

60

11-79

34-50

26-26

1-63

1-95

WS603

I I

0

14-32

34-27

25-57

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

1535

1537

10

14-26

34-27

25-59

—

—

N70B

99-0

1557

1618

KT

20

13-90

34-26

25-65

0-13

—

NiooB

J 99

3°

13-10

34-24

25-81

40

12-00

34-13

25-93

0-86

5°

I i-io

34-17

26-13

60

10-74

34-23

26-24

1-41

80

10-60

34-34

26-36

100

10-50

34-43

26-44

1-75

150

10-67

34-61

26-56

200

10-31

34-66

26-65

2-24

250

9-83

34-63

26-71

WS604

I I

0

14-00

34-26

25-63

0-21

5-50

N50V

1 00-0

1853

1855

10

13-90

34-25

25-65

—

—

N70B

■ 73-0

1937

1957

KT

20

13-87

34-24

25-65

0-21

5-43

N 100 B

i

30

13-85

34-24

25-66

—

—

NiooB

205-75

1937

2005

Depth estimated

40

13-70

34-26

25-69

0-48

5-28

5°

I2-IS

34-09

25-87

60

11-60

34-07

25-96

0-68

4-67

80

10-73

34-19

26-22

100

:o-6o

34-35

26-37

1-56

2-29

150

IO-S4

34-60

26-56

200

I0-20

34-65

26-66

1-98

0-41

300

8-56

34-53

26-84

400

7-12

34-47

27-01

1-90

1-97

600

5-27

34-34

27-14

3-99

WS605

I I

0

13-91

34-22

25-61

0-13

—

N50V

1 00-0

2155

2157

10

13-89

34-22

25-62

—

N70B

1 74-0
205-75

2225

2245

KT

20
30

13-88
13-87

34-23
34-22

25-63
25-62

0-13

—

N 100 B
NiooB

2225

2254

Depth estimated

40

13-82

34-21

25-63

0-40

50

12-86

34-15

25-79

60

12-06

34-09

25-89

0-82

80

10-86

34-15

26-17

100

1 1 -00

34-44

26-36

2-07

150

10-90

34-66

26-55

200

10-33

34-66

26-65

2-47

300

8-62

34-52

26-82

400

7-07

34-43

26-98

2-13

600

5-31

34-34

27-13

800

4-46

34-38

27-27

2-24

1000

3-84

34-42

27-35

155

WS 606—608

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS606

WS607

32" 09-6' S, 73° 32' w

32° 05-5' S, 74° 04' W

WS608 31° 57-5' S, 73° 02' W

1931
29 V

1716

0440

1 1-16

17-27

be

heavy long WSW
swell

heavy long SW swell

heavy short S swell

1^6

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 606—608

Station

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Rein arks

Age of -
(Tys")

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

S°/o.

0.

P.

mg. atom

0,

litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

From

To

WS606

12

O

l6-20

34-19

25-10

0-48

5-57

N70V

50-0

0920

lO

i6ig

34-19

25-11

—

,,

100-50

20

16-09

34-18

25-12

0-55

5-55

,,

250-100

30

1603

34-19

25-14

—

,,

500-250

1 100

40

i6-oo

34-19

25-15

0-61

5-47

„

1000-750

1200

5°

1 5 99

34-18

25-14

—

,,

750-500

1355

60

15-95

34-17

25-14

0-68

5-52

N50V

120-0

1358

1400

80

12-57

34-05

25-76

—

—

N70B

I 75~o

1422

1442

KT

100

11-65

34-12

25-99

1-06

4-76

N 100 B

/ '^

15°

10-52

34-29

26-32

—

NiooB

210-75

1422

1447

Depth estimated

200

IO-33

34-61

26-62

2-68

0-68

300

8-78

34-53

26-81

400

7-87

34-43

26-87

2-47

1-41

600

6-04

34-34

27-04

800

4-93

34-28

27-14

2-36

4-01

1000

4-22

34-37

27-29

1500

3-97

34-55

27-46

2-47

2-39

2000

3-77

34-41

27-36

2500

3-33

34-50

27-47

260

2-50

3000

2-95

34-51

27-52

3500

2-8i

34-54

27-56

2-60

2-62

WS607

12

0

16-42

34-27

25-11

0-40

—

N50V

1 00-0

1838

1840

10

16-44

34-28

25-11

—

—

N70B

1 83-0

3Il8

2139

KT

20

16-44

34-28

25-11

0-40

—

N 100 B

/

30

16-44

34-28

25-11

—

« —

NiooB

225-85

2I18

2150

Depth estimated

40

16-43

34-35

25-17

0-40

50

l6-22

34-24

25-14

60

16-01

34-26

25-19

0-40

80

12-50

34-11

25-82

100

11-49

34-18

26-07

1-22

15°

10-60

34-40

26-40

200

9-86

34-49

26-59

2-15

300

7-88

34-58

26-98

400

6-40

34-41

27-06

2-24

600

5-05

34-42

27-22

800

4-41

34-41

27-29

2-OS

1000

3-75

34-41

27-36

1500

2-87

34-54

27-56

2-05

2000

2-42

34-61

27-64

2500

2-03

34-60

27-67

2-05

3000

1-86

34-71

27-78

3S°o

I -So

34-44

27-57

2-15

WS608

12

0

14-01

34-19

25-58

0-40

—

N50V

1 00-0

0630

0632

10

14-01

34-15

25-55

—

—

N70B

i- 88-0

0828

0847

KT

20

14-01

34-16

25-55

0-40

—

N 100 B

I

30

13-77

34-18

25-62

—

—

NiooB

235-90

0828

0856

Depth estimated

40

13-61

34-33

25-76

0-55

50

13-50

34-21

25-70

60

13-32

34-20

25-72

0-82

80

i2-o8

34-28

26-04

100

11-52

34-37

26-21

1-50

150

10-50

34-47

26-47

200

10-13

34-56

26-60

2-24

300

9-00

34-56

2679

400

8-34

34-50

26-85

2-36

600

8-46

34-55

26-88

800

690

34-42

26-99

2-36

1000

5-58

34-31

27-08

1500

4-56

34-44

27-31

2-13

2000

3-45

34-55

27-51

2500

2-41

34-61

2766

2-13

3000

2-04

34-64

27-71

3500

1-88

34-70

27-77

2-13

157

WS 609—612

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS609

31° 51-2' S, 72°34' W

1931

30 V

WS610

31° 45-5' S, 72°oi-s' W

1840

2487
br.M

WS611

WS612

29° ii' S, 71° 42-5' w

27° 08-5' S, 72° 01-5' w

4 VI
6 vi

5861
R

NE

wsw
w

4-6

4-6
4-6

SW
W

158

1016-9

117

heavy short S swell

ioi8-i

heavy av. S x W swell

1018-4

1017-6
1019-3

16-1
15-0

13-9
14-9

low long SW swell

low long WSW swell
low long WSW swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 609—612

WS609

WS610

Age of
(days)

WS611

WS612

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150

200

300

400

600

800

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

30
40

5°
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1500
2000
2500?

20

3°
40
50
60
80
100

150
200

300
400
600
800
1000
1500
2000
2500

14-25
14-24
14-24
14-20
13-90
13-60

12-14

ii-i6

10-78

I1-3S

10-70

9-11

775

5-72

4-69

4-1 1

2-99

2-43
2-03
1-87
1-83

14-00

14-00

14-00

14-00

13-96

13-49

11-85

1 1-90

I i-i I

10-50

10-28

9-00

7-50

5-42

4-66

4-14

2-85

2-26

I -92

15-03

16-61
16-58
16-55
16-53
16-50
16-48
15-47
13-02
12-34
11-83
11-32
9-57
8-10

5-91

5-05
4-24
3-74
2-65

2-17

34-28
34-29
34-25
34-25
34-25
34-29
34-27
34-26
34-27
34-73
34-67
34-59
34-44
34-27
34-34
34-41
34-53
34-57
34-57
3463
34-63

34-25
34-25
34-23
34-23
34-21

34-02
34-21
34-31
34-55
34-62
34-56
34-46
34-42
34-46
34-61
34-33
34-55

34-60

34-43
34-45
34-45
34-43
34-43
34-45
34-38
34-33
34-30
34-65
34-73
34-62
34-52
34-37
34-41
34-45
34-46
34-58
34-63

25-60
25-60
25-57
25-58
25-65
25-74
26-02
26-19
26-27
26-52
26-59
26-80
26-90
27-03
27-21
27-33
27-54
27-61
27-65
27-71
27-71

25-67

0-55

0-61

0-61

0-87

1-50

1-77

1-98

2-15

2-05

1-98

1-98

0-70

0-78

0-63

0-84

1-33

1-82

2-47

2-60

1-56

0-13
0-13
0-13
0-13
0-13
0-13
0-70
1-27
1-27
1-56
2-03

2-13

2-20

2-13

2-13

5-63
5-47
5-42
4-17

2-72

0-54
1-45
3-02
2-33
2-99
3-06

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

5-37

5-35

5-28

5-15
3-10
0-26
0-91

NsoV

N70V

N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50 V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

Depth
(metres)

N70B

NiooB
NiooB

N50V

N50V

N70V

N70B
NiooB
NiooB

1 00-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-500
1000-750
250-200

86-0

230-85

1 00-0
56-0
170-55

87-0

230-85
1 00-0

1 00-0
50-0
100-50
250-50
250-0
250-100
500-250
750-500
1000-750

69-0

195-70

1315
1325

1546
1546

2018
2100
2100

1525
1606
1614

2024

2024
2108

1655
1710

2020
2120

2127

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

2253
2253

2045

2054
2110

1657

1730

2230
2315
2328

Water-bottle struck bottom

KT

Depth estimated

Position re-visited on 6. vi. 3 1
when observations from
3500 m. to bottom were
taiien

KT

Depth estimated

159

WS 612— 616

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS612

cont.

WS613

27° 08-5' S, 72° 01-5' w

27° 05-5' S, 70° 58' w

WS614

27° 06-5' S, 71° 00-7' w

WS615

27° °5'S' S, 71° 04' W

WS616

27° 08' S, 71° 10' w

I93I

6 vi

0640

134

f.d.S

0826

296
bl.G

1132
R

1768
gn.M

ESE

ESE

ESE

WNW

4-6

4-6

4-6

1-6

ESE

ESE

ESE

1018-4

low long SW swell

low long SW swell

iS-6

12-8

low long SW swell

1016-5

low long SW swell

160

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 612— 616

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

O,
litre

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

WS612

corit.

WS613

WS614

WS615

WS616

3000

35°o
4000
4500
5000
55°°

3°

40

5°
60
80
100
130

20
30
40

50
60
80
100

ISO
200

20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
800
1000

20
30
40

50
60
80
100

■5°
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1500

1-83
174
1-72
1-75
1-77
i-8i

1310
1310
1292
1269
i2-6o
12-55
12-51
12-46
12-28

I2-00

13-45
13-45
13-40

12-66
12-52
12-49
12-45
12-38
12-31
11-87

11-43
IO-35

14-20
14-21
13-50
12-90
12-74
12-46
12-36
12-40

12-21
11-91
I 1-40
10-94
10-78
604
4-99
4-25

14-88
13-90
13-35
13-00
12-62
12-60
12-70
12-40
12-22
11-90
11-25
10-39

«-7S
6-02
4-96
4-18
2-91

34-66
34-70
34-71
34-70
34-66
34-68

3435
34-37
34-50
34-56
34-68
34-70
34-72
34-74
34-78
34-80

34-31
3436
34-35
34-59
34-72
34-76
34-77
34-84
34-79
34-83
34-79
34-85

34-31
34-34
34-37
3450
34-61
34-62
34-68
34-76
34-79
3476
34-77
34-76
34-75
34-41
34-46
34-48

3434
3432
3436
3435
34-40
34-56
34-65
34-71
34-77
34-83
34-78
34-74
34-60
34-41
34-43
34-52
34-58

27-73
27-77
27-79
27-77
27-74
27-75

25-90
25-91
26-04
2613
26-24
26-26
26-29
26-32
26-38
26-46

25-79
25-82
25-83
26-16
2629
26-32
26-34
26-41
2639
26-50

26-55
26-79

25-63
25-65
25-82
26-04
26-16
26-23
26-29
26-34
26-41
26-43
26-54
26-61
2665
27-10
27-27
27-37

25-51
25-70
25-84
25-92
26-02
26-15
26-19
26-31
26-38
26-49
26-58
26-70
26-86
27-10
27-25
27-41
27-58

2-79
2-53
2-13
I -41
1-50
2-34
2-45

2-45

2-57

1-20

1-22
1-22
1-82
2-05
2-24
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-24
2-24

1-03
1-03
116
1-63
1-90
2-IS
2-05
2-05
2-05
2-47

2-6o

2-60
2-85

1-08

I-3S
1-43
1-82
1-63
2-07
2-40
2-53
2-85
2-68
2-53

2-53

2-28

4-79
4-54
0-48
043
0-23

4-87
4-63
2-65
i-io
0-32
026
049
2-12
2-67

N50 V
N70B
NiooB

N50V

N70V

N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

1 00-0
84-0

100-0
50-0
100-50
290-100

86-0

230-85

100-0
69-0
i95(-o)

0735
0750

0737
0814

Phosphate results estimated
4 days later

KT

I 125-0
260-125

0830
0955

1039
1039

1301
1320
1415

1655
1723
1723

0832

1015
1059
1106

1303
1340

1445

1657
1743
1743

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated. Fished
on 400 m. of warp closed
after 20 min. of tow

161

WS 617—620

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS617

WS618

27° 09-5' S, 71° 15-7' w

27° 09' S, 71° 12-5' w

27° 03-5' S, 71° 30' w

27° 04-5' S, 71° 23' W 6 vi

193 1
5 vi

6 vi

1820

3032
gn.M

486s
It.br.M

[150

WNW

NNW

ENE

4-6

4-6

WNW

W

4-6 NNW

ENE

be

be

0=
|1

[oi8-o

[0187

I020-8

i6-i

[2-8

12-8

12-8

low long WNW
swell

low long WNW
swell

low long WSW swell

low long SSW swel

162

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 617—620

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVA TIONS

Aye of
("days")

WS617

WS618

WS619 20

WS620

30
40
SO
60
80
100

150

200

300

400

600

800

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

30
40
50
60
80
1 00
ISO
200

20
30
40
50
60
80
100

150

200

300

400

600

800

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4S0O

30
40
50
60

15-90
15-90

is-^s

H'SO
13-40
12-41

12-45
11-72

I2-OI
I 1-76
II-13
9-82
8-26

S-93
4-91
4-20
2-97

2-22
1-90
i-8s

15-10
14-22
13-80
13-62
13-00
12-54
12-89
12-50
12-60
11-91

16-56

16-49

16-49

16-35

16-16

tS-88

14-79

12-83

1 1-98

1 1-20

10-72

9-50

7-83

S-84

4-86

4-12

2-86

2-20

1-89

1-80

1-79

1-78

1-69

16-50
16-21
i6-i8
15-80
14-91
14-28
13-13
11-92
11-80

34-44
34-44
34-44
34-34
34-25
34-21
34-35
3436
34-59
34-76
34-74
34-67
34-56
34-38
34-44
34-50
34-59
34-65
34-63
34-65

34-36
34-28
34-35
34-36
34-41
34-44
34-70
34-67
34-83
34-81
34-78

34-49
34-50
34-49
34-46
34-45
34-43
34-32
34-23
34-35
34-55
34-67
34-65
34-52
34-42
34-43
34-49
34-58
34-65
34-65
3469
34-66
34-68
34-68

34-45
34-44
34-44
34-52
34-34
34-31
34-22
34-24
34-50

2536
25-36
25-42
25-5S
25-75
25-92
26-02
26-16
26-29
26-46
26-57
26-74
26-91
27-10
27-27
27-39
27-59
27-69
27-71
27-72

25-47
25-61
25-75
25-79
25-95
26-07
26-20
26-25
26-36
26-48
26-61

25-24
25-27
25-26
25-27
25-30
25-35
25-51
25-85
26-1 1
26-41
26-59
26-78
26-94
27-13
27-26
27-38
27-59
27-69
27-72
27-75
27-73
27-76
27-76

25-22
25-29
25-30
25-44
25-51
25-61

25-77
2604
26-25

0-95
0-95
0-95
I -08
1-50
1-56
1-77

2-22

2-22

2-66
2-41

2-97
2-97

2-53
2-66

0-63

0-63

0-63

1-06

1-56
2-15
2-47

2-62

2-62

2-34

1-77

1-90

0-72
0-72
0-72
0-80

1-24
1-24

1-39

I-S6

2-IS

5-25
5-29
5-28

5-04
2-IS
0-63
0-88
1-98

2-68
2-97
2-97
3-49

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

N50V

NH
N70B

N 100 B
NiooB

67-0
1 90-65

1825
2000

2204

2204

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N70B
NiooB
NiooB

84-0
225-85

69-0
195-70

0608

1046
1046

1827

2225
2232

KT

Depth estimated

0610

1 107
1113

1312
1312

1332
1337

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

163

WS 620—625

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS620

cont.

WS621

WS622

27° 04-5' S, 71° 23' w

24° 27-5' S, 70" 43' w

23° 32-6' S, 70° 38-5' w

193'
6 vi

WS623

23° 32-7' S, 70° 41' w

WS624

23° 31-8' S, 70° 44-5' w

WS625

23° 31-7' S, 70°47'W

8 vi

148
br.v.M

289
S.G

8vi

819
R

1 1-16

ssw

I I-I6

ssw

7-16

15-6

be

ioi8-6

mod. av. S swell

low long E swell

be

1018-7

i6-i

low long E swell

1016-4

i6-i

mod. short S swell

16-1

3d. short S swell

164

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 620—625

HVDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
("days")

WS620

cont.

WS621

WS622

WS623

WS624

WS625

150
200
300

30
40

50
60

30
40

50
60
80
1 00

150
200
250

20

3°
40
50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
750

10

20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
800
950

11-07
10-37
9-23

17-20

4-10
4-07
3-70
3-44
3-38
3-26
2-79
2-70
2-60

4-14
3-69
373
3-61
3-51
3-27
3-19
3-04
2-61
2-33
1-81
1-67

4-31
4-08
3-81
3-68
3-26
314
2-94
2-71
2-71
2-29
1-95
I -08

9-38
6-26

5-33

13-93

13-72

13-46

13-62

13-32

13-23

13-06

12-91

12-76

12-44

11-98

11-23

9-40

7-38

5-47

4-72

34-59
34-68
34-61

34-79

34-59
34-59
34-81
34-74
34-77
34-80
34-84
34-87
34-86

34-64

34-70
34-76
34-76
34-79
34-80
34-80
34-84
34-89
34-86
34-88
34-88

34-56
34-63
34-72
34-77
34-80
34-80
34-80
34-82
34-93
34-83
34-80
34-78
34-64
34-42
34-46

34-39
34-49
34-42
34-63
34-79
34-79
34-75
34-81
34-82
34-82
34-88
34-80
34-66
34-53
34-47
34-47

26-47
26-66
26-79

25-33

25-87
25-88
26-13
26-12
26-15
26-21
26-33
26-37
26-38

25-90
26-03
26-07
26-10
26-15
26-21
26-22
26-28
26-40
26-43
26-55
26-58

25-80
25-90
26-03
26-09
26-21
26-23
26-27
26-34
26-41
26-42
26-47
26-61
26-80
27-07
27-23

25-75
25-86
25-86
26-00
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-29
26-33
26-39
26-52
26-60
26-80
27-02
27-22
27-31

1-98
2-32
2-66
2-32
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-53
2-53
2-66
2-41
2-41

2-32

1-39
1-39

1-54
1-98

2-34
2-15
2-22
2-22
2-34
2-34
2-45

2-45

2-45

0-26
0-34

UIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

3-51
2-13
0-46
0-18
0-21
0-20
0-30

N70B

NiooB
NiooB
N50 V

N50V
N70B
NiooB

N50V

N70 V

N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

205-75
100-0

1 00-0
128-0

100-0
50-0
100-50
280-100

95-0

250-95

100-0
102-0
265-100

100-0
109-0

2020
2058

0935
0953

1030
1 140

1232
1232

1420
1446
1446

2040

2050
2100

0937
1013

1210
1254
1259

1422
1506

1512

KT

Depth estimated

KT

KT

Depth estimated

1520
1653
1653

1522
1713
1723

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

165

WS 626—629

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS626

23° 30' S, 7°° 50' W

WS627

23° 28' S, 70° S2-5"W

WS628

23° 25' S, 70° 55' w

WS629

23°2i-s'S, 7i°28'W

1931
8 vi

1940
R

8 vi

2195
R

8-9 vi

7154

11-16

1 1-16

ssw

1014-6

12-8

mod. av. SW swell

1016-4

[2-8

mod. av. SW swell

12-8

mod. av. S swell

1016-6

15-6

mod. av. S swell

166

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 626—629

Age of -

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

Station

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

s °/,„

at

p.

mg. atom

0,

litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS626

22

O

14-09

34-41

25-73

1-77

4-75

N50V

100-0

I912

I914

lO

14-11

34-46

25-76

1-56

—

N70B

• 87^

1950

2010

KT

20

14-09

34-49

25-79

I-S6

4-64

N 100 B

3°

13-20

34-SS

26-03

2-24

NiooB

230-85

1950

2020

Depth estimated

40

13-61

34-8:

26-14

2-47

0-82

50

1316

34-72

26-16

2-47

60

13-07

34-79

26-24

2-74

0-28

80

12-81

34-90

26-38

3-10

100

12-71

35-02

26-49

3-10

0-14

ISO

I2-l8

34-82

26-44

2-91

200

11-65

34-79

26-51

3-10

0-18

300

10-85

34-73

26-61

400

9-48

34-66

26-79

2-74

0-26

600

6-29

34-44

27-10

Soo

4-98

34-45

27-26

3-10

1000

4-27

34-48

27-37

1500

3-85

34-S9

27-50

2-91

WS627

22

0

15-01

34-51

25-61

1-29

—

N50V

100-0

2035

2037

10

15-02

34-52

25-62

1-29

N70B

c 69-0

2305

2325

KT

20

14-85

34-68

25-78

1-35

— •

N 100 B

i

30

13-91

34-52

25-85

1-56

—

NiooB

195-70

2305

2335

Depth estimated

40

13-16

34-48

25-98

1-82

50

12-42

34-49

26-13

2-15

60

13-34

34-86

26-23

2-47

80

13-03

34-84

26-28

2-36

100

12-73

34-87

26-36

2-47

150

12-22

34-87

26-46

2-60

200

1 1-60

34-83

26-55

2-74

300

1 1-07

34-81

26-64

400

9-67

34-67

26-77

2-74

600

6-92

34-48

27-04

800

S-27

34-44

27-23

2-74

1000

4-51

34-49

27-34

1500

3-14

34-57

27-ss

2-91

WS628

22

0
10
20

3°

40

SO

60

80

100

ISO

200

300

400

600

800

1000

IS-I9
15-20

is-is

13-92

13-12

12-77
12-18
12-01
12-32

I2-IO

11-57

II-OO

9-70
7-42

5-38

4-SS

34-54
34-53
34-51
34-48
34-48
34-49
34-47
34-59
34-77
34-82

34-79
34-70
34-54
34-50
34-45

25-60
25-59

25-58
25-82
25-99

26-06

26-16

26-29

26-37

26-46

26-63
26-78

27-02

27-25
27-31

1-90
1-77
2-05
1-90
2-97
2-66
2-66

-

WS629

23

0

18-04

34-87

25-18

0-82

5-02

N50V

100-0

1050

1052

10

18-03

34-87

25-18

—

N70V

50-0

1100

20

18-02

34-87

25-18

0-82

5-14

„

100-50

30

18-02

34-86

25-17

—

„

250-100

40

18-00

34-86

25-18

0-82

5-19

„

500-250

—

114s

SO

17-97

34-81

25-16

—

—

N70B

} 87^

1736

1756

KT

60

17-92

34-80

25-16

0-95

5-03

N 100 B

70

16-16

—

NiooB

230-85

1736

1807

Depth estimated

80

14-71

34-35

25-56

100

12-57

34-31

25-96

1-16

1-35

ISO

10-92

34-46

26-39

200

1 1-00

34-70

26-57

1-69

1-82

300

9-87

34-67

26-74

400

8-74

34-60

26-86

1-90

1 0-32

1

167

WS 629—632

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Sounding
(metres)

(knots)

Direction Force

WS629

cont.

23° 21-5' S, 71° 28'W

1931
9 vi

WS630

From 23° 22' S, 71° o6'W
to 23° 13-5' S, 70° 56' W

9-10 VI

1955
0400

S
NE

7-IO
4-6

S
NE

WS631

23° 12' S, 70° 49' w

NE

4-6

NE

WS632

23° 10' S, 70° 46-s'W

NE

4-6

NE

1015-7
1015-1

15-0
14-4

13-9

12-5

mod. av. S s-well
mod. av. S swell

low short to low long
SW swell

1015-6

low long SE swell

168

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 629—632

Age of

HVDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME

Station

(days")

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

s°/,„

al

P.

mg. atom

0,
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS629

23

600

7-26

34-60

27-08

cant.

800
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000

35°°
4000
4500

S-8i
496

3-84
279

2-21
1-92
.•76
1-76

I -75

34-42
34-52
34-5°
34-56
34-67
34-67
34-70

34-68
34-70

27-13
27-32
27-42

27-57
27-71
21-73
27-78
27-76
27-77

2-22

2-05
2-22
2-41

1-60
1-55

2-55
3-02

WS630

23

0

17-31

34-70

25-23

0-87

—

N70B

} ,3-.

2007

2028

KT

10

17-31

34-70

25-23

—

N 100 B

24

20

17-29

34-72

25-25

0-87

—

NiooB

205-75

2007

2036

Depth estimated

3°

17-30

34-71

25-25

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

2045

2047

40

17-28

34-70

25-24

0-95

5°

16-47

34-59

25-35

60

14-46

34-37

25-62

1-08

80

13-09

34-30

25-85

100

1 1-90

34-3°

26-08

1-63

ISO

1 1 -6s

34-70

26-44

200

11-44

34-83

26-58

300

10-02

34-66

26-70

400

8-58

34-59

26-89

2-53

600

6-36

34-60

27-21

800

5-01

34-47

27-28

1000

4-31

34-48

27-36

1500

2-82

34-58

27-59

2-79

2000

2-33

34-62

27-67

2500

1-84

34-65

27-72

3000

1-82

34-65

27-72

3500

1-79

34-67

27-74

2-41

WS631

24

0

16-50

34-64

25-38

0-82

—

N50V

1 00-0

0955

0957

10

16-40

34-64

25-40

—

—

N70B

1 53-0

1028

1048

KT

20

15-67

34-58

25-52

0-87

—

NiooB

3°

15-19

34-52

25-58

—

—

NiooB

140-55

1028

1056

Depth estimated

40

14-86

34-49

25-62

1-22

50

13-68

34-34

25-77

60

12-66

34-29

25-92

1-50

80

12-22

34-43

26-12

100

1 2-08

34-58

26-27

2-22

15°

11-98

34-82

26-48

200

11-68

34-83

26-54

2-53

300

10-38

34-77

26-72

400

8-95

34-68

26-90

2-53

600

6-21

34-59

27-23

800

5-12

34-45

27-24

2-66

1000

4-39

34-51

27-37

1500

2-83

34-5°

27-52

2-97

WS632

24

0

15-77

34-53

25-46

0-82

5-27

NsoV

1 00-0

1225

1227

10

15-66

34-54

25-49

—

—

N70B

1 95-0
250-95

1245

1306

KT

20
3°

15-31

14-80

34-5°
34-43

25-53
25-59

0-95

5-34

N 100 B
NiooB

1245

1310

Depth estimated

40

13-68

34-29

25-72

1-03

4-59

50

i2-gi

34-28

25-88

60

12-86

34-40

25-97

1-29

2-89

80

13-21

34-77

26-19

100

12-73

34-78

26-29

2-22

0-56

15°

12-12

34-81

26-44

200

11-64

34-81

26-53

2-34

o-io

300

10-38

34-70

26-67

400

9-24

34-45

26-67

2-34

0-23

600

6-36

34-60

27-21

800

5-20

34-48

27-26

2-70

1-69

1000

4-29

34-48

27-37

0-92

1

169

WS 633—638

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Sounding
(metres)

Force
(knots)

WS633

J3° lo'S, 70° 43-5' W

1931
10 vi

NxW

W

be

15-6

12-8

low long SE swell

WS634

23° 10' S, 70° 40-5' w

w

be

12-8

low long W swell

WS635

23° 12-5' S, 70° 39-5' w

1658

700

NxW

NxW

b 1015-7

low short S swell

WS636

WS638

22° 04-5' S, 70° 36' w

19° 48' S, 70° 22' w

i8°54-S'S, 7i°o6' W

16 vi

18 vi

WSW

4-6

0508

2277
gy.Oz

SE

WSW

NNW

SE

be

10177

1016-7

iS-6

16-1

mod. short SW swell

low long SW swell

low long SE swell

170

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 633—638

Station

Age of -
(days)

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

S"/„

at

P.

ing. atom

0,
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

From

To

WS633

24

0

15-85

34-54

25-45

_

N50V

1 00-0

1325

1327

10

15-61

34-51

25-47

—

—

N70B

} 76-0

1440

1500

KT

20

13-98

34-46

25-79

N 100 B

30

13-81

34-58

25-92

—

—

NiooB

210-75

1440

1507

Depth estimated

40

14-00

34-74

26-01

50

13-94

34-68

25-97

60

13-76

34-79

26-10

80

13-40

34-84

26-21

100

12-74

34-84

26-34

150

12-34

34-85

26-42

200

11-90

34-82

26-49

300

10-71

34-74

26-65

400

9-41

34-68

26-82

600

6-25

34-43

27-09

800

5-06

34-51

27-30

WS634

24

0

15-11

34-48

25-57

I-16

—

N50V

1 00-0

1615

1617

10

14-35

34-49

25-73

—

N70B

\ 109-0

1633

1653

KT

20

13-83

34-69

26-00

2-22

N 100 B

30

13-92

34-72

26-00

40

13-59

34-77

26-11

3-14

5°

13-30

34-81

26-21

60

13-15

34-84

26-26

3-14

80

13-06

34-84

26-28

100

12-83

34-87

26-34

3-25

150

12-49

34-85

26-39

200

11-85

34-81

26-49

2-97

300

10-99

34-75

26-61

400

9-70

34-68

26-77

2-22

600

6-16

34-43

27-11

WS635

24

0
10
20
30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

14-90
14-51
13-91
13-63
13-53
13-41
13-30
13-07
12-86
12-51
12-09
10-95
9-90

34-46
34-47
34-58
34-70
34-73
34-73
34-77
34-78
34-81
34-81
34-83
34-72
34-62

25-59
25-69
25-90
26-04
26-10
26-12
26-17
26-23
26-30
26-37
26-46
26-58
26-70

1-20
1-82

2-34

2-57
2-85
2-85
2-85

N50V

100-0

1700

1702

WS636

I

0

16-23

34-66

25-45

N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V

} 65-0

190-65
100-0

2020

2020
2103

2040

2048
2105

KT

Depth estimated

WS637

3

0

15-67

34-88

25-75

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

100-0
I 88-0
235-90

2008
2034
2034

2010

2055
2105

KT

Depth estimated

WS638

3

0

18-62

35-OI

25-15

6-06

N50V

1 00-0

0520

0522

10

18-62

35-02

25-16

N70V

30-0

0700

20

18-62

35-03

25-16

S-I2

,,

100-50

30

18-57

35-05

25-18

„

250-100

40

14-68

34-44

25-63

3-97

„

500-250

50

13-61

34-54

25-93

„

750-500

60

13-34

34-62

26-06

1-45

„

1000-750

80

13-14

34-70

26-15

—

N50V

250-100

100

13-09

34-82

26-26

0-23

„

100-50

150

12-56

34-83

26-37

—

,,

30-0

—

0930

200

11-91

34-82

26-49

—

0-17

N70B

\ lOI-O

0955

IOI5

KT

300

10-60

34-72

26-65

— 1 JN 100 15

171

WS 638—643

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS638

cont.

WS639

i8°S4-5'S, 7i°o6'W

1 8° 44' S, 70° 48' W

WS640

i8°28'S, 7o°23-6'W

WS641

18° 27-5' S, 70° 26-5' w

WS642

18° 28-4' S, 70° 32-2' w

WS643

18° 30' S, 70° 42-8' W

1931
19 vi

1230

148s
gy.Oz

1744

82
d.gn.M

SE

108
br.gn.M

Lt airs

2118

146
d.gn.M

Lt airs

WSW

4-6

4-6

SE

SE

SE

WSW

ioi6-S

iS-3

low long S swell

1016-4

low long SE swell

ioi6-.

low long SE swell

i6-i

low long SE swell

1016-7

i6-i

12-8

low long SW swell

172

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 638—643

WS638

cont.

WS639

Age of
(d?ys)

WS640

WS641

WS642

WS643

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

400
600
800
1000
1500
2000

30
40

50
60
80
100

15°
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1300

30
40

50
60
70

30
40

5°
60

30
40

50
60
80

30
40

50
60
80
1 00
150
200

8-93
6-49

5-II

4-28
2-74

2-25

18-62

i8-6o
i8-59
16-72
14-88

14-54

14-14

13-81

13-39

12-56

12-10

ii-io

9-39

6-17

5-35

4-05

3-24

i6-57
15-01
13-56
13-84
13-52
13-40
13-21
12-94

17-62

17-21
14-64
13-91
13-91
13-63
13-41
12-88
12-84

17-91
17-88
14-76
14-36
14-08
13-85
13-62
13-25
13-22
12-61

18-06
18-04
16-49
15-49
14-21
13-83
13-33
13-16
12-63

12-21

34-63
34-49
34-46
34-5°
34-60

34-63

34-98
35-00
34-99
34-67
34-79

34-88
34-88
34-88
34-87
34-89
34-85
34-75
34-65
34-51
34-50
34-60
34-49

34-70
34-60
34-51
34-87
34-88
34-88
34-86
34-88

34-85
34-80
34-63
34-74
34-88
34-88
34-88
34-84
34-83

35-04
34-92
34-61
34-88
34-86
34-91
34-91
34-90
34-88
34-85

34-95
34-92
34-90
34-70
34-75
34-83
34-88

34-84
34-90
34-88
34-88

26-86
27-10
27-25
27-38
27-61
27-68

25-13
25-14
25-14
25-35
25-86
26-00
26-08
26-15
26-23
26-41
26-47
26-59
26-80
27-16
27-26
27-48
27-47

25-41
25-68
25-92
26-14
26-21
26-24
26-26
26-32

25-26
25-33
25-78
26-03
26-13
26-19
26-23
26-31
26-31

25-34
25-26

25-74
26-04
26-08
26-17
26-22
26-29
26-27
26-37

25-23
25-21
25-21
25-43
25-69
26-03
26-15
26-22
26-30
26-39
26-47

litre

0-17
0-48
I-5I

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

5-14
3-56

5-24
5-19

2-54
2-20
0-07
0-30

Depth
(metres)

NiooB

N50V
N70B
N 100 B
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

265-100

1 00-0

76-0

210-75

I 50-0

1 00-0
92-0

1334
1358
1358

1336
1419
1424

1823
1835

82-0

76-0

1916

2020

2143
2159

2159

1825
1856

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

KT

1918
2040

2145
2219

2223

2324
0034
0034

2326
0056
0107

KT

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

173

WS 643—650

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS643

cont.

WS644

WS645

WS646

i8°3o'S, 7o°42-8'W

i6° ss'z' S, 72° 39' W

15° 42-3' S, 7S°03'W

iS°3S'S, 7s°4i' W

1931
19-20 vi

3147
h

SE

WS647

iS° i9'2' S, 75° ii's'W

1152

WS648

15° 19-5' S, 75° 13' W

1 30s

66

gy.S.M

III
gn.M.S

SE

ESE

WS649

15° 20' S, 75° 16-5' W

137
gn.M.S

ESE

WS650

15° 22-5' S, 75° 22' W

1627

143
d.G.S

SE

7-16

SE

SE

SE

SE

SE

be

1016-9

be

iS-6

15-6

low long SSW swell

mod. av. SSE swell

mod. av. SE swel

be

1015-5

mod. av. SE swell

1015-6

156

mod. av. SE swell

mod. av. ESE swell

ioi6-6

mod. short SE swell

174

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 643—650

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

WS643

cant.

WS644

WS645

WS646

WS647

WS648

WS649

300
400
600

30
40
50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
Soo
1000
1500
2000
2500

30
40
50
60

30
40

5°
60
So

30
40

50
60
80
100

1 1 09

9-44
6-39

1643

14-85

14-81

14-81

14-81

14-81

14-61

14-22

14-01

13-72

13-50

13-24

12-87

II -60

9-61

6-63

5-s6

4-74

3-13

2-36

1-99

13-79
13-79
13-73
13-71
13-61
13-58
13-52

13-82
13-84
13-81
13-81
13-67
13-59
13-57
13-42
13-24

14-19
14-19
14-01
13-93
13-86
13-80
13-63
13-61
13-51

14-43
14-42
14-2S
14-16

34-78
34-64
34-46

34-90

34-97
34-97
34-95
34-95
34-96
35-03
34-94
34-89
34-96
34-96
34-91
34-82
34-69
34-53
34-52
34-52
34-62
34-63
34-63

34-99
34-98
34-99
34-96
34-97
34-97
34-98

34-97
3S-00
34-99
34-98
34-97
35-06
34-97
34-93
34-97

35-00
34-97
34-99
34-98
35-00
34-99
34-99
34-99
35-00

34-99
3499
34-98
35-00

26-61
26-79
27-10

25-59

26-01
26-01
26-00
26-00
26-04
26-18
26-16
26-18
26-27
26-33
26-37
26-55
26-79
27-12
27-25
27-35
27-60
27-67
27-70

26-24
26-24
26-26
26-23
26-26
26-27
26-30

26-22
26-24
26-24
26-24
26-25
26-33
26-27
26-27
26-34

26-17
26-15
26-20
26-21
26-24
26-24
26-28
26-28
26-31

26-11
26-11
26-14
26-17

1-77

1-50

1-50

1-50

1-56

1-63

1-77

2-05

1-50

1-75

1-77
2-05
1-90
1-56
1-90
1-35
1-35

1-77
1-77
2-15
1-90
2-15
1-39
2-24
1-90
1-77

2-15
2-24
2-24
1-50
1-50
1-90
1-90
2-15
2-24

2-41

2-22
2-32
2-32

Os
litre

3-S7

3-88
3-24
0-91
0-12
o-i I
0-15
0-71
1-48

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

1-37
1-65
0-47
o-i I
0-18

;-77
;-77

N50V

N70V

N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB

NsoV
N70B
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB

N50V

1 00-0

N70B

NiooB

} 84-0

NiooB

225-85

NsoV

1 00-0

N70B
NiooB

] 67^

NiooB

190-65

N50V
N70B

NiooB

1 00-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-500
1000-750

1 1 8-0

320-120

:oo-o
I 109-0

1 00-0
84-0

1 00-0
1 18-0
1 00-0

2010
2031
2031

202S
2050
2050

0540
0550

0749
0749

1218
1230

1313
1409

1524
1537

1634
1734
1810

2012
2052
2102

2030
2110
2116

0542

0730
0809

KT

Depth estimated

KT

1220
1251

1315
1429

KT

Depth estimated

KT

1526
1600

KT. N 100 B fouled bottom

KT

1636

1752 KT

1830 Depth estimated

175

WS 650—653

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS650

cont.

WS651

15" 23-5' S, 75° 22' W

15° 31' S, 75°37-5"W

1931

22 vi

1266
d.M

SE

WS652

16° 21-5' S, 76° 30-2' w

064s

3987

br.gy.M

SE

16° 54' S, 77° 13' W

SE

7-16

SE

SE

SE

1016-7

12-8

mod. short SE swell

167

mod. av. S swell

iS-6

mod. av. SE swell

176

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 650—653

Station

Age of
(days")

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(metres)

Teirip.

s°/„

.,

P.

mg. atom

Oi
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

From

To

WS650

7

40

13-97

34-99

26-21

2-32

0-69

cont.

SO
60
80
100
140

13-82
13-74
13-57
13-31
13-13

35-03
35-20
35-01
34-99
34-99

26-26
26-42
26-31
26-34
26-38

2-41

2-66
2-32

2-32

2-97

0-37
0-13

WS651

7

0

14-86

35-01

2603

1-90

—

N50V

1 00-0

2123

2125

10

14-86

34-99

26-02

2-22

—

N70B

[■ 80-0

2144

2205

KT

20

14-83

35-00

26-03

2-22

—

N 100 B

1

30

14-73

35-02

26-07

2-22

—

N 100 B

220-80

2144

2214

Depth estimated

40

14-63

35-02

26-09

1-90

50

14-27

35-00

26-15

1-90

60

14-26

35-02

26-17

2.-2.2

80

13-60

34-97

26-27

2-32

100

13-50

3499

26-30

2-53

'5°

13-03

34-98

26-40

2-53

200

12-49

34-91

26-45

2-41

300

11-20

34-86

26-65

2-32

400

9-13

34-70

26-88

2-53

600

6-75

34-59

27-16

2-79

800 '

5-24

34-54

27-31

2-79

1000

4-49

34-58

27-42

2-79

WS652

7

0

18-82

35-22

25-26

0-I3

5-05

NH

0

0800

10

18-82

35-26

25-28

—

—

N50V

60-0

0930

20

18-82

35-24

25-27

0-27

4-88

„

80-60

30

18-82

35-26

25-28

—

—

,,

140-80

0950

40

18-82

35-26

25-29

0-55

4-93

N70B

/ 102-0

1053

■113

KT

5°

18-80

35-28

25-30

—

—

N 100 B

60

18-07

35-16

25-35

0-55

467

NiooB

270-100

1053

in8

Depth estimated

80

14-15

34-53

25-81

100

13-81

34-66

25-98

I-3S

2-90

150

12-89

34-91

26-37

200

12-18

34-90

26-50

2-22

0-21

300

II-I7

34-87

26-66

400

9-80

34-75

26-82

2-22

0-30

600

7-89

34-64

27-03

—

—

800

7-41

34-63

27-09

2-66

0-68

—

—

•

1000

6-90

34-59

27-13

—

—

—

—

'

1500

5-13

34-59

27-36

2-41

0-46

—

—

—

1 Very heavy stray on

water

2000

3-88

34-55

27-47

—

—

—

—

1 bottle wire

2500

3-72

34-61

27-52

2-13

1-09

—

3000

3-06

34-59

27-58

—

—

—

—

3500

2-6o

34-67

27-68

2-05

I-15

~~

WS653

8

0

18-79

35-19

25-24

0-13

5 -68

N50V

1 00-0

1833

1835

10

18-80

35-21

25-25

—

—

N70V

50-0

1850

20

i8-77

35-20

25-25

0-2I

4-17

100-50

30

i8-74

35-20

25-26

—

250-100

40

18-72

35-19

25-25

0-40

4-78

500-250

5°

15-11

34-72

25-75

—

1000-750

60

14-26

34-66

25-88

1-35

1-93

750-500

2030

80

13-27

34-67

26-10

—

N70B

}• I 18-0

2120

2141

KT

100

12-62

34-63

26-20

1-63

1-35

N 100 B

150

12-31

34-84

2643

—

NiooB

320-120

2120

2150

Depth estimated

200

11-54

34-78

26-52

1-63

1-46

300

10-03

34-70

26-74

400

8-33

34-58

26-92

1-82

0-27

600

6-11

34-50

27-16

800

4-94

34-49

27-29

1-82

0-32

1000

4-15

34-51

27-40

1500

2-80

34-57

27-58

1-90

1-16

2000

2-31

34-50

27-56

2500

1-85

34-64

27-72

1-90

3-20

3000

.-76

34-66

27-74

177

WS 654— 657 A

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS654

16" 36' S, 76° 55-5' W

WS655

16° 08' S, 76° 22' w

WS656

15° 52-5' S, 76" 07-5' w

24 vi

ESE

3316
br.gy.M

WS657
A

i5°44'S, 75° 59' W

1357

ESE

1 1-16

SE

SE

ESE

SE

mod. av. to mod.
long SE swell

ioi8-8

16-7

14-4 mod. av. ESE swell

i6-7

15-8

iS(>

mod. short to mod,
av. SE swell

mod. av. SE swell

178

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 654— 657 A

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

(days)

Depth
(metres)

'IVnip.

s /„

al

p.

mg. atom

0,

Utre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS654

8

0

1923

35-30

25-21

_

_

NsoV

1 00-0

0133

0135

lO

19-20

35-29

25-21

—

—

N70B

} 87-0

0216

0235

KT

20

19-24

35-32

25-22

—

N 100 B

3°

19-23

35-29

25-20

—

—

NiooB

230-85

0216

0241

Depth estimated

4°

19-23

35-29

25-20

SO

19-23

35-34

25-24

6o

19-24

35-30

25-21

8o

16-40

34-79

25-52

lOO

13-96

34-50

25-82

150

11-98

34-69

26-36

200

11-40

34-77

26-54

300

lo-oo

34-71

26-75

400

8-50

34-62

26-93

600

6-37

34-51

27-14

800

5-13

34-50

27-28

1000

4-74

34-50

27-33

1500

2-93

34-58

27-58

2000

2-23

34-62

27-68

2500

1-87

34-65

27-72

3000

2-03

34-62

27-70

WS655

8

0

17-26

35-03

25-49

0-82

—

N50V

1 00-0

1030

1032

10

17-26

35-01

25-48

—

—

N70B

} 84-0

I 125

I 145

KT

20

17-12

35-01

25-52

0-82

—

N 100 B

30

15-07

35-08

26-03

—

—

NiooB

225-85

II25

II55

Depth estimated

40

14-70

35-05

26-09

1-69

50

14-55

35-03

26-11

60

14-25

35-03

26-17

2-05

80

13-51

34-93

26-25

100

13-09

34-92

2633

2-47

150

12-41

34-91

26-46

200

11-80

34-88

26-55

2-24

300

10-56

34-77

26-69

400

8-79

34-67

26-91

2-36

600

6-69

34-57

27-14

800

S-34

34-57

27-31

2-74

1000

4-40

34-62

27-47

1500

3-05

34-58

27-57

3-29

2000

2-34

34-64

27-68

2500

1-92

34-66

27-72

3-IO

3000

1-82

34-91

27-94

WS656

9

0

16-24

34-90

25-64

1-41

4-91

N50V

1 00-0

1542

1544

10

16-21

35-02

25-74

—

—

N70B

\ 80-0

1600

1619

KT

20

15-90

34-93

25-74

1-41

4-29

N 100 B

30

15-61

34-88

25-76

—

N 100 B

220-80

1600

1631

Depth estimated

40

14-15

34-72

25-96

1-50

2-64

50

14-28

34-79

25-99

60

14-49

34-89

26-02

1-56

i-i6

80

14-17

34-94

26-12

100

13-30

34-88

26-26

2-05

0-34

150

12-71

34-93

26-41

200

I2-II

34-90

26-51

2-22

0-16

300

10-68

34-81

26-71

400

9-43

34-73

26-86

2-41

0-14

600

6-78

34-58

27-14

800

5-40

34-53

27-28

3-33

0-75

1000

4-37

34-56

27-42

1500

3-14

34-63

27-60

3-33

1-61

2000

2-39

34-64

27-68

2500

2-09

34-70

27-74

2-53

2-13

3000

1-93

34-67

27-73

WS657
A

9

N70H
NiooH

0
05

1 1740

1750

Position A

179

WS 657B— 664

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS657
B

WS658
WS659

WS660

WS661

WS662

WS663

15° 38-3' S, 75° 53-4' W

13° 45-5' S, 76°2o'W
13° 37-8' S, 76° 20' W

12° 23-5' S, 77° II-2'W

i2°o8'S, 77° 16' W
12° 08-5' S, 77° 16' W

12° 09-5' S, 77° 15' W

12° 09-6' S, 77° 15' W I vii

WS664

12° 11-5' S, 77° 17' w

I93I

24 vi

25 VI
25 vi

26 vi

26 vi

26 vi

1850

0936

IIS3

1354

Sounding
(metres)

71

d.gn.M

SE

S

NWxN

sw

sw
sw

sw

7-10

7-10

4-6

4-6
4-6

62
d.gn.M

lOI

gy.M

ESE

SE

SE

S

NW X N

SW

SW

ESE

SSE

1014-5
1016-7

1015-6

1014-9
1013-9

15-8

i6-7
i6-i

15-6

17-2
17-2

15-6

mod. av. SE svi^ell

14-4 low long S swell
15-2 low long NN W swell

low long SW swell

15-6 mod. short S swell
15-6 mod. short S swell

156

17-6

mod. short S swell

mod. short S swell

mod. av. SE swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS657B— 664

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Age of -

TIME 1

Station

(days)

Depth

(metres)

Temp.

S%o

"'

P.

mg. atom

0.
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS657

9

O

15-36

34-96

25-88

2-34

N50V

1 00-0

2013

2015

Position B

B

lO

15-31

34-97

25-90

—

N70B

• 67-0

2120

2139

KT

20

15-11

34-97

25-94

2-15

N 100 B

3°

15-06

35-02

26-00

N 100 B

190-65

2120

2149

Depth estimated

4°

15-00

34-98

25-98

2-34

5°

14-77

35-00

26-04

6o

14-62

34-99

26-07

2-34

8o

14-26

35-11

26-24

I GO

13-51

35-03

26-33

2-34

150

1301

34-98

26-40

200

12-16

34-92

26-51

2-45

300

10-91

34-79

26-65

400

9-08

34-69

26-88

2-85

600

6-53

34-53

27-14

800

5-62

34-53

27-25

3-02

1000

4-61

34-54

27-38

1500

3-II

34-57

27-55

2-85

2000

2-34

34-62

27-67

2500

1-96

34-62

27-70

2-57

3000

1-71

34-65

27-73

WS658

lO

0

19-10

-

-

-

-

N50V

■5-0

1228

1230

WS659

10

0

17-60

35-16

25-51

—

N50V
N70B
N 100 B

50-0
54-0

2120
2145

2122
2205

KT

WS660

lO

N50H
N70H

N50V
N70B
NiooB

■ 0
j

1 00-0
V 105-0

0935
0953
1005

0940
0955
1025

KT

WS661

lO

0

16-61

35-07

25-67

—

—

N50V

60-0

1230

1232

10

15-91

35-06

25-83

—

NiooH

0-5

1355

I4IS

lO

20
30
40

5°
60

15-56
15-42
15-42
15-42
15-40

35-07
35-05
3S-o8
35-07
35-06

25-92
25-93
25-96
25-95
25-94

N70H

0-5

1400

1420

WS662

10

0

16-86

34-99

25-56

—

—

N50V

50-0

I315

1317

10

16-19

3S-00

25-72

—

N70H

) o-S

1320

1340

20

i6-o8

35-04

25-78

—

N 100 H

30

15-97

35-06

25-81

40

15-50

35-06

25-92

5°

15-36

35-05

25-94

60

15-27

35-06

25-97

WS663

IS

0

17-20

35-08

25-54

—

—

N70V

25-0

1205

10

16-87

35-10

25-64

—

„

50-23

1215

20

16-75

35-17

25-73

—

N50V

50-25

1230

30

16-39

35-09

25-75

—

„

25-0

1240

40

15-90

35-08

25-85

—

N70B

1 44-0

1250

I313

KT

50

15-57

35-°8

25-92

—

NiooB

NsoH

0-5

1254

1256

WS664

i6

0

17-20

35-12

25-57

—

4-41

N50V

25-0

1403

lO

16-96

35-15

25-66

—

»

50-25

20

16-78

35-14

25-69

—

2-76

,.

95-50

30

16-27

35-13

25-80

—

N70V

25-0

40

15-64

35-07

25-90

—

i-i8

»

50-25

50

15-49

35-08

25-94

—

—

„

95-50

1434

KT

60

14-92

35-07

26-06

—

0-37

N70B

1 00-0

1445

1505

80

14-71

35-06

26-10

—

NiooB

90-0

1528

1551

Depth estimated

95

14-66

35-05

26-10

0-26

WS 665—669

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS665

WS666

WS667

WS668

WS669

12° 13-3' S, 77° 21-8' W

I93I
1 vii

12° iS's' S, 77° 30-s'W

12° 23-2' S, 77°39-S'W

12° 48-5' S, 78° 45-8' W

«2° 33-S' 8,78° 21-6' W

1613

134
d.gn.M

1834

0737

199

d.gn.M

474
bl.G

3840
gy.M

SE

SE

SExE

SE

11-16

11-16

17-21

SE

SE

SE

15-6

1013-2

15-6

i6-i

16-7

1013-3 169

mod. short S swell

mod. short SE swell

mod. short SE swl-U

mod. av. SE swell

mod. av. SE swell

182

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 665—669

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

moon

TIME 1

Remarks

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

S'L,

at

p.
mg. atom

O3
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS665

l6

O

17-55

35-20

25-56

N50V

1 00-0

1653

1655

lO
20

17-53
17-51

35-21
35-24

25-57
25-60

N70B

NiooB

1 ■«-

1705

1728

KT

30

15-91

35-IO

25-87

40

15-34

35-08

25-98

50

I5-03

35-08

26-04

60

14-78

35-05

26-07

80

14-52

35-19

26-24

100

14-41

35-o6

26-16

130

14-34

35-03

26-15

WS666

i6

0

17-83

35-25

25-52

—

3-98

N50V

1 00-0

1836

1838

10
20

17-83
17-82

35-26
35-26

25-52
25-53

4-02

N70B
NiooB

[ 89-0

1935

1958

KT

30

17-62

35-21

25-55

40

17-16

35-17

25-62

—

2-48

50

1 6-6 1

35-13

25-72

60

15-39

35-07

25-95

—

I -00

80

14-51

35-06

26-14

100

14-49

35-08

26-16

—

0-23

ISO

14-04

35-05

26-23

WS667

i6

0

19-13

35-49

25-38

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

2135

2137

10

19-13

35-48

25-37

—

—

N70B

> lOO-O

2212

2232

Depth estimated

20

19-14

35-51

25-39

—

—

N 100 B

30

19-14

—

—

—

NiooB

320-100

2310

2340

Depth estimated

40

19-13

35-48

25-37

5°

17-01

35-i8

25-68

60

15-53

35-07

25-92

80

15-09

35-07

26-02

100

14-18

35-00

26-17

150

13-71

34-99

26-26

200

12-98

34-91

26-35

300

11-95

34-90

26-54

400

10-67

34-81

26-71

WS 668

i6

0

18-88

35-40

25-38

—

5-21

N50V

1 00-0

0910

0912

10

18-87

35-44

25-41

—

—

N70B

1 1 16-0

II36

I157

KT

20

18-90

35-45

25-41

—

4-88

N 100 B

/

30

18-91

35-49

25-43

—

—

NiooB

3I5-II5

1136

1202

Depth estimated

40

16-91

35-06

25-60

—

3-63

50

16-51

34-99

25-64

60

15-51

34-97

25-85

—

0-93

80

14-49

34-96

26-07

100

13-84

34-95

26-20

—

0-I2

150

12-94

34-94

26-38

200

12-29

34-87

26-45

—

0-17

300

II-I2

34-87

26-67

400

9-49

34-74

26-86

—

0-75

600

7-06

34-59

27-11

800

5-48

34-55

27-29

—

0-85

1000

4-76

34-61

27-42

1500

3-09

34-70

27-66

—

1-79

2000

2-38

34-67

27-70

2500

1-97

34-69

27-74

—

0-12

3000

1-87

34-52

27-62

3S0O

1-78

34-59

27-69

—

1-86

4000

1-72

34-64

27-73

WS669

i6

0

17-21

35-i8

25-63

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

1555

1557

10
20

17-20
17-20

35-17
35-18

25-61

25-63

N70B

N 100 B

1 91-0

1824

1844

KT

30

i6-g6

35-14

25-65

—

—

N 100 B

240-90

1824

1850

Depth estimated

40

16-89

35-12

25-65

5°

16-81

35-14

25-69

60

16-77

35-11

25-68

183

WS 669—674

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS669

cont.

WS670

WS671

12° 33-5' S, 78° 21-6' W

12° 22-2' S, 78° 13-8' w

[2° IO-8' S, 77° 59-2' W

WS672

WS673

WS674

1931

2 vii

[2° 097' S, 77° 14' W

11° 23-6' S, 77° 38' W

09° 00' S, 79° 40' w

vii 0800

8 vii

1920
gn.M

SE

SE

11-16

SSE

SSE

11-16

SE

SE

SSE

7-10 SE 2

SSW

167

17-2

15-6

161

i6-3

i6-7

mod. av. SE swell

mod. av. SE swell

mod. av. S swell

mod. short SE swell

mod. short ESE
swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 669—674

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

Age of

TIME

Remarks

(Tys")

Depth
(metres)

Temp

s °/.„

01

p.

mg. atom

Oa
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS669

i6

80

14-18

34-97

26-15

cont.

100

200
300
400

13-72

i3-°3
1239
I II I
945

35-08
34-93
34-88
34-83
34-65

26-32

26-35
26-44
26-64
26-79

600

8-45

34-66

26-96

—

—

—

800

6-46

34-53

27-14

—

—

—

—

—

—

1000

5-23

34-50

27-27

—

—

—

Very heavy stray on

water-

1500

3-57

34-54

27-49

—

—

bottle wire

2000

3-33

34-53

27-50

—

—

—

2500

2-51

34-57

27-61

—

—

—

—

3000

2-i6

34-62

27-69

—

—

■'

WS670

17

0

19-21

35-41

25-30

-^

4-89

N50V

1 00-0

2148

2150

10
20

19-22
19-21

35-45
35-50

25-32
25-36

4-86

N70B

N 100 B

/ 109-0

2212

2235

KT

30

19-20

35-47

25-35

NiooB

235-90

2212

2240

Depth estimated

40

17-29

3S-i6

25-58

— •

3-10

5°

15-45

34-97

25-86

60

14-89

3492

25-95

0-96

80

14-01

3492

26-14

100

13-50

34-96

26-27

150

12-61

34-91

26-42

200

12-15

34-89

26-49

0-16

300

10-92

34-79

26-65

400

9-68

34-70

26-80

0-15

600

7-23

34-58

27-08

800

5-82

34-56

27-25

—

0-53

1000

5-32

34-52

27-28

—

—

—

—

1500

3-63

34-58

27-51

1-69

—

—

—

—

[Heavy stray on

water-

2000

2-64

34-61

27-63

—

—

—

—

—

—

1 bottle wire

2500

2-25

34-62

27-68

2-22

—

—

^

)

WS671

17

0

19-33

35-45

25-30

—

^

N50V

100-0

OII3

OII5

10

19-33

—

—

N70B

N 100 B

} 89-0

0257

0317

KT

20

19-31

35-59

25-41

3°

19-33

35-46

25-31

—

—

NiooB

235-90

0257

0325

Depth estimated

40

19-13

35-41

25-32

50

18-75

35-40

25-41

60

16-27

34-98

25-70

80

14-25

34-90

26-08

100

13-81

34-97

26-23

150

12-92

34-97

26-40

200

12-22

34-93

26-51

300

11-25

34-90

26-67

400

9-20

34-70

26-87

600

6-66

34-60

27-17

800

6-20

34-60

27-23

1000

5-00

34-62

27-40

1500

3-30

34-61

27-58

WS672

22

0
10
20

30

40

45

17-34
17-21
17-10
16-96
16-21
15-51

35-14
35-10
35-14
35-13
35-08
35-05

25-56
25-56
25-62
25-64
25-78
25-91

N50V

45-0

0828

0829

WS673

23

0

17-32

35-18

25-60

N50V
N70B
N 100 B

95-0
}■ 47-0

2020
2039

2022
2059

KT

WS674

24

0

20-36

35-48

25-05

I -03

4-88

N50V

1 00-0

2028

2030

10

20-34

35-42

25-01

1-08

N70V

50-0

2035

20

20-26

35-48

25-07

1-29

4-69

"

100—50

2045

185

WS 674—682

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS674

cont.

WS675

WS676

WS677

WS678

WS679

09° 00' S, 79° 40' w

08" 14-5' S, 78° 58'W
Salaverry Roads

17' S, 79° 01-5' W

08" 19-5' S, 79° 05-8' W

'3S-S'S, 78^57' W

o8°38'S, 79° 01-5' W

1931
9 vii

SW

WS680

'44'S, 79° 15'W

WS681

WS682

08° 49' S, 79° 24' w

' S3' S, 79° 33' W

1824

29
bl.M

49

gn.M.

Sh

55

gn.M.

Sh

66

SSW

SW

SSW

2238

91 SW

d.gn.M

106
R

no
br.S.Sh

SE

SE

4-6

4-6

SxW

4-6

4-6

4-6

SxW I

I012-8

i8-9

17-8

low long SW swell

low long S swell

low long S swell

mod. short S swell

mod. av. S swell

17-8

low long S swell

18-9

i8-3

i8-3

long S swell

low long S swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 674—682

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Age of -

TIME 1

Station

(days)

Depth

Temp.

S "/„„

Gt

P.

Tig. atom

0,

Gear

(metres)

(metres)

"C.

litre

From

To

WS674

24

30

20-23

35-41

25-03

1-33

_

NiooB

59-0

2050

2I16

KT
KT

COIlt.

40

i8-86

35-25

25-26

1-50

290

N70B

85-0

2126

2146

50

17-31

35-14

25-57

1-77

60

16-70

35-15

25-72

2-24

1-34

80

i6-oi

35-13

25-86

1-90

1 00

15-11

35-08

26-03

1-90

0-60

WS675

24

0

i6-oo

35-n

25-86

—

—

N70H

0'5

1321

134'

10

15-67

35-05

25-87

N 100 H
N50H

0-5

1329

1331

WS676

25

0

16-71

35-08

25-66

2-13

I -86

N50H

0-5

1436

1438

10

16-09

35-05

25-78

2-32

—

N70B

O-IO

1436

1456

20

15-60

35-05

25-89

2-32

1-64

N 100 B

25

15-55

35-07

25-92

WS677

25

0

16-83

35-09

25-64

2-40

—

N50V

45-0

1545

1546

10

16-59

35-06

25-67

2-40

—

N 70B

} 36-0

1600

1620

KT

20

16-34

35-06

25-73

2-40

—

N 100 B

30

15-81

35-08

25-87

2-53

40

15-43

35-09

25-96

2-85

■Water bottle struck bottom

45

■5-42

~

^

WS678

25

0

16-86

35-08

25-63

1-98

3-71

N50V

45'0

1828

1830

:o

16-20

35-05

25-75

1-90

—

N70B

1- 32-0

1909

I93I

KT

20

15-72

35-07

25-88

1-98

0-63

N 100 B

J

30

15-46

35-08

25-95

2-41

40

15-45

35-08

25-95

2-79

0-14

Water bottle struck bottom

48

15-45

~

WS679

25

0

17-40

35-08

25-50

1-29

—

NsoV

50-0

2034

2035

10

16-49

35-08

25-71

1-82

—

N70B

■ 50-0

2044

2105

Depth estimated

20

i6-io

35-IO

25-82

1-90

—

NiooB

1

30

15-57

35-08

25-92

2-15

40

15-30

35-10

26-00

2-45

50

15-27

35-10

26-01

2-45

60

15-24

35-26

26-13

2-15

WS680

25

0

17-41

35-16

25-55

0-95

3-54

N50V

90-0

2316

2318

10

17-01

35-17

25-66

0-95

—

N70B

• 50-0

2330

2350

KT

20

16-70

35-15

25-72

1-35

2-72

N 100 B

j

30

16-61

35-13

25-72

1-50

40

l6-20

35-11

25-81

1-35

1-06

50

15-95

35-11

25-87

1-35

60

15-14

35-10

26-04

1-35

0-18

80

14-99

35-08

26-05

1-35

WS681

25

0

19-44

35-36

25-20

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

0146

0148

10

18-64

35-30

25-36

0-40

—

N 70B

1 73-0

0158

0217

KT

20

18-02

35-25

25-47

0-82

—

N 100 B

i

30

17-31

35-18

25-61

1-08

40

16-70

35-12

2569

1-08

50

16-30

35-12

25-79

1-50

60

15-3°

35-09

25-99

1-62

80

15-08

35-07

26-02

1-62

100

15-08

35-09

26-04

1-75

WS682

25

0

20-04

35-42

25-09

. 0-13

—

N50V

1 00-0

0405

0407

10

20-04

35-42

25-09

0-27

—

N 70 B

\ 102-0

0418

0438

KT

20

19-92

35-41

25-12

0-27

—

N 100 B

30

19-10

35-33

25-26

0-27

40

17-58

35-17

25-52

0-95

50

16-54

35-12

25-73

1-22

60

15-72

3S-IO

25-91

1-56

80

15-66

35-09

25-91

1-63

100

15-00

35-08

26-05

1-69

187

WS 683—687

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS683

WS684

io°37'S, 78° 17-3' W

12" 09-5' S, 77° 15' w

WS685

12" 09-5' S, 77° 15' W

WS686

09° 25-5' S, 80° 22' w

WS687

07° 42' S, 82° 09' W

1931
II vii

1018

SExS

SSE

7-16

SExS

SxE

SxE

0036

4228
gy.M
br.M

17-it

2216

SE

SE

SSE

i8-9

15-6

mod. av. SE swell

low long S swell

15-6

mod. long S swell

bcp

mod. av. S swell

i6-6

mod. av. S swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 683—687

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

(days) Depth
(metres)

WS683

WS684

26

26

WS685

WS686

WS687

3°
40

50
60

3°
40
50
60

20
30
40
SO
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
35°o

20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
800
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000

350°
4000

20-l8

17-27
17-05
16-60

15-50
15-12
15-00
14-97

17-13
16-15
15-64
15-59
15-10
15-08

14-80

20-24
20-25
20-25
20-25
20-17
19-15
17-44

i6-i8
15-40
14-53
13-90

12-29

10-16

7-32
5-90

4-78
3-18

i-gr
1-71
1-71
1-64

19-64
19-64
19-64
19-64
19-64
19-63
18-83
i6-8i
15-00
13-74
12-89
11-32
9-17

7-31
6-16

4-79
3-23
2-32
2-12
1-78
1-79
1-73

35-57

35-12
35-12

35-11
35-10

35-05
35-06
35-06

35-08
35-IO
35-08
35-09
35-08
35-06
35-05

35-47
35-47
35-46
35-46
35-44
35-27
35-15
35-11
35-11
35-06
35-00
34-88
34-71
34-58
34-58
34-55
34-65
34-63
34-58
34-58
34-62

35-26
35-26
35-26
35-26
35-27
35-27
35-21
35-16
35-11
35-01
34-95
34-85
34-73
34-61
34-58
34-55
34-59
34-64
34-64
34-64
34-69
34-68

25-56
25-61
25-72
25-96
26-00
26-03
26-04

25-56
25-81
25-91
25-93
26-03
26-01
26-07

25-08
25-08
25-07
25-07
25-07
25-21
25-54
25-81
25-99
26-13
26-23
26-46
26-72
27-07
27-26
27-37
27-61
27-71
27-68
27-68
27-73

25-07

25-07
25-08
25-08
25-09
25-09
25-25
25-70
26-08
26-27
26-40
26-61
26-90
27-10
27-22
27-37
27-56
2768
27-70
27-73
27-75
27-76

1-03
1-56
1-82
2-22
2-85
3-02
3-02
3-02
2-57
0-82
0-82

1-69

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

N50V
N70B

NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NsoH

N70H

N50V
N70B
N 100 B

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

1 00-0
91-0

5 5-5
25-0

50-0
31-0

1 00-0
71-0

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

200S
2019

1041

1051

1 100
1105

1746
1757

0338
0431
0431

1 00-0

lOI-O

265-100

2010
2039

I 102
I 1 20

'747
1817

0340
0450
0457

KT

KT

Net damaged

KT

2332
0446
0446

KT

Depth estimated

2334
0506
0517

KT

Depth estimated

WS 688—692

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Direction Force

WS688

07' 19' S, 81° 35' w

WS689

WS690

WS691

07° oi' S, 8i° 09' W

07° 03' S, 80° 40-6' W

06° 59-8' S, 80° is'W

193 1

18 vii

1156

06° 29-3' S, 80° 33' W (I)

o6°28-2'S, 8o°37'W(II)

06" 292' S,

80° 41-6' W(III)

0553

1017
1157

2094
gn.M

R.Sh

26
gy.S.Sh

SSE

SSE

SSE

BE

SE

7-16

SE

SSE

SE

be

17-8

mod. short to mod.
av. S swell

iS-3

i8-3

17-8

mod. av. S swell

17-8

16-7

1014-7 iS-3

mod. short to mod
av. S swell

low long to mod.
short S swell

low long S swell

1^-4 low long SSE swell

190

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 688—692

Station

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

(Xys)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

S "1.-.,

at

p.

mg. atom

litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS688

3

O

18-64

35-14

25-24

I-31

4-80

N70V

1000-800

1300

lO

18-58

35-12

25-24

,,

800-500

20

18-56

35-09

25-22

I-3I

4-II

„

500-250

3°

i8-5S

35-09

25-22

„

250-100

40

18-50

35-IO

25-25

I-3I

3-83

„

50-0

50

18-17

35-15

25-37

,,

100-50

60

17-00

35-12

25-62

1-90

I-4I

N50V

50-0

80

15-51

35-o8

25-94

,,

100-50

1455

100
150

14-55
13-51

35-03
35-00

26-1 I
26-31

2-24

0-62

N70B

N 100 B

[■ 91-0

1509

1529

KT

200

12-64

34-95

26-45

2-24

0-26

NiooB

240-90

1509

1539

Depth estimated

300

11-32

34-84

26-61

400

9-01

34-67

26-88

2-74

0-I7

600

6-73

34-57

27-14

800

5-45

34-55

27-29

2-74

0-91

1000

4-59

34-54

27-38

1500

2-97

34-58

27-58

2-74

1-64

2000

2-28

34-6i

27-67

2500

1-86

34-64

27-72

2-74

2-20

3000

1-79

34-64

27-72

3500

1-79

34-68

27-75

2-47

2-19

WS689

3

0

18-54

35-07

25-21

1-31

—

N50V

1 00-0

2II5

2II7

10

i8-45

35-17

25-31

—

—

N70B

1 130-0

2201

2221

KT

20

1S-12

35-08

25-32

1-62

—

NiooB

30

17-51

35-08

25-47

—

—

N 100 B

340-130

2201

2228

Depth estimated

40

17-08

35-07

25-56

1-90

5°

16-00

35-°8

25-83

60

15-70

35-06

25-88

1-98

80

15-50

35-07

25-93

100

15-15

35-07

26-01

2-22

150

14-1 1

35-OI

26-19

200

13-50

34-97

26-29

2-53

300

I2-20

34-88

26-48

400

9-66

34-71

26-81

2-97

600

7-60

34-62

27-07

800

5-70

34-55

27-26

3-97

1000

4-77

34-55

27-37

1500

3-19

34-60

27-57

2-97

2000

2-16

34-60

27-66

WS690

4

0
10
20
30
40

5°
60
80
90

l8-I2

18-12
17-80
16-72
16-60

l6-20

15-70

15-10

15-09

35-12
35-12
35-12
35-12
35-10
35-11
35-09
35-08
35-08

25-35
25-35
25-43
25-69
25-71
25-81
25-90
26-03
26-03

1-62
1-62
1-90
2-24
2-24

N50V

90-0

0307

0309

WS691

3

0
10
20

30
40

50
60

17-39
17-35
17-21

16-50

15-95
15-70
15-70

35-14
35-13
35-13
35-14
35-14
35-13
35-13

25-55
25-55
25-58
25-76
25-88
25-93
25-93

1-62
1-62
I -go

2-15

N50V

50-0

0628

0630

WS692

4

0

17-40

35-12

25-53

1-75

3-42

N70H

0-5

\ 1048

1108

Haul I

10

17-19

35-12

25-58

—

—

NiooH

0-10

/ ^

20

17-00

35-16

25-65

2-13

1-76

N50H

0-5

1059

1 101

4

—

—

—

—

—

N70H
NiooH

0-5

0-10

(■ "35

"55

Haul 11

4

"

"

N70H

0-5

1157

1217

Haul III

191

WS 693—697

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS693

WS694

06° 35'2' S, 80° 40' W

06° 38' S, 80° 49-9' W

WS695

06° 48-2' S, 8o°55'W

WS696

06° 54-8' S, 8i°o2"W

WS697

05° 55-5' S, 8i°o9' W

1931
19 vii

1508

40
h

1216

gn.M.

bl.G.

Sh

SSE

SSE

967

d.gn.M

SSE

1902
gy.M

SSE

75
bl.S.M

4-6

7-16

SSE

SSE

SSE

l8-2

low long SSE swell

low long SSE swell

i8-5

17-8

mod. av. SSE swell

mod. av. SSE swell

i8-2

i6-7

mod. av. SSW swell

192

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 693—697

Station

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

p.

0,

Depth
(metres)

TIME

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
"C.

S7oo

a(

mg. atom

litre

Gear

From

To

WS693

4

O

17-81

35-16

25-45

1-82

_

N50V

35-<3

1333

1334

lO
20

17-46
17-31

35-12
35-13

25-51
25-56

1-98

N70B

NiooB

• 29-0

1340

1400

KT

3°

16-28

35-13

25-80

35

:6-22

WS694

4

o

18-13

35-13

25-36

1-82

4-07

N70V

50-0

1703

lO

17-76

35-13

25-45

—

,,

100-50

20

17-28

35-13

25-56

1-98

2-43

„

250-100

3°

16-47

35-10

25-74

—

,,

500-250

40

15-85

35-09

25-87

2-41

0-61

,,

100-50

50

15-56

35-09

25-94

—

0

750-500

60

15-30

35-°9

25-99

2-22

1-09

„

1000-750

80

14-86

35-08

26-08

—

N50V

1 00-0

—

1855

100

14-72

35-08

26-11

1-90

1-43

N70B

[ 128-0

I91S

1937

KT

150

14-20

35-01

26-17

—

N 100 B

200

13-70

35-00

36-27

1-90

0-55

N 100 B

340-130

I918

1948

Depth estimated

300

11-81

34-90

26-57

400

9-36

34-72

26-86

2-74

0-39

600

7-69

34-63

27-05

800

5-58

34-59

27-31

2-74

1-08

1000

4-12

34-58

27-46

WS695

4

0

18-12

35-12

25-35

1-90

N50V

1 00-0

2206

2208

10

18-02

35-11

25-38

—

—

N 100 B

170-60

2250

2317

Depth estimated

20

16-35

35-12

25-78

2-05

—

N70B

} 58-0

2250

2310

KT

3°

l6-I2

35-13

25-84

—

N 100 B

40

15-82

35-12

25-90

2-05

50

15-45

35-10

25-97

60

15-28

35-10

26-01

2-15

80

14-99

35-09

26-06

100

14-79

35-07

26-09

2-24

15°

14-00

35-03

26-23

200

13-21

34-97

26-35

2-36

300

I I-4I

34-88

2663

400

9-51

34-74

26-85

2-47

600

7-62

34-62

27-06

800

5-57

34-58

27-30

2-47

900

5-°5

34-58

27-36

WS696

5

0

l8-2I

35-11

25-33

1-98

4-33

N50V

1 00-0

0142

0144

10

18-21

35-11

25-33

—

—

N70B

} 73-0

0233

0253

KT

20

18-00

35-09

25-36

1-90

4-00

N 100 B

30

17-21

35-08

25-54

—

—

NiooB

205-75

0233

0302

Depth estimated

40

i6-8i

35-07

25-63

2-05

1-50

50

16-13

35-07

25-79

60

15-70

35-07

25-88

2-05

1-41

80

15-33

35-05

25-95

100

15-24

35-05

25-97

2-05

1-47

150

14-70

35-05

2609

200

13-81

34-97

26-23

2-47

0-84

300

'1-35

34-79

26-57

400

9-51

34-67

26-80

2-47

0-22

600

7-66

34-61

27-05

800

5-51

34-53

27-27

2-91

0-35

1000

4-58

34-51

27-35

1500

3-29

34-58

27-55

2-91

1-74

WS697

6

0

16-50

35-06

25-69

2-52

N50V

50-0

1 104

1 105

10

15-92

35-08

25-84

—

N70B

1 37-0

II 14

1134

KT

20

15-80

35-06

25-85

146

N 100 B

30

15-55

35-14

25-98

40

15-50

35-03

25-90

I 06

5°

15-43

35-05

2593

60

15-36

35-03

25-93

1-54

193

WS 698—702

R.R.S. Williani Scoreshy

WS698

WS701

05°S5'S, 8i°09-8'W

o5'^54'S. 8i°ii-7'W

05° 52' S, 81° 15-5' w

o5°48'S, 81° 22-5' W

05°38'S, 8i°4o"W

1931
21 vii

1426

1656

2226

117

313
gn.M

1086

gy.M

3202
br.M

SxW

SxE

7-16

7-16

SxW

SxW

SxE

be

be

be

1013-6

:8-6

167

low av. S swell

low long S swell

low long SxE swell

mod. av. S swell

mod. av. SW swell

194

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 698—702

Station

Age of -

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

Says)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

s »/„,

at

p.

mg. atom

0.
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS698

6

0

i6-6o

35-03

25-65

_

N50V

50-0

1208

1209

lO

16-40

35-06

25-72

—

—

N70B

r 70-0

1224

1244

KT

20

i6-oo

35-06

25-81

N 100 B

30

15-87

35-04

25-83

40

15-54

35-03

25-89

50

15-48

35-04

25-92

60

15-40

35-03

25-92

80

15-25

35-07

25-99

WS699

6

0

17-76

35-06

25-39

—

2-57

N50V

1 00-0

1337

1339

Much stray on wire

10

17-09

35-05

25-54

—

N70B

} 85-0

1350

1410

KT

20

16-05

35-05

25-79

1-33

N 100 B

30

15-95

35-05

25-81

40

15-75

35-05

25-86

1-35

5°

15-50

35-06

25-92

60

15-40

35-06

25-94

80

15-31

35-06

25-96

100

15-10

35-06

26-01

1-08

WS700

6

0

18-24

35-13

25-33

—

N50V

1 00-0

1432

1434

10

17-71

35-09

25-43

—

—

N70B

} 73-0

1543

1604

KT

20

16-71

35-12

25-69

N 100 B

30

16-28

35-13

25-80

—

—

NiooB

205-73

1543

1614

Depth estimated

40

15-99

35-06

25-81

%o

15-71

35-07

25-88

60

15-50

35-08

25-94

80

15-23

35-07

25-99

100

15-11

35-07

26-02

ISO

14-70

35-05

26-09

200

14-20

35-05

26-19

270

13-95

35-04

26-25

WS701

6

0

18-47

35-11

25-26

—

4-75

N50V

1 00-0

1813

1815

10

18-12

35-11

25-35

N70V

50-0

1825

20

16-60

35-14

25-73

2-i8

,,

100-50

30

16-40

35-11

25-76

„

250-100

40

16-07

35-15

25-87

I-71

,,

500-250

50

15-91

35-15

25-90

„

100-50

60

15-77

35-17

25-96

1-56

,,

750-500

80

15-36

35-13

26-01

„

1 000-0

2015

100

15-10

35-12

26-06

—

1-45

N70B

1 59-0

2023

2044

KT

150

14-72

35-23

26-23

N 100 B

200

14-59

35-08

26-14

—

1-26

NiooB

170-60

2023

2050

Depth estimated

300

12-90

34-97

26-42

400

10-71

34-81

26-70

o-i8

600

7-47

34-71

27-15

800

6-72

34-61

27-17

0-50

1000

5-72

34-75

27-42

WS702

6

0

18-31

35-11

25-30

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

0104

0106

lO

18-31

35-14

25-32

—

N70 B

!• 60-0

0133

0153

KT

20

l8-22

35-11

25-33

—

N 100 B

)

30

17-51

35-15

25-53

—

—

NiooB

170-60

0133

0200

Depth estimated

40

i6-6o

35-13

25-72

50

16-18

35-12

25-81

60

15-41

35-11

25-99

80

15-30

35-12

26-01

100

15-10

35-11

26-06

150

14-80

35-27

26-25

200

14-15

35-07

26-22

300

12-62

34-96

26-45

400

9-57

34-79

26-88

600

7-40

34-67

27-12

800

5-27

34-74

27-46

1000

4-75

34-59

27-40

1500

3-39

34-6i

27-56

195

WS 702—705

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Force
(knots)

WS702

cont.

WS703

05° 38' S, 81° 40' w

05° 34' S. 82° 1 1-5' W

WS704

05° 33' S, 82° 47' w

WS705

1931

21-22

4724
gy.M

SE

ESE

1659

SE

05°35-S'S, 83°4i-8'W

4027
gy.M

ssw

4-6

SE

SE

iS-4

mod. av. SE swell

19-6

i7'8

mod. short SSE
swell

be

1013-6

mod. av. SSE swell

196

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 702—705

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

Age of

TIME 1

Remarks

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

S7o.

at

p.

mg. atom

Oz

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS702

6

2000

2-52

34-67

27-69

cont.

2500
3000

2-IO

i-8s

34-70
34-70

27-74
27-76

WS703

7

0

i8-i6

35-12

25-34

4-56

N50V

1 00-0

0915

0917

10

l8-I2

35-13

25-36

—

—

N70B

\ 68-0

1232

1252

KT

20

17-97

35-13

25-39

4-29

N 100 B

30

17-58

35-14

25-50

—

—

NiooB

i95(-o)

1232

1259

Depth estimated

40

16-59

35-13

25-73

2-47

50

16-65

35-13

25-71

60

15-70

35-11

25-92

1-60

80

15-50

35-11

25-97

100

15-29

35-10

26-01

1-79

150

14-90

35-07

26-06

200

14-55

35-06

26-13

1-14

300

12-60

34-97

26-46

400

lO-I I

34-79

26-79

0-23

600

7-44

34-64

27-10

800

6-o6

34-55

27-22

0-66

1000

4-66

34-57

27-39

1500

3-08

34-61

27-60

1-91

2000

2-45

34-64

27-67

2500

1-94

34-65

27-71

2-60

3000

1-77

34-68

27-76

35°o

1-77

34-68

27-76

2-58

4000

I -75

34-68

27-76

4500

i-8i

—

2-72

WS704

7

0

18-63

35-11

25-22

—

N50V

100-0

1800

1802

10

18-05

35-11

25-37

—

N70B
NiooB

> 60-0

2004

2024

KT

20

17-41

35-11

25-52

—

30

17-17

35-11

25-58

—

—

NiooB

170-60

2004

2030

Depth estimated

40

17-07

35-14

25-62

50

16-96

35-13

25-64

60

16-91

35-15

25-67

80

16-40

35-14

25-78

100

15-57

35-07

25-91

150

15-20

35-09

26-02

200

14-50

3503

26-12

300

12-35

35-01

26-55

400

9-41

34-72

26-85

600

7-03

34-62

27-15

800

5-58

34-58

27-30

1000

4-64

34-58

27-41

1500

3-08

34-66

27-63

2000

2-35

34-66

27-69

2500

1-89

34-70

27-76

3000

i-8i

3469

27-75

3500

1-79

34-69

27-75

3900

1-81

34-68

27-75

WS705

8

0

19-02

35-11

25-12

—

4-29

N50V

100-0

0406

0408

10

19-02

35-20

25-19

—

N70V

50-0

0414

20

19-02

35-11

25-12

4-65

100-50

30

18-83

35-09

25-15

—

250-100

40

16-82

35-14

25-68

1-90

500-250

50

16-22

35-11

25-81

—

750-0

60

15-50

35-08

25-94

i-og

750-500

80

14-94

3506

26-05

—

1000-750

—

0746

100

14-76

35-05

26-07

1-39

N70B

\ 91-0

0806

0826

KT

150

14-35

3S"oi

26-14

—

N 100 B

200

13-72

35-01

26-28

—

0-50

NiooB

240-90

0806

0834

Depth estimated

300

12-20

34-93

26-51

400

10-21

34-8i

26-79

0-43

600

6-81

34-61

27-16

800

5-42

34-53

27-28

1-79

197

WS 705—709

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS705

cont.

WS706

o5'3S-5'S, 83°4i-8' W

1931
23 vii

05° 37-5' S, 83° 58'W

ESE

o5'37-5'S, 84°3i-s'W

1528

SE

SE

04" 18' S, 82°o5'W

4294
gy.M

SSE

4-6

SSE

WS709

04° 17' S, 81° i6-8' W

ssw

mod. av. S swell

i8-6

mod. short SE swell

17-8

low long SE swell

187

mod. av. S swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 705—709

Station

Age of
(days)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

S '/oo

at

P.

mg. atom

o,

litre

Gear

Depth
metres)

TIME

From

To

WS705

8

lOOO

4-53

34-53

27-38

cont.

1500
2000
2500
3000

3500
3900

3-06
2-31

1-95
1-79
179
1-82

34-59
34-61
34-67
34-67

34-68
34-69

27-58
27-65
27-73
27-74
27-75
27-75

-

2-40
2-02
2-73

WS706

8

0

19-74

35-16

24-97

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

1056

1058

10

19-72

35-13

24-95

—

N70B

73-0

II18

II39

KT

20

19-49

35-12

25-00

—

N 100 B

i '^

30

18-94

35-12

25-14

—

—

N 100 B

205(-0)

II18

II55

Depth estimated

40

17-50

35-09

25-48

—

—

NH

0

II 20

50

16-82

35-12

25-67

60

15-62

35-11

25-94

80

14-99

35-09

26-06

100

14-79

35-08

26-10

ISO

14-21

35-06

26-20

200

13-35

35-00

26-34

300

12-20

34-93

26-51

400

10-10

34-76

26-76

WS707

8

0

20-69

35-16

24-71

—

5-12

NH

0

1630

10

20-48

35-16

24-77

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

1640

1642

20

20-42

35-i6

24-79

—

3-95

N70B

1 I 15-0

1717

1736

KT

30

20-24

35-17

24-85

—

—

N 100 B

40

17-29

35-11

25-55

—

2-17

NiooB

315-115

1717

1747

Depth estimated

50

16-18

35-08

25-78

60

15-80

35-08

25-87

—

0-89

80

15-00

35-08

26-05

100

14-51

35-07

26-15

—

1-69

150

13-80

35-00

26-25

200

13-22

34-98

26-36

—

0-45

300

I i-6i

34-86

26-57

400

9-40

34-71

26-85

—

0-38

600

6-86

34-57

27-12

800

S-70

34-54

27-25

—

1-07

1000

4-68

34-54

27-37

WS708

9

0

18-50

34-81

25-03

—

3-83

N50V

1 00-0

2353

2355

10

18-51

34-82

25-03

—

—

N70V

50-0

0000

20

15-72

35-07

25-88

—

1-04

100-50

30

15-50

35-08

25-94

—

—

250-100

40

15-39

35-07

25-95

—

1-92

500-250

5°

15-30

35-07

25-97

—

—

750-500

60

15-29

35-07

25-98

—

2-17

1000-750

0145

80

15-20

35-07

26-00

—

—

N70B

1 73-0

0321

0341

Depth estimated

100

15-00

35-04

26-02

—

1-60

N 100 B

150

14-60

35-04

26-11

—

—

NiooB

205-75

0321

0349

Depth estimated

200

14-30

35-00

26-14

—

1-43

300

12-30

34-87

26-45

400

9-24

34-70

26-87

—

0-36

600

8-05

34-70

27-06

800

6-41

34-56

27-17

—

0-78

1000

5-36

34-55

27-30

1500

3-54

34-56

27-50

—

1-82

2000

2-54

34-64

27-66

2500

2-20

34-64

27-69

—

1-99

3000

1-82

34-67

27-74

3500

i-8o

34-85

27-88

—

2-69

4000

1-83

34-90

27-93

WS709

lO

0

22-64

34-15

23-42

0-84

4-05

NsoV

15-0

HIS

II 16

lO

21-34

34-39

23-96

—

—

,,

30-15

II 29

I 130

20

16-50

35-08

25-71

1-56

2-03

N70B

/ 20-0

1135

II55

KT

3°

16-30

35-08

25-76

NiooB

199

WS 710—714

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS710

04° 18' S, 81° 21-3' w

04° 19-5' S, 8i°27'W

WS712

o4"2o'S, 8i°37-8'W

WS713

04°2o'S, 8i°47' W

WS714

04^ 20' S, 81° 57-5' w

I93I

25 vii

26 vii

1885
gn.M

1815

SSE

SxE

17-27

7-16

SxE

be

be

be

be

mod. av. S swell

17-8

mod. av. S swell

i8-6

17-8

mod. av. S swell

17-3

i6-8

mod. av. S swell

16-7

15-6

mod. av. SxE swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 710— 714

Station

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

ri

VIE

(days")

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
C.

s "/, „

al

p.

mt!. atom

0.
lUre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS710

lO

O

21-53

34-44

23-95

0-84

_

N50V

15-0

1255

lO

21-24

34-53

24-09

—

60-15

I3OI

20

30

16-91
16-03

35-08
35-13

25-61

25-86

.-56

N70B

NiooB

1 44-0

1310

1330

KT

40

15-70

35-14

25-94

1-56

50

15-60

35-10

25-94

60

15-5°

35-07

25-93

1-56

WS711

lO

0

21-19

34-53

24-10

0-68

4-04

N70V

50-0

1525

10

21-01

34-57

24-18

—

,,

100-50

20

18-60

3492

25-08

0-82

2-76

,,

250-100

30

l6-20

35-09

25-79

—

„

500-250

40

15-90

35-12

25-88

1-50

2-17

„

750-500

50

15-62

35-07

25-90

—

„

1000-750

1700

60

15-60

35-07

25-91

1-43

1-84

N50V

100-0

1705

1707

80

15-44

35-07

25-94

—

—

N70B

} 83-0

1726

1746

KT

100

15-40

35-o8

25-96

1-50

1-66

N 100 B

'5°

15-00

35-04

26-02

—

NiooB

225-85

1726

1806

Depth estimated

200

14-70

35-03

26-08

1-56

1-18

300

I2-00

34-88

26-52

400

9-78

34-73

26-80

1-69

0-29

600

7-19

34-61

27-11

800

5-77

34-61

27-29

1-90

0-83

1000

4-66

34-63

27-44

1500

3-09

34-6o

27-58

1-77

1-65

WS712

10

0

20-44

34-68

24-42

0-13

—

N50V

1 00-0

1957

1959

10

20-10

34-72

24-54

—

N70B

1 57-0

2019

2039

KT

20

16-60

35-08

25-69

0-13

—

N 100 B

30

16-29

35-08

25-76

—

NiooB

165-55

2019

2046

Depth estimated

40

15-85

35-10

25-88

0-55

50

15-51

35-10

25-96

60

15-48

35-09

25-95

0-82

80

15-40

35-09

25-97

100

15-36

35-09

25-98

1-03

150

14-86

3509

26-09

200

14-10

35-08

26-24

1-16

300

11-80

35-00

2665

400

9-91

34-75

26-80

.-63

WS713

lO

0

16-85

35-21

25-73

0-55

2-83

N50V

1 00-0

2308

2310

10

16-82

35-01

25-59

—

N 70B

1 80-0

2326

2346

KT

20

16-81

35-05

25-61

0-82

2-66

N 100 B

1

30

16-79

35-03

25-60

—

—

N 100 B

220-80

2326

2355

Depth estimated

40

16-72

35-03

25-62

0-82

2-74

SO

16-62

35-03

25-64

60

i6-oo

35-05

25-80

0-82

219

80

15-62

35-IO

25-93

100

15-36

35-10

25-99

I-16

1-73

'50

14-90

35-04

26-04

200

14-15

35-02

26-20

1-22

i-i I

300

11-80

34-89

26-56

400

9-71

34-77

26-84

1-90

0-30

600

7-14

34-65

27-14

800

5-57

34-59

27-31

2-05

1-19

1000

4-65

34-62

27-45

1500

3-10

34-64

27-61

2-13

2-41

WS714

I 1

0
10
20
30
40

50
60
80

17-01
17-01
16-97
15-79
15-45
15-39
15-33
15-25

35-02
35-06
35-06
35-05
35-10
35-07
3 5 -08
3S-IO

25-55
25-57
25-58
25-85
25-97
25-95
25-98
26-02

N50V

1 00-0

0158

0200

WS 714—719

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS714

cont.

04° 20' S, 81° 57-5' W

02° 11-3' S, 8i°04'W

02° ii' S, 81° 09' w

I93I

26 vii

31 Vll

1718

60
R

90
R

22-6

20-3

mod. short SSW
swell

mod. short SSW
swell

WS717

02° 12' S, 81° i8-s' W

1650
gy.M

SSW

>i-6

i8-8

mod. short SSW
swell

WS718

02° n' S, 81° 33-5' W

SWxS

SWxS

mod. av.
swell

SWxS

WS719

02° 11' S, 8i°s3'W

3109

SSW

4-6

SSW

mod. short
swell

SSW

202

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 714—719

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

Station

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
C.

S"/,:,.,

.,

p.

mg. atom

0.

litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS714

I I

100

1519

35-07

26-00

cont.

ISO
200
300
400

14-59
13-91
11-70
9-91

35-04
35-01

34-86
34-78

26-11

26-24
26-55
26-82

WS715

i6

0

24-30

33-76

22-64

—

—

N50 V

50-0

1617

1618

10

24-29

33-76

22-64

N70B

1 54-0

1627

1647

KT

20

22-28

33-98

23-39

N 100 B

1 3t

30

20-24

34-50

24-33

40

17-62

34-83

25-25

5°

15-90

35-OI

25-80

WS716

i6

0

24-43

33-79

22-63

—

—

N50V

50-0

1744

1745

10

24-45

33-82

22-64

N70B

• 90-0

1754

1814

KT

20

24-41

33-83

22-66

N 100 B

J

30

20-9S

34-41

24-08

40

19-52

34-71

24-69

50

16-58

34-97

25-62

60

15-20

35-03

25-97

80

15-01

35-04

26-02

WS717

17

0

24-22

33-83

22-72

—

N50V

I 00-0

2017

2019

10

24-22

33-83

22-72

N70V

50-0

2024

20

24-22

33-83

22-72

—

100-50

30

20-4S

34-51

24-29

250-500

40

i8-S9

34-77

24-97

500-250

5°

15-42

35-04

25-93

,.

750-500

60

15-29

35-03

25-95

1000-750

2200

80

15-21

35-08

2600

N70B

\ lOI-O
265-100

2219

2239

KT

100
150

15-19
14-50

35-05
35-03

25-98
26-12

N 100 B
N 100 B

2219

2245

Depth estimated

200

14-21

34-99

26-15

300

11-51

34-83

26-57

400

9-58

34-71

26-82

600

7-24

34-61

27-IO

800

5 -42

34-58

27-32

1000

4-60

34-56

27-39

1500

3 -49

34-61

27-55

WS718

17

0

23-85

33-87

22-86

—

N50V

1 00-0

0126

0128

10

23-84

33-87

22-86

N70B

\ 128-0
340-130

0148

0208

KT

20
30

23-82
19-41

33-87
34-65

22-87

24-66

z.

NiooB
NiooB

0148

0220

Depth estimated

40

17-71

34-97

25-34

50

15-89

35-05

25-82

60

15-59

35-06

25-90

80

15-46

35-03

25-91

100

15-11

35-07

26-02

• ISO

14-79

35-00

26-04

200

14-32

34-99

26-13

300

11-65

34-84

26-55

400

10-17

34-73

26-73

WS719

17

0

2300

33-91

23-13

4-79

N50V

1 00-0

0557

0559

10

23-00

33-91

23-13

—

N70V

50-0

0604

20

22-99

34-06

23-25

4-69

„

100-50

30

18-11

34-81

25-12

—

»

250-100

40

16-95

35-04

25-58

1-73

„

500-250

50

16-10

35-06

25-79

—

,,

750-500

0730

60

15-75

3506

25-87

2-12

N70B

1 103-0
270-103

0837

0857

KT

80
100

15-39
15-21
14-76

35-08
35-04

25-96
25-98

z

2-01

N 100 B
N 100 B

0837

0905

Depth estimated

150

35-01

26-05

—

—

TYFB

55o(-o)

0837

0920

Depth estimated

200

14-28

34-99

26-14

—

I -07

300

I2-20

34-89

26-48

203

WS 719—723

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS719

cont.

02° 11' S, 8i°53'W

WS720

02° 52-3' S, 82° iQ's' w

WS721

03°29'S, 82°5i"W

WS722

04" 20-4' S, 83° 03' w

WS723

05" 01-5' S, 83° 49' w

1931

I viii

1030

Sx W

SxW

SE

7-16

SE

SE

17-8

mod. av. S x E
swell

mod. av. S sweL

1014-8

i8-9

mod. av. S swell

1013-8

iS-5

mod. av. S swell

204

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 719—723

Station

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

(days)

Depth
(metres)

T-P

s °/,„

a,

p.

mg. atom

O2
litre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS719

17

400

10-52

34-71

26-66

0-25

cunt.

600
800
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000

7-57
5-74
4-97
373
2-58

2-02

1-75

34-62
34-56
34-57
34-61
34-61
34-62
34-67

27-07
27-26
27-36

27-53
27-64
27-70
27-75

I-14
1-52
2-II

WS720

17

0

2 1 -06

34-29

23-95

N50V

1 00-0

1828

1830

10

2 1 -06

34-28

23-95

—

—

N70B

)■ 80-0

1850

I9IO

KT

20

19-95

34-59

24-48

N 100 B

1

30

16-30

35-10

25-78

—

N 100 B

220-80

1850

I916

Depth estimated

40

15-90

35-11

25-88

50

1571

35-12

25-92

60

15-54

35-11

25-96

80

15-40

35-05

25-93

100

15-32

35-11

26-01

150

14-80

35-07

26-08

200

13-95

35-05

26-25

300

12-30

34-94

26-50

400

lO-I I

34-82

26-82

WS721

18

0

19-15

34-74

24-81

—

N50 V

1 00-0

0228

0230

10

19-15

34-74

24-81

N70B

84-0

0251

03II

20

19-15

34-74

24-81

N 100 B

225 85

0251

0319

Depth estimated

30

18-84

34-82

24-95

40

18-43

34-97

25-17

50

15-79

35-17

25 -94

60

15-58

35-24

26-05

80

15-40

35-15

26-02

100

15-20

35-10

26-03

150

14-75

35-08

26-10

200

14-19

35-07

26-21

300

11-80

34-94

26-60

400

10-04

34-82

26-83

WS722

18

0

18-54

35-06

25-20

4-45

N50 V

1 00-0

II38

I 1 40

10

18-54

35-06

25-20

—

—

N70B

/ 102-0

1321

1341

KT

20

i8-53

35-03

25-18

4-40

N 100 B

1

30

i8-53

35-06

25-20

N 100 B

270-100

1321

1351

Depth estimated

40

17-81

35-10

25-42

—

2-96

TYFB

I 200(-0)

1321

1425

Depth estimated

50

16-32

35-13

25-79

60

i6-oo

35-14

25-87

1-63

80

15-60

35-12

25-95

100

15-22

35-12

26-03

1-07

150

15-02

35-09

26-06

200

14-00

35-07

26-25

0-41

300

11-85

34-93

26-58

400

9-51

34-77

26-87

0-23

600

7-67

34-65

27-06

800

5-8i

34-58

27-27

0-56

1000

4-34

34-57

27-43

1500

3-11

34-65

27-61

1-60

2000

2-36

34-67

27-70

2500

1-93

34-67

27-73

2-46

3000

1-76

34-75

27-82

3500

1-72

34-66

27-74

1-48

WS723

18

0

18-42

35-07

25-24

—

N50V

1 00-0

2233

2235

10

18-42

35-06

25-23

—

—

N70B
NiooB

1 76^

2255

2315

KT

20

18-44

35-07

25-23

—

1

30

18-43

35-09

25-25

—

—

NiooB

210-75

2255

2322

Depth estimated

40

18-32

35-08

25-27

50

16-42

35-17

25-80

60

16-14

35-12

25-82

205

WS 723—727

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS723

cont.

WS724

05° 01-5' S, 83° 49' w

05° 35-7' S, 84=33' W

1931

2 viii

0630

WS725

06° 25' S, 85° 04-2' w

3 vm

1432

WS726

07° 20' S, 85° 12-5' w

0006

WS727

12° 09-5' S, 77° 15' w

SSE

SxE

SE

17-27

SE

SSE

SE

SE

SSE

16-7

mod. av. SSE swell

be

1014-4

18-9 i6-8

heavy av. SE swell

bcqp

1017-1

18-3

156

heavy av. SE swell

mod. long SSE swell

206

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 723—727

Station

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME

(days"

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

°c.

s ^.^,

or

p.

mg. atom

Oj
Utre

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS723

l8

80

1572

35-13

25-93

cont.

100

150
200
300
400

15-24
14-40

13-63

12-41
10-56

35-12

3S-o6

35-04
34-95
34-82

26-03
26-16
26-31
26-49
26-74

WS724

19

0
10
20
30
40

50
60
80
100

200
300
400

20-06

20-06

20-07
20-03
19-96
17-01

15-68
15-31

14-62
13-99
13-22

I I-6I

10-01

35-20
35-20
35-18
35-23
35-22
35-23
35-16
3S-i6
35-08
35-23
34-97
34-86
34-78

24-92
24-93
24-91
24-95
24-97
25-71
25-96
26-04
26-13
26-38
26-34
26-57
26-80

NsoV

1 00-0

0732

0734

WS725

19

0

20-13

35-20

24-90

—

—

N50 V

100-50

1533

10

20-I0

35-18

24-90

— •

—

,,

50-0

—

1545

20

20-04

35-20

24-92

—

—

N70B

1 89-0

1607

1626

KT

30

20-00

35-21

24-94

—

—

N 100 B

40

19-96

35-19

24-94

—

—

NiooB

235-90

1607

1632

Depth estimated

50

19-24

35-21

25-14

60

15-78

35-11

25-91

80

14-62

35-08

26-13

100

14-20

35-08

26-22

150

13-50

35-00

26-31

200

13-05

34-97

26-38

300

H-5I

34-89

26-62

400

9-89

34-76

26-80

WS726

20

0

20-02

35-27

24-99

—

4-94

N50V

100-50

0200

10

20-02

35-28

24-99

—

—

„

50-0

—

0230

20

20-II

35-25

24-94

—

5-00

N70B
NiooB

1 130-0

0349

0410

KT

30

20-I I

35-25

24-94

—

—

40

20-03

35-28

24-98

—

4-71

NiooB

340-130

0349

0419

Depth estimated

50

20-II

35-27

24-96

60

17-60

35-23

25-56

1-76

80

14-74

35-06

26-09

1 00

14-13

35-09

26-25

0-84

150

13-41

35-04

26-36

200

12-90

34-97

26-41

—

0-26

300

11-79

34-89

26-56

400

10-26

34-79

26-77

—

0-37

600

8-73

34-66

26-91

800

6-75

34-64

27-19

—

0-39

1 000

S-63

34-56

37-27

1500

3-68

34-56

27-49

—

1-40

2000

2-57

34-61

27-63

2500

2-09

34-66

27-71

—

1-80

3000

1-79

34-68

27-75

3500

1-79

34-70

27-77

—

1-59

WS727

23

0

14-88

35-08

26-08

—

—

N50V

50-0

0813

0814

10

14-77

35-08

36-10

—

—

N70H

1 0-5

0824

0844

20

14-63

—

—

—

—

NiooH

i

30

14-61

35-01

36-09

40

14-61

35-03

36-10

50

14-56

35-18

36-23

58

14-57

207

WS 728—733

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS729

12° 09-5' S, 77° 15' W

[2° ii'S' S, 77° 20' W

WS730

12° 15' S, 77° 27' w

WS731

12° 22' S, 77° 40' w

WS732

i2°36'S, 78°o7'W

WS733

12° 54-5' S, 78°43'W

1931
20 viii

0806

0948

1204

SW

ssw

SSE

SE

4-6

4-6

4-6

4-6

SW

SW

SE

be

15-6

low long SW swell

low long S swell

10137

mod. short SSW
swell

mod. short S swell

146

i3'9

mod. short S swell

iS-6

low long SE swell

208

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 728—733

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(Xys")

WS728

WS730

WS731

WS732

WS733

3°
40
50

30
40

50
60

30
40
50
60
80
100
15°

30
40

5°
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

30
40

5°
60
80
:oo

150
200
300
400
600
800
1000

30
40

50
60

15-73
15-59
15-36
14-86
14-43
1411

16-64
16-47

15-71
14-70

14-51
14-25
14-00

13-77
13-51

17-57
17-26
16-91
14-48
14-11
14-01
13-93
13-81
13-43
13-17

17-72
.7-62
17-58
17-56
17-53
14-89
14-43
13-61
13-26
12-69
12-00
10-99
9-50

16-51
16-51
16-49
16-44
16-1S

l6-02

16-01

14-63
13-82

13-06
12-30
10-90

9-19
6-83
5-55
4-54

15-91
15-9"
15-91

15-85
15-84
15-81
15-80

35-°4
35-04
35-03
35-02
35-00
35-00

35-17
35-12
35-08
35-02
35-01
34-99

34-98
34-95

35-41
35-29
35-24
35-04
35-04
35-02
35-01
34-99
34-97
34-96

35-34
35-35
35-35
35-35
35-35
34-97
34-97
34-97
34-96
34-96
34-91
34-82
34-71

35-20
3S-i6
3S-i6
35-16
35-16
3S-i6
35-i6
34-98
34-96
34-93
34-92
34-81
34-69
34-58
34-53
34-57

35-11
3S-IO

35-10
35-10
35-10
35-10
35-11

25-86
25-89
25-93
26-04
26-12
26-18

25-76
25-75
25-89
26-08
26-11
26-15

26-25
26-27

25-71
25-69
25-74
26-14
26-21
26-22
26-23
26-24
26-31
26-34

25-62

25-65
25-66

25-67
25-68
26-00
26-10
26-27
26-32
26-44
26-54
26-66
26-84

25-80
25-77
25-77
25-78
25-85
25-88
25-88
26-06
26-21
26-34
26-49
26-67
26-86
27-13
27-26
27-41

25-88
25-87
25-87
25-88
25-88
25-89
25-90

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

N50V
N70V
N70B

NiooB

N50V

N70V

N70B
NiooB

N50 V
N70B
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

Depth
(metres

50-0
50-0

100— O

50-0
100-50

80-0

lOO-O

I 1 17-0
320-115

1 00-0

97-0
255-95

0830

0835

0848

1023
1035

1058

1246

1304

1600

1628
1628

I 1 17-0

320-1 IS

2128
2219
2219

0615

0635
0635

0831
0836

1025

1050
1118

1248
1324

1602
1648
1657

KT

KT

KT

KT

Depth estimated

2130
2239
2249

0617

0655
0703

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

209

WS 733—736

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Sounding
(metres)

Force
(knots)

WS733

coiit.

12° 54-5' S. 78° 43' W

1931
:i viii

WS734

13° 16-5' S, 79° 27-5' W

4627

i7°47'S, 77°36'W

084s

SE

11-16

SE

WS736

22° 37-3' S, 75°27' W

SxE

11-16

SxE

16-7

mod. short S swell

i6-i

mod. av. SE swell

be

1022-6

low long SxE swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 733—736

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

WS733

cont .

WS734

WS735

WS736

So

lOO

15°

200

300

400
600

800

1000

3°
40
50
60
80
100

150

200

300

400

600

800

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500
4000

30
40

50

60

80

100

150

200

300

400

600

800

1000

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
800
1000

15-36
i3-8i
13-16
12-45
1 1-14
g-60
6-98

5-45
4-52

17-16
17-09
17-05
17-04
17-03
17-02
17-01
16-92
1 5 -04
13-21

12-35
11-07
9-07
7-01
5-64
4-61
3-24
2-73
2-16
1-86
1-83

16-71

16-71

16-71

16-71

16-71

16-71

16-63

16-67

15-77

12-66

11-84

10-78

9-96

7-67

5-86

4-80

16-35

16-37

16-38

16-37

16-37

16-36

16-31

16-29

16-22

11-70

11-85

IO-45

8-74

6-47

5-96

4-58

35-04
34-98
34-93
34-92

34-84
34-74
34-57
34-52
34-52

35-47
35-34
35-34
35-34
35-34
35-34
35-34
35-28
35-°3
34-95
34-86

34-83
34-67
34-54
34-51
34-52
34-57
34-59
34-66
34-67
34-68
34-67

35-12
35-12
35-12
35-13
35-14
35-15
35-17
35-18
35-03
34-69
34-74
34-76
34-70
34-60
34-50
34-51

34-79
34-79
34-79
34-79
34-79
34-78
34-77
34-76
34-76

34-82
34-71
34-69
34-58
34-48
34-48

25-94
26-24
26-32
26-46
26-65
26-84
27-10
27-26
27-37

25-86
25-77
25-78
25-78
25-79
25-79
25-79
25-76
26-00
26-33
26-43
26-65
26-87
27-08
27-23
27-36
27-54
27-61
27-71
27-74
27-75
27-74

25-69
25-69
25-69
25-70
25-71
25-72
25-76
25-76
25-84
26-23
26-44
26-64
26-75
27-03
27-19
27-33

25-53
25-52
25-52
25-52
25-52
25-51
25-52
25-51
25-53

26-50
26-67
26-93
27-18
27-17
27-33

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

N50 V

N70B

NiooB
NiooB

100-0
165-0
430-165

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

N50V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

1 00-0
99-0
265-100

1 00-0
155-0
400-155

1635
1724
1724

1637
1744
1754

0934
0953
0953

0556

0747
0747

KT

Depth estimated

0936
IOI3
1024

0558

0807
0820

KT

Depth estimated

KT

Depth estimated

WS 736—742

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS736

cont.

22° 37-3' S, 75° 27' W

J7° 23' S, 73° 40' W

1931
25 viii

WS738

32° 04-5' S, 71° 36' w

28 viii

WS739

32° OS'S, 71° 47-5' W

28-29
viii

20S

SSE

SxE

-27

WS740

WS742

33° S6' S, 72° is'W

36° 00' S, 73° is-s'W

22' S, 73° 41' W

SWxS

SW

NNW

11-16

11-16

4-6

SWxS

SW

NNW

mod. av. to mod.
long SxE swell

I020-8

mod. av. S swell

mod. av. S swell

I020-6

heavy av. SW x S
swell

heavy short SW
swell

low short NNW
swell

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 736—742

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

Depth
(metres)

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000

30
40

SO
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
600
800
1000

3°
40

50
60
80
100
150

30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

3-05
2-28
2-03
1-89
i-8i
1-76

14-58

14-59

14-59

14-54

14-51

14-38

13-51

12-62

1219

10-88

11-00

9-97

8-99

5-97

4-99

4-33

12-10
12-10

I2-IO
12-05
11-49
11-30
11-20
10-83
I I-I2
I 1-06
10-80

12-Sl
12-81
12-81
12-81
12-81
12-80
11-70
I 1-20
10-85
10-42
10-16
9-82
8-20

12-08

34-60
34-62
34-61
34-67

34-67

34-48
34-48
34-48
34-48
34-48
34-43

34-37
34-31
34-30
34-41
34-67
34-65
34-60
34-42
34-42
34-50

34-23
34-23
34-23
34-23
34-33
34-40
34-40
34-41
34-58
34-66
34-67

09

27-58
27-68
27-69
27-74

27-75

25-68
25-68
25-68
25-69
25-70
25-69
25-82
25-95
26-03
26-36
26-54
26-70
26-82
27-11
27-23
27-37

26-00
26-00
26-00
26-00
26-18
26-27
26-29
26-37
26-45
26-52
26-57

25-74
25-77
25-77
25-77
25-77
25-79
26-00
26-17
26-28
26-50
26-61
2663
26-86

N50V
N70B
NiooB

N50 V
N70B

NiooB

N50 V
N70B
NiooB
NiooB

Nso V
N70B
NiooB

NiooB

NsoV
N70B
NiooB

BTS
BTS

N50V
N70B
NiooB

1 00-0
150-0
390-150

0200
0225
0225

0202
0247
0250

Depth estimated
Depth estimated

1 00-0
137-0

1 00-0
100-0

2024
2041

2026
2101

2310
2336
2336

1 00-0
I 132-0
340-132

1 00-0
j 135-0

58-47
47-35
3S-0

• 23-0

2312
2356
0006

KT

Depth estimated

2000
2041
2041

2004
2029

1755
1845
2010

2033

2002
2101
2111

2006
2049

1820
1945

2012
2103

+ 4 hours

KT

Depth estimated

Depth estimated

Haul A
Haul B

KT

213

WS 743—748

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

^~.

Air Temp.

Hour

Sounding

Weather

sa

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Ss

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

1931

WS743

41° 05' S, 74°05' W

8 IX

2000

170

ssw

7-10

SSW

3

b

1008-3

7-4

5-3

mod. av. SSW swell

WS744

43° 40-5' S, 75°o7-S'W

9ix

2000

-

SE

17-21

SE

4

0

1012-9

7-8

4-4

heavy av. SE swell

WS745

46°4i'S, 75°4S' W

10 ix

2000

-

SSE

7-10

SSE

2

b

1025-8

7-2

4-4

mod. av. SSE swell

WS746

53° 28' S, 72° 44' w

16 ix

0800

632

SE

7-10

SE

2

be

1027-7

3-1

1-7

no swell

WS747

53°5S-S'S, 71° 16' W

16 ix

1445

335

E

7-16

E

2-3

be

1016-3

77

S-5

no swell

WS748

53° 41-5' S, 7o°SS' W

16 ix

1746

300

Lt airs

°-3

-

0

be

1026-8

6-9

5-4

no swell

214

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 743—748

Station

Age of
(days)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

S7oo

at

P.

0,
hire

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

From

To

WS743

25

0

9-90

-

—

-

--

N50V
N70B

NiooB

)

1 00-0
146-0

200S
2036

2007

20s6

KT

WS744

27

0

9-34

—

—

NsoV
N70B
NiooB

1 00-0
I 15-0

200s
2023

2007

2043

KT

WS745

28

0

8-45

—

—

—

—

NsoV
N70B
N 100 B

1 00-0
1 00-0

2008
2021

2010
2043

Depth estimated

WS746

4

0
600

5-59
8-41

30-26
33-30

23-88
25-89

—

—

NsoV
N70B
NiooB

1 00-0
128-0

0827
0853

0829
0912

KT

WS747

5

0
300

6-21

6-62

30-90
31-17

24-31

24-48

N50V
N70B
NiooB

)

1 00-0
74-0

1513
1525

1515
1545

KT

WS748

S

0
300

612
6-37

30-87
31-13

24-30
24-48

-

-

NsoV

N70B

NR

1 00-0
1 00-0

30o(-o)

18IO
1834

1827

1812

i8ss
191S

Depth estimated
Depth estimated

215

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'
TRAWLING SURVEY
STATIONS WS 749-882

18. ix. 1931 — 19. iv. 1932

217

WS 749—760

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

VSI.ND

.SE.A

t «

Air Temp.
(J.

Sl.ilion

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

ll

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

WS749

52' 39-5' S, 69° 53-5' W

1931
iS ix

1052

40

Lt airs

0-3

-

0

be

1020-5

5-3

4-7

no swell

WS750

52° 12' S, 67" 19' W

19 ix

0030

95

NE

1-6

-

0

be

loi 1-9

5-4

5'0

low long NE swell

WS751

51" 50-5' S, 65' 17-5' W

19 ix

1200

14s

NxE

7-10

NE

4-5

be

1007-3

6-1

5-b

mod. av. NE swell

WS752

51° 20' S, 63" 17' w

19-20
ix

2330

160

NxW

7-10

NxW

4-5

b

1012-3

6-1

5-0

mod. av. NxW
swell

WS753

50° 58-5' S, 6i"o4"W

20 ix

I I 19

106

NNE

1-6

NW

2

e

1014-5

yi

5-6

mod. short NW swell

WS754

51" 09-5' S, 58° 54' W

20 ix

2230

1 1 1

NNE

17-27

NNE

4

0

lOIO-l

4-6

43

mod. long N swell

WS755

51° 39' S, S7°39'W

21 ix

0740

-

N

17-21

N

4

0

1016-5

s-6

39

mod. short N swell

WS756

From 50° 53' S, 60" 00' W

to 50° 56-3' S, S9°s6'W
to 50° 59-5' S, 59° 52' W

10 X

0700

II 30
1545

119

bl.G.

gn.M.S

90

NxE
NNE

11-16

17-21

NE

NNE

3

4-5

c
0

1023-5
IOI9-5

4-2
4'4

2-8
33

mod. short N swell

mod. long NNE
swell

WS757

49° 56' S, 60° 33' W

II x

I 100

166

NxW

7-10

N

4

e

10I9-I

6-9

6-4

mod. av. N swell

WS758

48°32'S, 61° 19' W

12 X

0000

1 12
R

N

7-10

N

3

of

1013-g

6-0

5-6

mod. av. N swell

WS759

47° 08' S, 62' 06' W

12 X

1605

135

NNE

17-21

NNE

4-5

be

996-1

8-9

7-8

iiKjd. av. NNE
swell

WS760

45^ 40' S, 62" 26' W

13 X

0600

1 10

SW

17-21

SW

5-9

'*

1007-7

6-7

6-1

heavy av. conf. swell

218

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 749—760

Station

Akc of
(days)

HYDROLOGICAI

. OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(iTietres)

Temp.
°C.

s°/„

al

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

From

To

WS749

6

0
40

3-52
3-49

31-47
31-55

25-06
25-11

NsoV

N70B

N 100 B

NR

1

40-0
25-0

4o(-o)

I 105
II39
II39

I 107

1 1 59
1206

+ 4 hours
Depth estimated

WS750

7

0

4-77
4-79

33-09

33-IO

26-21
26-21

NsoV

N 100 B

NR

90-0
80-0
95(-o)

0104
0137
0137

0106
0IS7
0207

KT

WS751

7

0
140

501
5-00

33-23
3326

26-30
26-32

NsoV

N70B

N 100 B

NR

1
/

1 00-0
102-0
i45(-o)

1230
1300
1300

1232
1317
1335

KT

WS752

8

0
155

5-13

5-20

33-49
33-52

26-49
265 I

NsoV

N70B

NiooB

NR

1
/

1 00-0
77-0
i6o(-o)

2357
0031
0031

2359
00s I

Olio

KT

WS753

8

0
100

5-00

4-92

33-78
33-79

26-74
26-76

N50V

N70B

NiooB

NR

}

102-0

73-0
io6(-o)

III9
I 20 1
I 20 1

I 121
I22I
I23I

KT

WS754

9

0
100

3-98
3-79

33-77
33-77

26-S3
26-85

NsoV

N70B

NiooB

NR

\
/

1 00-0
82-0
iii(-o)

22S2
2311
23II

22S4
2331
2342

KT

WS755

lO

0
70

4-25
4-17

33-78
33-78

26-82
26-83

NsoV

N70B

NiooB

NR

\
/

70-0
50-0
75(-o)

0808
0825
0825

0810
0845
0853

Depth estimated

WS756

28

0

1 10

432
402

33-75
33-70

26-78
26-77

NsoV

DC
N70B
NiooB

)

1 00-0
119

75^

0744
0800

0845

0746
0905

+ 3 hours

KT. N 100 B did not fish properly

28

NR
OTC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

ii9(-o)
1 19-104

104-90

0845
1028

1435

0920
II30

1545

Haul A

Haul B. N 4-T did not fish properly

WS757

29

0
160

5-40
5-27

3383
33-83

26-73
26-75

NsoV

N70B

N 100 B

NR

1 00-0
139-0
i66(-o)

I126
1200
1200

I 128
1220
1237

KT

WS758

I

0
1 10

572
5-30

33-69
33-76

26-57
26-68

NsoV

N70B

NiooB

NR

1 00-0
94-0

H2(-o)

0014

00S4
00S4

0016
OII4
0130

KT

WS759

I

0

130

6-6i
606

33-61

33-74

26-40

26-57

N70B

N 100 B

NR

N50V

88-0

i35(-o)
1 00-0

1658
1658
1744

1718

1730
1746

KT

WS760

2

0
1 10

733

6-21

33-38
33-56

26-12
26-42

NsoV

N70B

N 100 B

NR

1 00-0
62-0
1 lo(-o)

0620
0715
0715

0622
0735
0750

KT. N 70 B did not fish properly

219

WS 761—770

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

j._

Air Temp.
C.

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

Jl

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

WS761

44° 22' S, 63° 02' W

1931
13 X

1800

97
gn.S.M

SWxS

II-16

SWxS

4

be

IOII-3

8-3

6-7

mod. av. SW x S
swell

WS762

From 43° 48-5' S,
65° 00' W
to 43° 51-5' S, 65° 037' W
to 43° 48-5' S, 65° 06-5' W

16 X

0615

0830
lOIO

68

gy.S.M

66

WxS

I I-16

WxS

be

1005-6

lo-o

6-1

low av. W X S
swell

WS763

From 44° I4'S' S,
63° 30' W
to 44" 13-5' S, 63° 26' w

16 X

1815
2030

86
M.S
82

sw

4-6

SW

3

b

101 1-2

9-4

6-7

low long SW swell

WS764

From 44° 40' S, 62° 00' W

to44°36-s'S, 6i°57'W
to 44° 41' S, 61° 52' W

17 X

0605

0830
1015

1 06

f.gn.S

no

104

SWxW

7-10

SWxW

3

b

1010-3

9-4

6-7

mod. short SW x W
swell

WS765

From 45° 06' S, 60° 30' W
to 45° 08' S, 60° 26-5' W

I7X

1730
1950

113

br.gn.

M.S

119

W

7-10

w

3

b

IOI5-O

7-8

5-8

mod. av. SW swell

WS766

45° 13' S, 59° 56-5' W
44° 58' S, 60° 05-5' W

18-19 X

1800
1245

545
f.d.gy.S

SWxW

s

17-21
1 1-16

SWxW

s

4
4

bcqp
b

IOI3-O
1024-9

5-0
6-7

4-2
4-4

mod. av. SW x W

swell
mod. av. to mod.

long S swell

WS767

45° 12' S, 6i°4i'W

19 X

2215

98

w

4-6

W

-

b

1016-4

7-«

6-1

mod. short SSW
swell

WS768

45° 31' 3,63° 23 "W

20 X

0932

108
gn.M

NW

7-10

NWxN

2

be

1020-7

8-3

7-3

mod. short NW swell

WS769

45°45'S, 64° 53' W

20 X

■S45

99

gy.M

NW

1-3

NW

o-i

be

IOIO-6

I i-i

9-2

low long NW swell

WS770

46° 03' S, 66° 34' W

21 X

°445

95

b.gy.

Cy

WNW

7-10

w

3

b

1002-5

10-6

94

low long W swell

220

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 761—770

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

TIME

Remarks

("days)

Depth

Temp.

S 7

al

Gear

Depth

1

(metres)

C.

(metres)

I-rom

To

WS761

2

O

8-17

33-42

26-04

N50V

95-0

1810

1812

95

6-43

33-69

26-48

N70B

N 100 B
NR

1 73-0
97(~o)

1840
1840

1900
I918

KT

WS762

5

o

S-6o

33-42

25-97

N50V

50-0

0630

0632

65

8-6o

33-44

25-98

DC
OTC

N7-T

N4-T

NCS-T

OTC

N7-T
NCS-T

68
68-66

• 68-66

0638
0720

0910

0645
0830

lOIO

Haul A
Haul B

WS763

5

o

8-44

33-38

25-96

N50V

75-0

1833

1835

8o

6-59

33-62

26-41

DC
OTC

N7-T

86
• 86-82

1854
1925

I9IO
2030

NCS-T

WS764

6

o

7-50

33-54

26-22

NsoV

1 00-0

0630

0632

lOO

609

33-64

26-49

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

106
106-110

r I 10-104

0642
0720

0915

0655
0830

IOI5

Haul A
HaulB

WS765

6

o

678

33-70

26-45

N50V

I 00-0

1753

1755

I lO

5-52

33-82

26-71

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

"3
I 113-119

1800
1845

1815
1950

WS766

7

o

6-35

33-78

26-57

N50V

lOO-O

1833

1835

500

4-32

34-13

27-08

DC

545

1845

1920

8

OTC

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
N70B

NiooB

i 128-0

2010

1313

2040

1333

Trawl badly torn, empty
KT

WS767

8

0

7-28

33-62

26-32

N50V

N70B

N 100 B

NR

98-0
1 53-0
98(-o)

2240

2317
2317

2242
2327
2348

KT

WS768

9

0

7-69

33-31

26-02

N50V

1 00-0

0953

0955

100

6-35

33-50

26-35

N70B

N 100 B

NR

1 51-0
io8(-o)

1015

IO15

1035
1045

KT

WS769

9

0

8-41

33-17

25-80

N50V

96-0

1905

1907

90

7-22

33-16

. 25-97

N70B

N 100 B
NR

/ 58-0
99(-o)

1925
1925

1946
2000

KT

WS770

lO

0

8-90

33-34

25-86

N50V

90-0

0450

0452

go

7-51

33-32

26-05

N70B

NiooB

NR

} 57-0
95(-o)

0515
0515

0535
0555

KT

Completely full of mud

221

WS 771—780

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

If
1,1

Air 'I
C

em p.

Station

Position

Vhnc

Hour

SoundiriR
(metres)

Weather

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

WS771

From 42° 40' S, 60° 32' W
to 42° 43-5' S, 60° 30' W

1931
29 X

1615
1830

90

d.gn.S
90

E

1-6

E

I

ofe

lOIO-O

II-7

I I-I

low av. E swell

WS772

From 45° 13' S, 60° 00' W
to 45° 13-8 S, 60" 005' W

30 X

1500
1645

309

gy-S
163

NW

1-6

-

0

f

1010-5

8-1

7-2

mod. low long to
short NW swell

WS773

From 47° 27' S, 60° 49' W
to 47° 29' S, 60° S3' W

31 X

1225
1433

291

gn.S.M
298

WNW

1 1-16

WxN

4

be

lOOIO

9-2

7-5

mod. av. WxN
swell

WS774

From 47° 09' S, 62° 00' W
to 47° 07' S, 62° 04' W

I xi

1625
1830

139
d.gn.
S.M

144

WxS

11-16

wsw

3

be

9966

9-8

7-8

mod. short WSW
swell

WS775

From 46° 445' S,
63° 30' W

to 46° 45' S, 63" 36' W

2 xi

1500
1720

115
G.f.

gy-S
1 10

WxS

11-16

w

3-4

c

990-6

10-6

7-9

mod. long W swell

WS776

From 46° 19' S,

65° 00' W
to 46° 17-5' S, 65° 04-5' W

3xi

0510
072s

110

gy.M.S
99

gy.M.S

NNE

4-6

NNE

o-i

b

987-9

9-7

7-9

low av. conf. swell

WS777

From 45° 56' S, 66° 24' W
to45°58'S,66°27"W

3xi

1700
1930

98
b.gy.
Cy.M

99
gn.gy.

St

SW

H-16

sw

4

0

9933

9-7

6-7

mod. short SW swell

WS778

47° 33' S, 65'00'W

4xi

"45

77

wsw

11-16

s

4

be

1000-8

100

6-1

mod. av. S swell

WS779

47° 58' S, 63° 30' W

4x1

2000

1 10

NW

7-10

NW

4

be

9922

8-6

6-6

mod. av. SSE swell

WS780

48° 22' S, 62" 00' W

5xi

0430

148

WxS

17-21

conf.

5

oq

981-9

6-7

51

mod. long SW swell

222

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 771—780

Age of
(days)

i8

WS773

WS774

WS775

WS776

WS777

WS778

WS779

WS780

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

lO-I 1

6-27

7-QI

4-59

6-82
4-77

8-00
6-23

8-00
6-i8

8-50
7-5S

975
7-53

684

6-78

7-iS
6-54

6-67
5-51

3359
33-78

3376

34-07

3378
34-07

33-72
33-73

33-27
33-37

33-12
33-18

33-34
33-32

33-18
33-20

33-59
33-60

33-64
33-69

25-86
26-58

26-34

27-01

26-51
26-gg

26-29
26-54

25-93
26-26

25-74
25-93

25-72
26-05

26-03
26-06

26-31
26-40

26-41
26-60

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

N50 V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V

N70B

NiooB

NR

N50V

N70B

NiooB

NR

N50 V

N70B

NiooB

NR

90-0
90

1 00-0
309

309-163

1 00-0
291

291-298

1 00-0
139

139-144

1 00-0
115

1 00-0
no

95-0
98

77-0
29-0

77(-o)

iio(-o)
1 00-0

I 93-0

i48(-o)

1623
1630

1528
1534

1630

1246
1315

1644
1651

1515
1525

OS35
0550

0625

1715
1721

1 150
1223
1223

2010
2039
2039

0430
0513
0513

1625
1652

1830

1645

1248
'325

1646
1710

1830

1517
1545

0537
0605

0725

1717
1740

1930

1152
1243
1253

2012
I 2059
I 2108

2109

0432
0533
0540

Trawl hitched on bottom but came
up intact

I cwt. fossihferous stones taken in
trawl

KT

KT. N 100 B slipped on hauling

KT

223

WS 781—787

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

11

.(\ir Temp,

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

|x

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

mS

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

1931

WS781

From 50° 29' 8,58° 52' W
to 50°3i'S, 58°48'W

6xi

1602
1920

148

d.gn.
S.M

W

I I-16

W

3

cqrs

994'9

2-8

mod. short W swell

WS782

From 50° 30' S, 58° 19' W
to 50° 28-5' S, 58" 23-5' W

4 xii

0434
0825

141
gn.S.R

NW

I I -2 1

NW

4

c

1007-4

7-8

6-7

mod. short NNW
swell

to 50°27'S, 58°3i'W

II27

146

NW

17-21

NW

5

be

1006-9

8-9

7-8

mod. long NW swell

WS783

50° 03-5' S, 60° 08' w
50° 08' S, 59° 50' W
50° 07-5' S, 59°S3'W

5 xii

040s

0505
0540

161

R.St.Sh

161

R.St

SW

4-6

W

I

ce

lOI i-o

8-9

7-8

low av. W swell

50° 03-5' S, 60° 08' w

0705

157
R.M.S

—

0-3

—

0

b

1013-7

lo-o

8-3

low av. to low long
N swell

From 50°03-5'S, 6o°o8'W

0735

157

to 50° 02' S, 60° 12' W

0910

to 50° 03-5' S, 60° 16' W

1115

165

N

4-6

NW

2

b

IOI2-2

8-3

7-8

low long NW swell

WS784

From 49° 48-5' S,
6i°03'W

to 49° 47' S, 61° 07'W

5 xii

1606
1835

170
d.gn.
S.R
164

NNW

7-16

NW

3

be

IOIO-6

8-9

7-8

mod. short NxW
swell

WS785

From 49° 27' S, 62" 32' W
to 49° 26' S, 62° 36' W

6 xii

0S20
0910

1 1 10

113

15°

d.gn.S

147

N

17-21

N

4-5

oe

995-2

IO-6

lo-o

mod. av. to mod.
long N swell

1200

—

N

17-21

N

4

oe

993-0

10-6

lO-O

mod. av. N swell

to 49° 24-5' S, 62° 39' W

1250

147

to 49° 23' S, 62° 43-5' W

1430

147

WS786

From 49° 07' S, 63° 55' W
to 49° 06' S, 63° 59' W

7 xii

0330
0630

134

d.S.R

119

SW

4-6

W

2

b

1006-9

8-6

7-2

low long W X S
swell

WS787

From 48° 44' S,
65° 24-5' W

to 48° 48' S, 65° 25' W

7 xii

1453
1715

106
c.br.
sk.S

no

N

7-10

NxW

3

be

ioog-5

I i-i

8-9

mod. short NxW
swell

224

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 781—787

WS785

Age of
(dJys)

26

WS786

WS787 28

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Depth
(metres)

i6s

5-s8
4-78

7-32
514

8-04
4-89

8-os
4-82

8-39
6-34

9-56
7-35

33-78
33-88

33-89
33-96

33-86
33-88

3369
33-86

33-59
33-60

33-50
33-53

33-53
33-55

26-67
26-84

26-52
26-86

26-39
26-83

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

26-26
26-81

26-08
26-51

26-06
26-37

25-90
26-25

N50V

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50 V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T

NCS-T

N50V

DC

DC

DC

OTC

N7-T

N4-T

NCS-T

OTC

N7-T

N4-T

NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

Depth
(metres)

1 00-0
141

I41-146

141-I46

1 00-0
161

i6i

157

157-165

165-0

1 00-0
170

170-164

1 00-0
150

150-147

150-147

150-147

1 00-0
134

1 00-0
106

1623
1649

1800

0529
0555

0445
0505
0540
0705

0805

1632
1645

0910
0925

0425
0435

0520

1508
1520

1615

1626
1700

0532
0604

0447

0525
0603

0735

1635
1700

1835

0912
0950

1250

0427
0455

0630

1510
1540

Haul A

Haul B

Net torn
Haul I
Haul II
Haul III

Haul A

Haul B. Trawl hauled obliquely

Haul A

Haul B

HaulC

225

WS 788—796

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS788

WS789

WS791

WS792

WS793

WS794

WS795

WS796

45° 05' S, 65°oo'W

From45°o6-5'S, 64°56'W
to 45° 07-5' S, 64° 52' W

From 45° 17' S, 64° 22' W
to 45° 18-5' S, 64° 18' w

From 45° 28-3' S,
63° 42-3' W

to 45° 29-5' S, 63°39'W
to 45°33-S'S, 63°23'W

From45° 38'S, 62°57"W 14 xii

to 45° 395' S, 62°53' W
to 45° 44' S, 62° 37' W

From 45° 49' S,
62° 23' W

to 45° 50' S, 62° iS-s'W

to 45° 54-5' S, 62° 04' W

1931
13 xii

13 Xll

I7SS
1855

2343

0730
1240

45°58'S, 6i°42'W

From 45° 52-3' S,

6i°37'W
to 45° 53-8' S, 61° 33' W

From 46° 1 1 -8' S,

6i°oi'W
to 46° 13-5' S, 60° 57-5' W

From 46° 14' S, 60° 24' W
to 46° 16' S, 60° 21' W

From 47° 50-3' S,

63° 40-5' W
to 47° 49' S, 63° 44-5' W
From 47° 5 1 ' S, 63° 43' W
to 47° 56' S, 63° 22' W

15 Xll

16 xii

0350
0430
0850

82
sk.gy.
M.S.G

88

95
sk.gy.
gn.M

93

ik.gy.S.M

99

gn.gy.
S.M

1446

lOI

1528

97

gn.S

1700

95

2350

lOI

102
d.gn.
S.R
106
106
1 12
gn.S.M

Lt airs

NE

NNW

NxW

NW

NW

wsw

WxN

HOC

IIO

d.gn.S

0200

108

R

0350

III

0732

123

0950

126

0905

157

S.R

I2II

161

1035

106

c.br.sk.S

1300

113

0345

108

0750

112

W 7-10

wsw 11-16

1-6

4-6

7-16

7-10

7-16
7-16

ssw

ssw

NNE

NxW

NNW

NW

NW
WNW

WxS
W

w

ssw

1-3 —

2-3

3

be

be

1014-8

1 005 -6

ioo8-i

998-0

996-7

15-6

15-6

15-6

997-2 i6-i
996-0 14-7

996-0
997-9

1017-5

be 1003-4

15-8
156

13-6

14-8

be

1014-0

13-9
12-8

13-8

8-9

8-3

8-9

low av. W swell

low long NNE swel

low av. to low long
N swell

low av. N swell

low long N swell

mod. av. NNW swel

low long NW x N
swell

[short W swell
low long to mod.
low long NW swell

mod. short W x S

swell
mod. av. W swell

mod. av. to mod,
long W swell

mod. av. S swell

mod. av. SSW swell
mod. short S swell

226

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 788—796

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

I3'45
970

1378
7'12

13-11
7-14

13-62
6-52

13-10

6-43

13-15
6-52

11-20
6-07

9-28
4-83

14-41
7-33

33-33
33-33

33-29
33-35

33-24
33-48

33-38
33-53

33-35
33-56

33-51
33-69

33-69

33-74

33-90
34-03

33-63
33-64

25-03
25-72

24-93
26-13

25-03
26-22

25-03
26-35

25-12
26-39

25-23
26-47

25-74
26-57

26-23
26-95

25-07
26-32

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50 V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T
OTC
N-T

N50V

DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T
OTC

N-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V

OTC

N7-T

NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

80-0
82

82-88

90-0
95-93

1 00-0
99

95-0
97

1 00-0
102

102-106

106-1 12

} 123-1

23-126

1 00-0
157

157-161

1 00-0
106

106-113

1538
1543

1755

2159

2227

0544
0550

0625
0835

1517
1528

1950

0207
0215

1119
1125

0250

1055
I no

1540
1555

1855

2343

0546
0605

1520
1540

2350

0209
0230

0350

0450 0850

1 121
1 140

0350

0756

0758

0850

0950

0935

0938

1020

1050

1058
II30

Haul A

HaulB

Haul A

Haul B

Haul A

Haul B

Position re-visited on 21 xii when
Haul B was taken

Haul A

227

WS 796—803

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS796

cont.

WS797

From 47° 51' S, 63^ 43' W
to 47° 56' S, 63° 22' W

47° 45-3' S, 64° 10-5' W

From 47° 44' S, 64° 22' W
to 47° 45-2' S, 64" 18' W
to47°50'3' S, 63°S7'W

WS798

WS799

From 47° 31-5' S,
65° 02' W
to 47° 32-5' S, 64° 58' W

From 48° 03-5' S,

62" 50-3' W
to 48° 05' S, 62° 46' W
to 48° 10' S, 62° 31' W

WS800

WS801

WS803

From 48° 15' S,
62° ii-8'W
to 48° 16-5' S, 62°o8'W

to48°2i-s'S, 6i°48'W

From 48° 25-5' S,

61° 30' W
to 48° 27' S, 6i''26"W

50° 46' S, 61° 20' W

From 50° 47' S, 61° 20' W
to 50° 44-5' S, 61° 24' W
to 50° 43' S, 6i°28'W

From 50° 34-5' S,

62°03-5"W
to 50° 33' S, 62° 07-5' W

1931
21 xii

19 Xll

20 xii

1932

31

1705

1635
1812

2355

117
St
115
1 1 1

113

1307
1745

49

P.Sh.S
66

141

d.gn.S

137

139

2015

2210
2400
0250

0455
0655

1408

1250
1447
1630

139

d.S.Sh

16s
d.S
i6s

137
gn.S.Sh
128
132
139

174
St.c.d.S

SW

ssw
s

17-21 SxW

SSW

s

I I-2I

4-6

SW

7-16

NW

NW

NW

SWxW

NNW

7-16

17-27
7-10

SW

NW

SW

NNW

NNW

b
be
b

be

beq
be

be

I006'2

1013-2
1014-2

1008-9

1004-6

1003-0
IOIO-4

II-7

12-2

8-3

8-3
8-3
7-2

7-6

6-9
6-7

8-9

7-8

mod. long SSW swell
mod. long SSW swell
mod. av. S swell

mod. av. SW swell

low long S swell
low av. SSE swell

mod. short W swell

mod. short NW swell

mod. short NW swell

mod. av. SW swell

mod. short NNW
swell

11 -4 mod. short NNW
swell

228

R.R.S. Williarn Scoreshy

WS 796—803

Age of
(days)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

S°/oo

at

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

Remarks

From

To

WS796

12

OTC

cont.

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

• Io8-H2

0350

0750

Haul B

WS797

lO

O

10-37

33-52

25-76

N50V

1 00-0

1715

1717

Position re-visited on 20 xii

when

I lO

7-57

33-53

26-20

DC

117

1720

1735

Hauls B and C were taken

I I

—

—

—

NCS-T
OTC

117

1800

1812

Haul A

II

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

• II5-III
■ III-I13

1712
2000

1812
2355

HaulB
Haul C

WS798

II

o

905

33-23

25-76

N50 V

49-0

1056

1058

48

8-89

33-23

25-78

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

49
49-66

1 105
I 142

II15

1242

WS799

12

0

IO-97

33-63

25-74

N50V

1 00-0

II18

I 120

135

6-74

33-69

26-44

DC
OTC

141

II25

I 145

12

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
NH

■ 141-137

• 137-139
0

1207

1345
1700

1307
1745

Haul A
HaulB

WS800

13

0

990

33-68

25-96

N50V

1 00-0

2030

2032

135

5-80

33-68

26-55

DC
OTC

139

2030

2055

13

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

- 139-137
■ 137-139

21 10
2250

2210
0250

Haul A
HaulB

WS801

13

0

933

3369

26-06

N50V

1 00-0

0514

0517

160

5-14

3 3 -So

26-73

DC
OTC

16s

1 6 6

|- 165-165

0527

N4-T

0555

0655

NCS-T

WS802

25

0

7-83

33-76

2635

N50V

1 00-0

1443

1445

Position re-visited on 5 i 32

when

130

5-97

33-80

26-63

DC

137

1530

155°

hauls A and B were taken

27

OTC

N4-T

NCS-T

OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

■ 128-132

•

■ 132-139

1335
1530

1447
1630

Haul A
HaulB

WS803

27

0

10-09

33-63

25-90

N50V

1 00-0

2057

2059

170

S-26

33-80

26-72

DC

174

2II5

2140

229

WS 803—811

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS803

cont.

WS804

WS805

WS806

WS807

WS808

WS809

WS810

From 50' 34-5' S,

62°03-5'W
to 50° 33' S, 62° 07-5' W

From 50° 23-5' S,

62° 47' W
to 50° 22' S, 62° 51' W

to 50° 20-5' S, 62° 5S' W

From 50° It's,
63° 27' W

to 50° 09-5' S, 63° 31' W

From 50° 04' S,
64° 19' W

to 50° 03' S, 64° 23' W

From 49° 51' S,

65°oi'W
to 49° 50' S, 65° 05'W

From 49° 41' S,

65° 40' W
to 49° 39-5' S, 65° 44' W

From 49° 29' S,

66° 27' W
to 49° 27-5' S, 66° 31' W
to 49° 32-5' S, 66°5i-s"W

From 49° 15' S,
67° 08' W

to 49° 19' S, 67° 08' W

From 51° 27' S,

68° 03' W
to 51° 28-5' S, 68°oo'W
From 51° 22' S, 68° 03' W
to 51° 27' S, 67° 43' W

1932
5 '

81

0416

0647
0800
084s

0500

1 146

0450

1555
2035

0801
1935

150
G.St.S

143
15°

150
c.d.

sk.S

130

d.gn.

sk.S.Sh

123

124
d.S
126

110

br.gn.S

106

108

br.sk.S

104

lOI

95
b.gy.
S.M

97

99
S.St
99
97
99

NxW

WNW

WSW

NW

NW

sw

sw

sw

Lt airs

WSW

11-16

Direction Force

II-16

II-16

NNW

WNW

SWxW

WNW

NxW

NW

SW

sw

SW

11-16

WxS

be

be

be

be

be

117

IO-6

10-6

low long to mod.
short NNW swell

low long WNW swell

93 mod. av. SW x W
swell

1006-7

988-6

998-0

8-3

10-6

10-6

8-3
8-9

mod. av. W swell

mod. short NxW
swell

mod. av. WNW
swell

mod. short SW swell

mod. av. SW swell

mod. av. SSW swell

low long to mod.
short SE swell

mod. short W swell

230

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 803—811

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME 1

(days)

Depth

Temp.

S^/

P

Depth

(metres)

'C.

(metres)

From

To

WS803

27

OTC

]

cont.

N7-T

\ 174-187

2245

2345

NCS-T

WS804

28

0

lO-I I

33-51

25-80

N50V

1 00-0

0445

0447

147

57°

33-52

26-45

DC
OTC

150

]

0450

0513

28

N7-T
NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

|- 150-143
• 143-150

0547
0745

0647
0845

Haul A
HaulB

WS805

28

0

10-69

33-38

25-59

N50V

100-0

1556

1558

145

5-73

33-43

26-3S

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

150
- 150-148

1605
1645

1630
1 745

WS806

29

0

HOI

33-23

25-43

N50V

100-0

0520

0522

125

6-25

33-23

26-16

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

130
I 130-123

0530
0615

0545
0715

WS807

0

0

ii-ii

33-29

25-45

N50V

1 00-0

I201

1203

120

6-38

33-30

26-18

DC
OTC

124
1

1208

1223

\

N7-T

J- 124-126

1240

1340

Catch lost but similar

to NCS-T at

N4-T

WS 806

NCS-T

)

WS808

0

0

II-2I

33-31

25-45

N50 V

100-0

05II

0513

109

7-i6

33-36

26-13

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

HO
110-106

0530
0630

0600

0735

Net badly torn

WS809

I

0

11-29

33-40

25-50

N50V

100-0

1344

1346

100

7-54

33-41

26-12

DC
OTC

108

1350

1410

I

N7-T

N4-T

NCS-T

OTC

- 108-104
104-101

1450
1635

1555
2035

Haul A
Haul B

WS810

I

0

10-12

33-02

25-41

N50 V

90-0

0051

0053

90

8-07

33-14

25-83

DC
OTC

N7-T
NCS-T

95
|- 95-97

OII5
0200

0135
0255

WS811

2

0

9-12

32-85

25-44

N50V

90-0

0613

0615

Position re-visited on

12 i 32 when

90

6-26

33-88

25-87

DC
OTC

99
j

0620

0635

Haul B was taken

5

N7-T

N4-T

NCS-T

OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

r 99-99
• 97-99

0701
2000

0801
0000

Haul A
Haul B

231

WS 812— 819

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SE^

s-^

.\irTemp.

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

M

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

II

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

1932

WS812

From 51° 15-5' S,
68°S4'W
to 51° 17' S, 68°5o'W

10 i

1218
1420

53

gy.S.M

55
gy.S.M

NNW

7-10

N

I

C

1003-6

I I -9

9-4

mod. short N swell

Frornsi" 17' S, 68° 50' W

12 i

I 150

44

WSW

I 1-16

W

I

be

993-6

14-3

8-9

mod. short W swell

to 51° 22-5' S, 68° 30' W

1715

84

WS813

From 51° 34-5' S,
67° 18-5' W
to 51° 36' S, 67° 14' W

13 i

0230
0500

106

d.sk.S
102

WSW

7-10

WxS

2

b

1000-5

10-6

7-8

mod. short W swell

WS814

From 51° 44-5' S,
66° 38' W

to 51° 46' S, 66° 42' W

131

1230
1450

112
c.d.
sk.S
119

SWxW

I I-16

sw

3

be

999-5

II-I

8-8

mod. av. WSW swell

WS815

From 51° 51' S,
65° 46' W

to 51° 52-5' S, 65° 42' W

13 i

1915

2145

132
c.d.
sk.S
163

WxN

17-21

w

4

0

997-9

11-1

9-4

mod. short to mod.
av. W swell

WS816

From 52° 09-5' S,

64°58'W
to 52° 10' S, 64° 54' W

14 i

1040
1300

150
Sn
150

W

7-10

WxS

3

c

995-6

IO-2

7-5

mod. av. W swell

WS817

From 52° 21' S,

64° 17' W
to 52° 25' S, 64° 21' W

141

1651
1905

192
d.S
203

WxN

7-16

w

3

be

992-3

IO-8

8-9

mod. short W swell

to 52° 30-5' S, 63°57'W

2345

238

N

17-21

N

4

cp

977-4

10-6

8-9

mod. av. N swell

WS818

From 52° 30-5' S,

63° 27' W
to 52°32'S, 63°23' W

lyi

0400
0640

272
d.sk.S

278

WSW

4-10

WSW

2

cd

1005-2

8-6

7-2

mod. short WxS
swell

to 52° 37' S, 63° 02' W

1 140

285

NW

4-6

NW

2

od

1003-8

8-9

7-8

low long NW swell

WS819

From 52° 41-3' S,

62°4i'W
to 52° 42-5' S, 62° 38' W

17 i

1438

1745

313

d.sk.S

329

NW

4-6

NW

I

od

1002-7

8-9

8-6

low long NW swell

to 52° 47-5' S, 62° 17' W

2235

342

NW

7-10

WSW

3-4

or

998-7

8-9

8-3

mod. short to mod.
av. WSW swell

232

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 812— 819

WS819

Age of
(Jays)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Depth
(metres)

180

9-35
8-8i

9-22
674

8-99

7-25

9-14
6-68

8-59
6-8i

872
6-38

7-46
4-91

7-51
4-6i

32-55
32-57

33-"
33-12

33-22
33-32

33-48
33-65

33-65
33-74

33-65
33-86

33-70
34-14

33-««
34-14

25-16

25-27

25-62
25-99

2576
26-09

25-93
26-42

26-15
26-47

26-13
26-62

26-35
27-03

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

26-49
27-07

N50V

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T

N 100 B
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50 V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50 V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T

N50 V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

45-0
53

53-55

18-0

44-84

1 00-0
106

106-102

1 00-0
1 12

132-163

1 00-0
150

1 00-0
192

i.„-

1 00-0
272

272-278

278-285

1 00-0
313

1226

1235

1320
1 22 1

0255
0305

0400

1254
1305

1350

1954
204s

1105
1115

1711
1719

1805

0435
0445

1506
1540

1645

1227
1250

1420

1241

1715

0257
0330

0500

1256
1315

1450

1956
2145

1 107
"35

1713
1730

2345

0437
0513

0640

1508
1615

Position re-visited on 12 i 32 when
Haul B was taken

Haul A

KT

Haul B. Net possibly not on bottom
throughout duration of haul

Hole in canvas bag

Haul A

HaulB

Haul A

Haul B

Catch discarded

Haul A

233

WS 819—829

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

.SEA

..

Air 7'emp.

^ tation

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

ll

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

WS819

cont.

From 52° 41-3' S,

62°4i'W
to 52° 42-5' S, 62° 38' W
to 52° 47-5' S, 62° 17' W

1932

17 i

WS820

From 52° 52-5' S,

61° 53-5' W
to 52° 54' S, 61° 49-5' W

i8i

0100
0450

351

f.d.S.M

368

NW

7-10

NW

2

od

995-6

8-3

8-1

mod. short N swell

WS821

From 52° 55' S,
60° 57' W

to 52° 56-5' S, 60° 53' W

i8i

0900
I 140

461
f-gn-gy-

S.M
468

WNW

7-10

NW

2

be

993-0

10-0

9-2

low long NW swell

WS822

53° 11' S, 60° 12' W

i8i

1753

662
gn.S.M

WNW

7-16

WNW

3-4

be

993-1

10-6

8-9

mod. short NW swell

WS823

From 52° 12-5' S,
60° 02' W

to 52° 16-5' S, 60° 00' W

191

05 1 1

0730

80

gn.gy.

f.S

95

S

7-10

S

2

or

996-0

6-7

5-6

low long SE swell

WS824

From 52° 31' S,
58°29' W

to 52° 27-5' S, 58° 25-5' W

191

1900
2105

146
gn.sk.
S.Sh

137

W

17-21

wsw

4-5

be

1004-5

9-4

7-8

mod. av. WSW swell

WS825

From 50° 50' S,
57°I3'W

to 5o°5o'S, 57° 17-5' W

28-29 i

214s
0135

135

gn.S.M.
Sh
144

NW

I I-2I

NW

4

c

978-5

IOC

8-3

mod. av. NW swell

WS826

50° 50' S, 58° 31-5' W

29 i

0915

15°

WNW

I I-16

WNW

3

e

980-4

8-9

7-7

mod. av. WNW swell

WS827

50° 51' S, 6o°o6' W

30 i

1025

137
St

SExE

1-6

ESE

I

c

997-S

7-2

4-0

low long ESE swell

WS828

50° 51' S, 6i°42'W

30 i

1S55

155

WNW

4-6

WNW

2

ep

998-3

S-i

5-6

low long to mod.
short NW swell

WS829

So°5i'S, 63° 13-5' W

31 i

0244

155

WxS

4-21

WxS

2

bcq

996-2

7-2

5-0

mod. short W swell

234

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 819—829

Station

Age of
(days)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

s°/„

at

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

From

To

WS819

lO

OTC

)

cont.

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

.

329-342

183s

2235

Haul B

WS820

lO

O

7-64

33-96

26-53

N50 V

1 00-0

0132

0135

35°

4-27

34-13

27-08

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T

\

351
351-368

0245
0345

0450

WS 821

lO

o

7-92

33-90

2644

N50V

1 00-0

0925

0927

450

4-II

34-17

27-14

DC
OTC

N7-T

N4-T

NCS-T

LB

461

461-468
0

1015
I 120
1245

1045
I 140

Trawl came up foul

WS822

1 1

0
660

7-40
401

34-00

34-iS

26-60
27-16

N50V

1 00-0

1830

1832

WS823

1 1

0

910

33-68

26-09

N50V

75-0

0543

0545

75

841

33-74

26-24

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

80
80-95

0550
0630

0605
0730

Net torn

WS824

II

0

8-30

33-81

26-32

N50 V

1 00-0

1927

1929

140

5-45

33-87

26-75

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

-

146
146-137

1935
2000

1945
2105

WS825

21

0

8-12

33-78

26-32

N50V

1 00-0

2202

2204

130

5-6i

33-91

26-76

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
N70B

N 100 B
NR

)

135
135-144

68-0

i44(-o)

2220
0035

0254
0254

2235
0135

0314
0324

KT

WS826

21

0

901

33-78

26-19

N50V

1 00-0

0941

0943

145

5-54

33-92

26-78

N70B

N 100 B

NR

)

98-0
i5o(-o)

I02I
I02I

1041
1051

KT

WS827

22

0

934

33-87

26-20

N50V

1 00-0

1050

1052

130

S-67

33-74

26-62

N70B

NiooB

NR

)

87-0
i37(-o)

1131
II3I

II5I
I20I

KT

WS828

23

0

8-83

33-78

26-22

N50V

1 00-0

1905

1907

ISO

5-21

33-97

26-86

N70B

NiooB

NR

)

128-0
i55(-o)

1942
1942

2002
2012

KT

WS829

23

0

9-22

33-68

26-07

N50V

100-0

0256

0258

•5°

S-82

33-77

26-62

N70B

NiooB

NR

\
/

120-0
iSS(-o)

0339
0339

0359
0424

Depth estimated

23 s

WS 830—841

R.R.S. William. Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

S'E

Air Temp.

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

ll

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

WS830

50' 50' S, 64°43'W

1932
31 i

II3S

143

WxS

II-16

WSW

3

C

1001-5

9-7

7-8

mod. av. WSW swell

WS831

S°° SO'S' S, 66° 10-5' W

31 i

1944

119

SW

7-10

SW

2

be

ioo6-i

8-3

5-6

mod. short SW x S
swell

WS832

5o°49'S, 67°S5' W

I ii

0336

95

wsw

7-10

SW

3

c

1005-6

8-9

5-6

low long SW swell

WS833

From 52° 28' S,
68° 00' W

to 52° 32' S, 68° 00' W

I ii

1610
1900

38
b.gy.
M.f.S

31

SWxW

4-6

SW

2

be

1000-8

1 1 -4

7-8

low long SW swell

WS834

From 52° 57' S,
68° 07' W

to 52° 58-5' S, 68° 09-5' W

2 ii

0520
0725

27

d.b.gy.

Sn.St.

M.S

38

WxN

1 1-16

w

3

c

996-0

7-8

5-0

low long WxS
swell

WS835

53° 05-5' S, 68° 06-5' W

2 ii

1000
1150

15
St
16

w

17-21

w

3

c

993-9

-

-

mod. av. W swell

WS836

53° 05-5' S, 67° 38' W

3"

0910

64

NWxW

7-10

NWxW

2-3

be

992-2

10-6

8-9

mod. short NW x W
swell

WS837

From 52° 48-5' S,
66° 30' W

to 52° 50' S, 66° 26' W

3ii

1512
1725

102

c.d.gn.

S.P

102

NW

7-10

NNW

2

be

990-8

13-3

lo-o

mod. short NNW
swell

WS838

From 53° 11' S,
65° 02' W

to 53° 12-5' S, 64°s8' W

5"

1042
1307

149

c.d.sk.

S.P

159

WxS

1 1-16

W

4

e

999-1

lo-o

7-8

mod. av. W swell

WS839

From 53° 29-5' S,

63°3i'W
to 53° 31' S, 63°27' W

S ii

1940
2307

503

f.S.M

534

NxW

4-6

NxW

2-3

or

988-2

8-3

7-2

mod. short NW swell

WS840

From 53° 51-5' S,

6i°5i-s'W
to 53° 52-5' S, 61° 47' W

6ii

0840
III5

368

gn-gy-S

463

SW

4-10

WSW

2-3

b

990-0

8-3

7-5

mod. short WxS
swell

WS841

From 54° 11' S,

60° 23' W
to 54° 12-5' S, 60° 20' W

6ii

iSio
2040

no

Sn.Sh

121

NW

4-6

NW

2

be

993-4

8-9

7-2

mod. short WNW
swell

236

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 830—841

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

TIME

Remarks

(days")

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

S°/oo

al

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS830

24

0

9-33

33-49

25-90

N50V

1 00-0

I 147

1149

140

6-38

33-42

26-28

N70B

N 100 B
NR

} 84-0

i43(-o)

1222
1222

1242
1252

KT

WS831

24

0

9-71

33-24

25-65

N50V

1 00-0

1955

1957

I 10

6-85

33-25

26-07

N70B

NiooB

NR

} 83-0
ii9(-o)

2025

2025

2045
2100

KT

WS832

24

0

993

—

—

N50V

90-0

0415

0417

90

7-21

32-89

25-76

N70B

NiooB

NR

j 75-0
95(-o)

0505
0505

0525
0539

Depth estimated

WS833

25

0

9-54

32-89

25-41

N50V

35-0

1625

1626

35

9-21

32-89

25-46

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

38
■ 38-31

1700
1800

1900

WS834

25

0

9-61

32-79

25-32

NsoV
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

25-0
27

• 27-38

0530
0540

0625

0531
0550

0725

WS835

25

—

—

—

—

DC
BTS

15
15-16

1005
I 1 20

IO15
I150

Depth by hand lead

WS836

26

0

9-71

32-88

25-37

N50V

50-0

0930

0931

60

9-68

32-84

25-34

BTS

64

0950

1020

WS837

27

0

9-13

33-08

25-61

N50V

95-0

1520

1522

95

8-41

33-19

25-81

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

102

r 102-102

1528
1625

1545
1725

WS838

29

0

7-S6

33-64

26-25

N50V

1 00-0

1048

1050

140

7-60

33-75

26-37

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

149
- 149-159

I 107
1207

1 1 20
1307

WS839

29

0

6-55

34-07

26-77

N50V

1 00-0

1950

1952

400

4-28

34-20

27-14

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

503
• 503-534

2045
2207

2115

2307

WS840

29

0

6-87

34-09

26-74

N50V

I 00-0

0905

0907

360

4-35

34-18

27-12

DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

368
■ 368-463

0915
IOI5

0945
III5

WS841

0

0

7-IO

34-07

26-70

N50V

1 00-0

1817

1819

100

6-8i

34-07

26-74

DC

no

1840

I8S5

23

7

WS 841— 851

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

S-s

Air Temp.
= C.

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

E--2
213

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry

bulb

Wet
bulb

WS841

cont.

From 54° ii' S, 6o° 23' W
to 54° 12-5' S, 60° 20' W

1932

6u

WS842

S3°34'S, 61° 36' VV

7il

0510

688

gn.S.M

NW

II-16

NW

3-4

be

994-0

8-9

7-8

mod. short to mod.
av. NW X W swell

WS843

52° 53' S, 62°54' W

7ii

1418

33S

NW

II-16

NW

2

orm

988-6

I I-l

lo-o

mod. short NW swell

WS844

52° 14' S, 64° 10' w

7-8 ii

2220

218

W

II-16

WxS

2

be

992-1

10-6

8-9

mod. short WxS
swell

WS845

51° 30' S, 65° 25' w

8ii

II35

141

WxN

11-16

WNW

3

e

994-1

II-I

8-9

mod. short W x N
swell

WS846

50' 56' S, 66° 40' W

811

2101

no

WNW

7-10

WNW

2

be

986-5

II-6

10-0

low long WNW swell

WS847

From 50° 15' S, 67° 59' W
to 50° 16-5' S, 67° 55' W

to 50° 21' S, 67°33' W

911

0646

0915
1200
1420

51

57
84

SWxW

sw

17-27
17-21

SW
WSW

4
4

be
be

992-5
996-0

I i-i
10-6

10-0
7-8

mod. av. WSW swell

mod. av. SW x W
swell

WS848

From 50° 37' S,

66° 26' W
to 50° 38' S, 66° 22' W

10 ii

HIS

1325

115

d.gn.S

117

WxN

7-10

W

2

be

1003-8

ii-i

8-2

mod. short WxN
swell

WS849

From 50° 56-5' S,

65° 00' W
to 50° 57' S, 64° 56' W

10 ii

1929
2145

137
d.S
137

WxN

4-10

WxN

2

be

1002-8

11-7

8-9

mod. short W swell

WS850

From 51° 18' S,
63° 31-5' W

to 51° 19-5' S, 63° 29' W

II ii

0602
0838

IS7
d.gn.
S.St

166

WxN

7-10

WxN

2

be

1005-3

IO-6

8-9

mod. short W swell

WS851

From 51° 39' S,

62° 02-5' W
to 51° 41' S, 62° 00' W

II ii

1504
171S

221

St
198

WSW

7-10

WSW

3

b

1009-9

9-7

8-9

low long WSW swell

238

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 841—851

Station

Age of
(days)

HYDROLOGICAL

OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

S°/oo

0,

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

From

To

WS841

O

OTC

CO lit.

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N70B
NiooB

r 1 1 0- 1 2 I
f 91-0

1930
2125

2040
2145

Foot rope parted during tow
Depth estimated

WS842

I

O

7-05

34-08

26-71

N50V

100-0

0519

0521

6oo

4-07

34-18

27-15

N70B
NiooB

1 lOO-O

0612

0632

Depth estimated

WS843

I

o

8-31

33-70

26-28

N50V

1 00-0

1425

1427

300

S-20

34-14

27-00

N70B

N 100 B
NR

j 102-0
338(-o)

1503
1503

1523
1533

KT

WS844

I

0

8-49

33-69

26-19

N50V

100-0

2228

2230

200

6-50

33-96

26-69

N70B

NiooB

NR

1 91-0
2i8(-o)

2319
2319

0030
0125

KT

Haul irregular

WS845

2

0

911

33-6i

26-04

N50V

1 00-0

I158

1 200

140

7-21

33-75

26-43

N70B

NiooB
NR

f 1 00-0
i4i(-o)

1240
1240

1302
1310

KT

WS846

2

0

10-04

33-i8

25-55

N50V

1 00-0

2107

2109

100

6-84

33-18

26-03

N70B

NiooB

NR

} 98^
iio(-o)

2136
2136

2156

2215

KT

Net did not fish properly

WS847

3

0
45

IO-86
10-89

32-78
32-81

25-10
25-11

N50V
DC

45-0
51

0728
0740

0729

Temperature repeated

3

OTC

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

■ 51-57

• 57-84

0815
1020

0915
1420

Haul A

Haul B. Net torn

WS848

4

0
no

10-41
7-12

33-23
33-27

25-53
26-06

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

1 1 0-0
115

• II5-II7

1 130
1147

1225

1132
1200

1325

Trawl torn

WS849

4

0

130

9-25
6-76

33-40
33-40

25-85
26-22

N50V
DC
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

1 00-0

137
\ 137-137

1935
2010

2045

1937
2025

2145

WS850

5

0
ISO

8-89
6-40

33-65
33-78

26-10
26-57

N50V
DC
OTC

N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

100-0

157
■ 157-166

0623
0650

0730

0625
0710

0838

WS851

5

0
200

8-8i
5-38

33-75
34-05

26-19
26-90

N50V
DC

115-0

221

1509
1530

1511
1550

239

WS 851—861

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

WIND

SEA

Weather

si

II

Air Temp.
= C.

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
bulb

Wet
biUb

WS851

cont.

From 51° 39' S,
62° 02-5' w
to 51° 41' S, 62° 00' W

1932

II ii

WS852

44° 12-5' S, 64° 13' W

21 iii

0600
0812

84

88

NxW

4-6

N

2

be

1004-7

17-2

14-4

low long to mod.
short NxW swell

WS853

From 44° 38' S, 64° 15' W
to 44° 41-5' S, 64° 12' W

21 iii

I 122

1320

90
90

NxW

1-3

N

I

be

1006-5

17-9

14-4

low long N swell

WS854

45° 16' S, 64° 25' w

22 iii

0524
0816

97
97

N

1-6

N

1-2

be

1004-8

16-3

15-0

low long to mod.
short NxW swell

WS855

From 45° 56' S,

64° 10' W
to 45° 59' S, 64° 12' W

22 iii

1250
1440

115
no

ExN

1-3

N

1-2

c

1003-4

16-I

15-0

low long to mod.
short ENE swell

WS856

46°3s'S, 64° 11' W

23 iii

0600
0806

104
104

NW

1-6

NW

I

be

1006-2

15-0

12-2

low long to mod.
short WNW swell

WS857

From 47° 1 1 ' S,

64° 15'W
to 47° 12' S, 64° 09' W

23 iii

1236
1435

123

124

WNW

4-10

NW

2

b

1006-1

15-5

12-8

low long to mod.
short NW swell

WS858

From 45° 42' S, 60° 30' W
to 45° 40-5' S, 60° 33'W

24 iii

1222
1445

132
123

SSE

4-10

S

2

oni

loi 1-8

12-8

11-7

low long S swell

WS859

From 45° 14' S, 61° 56' W
to 45° 12' S, 62° 00' W
to 45° 10' S, 62° 03' W

25 iii

0605
0850
1032

106
no
106

W

4-10

wsw

2

b

I020-I

13-9

II-7

low long to mod.
short WSW swell

WS860

From 44° 53' S,

63° 30' W
to 44° 55' S, 63° 32'W

25 iii

184I
2030

lOI

104

NxW

11-16

NW

3-4

b

IOI8-4

15-3

13-9

mod. short NW x N
swell

WS861

47° 40' S, 64° :2' W

27 iii

0600
0800

117
124

N

1-3

N

1-2

b

1023-3

13-6

II-7

low long NW swell

240

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 851—861

Stalinn

Age of

(days)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

Depth
(metres)

TIME

S7.0

al

Gear

From

To

WS851

5

OTC

colli.

N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

221-198

1615

1715

WS852

14

0

15-10

33-51

24-83

N50V

80-0

0620

0622

+ 4 hours

So

10-51

33-38

25-62

N70B
NR
BTS

71-0

84(-o)
86-88

0657
0657
0742

0717
0727
0812

KT

WS853

14

0

85

14-71

8-14

33-45
33-38

24-86
26-00

NsoV
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

80-0
90-go

II38
1220

I 140
1320

WS854

15

0

14-73

33-32

24-76

N50V

90-0

0634

0636

90

7-i6

33-33

26-10

N70B

N 100 B

NR

BTS

1 74-0

97(-o)
97-97

0658

0658
0746

0718

0728
0816

KT

WS855

IS

0
1 10

14-71
6-78

33-34
33-41

24-78
26-22

NsoV
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

1 00-0
y 115-110

1306
1340

1308
1440

WS856

16

0

13-61

33-54

25-16

NsoV

1 00-0

0620

0622

100

7-3-2

33-33

26-08

N70B

NiooB

NR

BTS

} Ss-o

i04(-o)
104-104

0643

0643
0736

i 0703

1 0713

0713

0806

KT

WS857

16

0
120

13-49

8-02

33-63
33-58

25-25
26-18

N50V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

1 00-0
• 123-124

1304
1335

1306
1435

WS858

17

0

130

12-71
5-96

33-60
33-63

25-39
26-51

N50 V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

1 00-0
■ 132-123

1303
133s

1305
1445

WS859

18

0

14-08

33-64

26-14

NsoV

1 00-0

0717

0719

100

6-71

33-68

26-44

OTC

io6-iio

N7-T
N4-T

0750

0850

Haul A

NCS-T

OTC

N7-T
N4-T

- 11 0-106

0932

1032

Haul B

NCS-T

J

WS860

iS

0
100

15-06

7-21

33-36
33-44

24-72
26-18

NsoV
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

1 00-0

r IOI-IO4

1902
1930

1904
2030

WS861

20

0

12-38

33-45

25-34

NsoV

90-0

0619

0621

90

8-91

33-58

26-05

N70B

N 100 B

NR

BTS

i 68-0

ii7(-o)
117-124

0639

0639
0730

( 0659

I o7°9
0709
0800

Depth estimated

[of tow
Net probably oflf bottom during part

241

WS 862—872

R.R.S. Williatn Scoreshy

WS862 From 48° 23' S,
64° is'W
to 48° 26' S, 64° 13' W

49° 05' S, 64° 09' w

WS864 From49°32'S, 64° 15'W
to 49° 35' S, 64° 17' W

50° 03' S, 64° 14' W

WS866 From 50° 36' S, 64° 15' W 29 iii
to 5°° 39-5' S, 64° 15' W

1932
27 iii

WS867

WS868

WS869

WS870

WS872

51° 10' S, 64° 15-5' w

From 51° 45' S, 64° 16' W
to 51° 46-5' S, 64° 17' W

52° 15-5' S, 64° 13-8' W

From 52° 49' S, 64° 15' W
to 52° 50' S, 64° 10' W

53° 16' S, 64° 12' W

From 53° 49' S, 64° 15' W
to 53° 47' S, 64° 22' W

30 111

1255
1435

0600
0817

1 109
1255

0514
0748

12IO
1358

0600
0830

1245
1440

0600
0825

1300
1500

0600
0955

I5IO

1705

121
117

128
126

126
128

137
144

163

187
201

276

336
342

139
134

Lt airs

NxW

NNW

NNW

NxW

NNE

WxS

WxN

wsw

7-16

7-10

4-6

NxW

NxW

NNW

NNW

NNE

conf.

W

4-6

W

1019-3

IOIO-5

1002-4

be

10-6

8-9

8-8

1 007-1

1007-8

8-9

low av. NxW swell

mod. short N swell

mod. short N x W
swell

mod. av. NW swell

mod. av. NNW swell

mod. short to mod.
av. N swell

mod. av. conf. swell

mod. short WxN
swell

9-9 7-8 mod. short W swell

5-6

6-7

low long SW swell

low long S swell

242

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 862—872

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

250

12-21

8-42

I0-20
7-38

9-93
7-51

9-36

770

9-01

7-41

8-62
7-8i

8-24
7-93

8-02

7-i8

7-99
6-ig

7-49
5-91

7-49
6-6i

33-41

33-45

33-41
33-33

33-41
33-45

33-37

33-51
33-52

33-83
34-30

33-64

33-70

33-62
33-81

33-55
33-98

33-71
34-17

33-62

33-87

25-34
26-02

25-70
26-07

25-75
26-15

26-06

25-97
26-22

26-29
26-77

26-19

26-28

26-21

26-48

26-16

26-75

26-36
26-93

26-29
26-61

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

NsoV
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V
N70B
NiooB

NR

BTS

N50 V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

NsoV

N70B

NiooB

NR

BTS

N50V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T

NCS-T

N50V

N70B

NiooB

NR

BTS

N50V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

N50V

N70B

NiooB

NR

BTS

N50V

OTC

NCS-T

N50V

N70B

NiooB

NR

BTS

N50V
OTC
N7-T
N4-T
NCS-T

Depth
(metres)

71-0
I2l(-o)

128-126

79-0
I26(-o)

126-128

1 00-0

95-0

i5o(-o)
150-148

1 00-0
166-163

1 00-0

120-0

i87(-o)
187-201

100-0
269-276

336(-o)
336-342

From

1309
1335

0624
0647
0647
0747

I 124

"55

0634

0700

0700
0742

1226
1258

0628

0655

0655
0748

To

0626

0650
0650

07s s
1323

1400
0627

0705

0705
0925

1605

I3II

1435

0626
0707

0717

0817
1 1 26

0636
0720

0733

o8i2

1228

1358

0630

0715

0725
0818

1309
1440

0628

0710

0730
0825

1325
1500

0629

0725

0750
0955

KT

KT

KT

KT

Nets probably not fishing properly

KT

243

WS 873—882

R.R.S. William

Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

S's

Air Temp.

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

Weather

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry
bulb

Wet
bulb

WS873

52° 35' S, 67° 19' W

1932

2 iv

1900

93

w

1-3

-

0

be

1017-2

8-9

6-7

low av. to low long
sw swell

WS874

From 52° 35' S, 65" 17' W
to 52° 36' S, 65° 11' W

3iv

0700
lOIO

13s
132

wsw

4-6

sw

I

c

loiS-o

9-2

8-3

low long W swell

WS875

From 52° 35' S, 63° 50' W
to 52° 37' S, 63°4S-s'W

3iv

1533
1655

252
234

SE

4-10

SE

2

c

IOl8-2

8-3

6-7

low long to mod.
short ESE swell

WS876

52° 35' 3,63° 17' w

3iv

1948

263

SSE

4-6

SSE

2

od

1017-3

7-2

5-6

low long to mod.
short S swell

WS877

52° 35'5' S, 6i°04'W

4iv

0720

349

SxW

1 1-16

S

3-4

c

1013-7

6-7

3-9

mod. short to mod.
av. S swell

WS878

52° 36' S. 58° 54' W

4 iv

204s

121

SE

17-21

SE

4

c

IOIO-3

6-1

4-4

mod. av. to mod.
long SE swell

WS879

51" 39' S, 57°39' W

5 iv

0705

S3

ssw

11-21

S

4

c

IOIO-8

6-7

5-0

mod. av. to mod.
long S swell

WS880

So^Si'S, 57°33'W

16 iv

2000

302

NE

17-21

N

4

cr

975-6

3-9

33

mod. short N swell

WS881

47°28'S, 57° 18' W

17 iv

2000

-

W

7-10

W

2

c

1002-2

7-8

5-6

mod. short W swell

WS882

41° 05-5' S, 56° 21' W

19 iv

2000

1 194

NNW

7-IO

N

2

b

1012-4

IO-6

8-9

mod. short N swell

244

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 873—882

Age of
(d^ys)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

S7.=

at

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

Remarks

From

To

WS873

27

0

9-17

33-12

25-64

N50V

90-0

I9I7

I9I9

90

8-98

33-48

25-95

N70B

N 100 B
NR

}• 80-0

93(-o)

1942
1942

2002
2012

Depth estimated

WS874

27

0

8-51

—

—

N50V

1 00-0

0720

0722

130

8-29

33-51

2609

N70B

N 100 B

NR

OTC

N7-T

N4-T

NCS-T

} 73-0
i35(-o)

- 135-132

0746
0746

0910

0806
0816

1010

KT

,- Catches discarded

WS875

27

0

7-8i

33-57

26-20

OTC

)

i

230

6-38

33-99

2674

N7-T
N4-T

[ 252-234

1555

1655

f Catches discarded

NCS-T

J

WS876

28

0

7-59

33-72

26-35

N50V

1 00-0

2019

2021

250

5-36

34-10

26-94

N70B

NiooB

NR

} I3S-0
263(-o)

2043
2043

2105
2II6

KT

WS877

28

0

5-58

33-83

26-71

N50V

1 00-0

0751

0753

340

4-86

34-15

27-05

N70B

NiooB

NR

1 88-0
349(-o)

0820
0820

0840
0910

KT

WS878

29

0

7-47

33-89

26-50

N50V

100-0

2108

2II0

120

6-78

33-93

26-62

N70B

NiooB

NR

} 84-0

I2l(-o)

2134
2134

2154
2204

KT

WS879

29

0

8-45

33-76

26-26

N50V

50-0

0727

0729

50

8-44

33-74

26-24

N70B

53-0

0745

0805

Depth estimated

WS880

11

N50V

100-0

2020

2022

TYF

ca. 300-0

2108

2133

Depth estimated. Net badly

torn

WS881

12

0

7-IO

34-09

26-71

N50V
TYF

1 00-0
ca. 700-0

2010
2039

2012
2129

Depth estimated

WS882

14

0

8-75

34-07

26-45

N50 V
TYF

100-0
ca. 700-0

2009
2049

201 1
2139

Depth estimated

245

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'

WHALE-MARKING CRUISE

STATIONS WS 883-895

31. XII. 1934—20. 11. 1935

247

WS 883—887

WS883

WS884

WS885

6i° 06' S, 90° 18' E

60° 16' S, 90° 18' E

59° 25' S, 90° 13' E

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

1934

31 xii

31 XII

400

WS886 From 63° 34' 8,83° 41' E
to 63° 30' S, 83° 30' E

WS887

66° 10' S, 58° 47' E

193s

41

0935
1400

SExE

NExN

NNE

4-6

4-6

4-6

SExE

NExN

NNE

ExS

ExN

28-33

ExS

ExN

977-1

979-3

0-6

965-4

987-5

0-6

conf. swell

conf. swell

mod. long swell

low long swell

mod. av. swell

248

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 883—887

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Depth
(metres)

WS883

WS885

WS886

WS887

20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

30

40

5°
60
80
100

150
200
300
400
ISO

30
40

50
60
80
100
ISO
200
300
400

30

40

50

60

80

100

150

200

300

400

30
40
50
60
80
100

-o-ig
-o-ig
-0-24

- 1-29

-1-44
-1-54
- 1-64
-1-49
-1-39
-0-59

0-2I
I -07
1-42

-O'04
-0-04
-0-07
-o-og
-0-14
-o-oi
-0-04
-0-S9
-0-84
-049
-IS9

-0-24

0-76
-0-34

0-36

o-i6

006

o-o6

-o-oi

-0-14

-0-87

-III

-114

-0-64

0-36

1-77

1-90

- I -02
-I -04

- 1-07
-I-I4
-0-74

-0-34
0-51

1-27

I-S7
1-67
1-77
1-79
1-77

- i-io
-I -09

- 1-09
-1-52

-1-74
-1-74

-1-74
-1-71
-1-71

3379
33-79
33-Si
34-03
34-06
34-14
34-23
34-32
34-33
34-34
34-52
34-64
34-70

33-79
33-79
33-79
33-80
33-81
33-94
33-97
34-05
34-14
34-23
34-29
34-47
34-59
34-27-

33-76
33-79
33-83
33-83
33-84
33-85
33-87
33-97
34-05
34-22
34-35
34-59
34-68

33-72
33-72
33-72
34-05
34-33
34-38
34-48
34-58
34-63
34-64
34-67
34-70
34-71

33-54
33-54
33-54
33-90
34-08
34-17
34-18
34-23
34-29

27-17
27-17
27-18
27-40
27-43
27-50
27-57
27-64
27-64
27-63
27-73
27-78
27-80

27-16
27-16
27-16
27-16
27-18
27-27
27-30
27-39
27-48
27-53
27-61
27-71
27-76
27-56

27-11
27-15
27-19
27-19
27-19
27-21
27-26
27-35
27-41
27-52
27-59
27-69

27-75

27-14
27-14
27-14
27-41
27-61
27-65
27-68
27-71
27-73
37-73
27-75
37-77
27-79

27-00
26-99
26-99
27-30
27-46
27-53
27-54
27-57
27-62

+ 6 hours 25 minutes

Repeated after 400 m. haul

N70B
NiooB

1354

Strong head wind
+ 6 hours 5 minutes,
estimated

in pack-ice.
Depth

+ 4 hours 40 minutes

249

WS 887—892

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS887

coiit.

WS888

66° lo' S, s8° 47' E

From 64° 25' S, 56° 13' E
to 64° 24-5' S, 56° 09' E

WS889

64° 12' S, 54° 06' E

64° 29' S, 49° 43' E

63° 30' S, 47° 49' E

2200
0035

WS892

From 64° 49' S, 09° 02' E
to 64° 49' S, 09° 06' E

15-16 ii

2330
0140

ExS

SE

4-6

4-6

SE

4-6

NExE

mod. short swell

mod. short swell

low short swell

989-9

-0-6

low short swell

987-9

conf. swell

250

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 887—892

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

WS887

WS888

WS889

WS890

WS891

WS892 12

150
200
300
400

30
40

50
60
80
100

15°
200
300
400

20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

20

30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

30
40

-1-69
■1-54

- 1-32

-0-14
-0-14

-0-22
-0-24

-1-68

-174

-1-74

-1-54

I-I7

1-47

1-52

1-57

1-57

016
o-i6
0-14

- 0-I2

-I-S8
-172
-172

- 1-39
0-87
1-44
1-52
1-57
I-S7

-0-04
-0-14

-0-22

- 1-36

- 1-64
-174
-174

- 170

-1-44
0-33
0-87
1-30
1-07

0-87

0-82

0-64

-077

- 1-62

- 1-64
-1-54
-079

0-36

1-37
1-50
1-52
1-46

0-67
071
070
0-66
o-o8

34-35
34-36
34-43
34-51

33-87
33-87
33-91
33-93
34-19
34-20

34-22

34-24
34-51
34-59

34-f>3
34-69
34-69

33-94
33-94
33-94
33-95
34-15
34-19
34-20
34-26
34-52
34-62

34-70
34-70

33-49
33-52
33-77
33-99
34-14

34-31
34-40
34-58
34-64
34-69
34-69

33-78
33-86
33-86
33-93
33-93
34-15
34-23
34-36
34-54
34-63
34-68
34-69
34-69

33-94
33-94
3394
33-94
34-02

27-68
27-68
27-73
27-79

27-23
27-23
27-26
27-27
27-54
27-55
27-56
27-58
27-66
27-71
27-74
27-77

27-77

27-26
27-26
27-26
27-29
27-51
27-54
27-55
27-59
27-69
27-74

27-79
27-79

26-91
26-95
27-14
27-37
27-50

27-64
27-70
27-77
27-79

27-79
27-81

27-10
27-15
27-17
27-30
27-32
27-51
27-57
27-65
27-74
27-75
27-78
27-78
27-78

27-23
27-23
27-23
27-23
27-34

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

N70B

NiooB
NiooH

NiooH

1 00-0
2-0

2335
0010

2325

NiooH

NiooH

NiooB

5-0

2146

2355
0030

2345

Depth estimated.

+ 4 hours 10 minutes

+ 3 hours 40 minutes

2206

+ 3 hours

+ 2 hours 50 minutes

0130

Depth estimated. + o hour 30 minutes

251

WS 892—895

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS892

cont.

From 64° 49' S, 09° 02' E
to 64° 49' S, 09° 06' E

1935
15-16 ii

WS894

WS895

63° 13' S, 05° 29' E

61° 29' S, 04° 13' E

61° 36' S, 14° 43' E

SEx S

SExS

SSW

ssw

wsw

wsw

conf. swell

conf. swell

06

mod. short swell

252

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 892—895

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Age of
(days)

WS892

cont.

WS893

WS894

WS895

5°
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

30
40
50
60
80
100

ISO
200
300
400

30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

30
40

5°
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

- 1-44
-0-54

029
0-94
I-I7

1-25

I-I7

i-oo
i-oo
0-97
0-97
0-77
o-o6
-113

- I 69

- 1-69
-1-77

036
0-5S
0-46

060
0-59
0-62
0-52
-0-04

- 1-62

- 1-69
-1-72

- 1-69
-1-34

0-26
0-38
0-38

1-05
I -05
1-05
I -02
0-85

- I -20
-1-53
-1-54
-0-74

0-77
0-97
0-92

34-32
34-40
34-51
34-60

34-67
34-68
34-71
34-74

33-94
33-94
33-94
33-94
33-94
33-98
34-14
34-31
34-31
34-39
34-61
34-67
34-67

33-71
33-75
33-78
33-95
34-05
34-27
34-28
34-28
34-29
34-40
34-62
34-67
34-70

33-86
33-86
33-86
33-86
33-87
34-11
34-20
34-27
34-39
34-62
34-64
34-71
34-71

27-63
27-70
27-76
27-78
27-80
27-80
27-82
27-85

27-21
27-21
27-21
27-21
27-23
27-31
27-49
27-63
27-63
27-71
27-80
27-83
27-83

27-06
27-09
27-12
27-25
27-36
27-60
27-61
27-62
27-61
27-70
27-82
27-84
27-87

27-14
27-14
27-14
27-14
27-17
27-46

27-54
27-60
27-68

27-79
27-78

27-85
27-85

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

NiooB

N 100 B

NiooB

2137 Depth estimated. + o hour 1 5 minutes

2218

2238

Depth estimated. GMT

Depth estimated, -f o hour 20 minutes

— Moderate stray on wire

253

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'

WHALE-MARKING CRUISE

STATIONS WS 896-922

27-28. xii. 1935—31. iii. 1936

255

WS 896—900

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS896

63° 44' S, 46° 26' E

WS897

63° 20-5' S, 47° 23' E

WS898

56° 30' S, 46° 31-5' E

59° 36' S, 49° ii' E

WS900

60° 21' S, 50° 34' E

1935
27-28

1936

41

NW X W

NW X W

:ios

WxN

28-33

WxN

ENE

11-16

ENE

SSE

4-6

SSE

11-16

be

low av. swell

low av. swell

mod. conf. sweL

988-0

mod. to heav-y conf,
swell

986-7

0-6

low long swell

256

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 896—900

Age of

(days)

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

WS896

WS897

WS898

WS899

3°
40

5°
60
80
100

15°
200
300
400

30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

3°
40
SO
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

20
30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

3°
40
50
60
80
100
150

- I-I2

- 112
-1-56

-1-73

-1-73

-1-68

-1-66

039

1-07

1-38

I-S7

1-62

1-62

0-42

0-41

0-36

-0-65

-I-I4

- 1 42

-1-54

- 1-64

-1-49

0-36

1-29

1-54

I-S7

I -20
116
I 06
1-03
i-oi

lOI

0-93

-0-04

-0-31

-0-14

0-86

1-46

172

056

0-S4
0-26
o-o8
0-03
0-03
-0-04

- 1-64

- 1-69
-0-17

i-ii
1-77
1-85

i-oi
0-46
0-32
o-o6
o-oi
-009

-i-ss

-1-66
-114

lOI

33-78
33-81
34-06
34-21
34-21
34-23
34-27
34-51
34-56
34-64
34-65
34-72
34-84

33-94
33-94
3396
33-98
33-99
34-05
34-11

34-20
34-44
34-59
34-67
34-69

33-94
33-94
33-94
33-95
33-96
33-96
33-96
33-98
34-00
34-14
34-38
34-55
34-64

33-84
33-85
33-85
33-85
33-Ss
33-85
33-85
33-95
34-00

34-25
34-48
34-63
34-68

33-86
33-87
33-80
33-83
33-86
33-87
33-99
34-03
34-14
34-46

27-20
27-22
27-43
27-56
27-56
27-56
27-60
27-71
27-71
27-76
27-74
27-80
27-90

27-25
27-25
27-27
27-34
27-37
27-42
27-47

27-54
27-66
27-72
27-76
27-77

27-20
27-20
27-21
27-22
27-23
27-23
27-24
27-31
27-34
27-44
27-58
27-68
27-73

27-16

27-17
27-19
27-20
27-20
27-20
27-20
27-34
27-38
27-53
27-64
27-72
27-75

27-14
27-19
27-14
27-19
27-20
27-21
27-38
27-41
27-48
27-63

NiooB

0015

0035

Depth estimated. — 2 hours

NiooB

Depth estimated. — 2 hours

NiooB

2230

Depth estimated. — 3 hours

NiooB

2245

2305 Depth estimated

NiooB

2213

2233

Depth estimated

257

WS 900—905

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Air Temp.

WS900

conl.

WS901

'2i'S, 50° 34' E

62° 07' S, 51° 37' E

WS902

63°3S'S, 53° 12' E

WS903

65° 36' S, 55° 12' E

WS904

63° 47' S, 84° 16' E

WS905

61° 05' S, 84° 17' E

1936

71

8-9 i

2350

ExN

4-6

ExN

wsw

wsw

WxN

48-55

WxN

W

w

WxN

WxN

987-5

conf. swell

bcq

bq

mod. to heavy conf,
swell

-0-6

low long swell

low av. swell

low av. swell

258

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 900—905

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

WS900

cont.

WS901

WS902

WS903 25

WS904

WS905

200
300
400

20

30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

30

40

50
60
So
100

150
200
300
400

20

30
40

SO
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

3°
40

5°
60
80
1 00
150
200
300
400

30
40

50

1-53
1-82
1-82

0-33

0-28

o-i6

-o-o8

-0-24

-034
-I 49

-1-58
-0-94
0-96
1-37
1-62
1-58

0-05

0-05

0-05

-013

-o-i8

-0-49

-1-54

— I -60

-I-S9
0-35
1-32

1-53
I 60

— 1-62

— 1-63

— 1-64

— 1-67

— 1-72
-1-72
-1-72
-171

— 170
-1-66

— 1-69

-1-57

— 1-29

0-26
0-26

0-2I
-0-67

-1-34
-I-S4
-1-54
-1-45

-1-24

-1-14

— 071
060
0-96

0-94

0-94

0-04

-0-54

-0-99

-0-94

34-56
34-66

3469

33-91
33-94
33-95
33-96
33-97
33-97
34-05
34-11
34-22
34-50
34-62
34-69
34-70

33-61
33-61
33-60
33-61
33-66
33-78
34-08
34-16
34-16
34-42
34-52
34-60
34-68

33-69
33-69
33-76
34-16
34-24
34-29
34-33
34-39
34-39
34-38
34-43
34-45
34-48

33-26
33-26
33-58
33-77
33-97
34-12
34-19
34-29
34-34
34-41
34-45
34-59
34-65

33-47
33-52
33-49
33-78
34-14
34-15

27-67
27-73
27-75

27-23
27-26
27-27
27-29
27-31
27-32
27-42
27-47
27-53
27-66

27-75
27-77
27-79

27-01
27-01
27-00
27-02
27-05
27-16
27-45
27-51
27-51
27-63
27-66
27-70
27-77

27-13
27-13
27-19
27-51
27-59
27-62
27-65
27-71
2771
27-69
27-73
27-74
37-76

36-71
26-71
26-97
27-16
27-35
37-48
27-54
37-61
37-65
27-70
27-71
27-77
27-78

26-84
26-89
26-91
37-17
37-48
27-49

NiooB

0052

Depth estimated

NiooB

115-0

2253

2313

Depth estimated

NiooB

NiooB

2325

2230

2345

In pack ice

Moderate stray on wire
Depth estimated. —5 hours

Depth estimated.
— 5 hours 30 minutes

259

WS 905—910

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS905

cont.

WS906

61° 05' S, 84° 17' E

59° 23' S, 87° 26' E

60° 40-5' S, 100° 57' E

WS908

62° 19' S, 102° 13' E

WS909

63° 27' S, 103° 45' E

WS910

64° 26' S, 103° 54' E

1936
25 i

NWxW

NWxW

8ii

ExN

ExN

2040

SSE

28-33

SSE

SSE

SSE

mod. short swell

conf. swell

972-9

mod. short swell

-0-6

mod. av. swell

bv

984-8

■5-6

conf. swell

260

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 905—910

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Tern

Depth
(metres)

TIME

Remarks

"C.

From

To

WS905

2

6o

— 0-64

34-21

27-52

cont.

8o

lOO

150

200
300
400

0-45
076
I -09
1-66
1-87
I -85

34-33
34-43
34-S4
34-59
34-65
34-68

27-56
27-62
27-70
27-69
2772
27-75

WS906

4

0

10
20

30
40

5°
60
80
100
ISO
200
300
400

1-57
1-57
1-57
1-57
I 49
0-93
0-31
-0-34
-0-44
0-26
I-I7

1-82

1-95

33-78
33-78
33-78
33-78
33-78
33-81
33-84
33-95
34-00
34-22
34-39
34-54
34-63

27-05
27-05
27-05
27-05
27-06
27-12
27-17
27-30
27-34
27-50
27-57
27-64
27-70

N 100 B

100-0

2155

2215

Depth estimated. — 6 hours

WS907

l6

0
10
20
30
40

50
60
80
100

15°
200
300
400

2-27
2-29
2-27

1-97
0-36

— 0-64

— 0-92
-I -03

— 0-69
0-88
1-49
165
1-65

33-6i
33-69
33-73
33-74
33-78
34-00
34-05
34-15
34-20
34-47
34-58
34-60
34-69

26-86
26-92
26-95
26-99
27-12

27-35
27-40
27-49
27-51
27-65
27-70
27-70
27-77

NiooB

1 00-0

2II5

2135

Depth estimated

WS908

17

0
10
20
30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

1-47
1-47
1-47
1-45

0-20

-0-74

— lOI

— 112
0-76
1-47
1-57
1-55
I-S7

33-60
33-63
33-65
33-65
33-93
34-07
34-14
34-30
34-53
34-60

34-64
34-67
34-70

26-91
26-94
26-95
26-95

27-25
27-41
27-48
27-61
27-71
27-71
27-74
27-76
27-79

N 100 B

1 00-0

2045

2105

Depth estimated

WS909

i«

0
10

20

30
40

50

60

80

100

ISO
200
300
400

I -08
I 09
I-I5

— 0-I2

— I -06
-1-26
-1-42

— 1-64

-1-66

-1-74
-1-72
-I-I4

-0-27

33-55
33-52
33-59
33-81
34-17
34-13
34-25
34-33
34-52
34-51
34-43
34-47
34-58

26-90
26-88
26-93
27-18
27-51
27-47
27-58
27-64
27-80
27-80
27-74
27-75
27-80

NiooB

95-0

2132

2152

Depth estimated

WS910

19

0
10
20

-0-86

-074
-073

33-32

33-38
33-38

26-82
26-85
26-85

NiooB

1 00-0

2225

2245

Depth estimated

261

WS 910— 915

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS910

cont.

64° 26' S, 103° 54' E

WS911
WS912

64° 49' S, 103° 33' E
64° 40' S, 79° 38' E

WS913

68° 45' S, 70° 42' E

67° 48' S, 70° 41-5' E

WS915

64° 31' S, 56° 06-5' E

1936
1 1 ii

0945
2035

E

SxW

17-21
11-16

E

SxW

SxW

SxW

SxE

SxE

variable

4-6

982-5
1007-1

-5-0
-0-6

-5-6

low long swell
low av. swell

9960

-7-3

no swell

-5-6

conf. swell

conf. swell

262

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 910— 915

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

("days')

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

Depth
(metres)

TIME

Remarks

S°/o.

Gear

From

To

WS910

19

30

— 0-64

33-47

26-92

CO lit.

40
SO
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

-I-I4
-1-67
-172
-1-79
-rSo
-1-82
-1-82
-176

-1-24

33-81
34-"
34-34
34-34
34-34
34-35
34-13
34-40
34-48

27-22
27-47

27-66
27-66
27-66
27-68
27-49
27-71
27-76

WS911

19

-

-

-

—

NiooH

lo-s

0945

1005

In very young pancake ice, at edge
pack

of

WS912

0

0
10
20

30
40

5°
60
80
100

15°
200
300
400

I -07
I -07

I-OI

0-90

0-68

— I -02

-119

-0-86

-0-34

I-I4

1-32

1-49

1-37

33-68
33-69
33-69
33-69
33-71
34- IS
34-25
34-36
34-43
34-6i
34-64
34-72
34-72

27-00
27-01
27-01
27-02
27-05
27-49
27-57
27-65
27-69

27-75
27-76
27-81
27-82

N 100 B

95-0

2125

2145

Depth estimated.
— s hours 30 minutes

WS913

2

0
10
20

30
40

50
60
80
100
150

— 0-56

— 0-56
-0-54
-0-54
-0-52

— 0-46
-0-49

-1-24
-1-29

-174

33-96
34-01
34-OI
34-01
34-01
34-02
34-02
34-35
34-3S
34-42

27-32
27-36
27-36
27-36
27-35
27-36
27-36
27-66
27-66
27-72

— 4 hours 30 minutes

200

-1-66

34-46

27-75

—

—

—

—

Moderate stray on wire

300

— 1-64

34-48

27-77

400

-174

34-51

27-80

WS914

3

0
10
20

30
40

S°
60

-1-34
-1-34
-1-34
-1-34
-1-32
-1-32
-130

33-79
33-78
33-81
33-92
33-82
33-83
33-83

27-21
27-20
27-22
27-31
27-23
27-24
27-23

NiooB

90-0

2009

2029

Depth estimated. — 4 hours

80

-1-32

33-87

27-26

—

—

\ Moderately heavy stray on wire

100

-1-34

33-91

27-30

—

15°

-1-50

34-38

27-69

200

- I '77

300

-1-92

34-49

27-78

—

—

—

— •

Touched bottom, sample muddy

WS915

7

0
10
20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
300
400

0-32
019
0-19
o-i8
0-07
-0-38

-1-27
-1-24

— 0'04
1-47
IS9
1-64
1-59

33-83
33-83
33-82
33-82
33-87
33-86
34-18
34-28
34-39
34-61
34-65
34-68
34-70

27-17
27-18
27-17
27-17
27-21
27-22
27-52
27-60
27-64
27-72
27-74
27-77
27-79

N 100 B

1 00-0

2125

2145

Depth estimated.
— 3 hours 30 minutes

263

WS 916—920

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Force

(knots)

WS916

63° 20' S, 52° 33' E

WS917

65° SS' S, 51° 12' E

64° 28' S, 23° 04' E

WS919

58°37'S, 22°58'E

WS920

54° 46' S, 20° 48' E

1936
2 iii

NExE

4-6

NExE

-17

conf. swell

ExS

ExS

bcv

SExS

1-3

SExS

2036

NxW

sw

28-33

sw

9753

low long swell

be

?i-6

conf. swell

od

mod. av. swell

987-5

conf. swell

264

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 916—920

Station

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME

(days)

Depth

Temp.

001

^,

Depth

1

(metres)

°C.

^ /do

(metres)

From

To

WS916

9

0
10
20
30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
300
400

0-43
0-43
0-42
0-40

0-38

009

-1-44

— 1-64

-1-32

118

1-40

1-67

I -65

33-86
33-87
33-87
33-87
33-88
33-90
34-14
34-18
34-23
34-52
34-57
34-70
34-71

27-18
27-19
27-19
27-19
27-21
27-24
27-49
27-53
27-56
27-67
27-69
27-78
27-80

NiooB

95-0

2025

2045

Depth estimated. - 3 hours

WS917

12

0
10
20
30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
220

-1-68
-1-62
-I-S9

-i-ss

-I-S4
-1-54
-1-54
-IS3
— 1-46
-1-28

-1-24

-1-23

33-69
33-69
33-69
33-69
33-69
33-71
33-71
33-71
33-73
33-88
34-03
34-05

27-13
27-13
27-13
27-13
27-13
27-15
27-15
27-15
27-16
27-28
27-40
27-41

N 100 B

1 00-0

2135

2155

Depth estimated

WS918

26

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

80

100

150

200

300

400

0-28

0-27

0-26
0-24

032
— 0-63

-1-58
-1-32

o-o6
116
119

1-27

i-i8

34-05
34-05
34-05
34-05
34-05
34-14
34-30
34-34
34-52
3465
3465
34-68
34-73

27-35
27-35
27-35
27-35
27-35
27-46
27-62
27-65
27-74
27-77
27-77
27-79
27-84

N 100 B

95-0

2105

2125

Depth estimated. — 2 hours

WS919

3

0
10
20
30

066
0-66
0-66
066

33-77
33-78
33-78
33-79

27-09
27-10

27-11

27-12

NiooB

95-0

2147

2207

Depth estimated

40

0-66

33-79

27-12

—

—

5°

0-65

33-79

27-12

—

—

—

60

0-64

33-78

27-12

—

—

80

0-56

33-79

27-13

—

—

—

—

100

— i-io

3405

27-41

—

—

—

—

• Moderate stray on wire

ISO

-o-8i

34-21

27-53

—

—

—

200

026

34-48

27-70

—

—

300

I 07

34-66

27-79

—

—

400

i-oo

34-66

27-79

—

/

WS920

5

0
10
20
30

0-9S
0-96
0-96
0-94

34- It
34-12
34-12
34-12

27-36
27-36
27-36
27-37

40

094

34-12

27-37

—

—

50

0-94

34-12

27-37

—

—

■

60

0-94

34-12

27-37

—

—

80

0-86

34-15

27-40

— ■

—

—

—

100

— 0-2I

34-33

27-59

—

—

—

—

, Moderately heavy stray on

wire

150

— 014

34-40

27-65

—

—

200

0-56

34-56

27-74

—

—

300

I-OO

34-64

27-78

—

—

—

400

I-I7

34-68

27-80

—

—

. ~

;

265

WS 921—922

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

WIND

SEA

Weather

ll

Air Temp.
°C.

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Drv
bulb

Wet
bulb

WS921
WS922

46° 29' S, 19° 07' E
43° 03' S, 19° 04' E

1936

30 iii

31 iii

2035
2038

-

w

SWxS

II-16
17-21

w

SWxS

3
4

0
0

1007-3
1019-5

5-6
8-8

5-0
7-3

conf. swell
mod. av. swell

266

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 921—922

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

(d?°s")

Depth
(metres)

Temp.
°C.

S7.„

at

Gear

Depth
(metres)

TIME

Remarks

From

To

WS921

8

O
10

20

3°

40

50
60
80

100
ISO
200
300
400

5-60
560
5-60

5-59
5-59
S-59
5-59
5-57
5-29
4-58
4-38
371

3-20

33-85
33-85
33-85
33-85
33-85
33-85
33-86
33-86
33-86
34-05
34-13
34-17
34-18

26-72
26-72
26-72
26-72
26-72
26-72
26-72
26-72
26-75
2699
27-07
27-18
27-24

WS922

9

0
10
20

30
40

50
60
80
100

14-88
14-88
14-68

1353
12-80

12-41

12-17

11-73
10-95

35-10
35-10
35-08
34-95
34-86
34-80
34-77
34-71
34-56

26-10
26-10
26-12
26-27
26-34
26-38
26-39

26-44
26-46

150

10-44

34-50

26-50

—

—

—

200
300

10-20
9-69

34-46

34-52

26-51
26-65

—

—

~

■Heavy stray on wire

400

9-16

34-57

26-77

267

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'

WHALE-MARKING CRUISE

STATIONS WS 923-937

7. xii. 1936 — 16. iii. 1937

269

WS 923—926

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS923

56°48'S, i5°3S'E
(In large open pool in-
side pack ice)

1936
7 xii

WS924

58° 56' S, 44° 30-5' E

28 xii

59°27'S, 5i°59'E

2007

WS926

61° 08' S, 63° 51' E

SWxW

ii-i6

SWxW

SxW

SxW

WSW

wsw

hs-bc

IOOO-8

low long swell

986-8

low av. swell

conf. swell

low av. swell

270

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 923—926

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Remarks

TIME

Station

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

-c.

s°/„.

at

Gear

Depth
(metres)

From

To

WS923

24

0

-1-59

34-05

27-42

N 100 B

1950

2010

KT broken, depth unknown.

— 2 hours

5

-1-59

34-03

27-41

NHP

50-0

2325

2333

NP bottle visible at 10 m.

10

-1-59

34-04

27-41

20

— 1-64

34-°5

27-42

30

-1-64

34-05

27-42

40

-174

34-05

27-42

5°

-1-74

34-06

27-43

60

-1-74

34-06

27-43

80

-1-74

34-12

27-49

1 00

-1-74

34-28

27-62

150

-1-64

34-33

27-64

200

-0-34

34-55

27-79

250

0-2I

34-64

27-83

300

0-31

34-64

27-82

350

0-31

34-67

27-84

400

0-36

34-67

27-84

WS924

IS

0

0-56

33-75

27-09

NiooB

170-0

2123

2143

KT. -3 hours

5

0-56

33-79

27-13

NHP

50-0

2320

2330

NP bottle visible at 5 m.

10

0-46

33-78

27-12

20

-0-84

33-81

27-21

30

-0-84

33-88

27-27

40

-I-I4

33-88

27-28

50

-1-49

33-97

27-36

60

-1-54

34-OI

27-39

80

— 1-69

34-07

27-44

100

-1-74

34-07

27-45

150

-1-74

34-12

27-49

200

0-97

3446

27-63

250

1-57

34-60

27-70

300

1-67

34-69

27-76

35°

1-67

34-60

27-69

400

1-77

34-68

27-76

WS925

17

0

0-36

33-81

27-15

NiooB

132-0

2013

2033

KT. — 4 hours

5

0-36

33-82

27-16

NHP

50-0

2044

2051

NP bottle visible at 5 m.

10

0-36

33-81

27-15

20

0-36

33-81

27-15

30

0-28

33-80

27-15

40

-0-34

33-81

27-19

50

-I 62

60

-1-64

34-06

27-43

80

— 1-69

34-10

27-46

100

— 1-69

34-12

27-48

150

— 0-62

34-26

27-56

200

1-02

34-54

27-70

250

1-77

34-61

27-70

300

1-82

34-64

27-72

350

1-87

34-70

37-76

400

1-87

34-70

27-76

WS926

20

0

5

lO

20

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
250
300

— 0-56

— 0-56
-0-56
-0-S9

— 0-64

— 0-64

— i-io
-1-55
-1-56
-1-59

— 0-04
1-57
1-57
1-57

33-41
33-43
33-42
33-43
33-43
33-58
33-81
33-87
33-94
33-95
34-14
34-39
34-42
34-47

26-88
26-90
26-89
26-90
26-90
27-01
27-22
27-28
27-33
27-34
27-43
27-54
27-55
27-60

NiooB
NHP

170-0
50-0

191 I
21 I I

1931
2115

KT

NP bottle visible at 10 m.

350

1-75

34-51

27-62

—

/ Big stray on wires

400

1-92

34-61

27-70

—

271

WS 927—934

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WIND

SEA

n

Air Temp,
°C.

Station

Position

Date

Hour

(metres)

Weather

Be

as

Remarks

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dr\'
bulb

Wet
bulb

1937

WS927

60^ 47' S, 68'' 01' E

3 1

1943

w

II-16

w

3

0

994-4

0-0

-0-4

low av. swell

WS928

60° so' S, 79° 28' E

5 i

1914

WNW

7-10

WNW

~

C

988-0

0-0

— I-I

low conf. swell

WS929

60° 54' S, 95° 37' E .

22 i

2145

NE

4-6

N

I

0

986-2

1-2

I-I

low conf. swell

WS930

62° 19' S, 76° 07' E

29!

2IIO

N

4-6

N

I

0

984-2

2-5

I-I

low to mod. conf.
swell

WS931

62° 59' S, 71° 09' E

30 i

2142

ENE

22-27

ENE

5

OS

974-0

I-I

0-6

mod. conf. swell

WS932

63° 23' S, 64° 40' E

31 i

2145

SSE

4-6

SSE

2

c

985-9

2-1

i-o

mod. conf. swell

WS933

64°2i'S, 32°32'E

II ii

21 10

NExE

17-21

NExE

3

c

989-3

1-2

mod. conf. swell

WS934

66°36'S, 09° 19' E

10 iii

1735

variable

1-3

E

I

osp

9S0-0

-0-3

-0-5

low conf. swell

272

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 927—934

WS927

WS928

WS929
WS930

WS931
WS932

WS933
WS934

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Depth
(metres)

5
400

30
40

50
60
80
100

150
200
250
300

35°
400

30
40

50
60
80
100
150
200
250
300

350
400

30
40

5°
60
80
100

150
200
250
300

350
400

-0-46

-0-45

1-92

2-02
0-38

0-39
0-39
0-37
0-36
-0-14
-0-94
- 1 09

0-20
077
1-67

1-75
1-84
1-87
1-92
1-92

2-17

2-52
2-39
1-72

1-27

0-66
-0-24

- 1-22
-1-24

-o-8o

-0-32

1-27

i'S7
1-89
1-92
1-92
1-92

1-37

1-39
1-37
1-37
I-I7
-0-54

- I-I9
-1-52
-1-51

- 0-41
0-41
1-67
1-77
1-87
1-87
1-87

I -07

o-6i
0-64
0-58
0-58

33-66
33-65
33-64
33-68

33-98
33-98
33-98
33-98
33-99
34-00
34-10
34-20
34-38
34-44
34-58
34-6i
34-65
34-65
34-69
34-70

33-85

33-77
33-77
33-79
33-84
33-89
33-99
34-00
34-13
34-28
34-35
34-89
34-88
34-68
34-68
34-68
34-77

33-69

33-66
33-66
33-65
33-67
33-89
34-05
34-14
34-15
34-31
34-41
34-59

34-65
34-69
34-69
34-69

33-77

34-14
34-34
34-14
34-14

27-06
27-06
27-72
27-74

27-29
27-29
27-29
27-29
27-30
27-33
27-44
27-53
27-62

27-64
27-68
27-71
27-72
27-72
27-74
27-75

27-06

26-96
26-97
27-05
27-12
27-19
27-33
27-37
27-47
27-59
27-63
27-96
27-93
27-75
27-74
27-74
27-81

26-99

26-96
26-96
26-96
26-98
27-26
27-41
27-49
27-51
2759
27-63

27-69

27-72
27-75
27-75
27-75

27-07

27-40
27-56
27-41
27-41

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

NiooB
NHP

NiooB
NHP

NHP

NiooB
NHP

NiooB

N 100 B
NHP

NiooH

NiooB
NHP

104-0
50-0

157-0
50-0

50-0

159-0
50-0

108-0
50-0

S-o

135-0
50—0

1946
2018

1917
2103

2227

2116
2318

2006
2023

1937
2109

2232

2136
2325

2149

2157
2230

KT. — 5 hours

NP bottle visible at 10 m.

KT

NP bottle visible at 5 m.

— 6 hours
KT. — 5 hours

2217
2235

1744
1938

2130

1803
1945

KT

KT. — 4 hours

— 2 hours

KT

273

WS 934—937

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS934

cont.

WS935

WS936

WS937

66° 36' S, 09° 19' E

64° 07' S, 09° 58' E

60° 56' S, 10° 18' E

57° 42' S, 10° 17' E

1937
loiii

ExS

SWxS

4-6

ExS

SWxS

987-2

960-4

961-6

1-6

0-9 I 0-6

0-8

low conf. swell

low conf. swell

conf. swell

274

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 934—937

HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

(days)

WS934

cont.

WS935

WS936

3°
40

5°
60
80
100
150
200
250
300

350
400

20

30
40

5°
60
80
100

150
200
250
300
35°
400

30
40

5°
60
80
100
150
200
250
300

350
400

0-56

0-56

0-56

-1-34

-0-70

-0-04

0-48

056

0-56

o-6i

0-71

077

1-27

1-27
1-27
1-27
1-37

0-77

-0-97

-I-I4

-0-S4

o-ii

0-97

117

I-I9

112

I -07
I -03

1-27
1-30
1-31

1-35
-I-S8
-1-66
-171

- 1-69

- 1-69

- 1-64

0-95

1-07

I-I2
I -07
I -02
0-99

0-87
0-89
0-89

0-88
0-87

34-14
34-14
34-14
34-41
34-55
34-58
34-65
34-68
34-67
34-67
34-68
34-69

34-11
34-IO

34-11
34-13

34-11
34-14
34-37
34-40
34-48
34-55
34-64
34-69
34-69
34-70
34-69
34-70

33-82
33-8a
33-84
33-88
34-18
34-18
34-19
34-21
34-34
34-36
34-65
34-68
34-70
34-70
34-71
34-71

33-86
33-85
33-86
33-86
33-86

27-40
27-40
27-40
27-71
27-80
27-79
27-81
27-84
27-83
27-83
27-83
27-83

27-33
27-32
27-33
27-34
27-33
27-39
27-66
27-69
37-74
27-76
27-78
27-80
27-80
27-81
27-81
37-83

27-11
27-10
37-11
27-15
27-53
27-53
27-54
27-55
37-67
37-67
27-78
27-81
27-81
27-83
27-84
27-84

27-15
27-15
27-15
27-15
27-15

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

NiooB
NHP

NiooB
NHP

106-0
50-0

146-0
50-0

31 10
2143

1327
1513

2130
2150

1347
1520

KT

KT

NiooB
NHP

183-0
50-0

2120
2210

2144

2218

Depth estimated

Full series abandoned in rising

275

R.R.S. 'WILLIAM SCORESBY'

WHALE-MARKING CRUISE

STATIONS WS 938-959

25- X. 1937—23. ii. 1938

277

WS 938—959

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

Station

Position

Date

Hour

Sounding
(metres)

WIND

SEA

Weather

2?
II

Si.

Air Temp.
°C.

Remarl<s

Direction

Force
(knots)

Direction

Force

Dry

bulb

Wet
bulb

WS938

46° 27' S, 35° Il'W

1937
25 X

1930

—

N

II-l6

NW

3

C

IOI2-2

7-8

7-2

low av. NW swell

WS939

49° 01' S, 32° 16' w

30 X

2000

-

wsw

7-10

sw

I

0

lOOI-I

3-8

2-7

low long SW swell

WS940

54° 36' S, 30° 46' W

14 xi

2102

—

NW

I I-16

NW

3

b

999-3

0-4

0-3

mod. short NW
swell

WS941

55° 19' S, 27°o6'W

16 xi

2022

-

NW

17-21

NW

4

c

994-8

0-7

0-6

low av. NW swell

WS942

56° 40' S, 21° S3' W

iSxi

2055

-

ExS

17-21

ExS

4

0

976-9

-3-3

-3-5

mod. short E swell

WS943

S6°S7'S, i7°2i'W

20 xi

2057

—

ESE

17-21

ESE

3

0

997-8

-3-3

-5-1

low long NNE
swell

WS944

56° 46' S, 20° 31' w

23 xi

2020

-

NW

22-27

NW

4

0

1014-2

00

-0-6

low av. NW swell

WS945

57° 21' S, 24° 17' W

26 xi

2I2I

-

WNW

22-27

WNW

4

0

981-8

-0-5

-0-6

low av. NW swell

WS946

56°3i'S, i2°28'W

9 xii

2100

-

NWxN

II-I6

NWxN

3

0

1008-1

0-6

0-5

mod. long W swell

WS947

57° 22' S, 10° 09' W

10 xii

2035

-

NW

22-27

NW

4

0

9937

— o-i

-0-4

mod. av. NW swell

WS948

56° 24' S, 02° 10' W
(In vicinity of drift and
pack ice)

IS x'i

2130

—

W

28-33

W

3

0

989-0

0-0

-o-S

mod. long WNW
swell

WS949
WS950

59° 29' S, 20° 25' W
61° 21' S, 46° 43' W

27 xii

1938
14 i

2125
2253

NW

ssw

7-10
17-21

NW
SSW

3
3

om
osq

981-4
995-2

-0-4
-2-4

-0-4
-3-3

low av. conf. NW
swell

low av. SW swell

WS951

68°26'S, 8i°23'W

25 i

I 100

-

ENE

I I-I6

ENE

3

f

965-9

I-I

i-i

heavy av. NE swell

WS952

67° 06' S, 82" 52' W

28 i

092s

—

E

1-3

E

2

fe

961-1

0-8

o-S

mod. short E x N
swell

WS953

66° 17' S, 74° 54' W

291

2000

—

NNE

11-16

NxE

3

odni

972-4

2-1

2-1

low long WNW
swell

WS954

65°o3'S, 69°o3'W

31 i

2130

-

W

7-10

W

3

0

977-5

1-7

i-i

mod. av. W swell

WS955

67° 06' S, 72° 30' W

15 ii

2246

-

SSE

1 1-16

SSE

3

c

990-2

-1-7

— 2-2

mod. av. NE swell

WS956

65° 37' S, 68° 52' W

18 ii

2200

-

NW X N

7-10

NNW

2

c

looo'S

0-6

o-o

low av. NW swell

WS957

62° 24' S, 57° 23'W

21 ii

2030

-

W

1 1-16

W

3

be

980-1

1-6

I-I

low av. N swell

WS958

60° 32' S, 56° 54' w

22 ii

2006

—

WSW

22-27

WSW

4

or

979-5

2-2

2-1

heavy av. WNW
s«ell

WS959

58° 15' S, 57° 41' W

23 ii

2004

—

N

4-6

N

2

c

992-4

3-4

2-9

mod. av. WNW
swell

278

R.R.S. William Scoreshy

WS 938—959

Age of

HYDROLOGICAL
OBSERVATIONS

BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS

Station

TIME

Remarks

(days)

Depth
(metres)

Temp.

s°/„.

Gear

Depth
(metres)

1

From

To

WS938

21

—

7-2

—

NiooB

83-0

2006

2026

KT. + 2 hours

WS939

26

-

6-7

-

NiooB

88-0

20II

2031

KT

WS940

12

-

0-8

-

NiooB

156-0

2II5

2135

KT. -f I hour

WS941

14

—

i-i

—

NiooB

1 00-0

2040

2100

KT

WS942

16

-

— 1-2

—

NiooB

122-0

2III

2I3I

KT

WS943

iS

-

— 2-2

-

N 100 B

77-0

2II2

2132

KT

WS944

21

0

o-o

3399

NiooH

1 0-0

2025

2045

Streamed on rope. Hauled by hand

WS945

24

0

— o-i

34-10

N 100 B

104-0

2126

2146

KT

WS946

7

0

0-4

33-Si

NiooB

122-0

2II0

2130

KT

WS947

S

0

-0-6

33-67

NiooH

5-10

2050

2057

WS948

13

0

-07

33-99

N 100 B

70-0

2138

2158

KT. GMT

WS949

25

0

— O-I

33-59

NiooB

94-0

2140

2200

KT. + I hour

WS950

13

—

0-6

—

NiooH

0-5

2301

2306

+ 3 hours

WS951

24

0

0-6

33-78

NiooB

137-0

1 106

1 126

KT. +- 5 hours

WS952

27

0

i-i

33-75

NiooB

90-0

0933

0954

KT

WS953

28

0

2-2

33-74

N 100 B

95-0

2007

2027

KT

WS954

0

0

2-1

33-45

NiooB

1 00-0

2148

2208

Depth estimated

WS955

15

0

I-l

33-71

NiooB

1 12-0

2307

2327

KT. + 4 hours

WS956

iS

0

i-o

33-31

N 100 B

86-0

2209

2229

KT

WS957

21

0

I-I

34-08

N 100 B

91-0

2042

2102

KT

WS958

22

0

2-2

33-93

N 100 B

177-0

2014

2034

KT. Towing against very heavy swell

WS959

23

0

3-3

33-89

N 100 B

90-0

2010

2030

KT

279

SUMMARIZED LIST OF STATIONS

The positions of all stations made by the R.R.S. ' William Scoresby ' between April 193 1 and February 1938 are shown on the
charts reproduced in Plates XXXIV-XXXVII. The following list indicates on which chart each of the stations is to be found.

Station

Date

Place

Plate

WS576

17. iv. 31

Falkland Islands

XXXVI

ws 577-579

20. iv-22. iv. 31

Falkland Islands — Magellan Strait

XXXVI

WS 580-585

23. iv.-4. V. 31

Magellan Strait

XXXVI

WS 586 "

8. V. 31

Off southern coast of Chile

XXXVII

WS 587-590

10. V.-16. V. 31

Off southern coast of Chile

XXXIV

WS 591-643

i8. V. -19-20. vi. 31

Peru Current Survey

XXXIV

WS 644-735

20. vi.-23. viii. 31

Peru Current Sur\'ey

XXXV

WS 736-741

25. viii.-4. ix. 31

Peru Current Survey

XXXIV

WS 742-745

5. ix.-io. ix. 31

Off southern coast of Chile

XXXIV

WS 746-749

16. ix.-i8. ix. 31

Magellan Strait

XXXVI

WS 750-755

19. ix.-2i. ix. 31

Magellan Strait — Falkland Islands

XXXVI

WS 756-878

10. x. 31-4. iv. 32

Trawling Survey, Patagonian Shelf

XXXVI

WS 879-882

5. iv-19. iv. 32

Falkland Islands— Monte Video

XXXVI

WS 883-895

3i.xii. 34-20. ii. 35

Whale-marking Cruise

XXXVII

WS 896-922

27-28. xii. 35-31. iii. 36

Whale-marking Cruise

XXXVII

WS 923-937

7. xii. 36-16. iii. 37

Whale-marking Cruise

XXXVII

WS 938-959

25- X- 37-23. ii. 38

Whale-marking Cruise

XXXVII

280

PLATES XXXIV— XXXVII

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XXXIV

2(^1

75°

.1;

25

1

-g^ -WSeOg WS738
°yV3606 WS605;>W

75°

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XXXV

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XXXVI

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. XXV

PLATE XXXVII

fiU

T

ELLOBIOPSIDAE

By Dr H. Boschma, F.M.L.S., c.M.z.s.

Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke Historie, Leiden

(Plates XXXVIII-XLI; Text-figs. 1-16)
INTRODUCTION

HE material of the parasitic Protozoa, Ellobiopsidae, in the Discovery collections is interesting, as it

- contains specimens of three of the larger species of the family, all belonging to the genus Amallocystis.

As the material was in an excellent state of preservation, a comparative study could be made of the
organ of fixation and the parts of the organism which obviously serve for the absorption of food. The
rather complicated structure of these parts in two of the species found its explanation in the more
simple arrangement occurring in the third species.

The collection contains abundant material of a parasite of various Euphausiacea, described in
a short preliminary note (Boschma, 1948) as A. fagei. There are previous records of this species, but
until recently it remained unnamed.

The new species A. timbellatus described in the present paper is the first of the genus to become
known as a parasite of Caridea of the family Hoplophoridae. In the collection there are two specimens,
one of which was studied in more detail.

Finally, the collection contains two specimens of A. capillosus Page, a parasite of Caridea of the
genus Pasiphaea, hitherto known from the Skagerrak only. The specimens described here are from
the Strait of Magellan.

I am much obliged to Dr L. B. Holthuis for determining the sex of the specimens of Hophphoms
and of Pasiphaea infested with Amallocystis. Moreover, I am much indebted to Dr N. A. Mackintosh
for his care in editing the present paper.

REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE OF THE ELLOBIOPSIDAE

Sars (1868). Description and figure of parasitic bodies on the third maxiUipede and the two
preceding appendages of Pasiphaea midtidentata Esmark (P. norvegica M. Sars). Their shape was
reminiscent of the Gregarinids ; the smaller specimens consisted of a cylindrical sac with rounded free
extremity, and the larger specimens consisted of two sacs, one on the top of the other. The distal sac
was smaller and thinner than the proximal, the latter often being thicker in its upper than in its lower
part. It is not improbable that these parasitic bodies were Ellobiopsidae consisting of a trophomere
which could give rise to one gonomere. They remind one of Ellohiocystis tenuis Coutiere, 1911c,
parasitic on Pasiphaea sivado (Risso).

Bate (1888). To the description of his new species P. cristata from St. 173 of the Challenger Expedi-
tion (off the Fiji Islands, 315 fathoms) this author adds: 'In our specimen, which I consider to be
a female, there is a mass of parasitic cell-growth (fig. 3) strung together in a bead-like arrangement and
suspended from a common centre' (loc. cit., p. 869). The figures (loc. cit., pi. cxl, figs, i, 3 and 3')
show that the parasite is attached to the ventral surface of the second abdominal segment; it consists
of groups of trophomeres, each bearing two or three gonomeres. In the most highly enlarged figure
there are visible the remains of recently detached gonomeres.

284 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Scott (1897). Drawing of a specimen of C alarms finmarchiciis (Gunn.) found in the Clyde, up as far
as the head of Loch Fyne, with an ' Infusorian-like ' parasite. The author adds: 'the parasites are
found adhering to the body of the copepods, to the antennules, to the antennae, and to other appen-
dages, but usually about the head; sometimes large numbers of Calanus will be found infested by
these parasites.' The figure shows a parasite with a comparatively long stalk. The body is divided
into a smaller proximal part and a larger distal part, just as in Ellobiopsis chatto?u described by Caullery
(1910).

Mrazek (1902). Numerous specimens of Calanus fmmarchiais from the Spitzbergen region of the
Arctic Sea showed large short-stalked ' cysts of some Ciliate ' on the antennulae or on the maxillipedes
or on the thorax. Mrazek was convinced that these cysts were the same as the parasites mentioned and
figured by Scott (1897).

Caullery (1910). Description of Ellobiopsis chatto?ii, a parasite of Calanus helgolandicus Claus from
Banyuls-sur-mer. The parasites are attached by means of a stalk to the mouthparts, maxillipedes, and
antennae of the copepod. Young stages are oval or globular; older stages show a division of the body
in two parts, a smaller trophomere and a larger gonomere. The stalk penetrates into the appendage of
the host. Caullery is convinced that this stalk is not only an organ of fixation, but also an organ for the
absorption of food from the host. The systematic position of the parasite is discussed, and there are
indications which point to its being allied to the Peridinians, which are known to contain a number of
parasitic forms. In a postscript Caullery adds that Mrazek drew his attention to the similarity of
Ellobiopsis to the parasites mentioned by Scott (1897). Material afterwards received from Scott proved
the identity of the two forms.

Apstein (191 1). Notes on 'Parasit 19' occurring on Pseudocalanns, Calanus and Acartia; as a rule
on the antennae. The figures represent one undivided specimen and one with distinct trophomere
and gonomere. The more or less globular gonomere is about half as large as the slightly elongate
trophomere.

Coutiere (191 1«). Short description of parasites occurring on Parapasiphae grimaldii Coutiere (not
mentioned in later papers by the same author as a host of EUobiopsidae), Acanthephyra purpurea A.M.E.
and A. pulchra A.M.E., similar to Ellobiopsis chattoni Caullery. These parasites do not show a trans-
verse septum (no division in trophomere and gonomere) ; they are attached to their hosts by simple
broadening of their proximal extremity, without penetrating the appendage of the host.

Coutiere (191 16). Remarks that specimens of Ellobiopsis were found by him on Systellaspis debilis
(A.M.E.), Acanthephyra pulchra A.M.E. and A. purpurea A.M.E. To these parasites the common
name Ellobiopsis caridarum is given, though there are five forms of probably specific distinction. The
most common form, indicated as a, is ovoid or elongate, without stalk ; y? is a swollen form with a long
stalk originating from a broad circular base ; 7 is a slightly conical form with broad base of attachment,
and its cuticle is covered with soft hairs ; e is a form consisting of two successive cylindrical elements ;
7 is a form with short spherical elements. Consequently in e and ?/ the body is divided into trophomere
and gonomere, whereas in the other forms no such division was observed.

In the same paper an EUobiopsid is described consisting of about fifty cylindrical bodies, united on
a common stalk, the cylindrical bodies up to 4 mm. long, each divided into two to eight elements. The
stalk penetrates the abdominal wall of the host, Pasiphaea tarda Kroyer, and ends with a blunt point
in the connective tissue under the ventral nerve cord. Coutiere names this organism, which he regards
as a real parasite, Ellobiopsis racemosus.

Chatton (191 1). Points to the similarity of Apstein's parasite 19 with E. chattoni Caullery and the
parasite found by Scott on Calanus finmarchiciis (Gunn.).

Coutiere (1911c). More elaborate data on the EUobiopsidae dealt with in previous papers (Coutiere,

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 285

191 1 rt, b). Genus Staphyhcystis, type Ellobiopsis racemostis Coutiere; genus Ellobiocystis, type Ello-
biopsis caridariim Coutiere. The author distinguishes the following species:

Staphyhcystis racemosus, on the ventral surface of the third abdominal segment of Pasiphaea tarda
Kroyer, from St. 1038 of the cruises of the ' Princesse-Alice ', north-east of Iceland, 3310 m. Ac-
cording to Coutiere the parasite described by Bate on P. cristata Bate from the Fiji Islands belongs to
this species.

In the genus Ellobiocystis Coutiere recognizes a number of species. The hosts were collected during
the cruises of the ' Princesse-Alice ' in the region of the Bay of Biscay to the Azores from depths
up to 5000 m. (except E. mysidariim). The species chiefly occur on the mouthparts and the maxillipedes
of the hosts. The names given by Coutiere are :

Ellobiocystis caridariim, on Acanthephyra purpurea A.M.E., A. pulchra A.M.E. and Systellaspis
debilis (A.M.E.).
Ellobiocystis villosus (forme y of 191 iZ)), on Acanthephyra purpurea A.M.E.
Ellobiocystis tuberosus (forme 7/ of 191 iZ>), on Acanthephyra purpurea A.M.E.
Ellobiocystis filicollis (forme j] of 191 1 b), on Acanthephyra purpurea A.M.E.
Ellobiocystis catenatus (forme e partim of 191 iZ)), on Acanthephyra purpurea A.M.E.
Ellobiocystis tenuis (forme e partim of 191 16), on Pasiphaea sivado (Risso).

Ellobiocystis mysidarum, on Antarctomysis maxima (H. J. Hansen, MS. in Holt and Tattersall) from
the Antarctic (the French Antarctic Expedition of the 'Pourquoi-Pas?').

Finally, Coutiere mentions small parasites of Sergestes sp., from the cruises of the' Princesse-Alice',
in all probability belonging to Ellobiocystis caridariim.

CauUery (1912). Short note on the particulars and the systematic position of Ellobiopsis chattoni,
abstract of a paper read at the Congress of Zoology of 1910.

Liihe (1912). In the discussion following the paper by CauUery, Liihe remarked that he had found
on the gills of a Unionid parasites which were extraordinarily similar to those described by CauUery.
No further data being available, it is impossible to decide whether or not these parasites belonged to
the EUobiopsidae.

CoUin (1913). Description oi Parallobiopsis coutieri, parasite oi Nebalia bipes (O. Fabr.). The parasite
is attached to the abdominal appendages, the gills, and especially to the membranous folds of the
cephalothorax of the host. It is fixed to the chitin by a circular sucker, and according to Collin it has
no root system ('il n'emet point de rhizoides'). In young stages the body already shows a transverse
septum ; in older stages up to nine successive gonomeres may be observed, and the topmost may show
the remnants of a former gonomere from which the spores have escaped.

Chatton (1920). This extensive paper was completed in May 1914; it gives, besides data on real
parasitic Peridinea, the most important particulars of the EUobiopsidae. Concerning the species
distinguished by Coutiere in his genus Ellobiocystis, Chatton remarks that a specimen of E. caridariim
(Coutiere, 1911c, pi. viii, fig. 18) in its lower half shows hairs, as they occur as a specific character in
E. villosus. This causes some doubt concerning the specific status of the various forms.

Willey (1920). Figure and notes of a 'two-chambered cyst' attached to the right antenna of
a female of Pseudocalanus elongatiis (Boeck) from CoUinson point (Camden bay), Arctic Alaska, 1-2
fathoms, similar to the parasites observed by Scott (1897), now named Ellobiopsis chattoni CauUery.
In the trophomere and in the gonomere a faint indication of a radial arrangement of the contents was
observed. The shape of Willey 's specimen differs from CauUery's specimens of E. chattofii in so far as
the more or less conical trophomere is much larger than the globular gonomere.

Zachs (1923). Description and figure of E. (?) eupraxiae on the parapodia of the Polychaete worm
Nephthys ciliata Miiller from the White Sea. The parasite consists of an elongately oval trophomere and

286 DISCOVERY REPORTS

one to five globular gonomeres. In the figured specimen spores are emerging from the top of the distal

gonomere. The parasite penetrates into the host by means of a more or less dichotomously divided root

system.

Hovasse (i925«). The spores of ParoIIobiopsis coutieri Collin are flagellispores, not dinospores as
might have been expected on the presumption that the EUobiopsidae are allied to the Peridinea.

Hovasse (1925Z)). Cytological studies of the cycle of evolution of P. coutieri.

Hovasse (1926). Extensive studies of living and preserved material of P. coutieri. The author shows
that this organism is a real parasite, as in the centre of the sucker with which it is attached to the
host the cuticle of the latter shows an opening through which a protoplasmatic mass of the parasite
penetrates into the tissues underlying the cuticle, thereby forming an organ for the absorption of food.
As far as concerns the systematic position of the EUobiopsidae, Hovasse remarks that they form
a special group in the class Flagellata. The form described by Zachs as Ellobiopsis eupraxiae, according
to Hovasse must be the type of a separate genus, on account of its divided root system. Hovasse
proposes for this genus the name Rhizellobiopsis ; he remarks that the shape of this parasite corresponds
with Staphylocystis in so far as it bears more than one gonomere on the top of its trophomeres.

Macdonald (1927). Among the parasites of Meganyctiphanes fiorvegica (M. Sars) this author notes:
' Staphylocystis racemosus (Coutiere), a dinoflagellate found on the carapace of a specimen caught at
" Cumbrae Deep " in March 1925. The only record of this parasite is that of Kroyer on Pasiphaea tarda
in N.E. Iceland' (loc. cit., p. 780). Instead of 'Kroyer', read 'Coutiere'; the type specimen of
Coutiere's Staphylocystis racemosus is from north-east Iceland. In all probability, however, the
identification of the parasite is incorrect. It is stated to occur 'on the carapace', and, therefore,
almost certainly belongs to Amallocystis fagei dealt with in the present paper. Support to this opinion
is, moreover, given by the fact that the host is a Euphausiid. The hitherto known EUobiopsidae of this
group of Crustacea belong to the species A. fagei.

Steuer (1928). Notes on Ellobiopsis chattoni as a parasite of the copepods Pleuromamma gracilis
(Claus) from one station in the Indian Ocean, about half-way between south India and Madagascar,
and of P. borealis (F. Dahl) from two stations in the South Atlantic, off South Africa. The material
was obtained by the Valdivia Expedition, from depths of 2000-2500 m. Young and older stages of the
parasite are described and figured. The adult stage differs from the specimens of Ellobiopsis chattoni
described by Caullery (1910) in being smaller (422// against 700/<), and in having a different shape. In
CauUery's specimens the gonomere is much larger than the trophomere, in Steuer's figure the globular
gonomere is much smaller than the pear-shaped trophomere. Moreover, the groove between the two
parts of the parasite in Steuer's specimen is much more pronounced than in those of Caullery. Steuer
classifies the EUobiopsidae among the Flagellata.

Reichenow (1930). Ellobiopsis chattojii recorded as occurring in the North Sea and in the Baltic.
Notes on the distribution of the other EUobiopsidae.

Steuer (i932fl). Description oiE. elongata, a parasite of Ctenocalanus vanus Giesbr. from the Meteor
Expedition (St. 57, about 50° S, 35° W, near South Georgia, from a depth of 50-100 m.). Differs from
Ellobiopsis chattoni by its more slender, cylindrical trophomeres, which in full-grown specimens bear
two globular gonomeres. The stalk penetrates into the appendage of the host.

Steuer (19326). More elaborate notes on the specimens of E. chattoni dealt with in a previous paper
(Steuer, 1928), with three more records of the parasite in the Indian Ocean (stations of the Valdivia
Expedition) and one more record in the Atlantic, off South Africa (station of the Meteor Expedition).
A map shows the distribution of E. chattoni, based on the data in Steuer's paper and in those from the
previous literature.

Steuer (1933). A summary of the i932Z> paper by the same author.

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 287

Marshall, Nicholls and Orr (1934). Note on the occurrence of E. chattoni on Calamis finmarchicus
in Loch Striven (Firth of Clyde area).

Fage (1936). New generic name Amallocystis for Staphylocystis, preoccupied. Description of
Amallocystis fasciatiis, a parasite on the ventral side of the first abdominal segment of Gnathophausia
zoea Will. S. (Mysidacea) from the Dana Expedition (off the Fiji Islands and off New Zealand, 3000
and 2500 m. wire respectively). Fage describes the characters separating the species from Amallocystis
racemosiis (Coutiere), gives an account of the organ of fixation, and notes on cytology, and refers to the
influence of the parasite on the host. One of the hosts, a male, does not appear to have undergone any
change as a result of being infested by the parasite. On the contrary the other host, a female, shows
a pronounced retardation in the development of the sexual characters. The oostegites of the parasitized
female are considerably smaller than those of uninfested females of the same size, and the mass of
hairs found on the sternal plates of normal females has remained very much under-developed in the
specimen bearing the parasite.

Jepps (1937). Notes on young and aduh stages of Ellobiopsis chattoni attached to the mouthparts
and the second antenna of Calamis helgolandicus Glaus from the Clyde Sea area, and on very young
stages of the parasite attached to the setae of the appendages. The larger specimens showed well-
developed roots penetrating into the appendages of the copepod. In some of the gonomeres the
formation of buds leading to sporulation was observed. A plug and an anterior cone are described as
often occurring on the top of the gonomere; these might be the remnants of a previous gonomere,
detached from the trophomere before the present gonomere developed.

Fage (1938). Description of Amallocystis capillosus, a parasite of Pasiphaea tarda Kroyer from the
Skagerrak. The external parts of the parasite form two tufts of long-stalked trophomeres, each tuft on
one side of the base of the rostrum. The basal part of each tuft passes through a hole in the cuticle
into the internal part of the parasite, forming the organ of fixation, which extends transversely under the
rostrum of the host. This internal part has a rough surface. Fage remarks that the simple Ellobiopsidae,
which may be found in various parts of their hosts, in all probability attain their full development on
the spot where the spore originally attached itself. For the compound Ellobiopsidae, each species of
which occurs in a definitely localized part of its host, it is hardly possible to believe that they originally
fixed themselves on the spot. In connexion with this Fage points to the probability that m the life
history of these parasites there occurs an internal stage.

Coutiere (1938, 1940 «, 6). Reprinted previous papers by the same author (Coutiere, igiia-c).
Fage (1941). Data from a previous paper (Fage, 1936) with additional notes. Amallocystis fasciatus
on a third specimen of Gnathophausia zoea (from off Guyana), and on two specimens of G. itigens
(Dohrn), one from the Indian Ocean, the other from the Atlantic.

Fage (1942). Notes on the effect of the parasite Amallocystis fasciatus on its hosts.
Einarsson (1945). Remarks on Amallocystis sp., a parasite of the Euphausiids Thysanoessa inermis
(Kroyer) and Th. raschii ( M. Sars) from Icelandic waters. The parasite occurs on the carapace of the
host, as a rule in the region of the genital gland, and in some cases in the region of the stomach. Often
more than one parasite on one host. Description of the root system extending from the organ of
fixation into the ovary of the host. The parasite seems to castrate the animals which it infests, as
external sexual characters are totally absent and the ovary is completely disorganized in the specimens
bearing the parasites.

Boschma (1948). Description of Amallocystis fagei, a parasite of Euphausia vallentini Stebbing and
other Euphausiids not mentioned by name (material from various Discovery Stations in the Antarctic),
with an account of the sieve plate occurring in the organ of fixation.

288 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Amallocystis fagei Boschma

Staphylocystis racemosus Macdonald, 1927, p. 780.
Amallocystis sp. Einarsson, 1945, p. 158.
Amallocystis fagei Boschma, 1948, p. 448.

Material :

St. 665 (51° 41' 30" S, 29^ 58' 45" W), 17. iv. 1931, net TYFB, depth of net 250-0 ni., i ex. on Euphaiisia frigida
H. J. Hansen. Transverse sections of host, Delafield's haematoxylin (Fig. 3^).

St. WS 770 (46° 03' S, 66° 34' W), 21. X. 1931, net NiooB, depth of net 57-0 m., 6 ex. on Euphausia vallentini
Stebbing. Three specimens figured in Pi. XXXVIII, figs. 1-5, 10; one specimen transverse sections of host,
Ehrlich's haematoxylin (PI. XXXIX); one specimen longitudinal sections of host, Delafield's haematoxylin (PI. XL).

St. 712 (28° 02' 06" S, 43° 09' 30" W), 28. X. 1931, net TYFB, depth of net 224-0 m., i ex. on Euphausia recurva
H. J. Hansen (PI. XXXVIII, fig. 6).

St. 733 (62" 56' 42" S, 75"o2' W), 21. xi. 1931, net NiooB, depth of net 84-0 m., i ex. on Euphausia frigida
H. J. Hansen.

St. 748 (55° 29' 24" S, 54" 13' 48" W), 29. xi. 1931, net N looB, depth of net 180-0 m., i ex. on Euphausia frigida
H. J. Hansen.

St. 751 (51° 28' 42" S, 49° 17' 42" W), I. xii. 1931, net NiooB, depth of net 104-0 m., 2 ex. on Euphausia frigida
H. J. Hansen. One specimen figured in PI. XXXVIII, figs. 8 and 11; one specimen longitudinal sections of host,
Ehrlich's haematoxylin (Fig. 4).

St. 766 (58° 51' S, 36° 54' W), 10. xii. 1931, net NiooB, depth of net 102-0 m., i ex. on Euphausia frigida H. J.
Hansen. Transverse sections of host, Delafield's haematoxylin (Fig. 30).

St. 869 (43° 56' 30" S, 103° 24' 18" E), 5. V. 1932, net N looB, depth of net 68-0 m., i ex. on Euphausia lucens
H. J. Hansen.

St. 871 (39° 32' 06" S, 107° 06' 24" E), 7. V. 1932, net NiooB, depth of net 240-100 m., i ex. on Tliysanoessa
gregaria G. O. Sars. Transverse sections of host, Ehrlich's haematoxylin (Fig. 5).

St. 872 (37° 09' 06" S, 108' 47' 12" E), 7. V. 1932, net N looB, depth of net 128-0 m., i ex. on Euphausia hemigibba
H. J. Hansen (PI. XXXVIII, fig. 9).

St. 892 (52° 48' 30" S, 137° 00' 24" E), 31. V. 1932, net N looB, depth of net 93-0 m., i ex. on Euphausia vallentini
Stebbing. Transverse sections of host, borax carmine (Fig. 2).

St. 963 (52° 01' S, 139° 13' 12" W), 14. ix. 1932, net N lOoB, depth of net 320-128 m., i ex. on Euphausia vallentini
Stebbing. Type specimen, transverse sections of host, Delafield's haematoxylin (Figs, i, 96).

St. 965 (47° 16' 54" S, 132" 25' 06" W), 16. ix. 1932, net NiooB, depth of net 310-132 m., i ex. on Thvsanoessa
gregaria G. O. Sars (PI. XXXVIII, fig. 7).

St. 1056 (50° 18' S, 37° 04' 30" W), 4. xii. 1932, net N 100 B, depth of net loo-o m., i ex. on Euphausia vallentini
Stebbing.

The first record of this parasite undoubtedly is the specimen on Meganyctiphanes norvegica (M. Sars)
identified by Macdonald (1927) as Staphylocystis racemosus (Coutiere). As the author states that the
parasite occurred on the carapace of this host, and as the host belongs to the Euphausiacea, it cannot
have been the species of Coutiere which lives on the underside of the abdomen of a host belonging to
the Caridea.

More particulars on the parasite of the Euphausiids are given by Einarsson (1945). This author
states that the parasite is closely allied to Amallocystis racemosus (Coutiere), A. fasciatus Page and
A. capillosus Page, and remarks that most probably it is a species new to science, which he provisionally
indicates as Amallocystis sp. Einarsson states that this parasite, which he found on Thysanoessa inermis
and Th. raschii, is always attached to the dorsal side of the carapace, usually in the middle or behind
the middle, but in rare cases in the region of the stomach. Interesting is the following remark (Einarsson,
1945, p. 158): 'Usually there are more than one bundle of trophomeres and gonomeres present, most
often three or more, which seem to have no connection with each other.' This points to the fact that
in the North Atlantic, specimens of Thysanoessa may be infested by a number of separate individuals
of the parasite.

Einarsson 's fig. 81 distinctly shows that his parasite corresponds with those dealt with in the present
paper. His figures of transverse sections of a specimen of Thysa?ioessa with Amallocystis sp. (loc. cit.,
fig- 83 b, c) show the organ of fixation in its most strongly developed region, and the ramifications of the

ELLOBIOPSIDAE ' 289

parasite inside the ovary (referred to in the present paper as ' protoplasmatic excrescences ' or ' root
system'). Einarsson describes the chief particulars of the internal part of the parasite: 'The stalk of
the parasite, which penetrates the carapace, may be followed in the sections, often dividing into
branches which run horizontally through the internal organs, but sometimes it is confined to one
strong continuation of the stalk' (loc. cit., p. 158). In the infested specimens of Thysanoessa Einarsson
found that the external sexual characters are totally absent; it therefore seemed probable that the
parasite castrates its host. Examination of sections of the ovary of a mature female and of an infested
specimen showed that in the latter the ovary was completely disorganized.

Recently I published a short paper on the organs of absorption in a species oi Amallocystis (Boschma,
1948), a preliminary communication dealing with a part of the material from the Discovery collections.
The parasites of the Euphausiids were mentioned here as A.fagei; provisionally the peculiar manner of
attachment to the region of the genital gland of the host was considered as a sufficient indication of its
specific distinction. In this paper I mentioned protoplasmatic excrescences penetrating from the organ
of fixation into the ovary (at the time I did not know that Einarsson already had described these
prolongations of the organ of fixation), and showed that the cuticle of the organ of fixation possesses
a distinct sieve plate through which the protoplasmatic excrescences protrude. Page (1936) already
had given as his opinion that the organ of fixation of Amallocystis not only serves as a means of attach-
ment of the parasite, but that it also functions as an organ of absorption of food. After having found
the sieve plate and the protoplasmatic excrescences emerging through this plate into the ovary I con-
cluded that these are the real organs for the absorption of food ; the cuticle of the organ of fixation
itself is too thick to allow the passage of food.

A more detailed description of the Discovery material follows here.

The parasites are found slightly behind the middle of the dorsal surface of the carapace of the host.
Their external part consists of a bundle of cylindrical bodies which are divided into a series of elements
by distinct transverse grooves. On the larger specimens of the Euphausiids the parasites may show
a considerable number of these cylindrical bodies; in one specimen on Etiphausia vallentini
(PI. XXXVIII, figs. I, 4) fifty of them could be counted. As a rule, however, this number in the parasites
on E. vallentini does not exceed thirty (as in the specimen in PI. XXXVIII, figs. 2, 5). The parasites
of E.frigida have approximately the same number of cylindrical bodies (PI. XXXVIII, fig. 8). On the
parasites of E. recurva (PI. XXXVIII, fig. 6), E. Iticens, E. hemigibba (PI. XXXVIII, fig. 9), and
Thysanoessa gregaria (PL XXXVIII, fig. 7) ten to fifteen of these cylindrical bodies were counted.

The cylindrical bodies vary in length from 0-5 to 2-5 mm., and their transverse diameter is from
0-13 to 0-33 mm. They consist of up to eight elements, the proximal of which, the trophomere, is more or
less conical, whilst the others, the gonomeres, have a more or less globular shape. The distal gonomere
may grow out into a more elongated body (some of these are visible in PI. XXXVIII, figs, i, 4), which
may easily break off from the top. The following gonomere then may show a distinct scar (visible in
some of the gonomeres of PI. XXXVIII, figs. 2, 10). Probably, however, this is not the natural manner
of detachment of the ripe gonomeres. Numerous distal gonomeres show at their free extremities
a kind of filament (distinctly visible in PI. XXXVIII, figs. 8,11), which consists of the shrivelled cuticle
of the preceding gonomere from which apparently the spores have been set free.

As a rule the parasites of large specimens of the host are pronouncedly larger than those infesting
smaller specimens of the host. Measurements of the transverse diameter of the gonomeres of various
specimens yielded the following results. Two specimens on Etiphausia vallentini, gonomeres 0-28-
0-33 mm.; one specimen on E. frigida, gonomeres 0-28-0-33 mm.; another specimen on E. frigida,
gonomeres o- 16-0-23 mm-; specimens on E. hemigibba and on E. recurva, gonomeres o- 13-0- 16 mm.;
specimen on Thysanoessa gregaria, gonomeres o- 13-0- 16 mm.

290 DISCOVERY REPORTS

The internal parts of the parasites were studied in sections. Six hosts with parasites were sectioned
transversely and two longitudinally. In one of the latter the host proved to be infested by two parasites.
The chief particulars of the various series of sections are given below.

(i) The type specimen, on Euphaiisia vallentini from St. 963 (Fig. i). The section shows the external
part of the organ of fixation from which a number of trophomeres are branching off, and the internal

Fig. I. AmaUocystis fagei Boschma on Euphausia vallentini Stebbing from St. 963 (type specimen). Transverse section of host.
After Boschma (1948, fig. 2). ch, chitin; e f, external part of organ of fixation;/, organ of fixation; h, hepatopancreas
of host; i, intestine of host; m, musculature of host; o, ovary of host; p, protoplasmatic excrescences; s, sieve plate;
t, trophomere. x 160.

part of the organ of fixation embedded in the ovary of the host. The organ of fixation has a rather solid
cuticle which in many parts shows folds or wrinkles. At the lower surface of the organ of fixation there
is a region in which the cuticle is pierced by numerous holes, the sieve plate. Through the latter
a number of protoplasmatic excrescences are seen to protrude into the ovary. These excrescences form
the proximal part of the root system ; the more distal part of the latter is not distinctly visible in the
sections of this specimen. At the sides of the parasite there are a few irregular layers of chitinous
matter of a pronouncedly yellow colour. Probably these were formed by the host as a reaction against

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 291

the parasite. In the sections the ovary does not appear to be degenerated, though the eggs have
remained comparatively small.

A section of the lower part of the organ of fixation of the same specimen is shown in Fig. qb (p. 299).
The cuticle of the organ of fixation in many parts is rather strongly wrinkled. The sieve plate is more or
less convex, and contains a great number of openings. Irregular protoplasmatic excrescences are
protruding through the sieve plate; in some parts these excrescences themselves are covered with
a cuticle.

(2) Specimen on E. vallentini from St. WS 770 (PI. XXXIX). The section gives a distinct view of the
various parts of the parasite. The organ of fixation is more or less panduriform, as its ovoid internal
part is connected by a rather narrow neck to the again broadening external part. From the latter the
basal parts of a number of trophomeres take their origin. The section shows several groups of gonomeres

Fig. 2. Amallocystis fagd Boschma on Eiiphausia vallentini Stebbing from St. 892. Transverse sections

anterior region than b. Letters as in Fig. i. x 80.

of host, a from a more

spreading in all directions. At the underside of the organ of fixation the sieve plate is visible ; through
this plate some protoplasmatic excrescences often of considerable length are seen to protrude into the
ovary of the host. In this specimen again the ovary shows no obvious signs of degeneration. The
developing eggs seem to be of normal appearance.

(3) Specimen on E. vallentini from St. 892 (Fig. 2). The chief details of two sections, separated by
a distance of 40//, are given in the figure. One section (b) shows the rather narrow neck connecting
the internal and the external parts of the organ of fixation. The external part at its top divides into
trophomeres which extend in various directions. The lower part of the organ of fixation shows a large
sieve plate through which protoplasmatic excrescences are seen to protrude into the ovary of the host.
At its sides the internal part of the organ of fixation is surrounded by masses of chitin. The other section
{a) is from a slightly more anterior part of the host. Here the sieve plate is still visible, on one side
of the parasite.

(4) Specimen on E.frigida from St. 766 (Fig. 3 a). Here again there is a distinct constriction between
the external and the internal parts of the organ of fixation. The cuticle of the internal part is rather
strongly wrinkled, and the sieve plate is found on one side of the parasite. Sections of two trophomeres
and of one gonomere are to be seen.

292 DISCOVERY REPORTS

(5) Specimen on E. frigida from St. 665 (Fig. T,b). In this specimen the organ of fixation does not
show a constriction between the external and the internal parts. The sieve plate is present on one side
of the parasite. As in the preceding specimen the organ of fixation is largely surrounded by chitinous
matter.

(6) Specimens on E. vallentini from St. WS 770 (PI. XL). Here the Euphausiid is infested by two
specimens of the parasite of approximately the same size and shape. One (the right of the upper
figure of PL III) is embedded in the ovary of the host slightly before the other. The parasites show
a distinct neck-like constriction between their external and internal parts. The figure shows the sieve
plate of the hindmost of the two parasites, and the protoplasmatic excrescences protruding through
this plate. In the upper part of the figure sections of a number of trophomeres and gonomeres are
visible.

Fig. 3. Amallocystis fagei Boschma on Euphausia frigida H. J. Hansen. Transverse sections of hosts, a, specimen from St. 766;
b, specimen from St. 665. Letters as in Fig. i. In addition: ", gonomere. x 70.

A more enlarged photograph of part of a section next to the one of the upper figure is given in the
lower figure of PI. XL. It shows the lower part of the organ of fixation with the sieve plate and the
protoplasmatic excrescences protruding through this plate. The figure shows further that the cuticle
of the organ of fixation is rather thick, and that in some parts, especially in the right side of the figure,
it is strongly wrinkled. On the proximal parts of the protoplasmatic excrescences also a cuticle has
developed, though it is much thinner than that of the organ of fixation.

(7) Specimen on E. frigida from St. 751 (Fig. 4). The host was sectioned longitudinally. One of the
sections (a) shows a median section of the parasite. Its organ of fixation does not present a pronounced
constriction between the internal and external parts. The external part broadens into the common
basal part of the trophomeres. The sieve plate is found in the lower part of the organ of fixation,
pointing to the posterior region of the host. Through this plate protoplasmatic excrescences are seen
to extend into the ovary of the host, where they divide into a well-developed root system. In this
specimen the root system is pronouncedly different from other spaces in the ovary, so that the exact
number of roots occurring in the sections could be drawn. At its sides the parasite is surrounded by
irregular masses of chitin.

The other drawing (b) is after a section not far from the first one. It shows that the roots penetrate
for a rather long distance towards the posterior region of the ovary of the host.

(8) Specimen on Thysanoessa gregaria from St. 871 (Fig. 5). Five sections are drawn, each section
being at a distance of 20/^ from the next. In the section of the most anterior part of the host {a) the
cuticle of the organ of fixation is represented ; on its inner wall it shows small excrescences which prove
that this part represents the sieve plate. The next figure {b) shows the organ of fixation, a protoplasmatic
excrescence, and some chitinous matter enveloping the organ of fixation. The next figure {c) does not

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 293

show any important changes. In the following figure (d) the organ of fixation is divided into a larger
part which is largely external, and a smaller part in the lower region of the ovary of the host. In the
last figure {e) this smaller part is still visible. It forms a distinct prolongation of the organ of fixation,
penetrating the ovary of the host in a posterior direction. Moreover, the figures show sections of
trophomeres and gonomeres above the dorsal surface of the host.

Fig. 4. Amallocystis fagei Boschma on Euphausia frigida H. J. Hansen from St. 751. Longitudinal sections of host; a, approxi-
mately in the median plane; b, slightly to one side. Letters as in Fig. i. In addition: /;/, heart of host; ov, ovary of host;
r, roots. X 107.

It is interesting that the specimen on Th. gregaria is the only one in which the organ of fixation
possesses a prolongation of the kind described here. In the other specimens examined the organ of
fixation terminates in a blunt, somewhat broadened extremity.

Externally the parasites of the various species of Euphausiids are very much alike. The larger
specimens may show a much larger number of trophomeres and gonomeres than the smaller specimens,
and in the latter the size of the trophomeres and gonomeres may be smaller than in the former, but
these differences do not point to a specific distinction. Moreover, internally the examined specimens
are almost entirely similar. As the organ of fixation of the specimen on Th. gregaria possesses a
distinct spur directed posteriorly, causing a slightly different aspect of this organ as compared to

294 DISCOVERY REPORTS

that of the other specimens, this might point to a distinction. For the present, however, this difference
seems to be of too httle importance for a specific character, so that I am including the specimens on
Thysanoessa in the species Amallocystis fagei.

On account of lack of sufficient material for comparison, and owing to deficient knowledge of the
structure of the Euphausiacea, no attempt was made to determine the influence of the parasites on the
sexual characters of the hosts. It may be observed here that all the parasitized specimens of which

0° QO^ O.-^^-^^^

Fig. 5. Amallocystis fagei Boschma on Thysanoessa gregaria G. O. Sars from St. 871. Transverse sections of host.

Letters as in Fig. i. x 80.

sections were made are of the female sex. As already remarked above, the ovary of these infested
specimens does not give the impression of being rudimentary or decidedly under-developed. It is
quite possible, and it is even to be expected, that in normal specimens of the same size the ovary is
much more fully developed. In Einarsson's infested specimens of Thysaiwessa inermis and Th. raschii
the ovary appeared to be completely disorganized, and these specimens did not show secondary sexual
characters (cf. Einarsson, 1945). The differences in the state of development of the ovary in the
specimens from the Antarctic as compared to Einarsson's specimens from the region of Iceland may be
due to the fact that in the latter as a rule more than one parasite was found on each infested specimen,
whilst in the former the parasite very rarely occurs in more than one specimen on one host.

Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp.
Material :

St. 81 (32° 45' S, 8° 47' W), 18. iv. 1926, net 450 H, depth of net 650-0 m., i ex. on Hoplophorus novae-zeelandiae
De Man (Fig. 11).

^ ^ St. 692 (02" 02' 15" N, 30° 08' W), 9. V. 1931, net TYFB, depth of net 350-0 m., i ex. on H. grimaldii Coutiere.
Type specimen (PI. XLI, figs, i, 2, and Figs. 6-9 «, 10). Transverse sections of part of host containing parasite,
Delafield's haematoxylin.

Specific characters. External part consisting of numerous tufts of trophomeres and gonomeres,
united with long stalks to the organ of fixation. Parasites of species of Hoplophorus, attached to the
ventral surface of the first or second abdominal segment.

Of the two specimens the larger (the type specimen) was studied in sections, and of the other some
particulars of its external part are mentioned below.

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 295

A. THE SPECIMEN ON HOPLOPHORUS GRIMALDII COUTlfiRE
The parasite (PI. XLI, fig. i) is attached to the ventral surface of the first abdominal segment of its
host. Its external part consists of a large number of trophomeres with gonomeres which are arranged
in separate tufts each provided with a stalk of considerable length. The tufts as a rule are composed of
ten to twenty trophomeres (Fig. 6) ; in PI. XLI, fig. 2, a side view of the whole mass of the external
part, about fifteen of the tufts are visible. Assuming that approximately one-fifth of the total mass of
tufts is visible in the figure the full amount of trophomeres in this specimen is estimated at 750-1500.
The whole mass of trophomeres and gonomeres as shown in the figures in PL XLI has a greater diameter
of 8 mm. and a height of 5 mm. The trophomeres have a conical shape, and they gradually broaden
towards their distal extremity, where they bear two or three (as a rule three) gonomeres. The latter
have a globular shape with the exception of the most distal gonomere, which as a rule is more or less
elongated. The thickness of the gonomeres varies from 165 to 225/^ ; the trophomeres are slightly thinner.
The arrangement of the trophomeres in tufts which are separately connected with long stalks to the
organ of fixation gives the parasite a superficial resemblance to a compound umbel. This peculiarity is
expressed in the trivial name wnbellatus.

Fig. 6. Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp., type specimen. Tufts of stalks with trophomeres and gonomeres. x 15.

One section of the parasite with its external mass of tufts of trophomeres and gonomeres is repre-
sented in Fig. 7. In the region of this section the external part as well as the internal part of the organ
of fixation are visible, the two parts being connected by a rather narrow neck. The internal part of the
organ of fixation is surrounded by a number of roots, some of which penetrate into the marginal parts
of the ventral nerve cord, whilst also in the tissues of the host directly under the cuticle there are also
numerous roots. Some of these roots are found at a considerable distance from the organ of fixation,
as, for instance, the one in the body musculature at the upper part of the left side of the figure.

The figure, moreover, shows sections of seven or eight tufts of trophomeres and gonomeres. Of
some of these the stalks only are to be seen, of others stalks and trophomeres, and of others again
trophomeres and gonomeres.

More details of the organ of fixation and of the root system are shown in Fig. 8. Here the stalks
with their trophomeres and gonomeres are not represented in the figures. The parts belonging to the
host are stippled, the organ of fixation with its rather strong cuticle is drawn with a double line, and the
roots are drawn with single rather thick lines. Fig. %a is the most anterior of the sections represented
here ; each following drawing is of a section from a more posterior region. The distances between
the sections figured are: a-b, looju; b-c, iiofi; c-d, go/i; d-e, 140//; e-f, izofi; f-g, 90/^; g-h, lOO/i;
h-i, 80//; /-;, 14.0/i. The section drawn in Fig. 7 is exactly between those of Fig. 8 g and h.

In Fig. 8 a the anterior part (anterior in so far as it points to the anterior region of the host) of the
organ of fixation is found in the peripheral part of the ventral nerve cord of the host. It is indicated

296 DISCOVERY REPORTS

by/, and drawn with a double line, showing the thickness of its wall. In the peripheral part of the
ventral nerve cord there are, moreover, four roots of the parasite. Six other roots are found in the
body musculature of the host.

Fig. Sb does not differ in any important detail from Fig. Sa. The ventral nerve cord contains, besides
the anterior part of the organ of fixation, four roots. Numerous roots are present in the body musculature
of the host.

O o Q

QO

Fig. 7. Transverse section of the central part of the ventral region of the first abdominal segment of Hoplophoriis grimaldii
Coutiere, with Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp., type specimen. Section from the region between those of Fig. 8 g and h.
c, cuticle of host ; e f, external part of organ of fixation ;/, organ of fixation ; g, gonomere ; m, musculature of host ; n, ventral
nerve cord of host ; r, root ; st, stalks ; t, trophomere. x 34.

In the section of Fig. 8 c the organ of fixation is much wider. There are a few roots in the ventral
nerve cord, some in or against the musculature under the cuticle, and some against another muscle
(in the right side of the figure).

In Fig. 8^ the ventral nerve cord is connected by a strand of tissue to the musculature covering the
body wall. The parts of the parasite are not very different from those shown in Fig. 8c. One of the
roots, in the peripheral region of the ventral nerve cord, is sectioned more or less longitudinally.

In the section shown in Fig. 8e the ventral nerve cord is connected to the body wall by a broad mass
of tissue. The organ of fixation of the parasite here is already comparatively wide. There are a few
roots of large size and a great number of smaller roots.

ELLOBIOPSIDAE

297

In Fig. 8/ the organ of fixation forms a kind of neck protruding towards the body wall of the host.
The ventral nerve cord is connected to the body of the host by means of a broad mass of tissue.
Several large roots are visible here (one in the musculature at some distance from the median plane,
at the left side of the figure), and numerous smaller roots.

O'-

Fig. 8 a-/. Transverse sections of the central part of the ventral region of the first abdominal segment of Hoplophorus grimaldii
Coutiere, Wfith Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp., type specimen, a from a slightly more anterior region than b, each following
section from a more posterior region. Stalks, trophomeres and gonomeres omitted. Letters as in Fig. 7. x 45.

Fig. 8^ shows the organ of fixation in the region in which it attains its largest size. Its middle part
is more or less constricted and forms a kind of neck uniting the internal part to the external part.
Surrounding the internal part of the organ of fixation there are a great many large and smaller roots.
One of these roots has a rather thick wall. It is the proximal part of one of the larger roots.

In Fig. 8 A the external part of the organ of fixation is visible as a triangular mass next to the body
wall of the host. The internal part of the organ of fixation and a great number of roots of various sizes
are to be seen in the mass of tissue connecting the ventral nerve cord to the body wall, and in the

298

DISCOVERY REPORTS

ventral nerve cord itself. A few of the roots which have just branched off from the organ of fixation
have a rather strong wall, drawn with a double line in the figure. The internal part of the organ of
fixation in this section shows the proximal parts of some large roots (in the upper and in the lower
parts). Moreover, in the organ of fixation there is a series of cuticular formations which undoubtedly
represent a sieve plate. In the section there is a series of small cuticular bars arranged in a crescentic
row. Inside and outside this row there are a few more of these cuticular formations, so that the sieve
plate is not as distinct as in Amallocystis fagei. More details of this sieve plate will be noted below.

Fig. 8 g-j. For explanation see Fig. 8a~/. In addition: s, sieve plate. X45.

In the section of Fig. 8 /the ventral nerve cord is no longer connected with the mass of tissue enveloping
the parasite. In the nerve cord itself there are still a few roots. The internal part of the organ of fixation
shows one root penetrating into the musculature of the body wall (in the left half of the figure). More-
over, there is one large root in the upper part of the organ of fixation. This root is partially separated
from the organ of fixation by a sufficiently distinct sieve plate. On the wall of the organ of fixation
there are numerous more or less irregular cuticular excrescences, and in the interior of this organ there
are a few irregular masses of cuticular matter, the whole forming a part of, or being connected with, the
sieve plate of the section in Fig. 8 A.

The last section represented here (Fig. 87) shows parts of the root system, in the ventral nerve cord
as well as in the musculature of the body wall. Especially in the latter there are a great number of roots.

The internal part of the organ of fixation, as it appears in the section preceding that in Fig. 8 A, is
drawn on a larger scale in Fig. 9a. The organ of fixation is covered with a comparatively thick cuticle,
which is also present on the thick roots extending from the organ of fixation. In the lower part of the
figure there are more or less irregular excrescences of the cuticle which protrude as a trabecular mass
into the organ of fixation. This trabecular mass is arranged in a more or less crescentic manner,

ell;obiopsidae 299

partially dividing the left part of the organ of fixation from the larger right part. Now from this left
part the large roots take their origin (cf. also Fig. 7/?), and the whole configuration of this part of the
organ of fixation presents a striking similarity to that found in A.fagei (cf. Fig. gb).

In A.fagei the organ of fixation has a rather thick cuticle (necessary to ensure a solid fixation of the
parasite in its host) ; part of this cuticle is pierced by a system of holes so that a sieve plate is formed
through which protoplasmatic excrescences (the roots) can protrude. In A.fagei the proximal parts of
these roots may also develop a cuticle, as in the specimen of Fig. gb.

The external part of A.fagei does not show more than about fifty trophomeres, so that the parasite is
securely fixed to its host by means of the simple globular or oval organ of fixation. In A. umbellatiis,
however, which may have 750-1500 trophomeres, this enormous mass of external organs necessitates
the strengthening of the organ of fixation into an immovable organ of anchorage. Originally m the
specimen of A. iimbellatus described here the organ of fixation may have had a shape quite similar to

Fig. 9a. Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp., type specimen. Section preceding the one of Fig. 8/;. Organ of fixation with sieve plate.

/, organ of fixation ;/•, root, x 163.
Fig. 96. Amallocystis fagei Boschma, type specimen. Section of lower part of organ of fixation. /, organ of fixation ; p, proto-
plasmatic excrescences; s, sieve plate, x 283.
that found in A.fagei. It must have had a strong cuticle, but the part of the organ of fixation to the
left of the sieve plate in Fig. 9^ probably had a thin cuticle, so that the protoplasmatic excrescences
(the roots) might absorb food from the host. Gradually the root system became more divided and
more strongly developed ; at the same time the number of external parts (trophomeres and gonomeres)
increased, necessitating a stronger fixation of the parasite. The proximal parts of the root system
now became covered with a thick and strong cuticle, thereby forming a part of the organ of
fixation in securing a stronger hold of the parasite on its host. The sieve plate which was present
between the organ of fixation and the roots now had lost its direct function, but it remained as it was,
and the process of formation of a trabecular mass of cuticular excrescences even continued, so that now
in some parts two rows of trabeculae are visible.

In the type specimen of A. umbellatus the sieve plate therefore appears to be an organ which has had
its use as long as the parasite was comparatively young and possessed a few trophomeres only. It has
lost its real function now, but it has remained where it originally developed. A comparison with the
sieve plate of A. fagei shows that the trabecular mass in A. umbellatus must be regarded as being
homologous with the former.

The internal part of the organ of fixation forms a more or less bulbous expansion which is protracted

300 DISCOVERY REPORTS

into a long pointed spur extending in the anterior direction of the host. In this respect the organ of
fixation of A. mnbeUatus corresponds exactly with that of A.fasciatus, in which Fage (1936) described
a similar excrescence. Moreover, \n A.fasciatus the organ of fixation has a number of shorter excrescences
of varying shape pointing in a lateral or posterior direction (Fage, 1936, fig. Wc). In all probability the
latter represent the proximal part of the root system, as they show a certain similarity to the corre-
sponding parts of A. umbellatus, where the large proximal roots are confined to the region of the
parasite turned towards the posterior part of the host.

Fig. 10. Amallocystis umbi

lomere, showing

No Studies were made of cytological details of the parasite. A few remarks on the trophomeres
and the gonomeres may be given here. In the stained sections the trophomeres have a pink colour, the
younger gonomeres may have the same colour or may have become a slightly darker red. The older
gonomeres are stained much more deeply, and often show a dark blue colour. In the gonomeres
the nuclei appear to be more or less evenly distributed throughout the whole organ. In the tropho-
meres, however, there is a distinct difference between the proximal part and the distal region. In the
proximal part the nuclei are arranged in groups so as to form clusters that with their greater diameter
are more or less parallel to the longitudinal axis of the trophomere. This occurs in about the whole of
the proximal third part of the trophomere. In a more distal region the groups of nuclei become more
mdistinct, and finally the nuclei become more or less evenly distributed in the trophomere. The region
of transition of the groups of nuclei into a rather uniformly scattered mass of nuclei is shown for one
of the trophomeres in Fig. lo. It appears as if in the proximal region of the trophomeres the nuclei are
found on more or less parallel strands of tissue, whilst they do not occur in the intervening spaces. The
phenomenon referred to here is to be observed in all the trophomeres of the series of sections.

ELLOBIOPSIDAE

301

B. THE SPECIMEN ON HOPLOPHORUS NOVAE-ZEELANDIAE DE MAN
The specimen is attached to the ventral surface of the abdomen of its host, and the external part
protrudes through the integument joining the first and second abdominal segments. The parasite was
examined externally only, but the pleurae of the left first and second abdominal segments were removed
to obtain a better view of the parasite. In the side view of the external parts of the parasite (Fig. lib)
the pleurae are represented to show the situation of the parasite in regard to its host. In the figure
approximately 100 trophomeres with their gonomeres are visible. If we assume that about one-
fifth of the whole number of trophomeres is visible here, the total number amounts to 500, a
considerably smaller number than that of the type specimen. As in the latter the trophomeres are
united in tufts that with usually long stalks originate from a common centre. The whole external mass
in side view has a larger diameter of about 5 mm., and a height of about 2 mm.

Fig. II. Amallocystis umhellatus n.sp., specimen on Hoplophorus novae-zeelandiae De Man. a, tuft of stalks with trophomeres
and gonomeres; b, external part of parasite in situ on host, c, carapace; I, first abdominal segment; II, second abdominal
segment; III, third abdominal segment, x 15.

Fig. 11 a represents a single tuft of trophomeres and gonomeres. As a rule each trophomere bears
three gonomeres, which are of a globular shape except the distal gonomere which is usually slightly
more elongated. The diameter of the gonomeres varies from 140 to 195//. They are, therefore, slightly
smaller than those of the specimen on Hoplophorus grimaldii, but in all other respects the external part
of the two parasites is quite similar.

The host of the type oi Amallocystis umbellatus, a specimen oi Hoplophorus grimaldii Coutihre, appears
to be a female. The pleopods of the first and second abdominal segments seem to be of normal shape.
Every trace of an appendix masculina as it occurs on the second pleopod of the male is absent. More-
over, the anterior angle of the first abdominal pleuron is evenly rounded, without any indication of an
incision, so that this pleuron has the typical character of the female.^

The host of the other specimen of Amallocystis umbellatus, Hoplophorus novae-zeelandiae De Man,
again has all the characters indicating the female sex. Here also the pleopods of the first and second
abdominal segments show a normal development, whilst the appendix masculina is entirely absent.
As in the former specimen there seem to be no indications of a deviation from the normal type as
a result of the parasitization.

1 Cf. Chace, Jr., F. A., 1940, Plankton of the Bermuda Oceanographic Expeditions. IX. The Bathypelagic Crustacea.
Zoologica, vol. xxv, p. 188 (concerning Hoplophorus grimaldii Coutiere) : ' Although there is a well developed appendix masculina
in the adult males of this species, there is also a sexual distinction involving the first abdominal pleuron as in the preceding
species ; in the male, the lower anterior angle of this pleuron is deeply incised so that the angle formed approaches a right angle,
while in the female this angle, if present at all, is very obtuse.'

302

DISCOVERY REPORTS

Amallocystis capillosus Fage
Amallocystis capillosus Fage, 1938, p. 287.

Material :

St. WS 748 (53° 41' 30" S, 70° 55' 00" W), 16. ix. 1931, net NR, depth of net 300 (o- ?) m., 2 ex. on Pasiphaea
acutifrons Bate (PI. XLI, figs. 3, 4). One specimen, transverse sections of part of host containing parasite, Delafield's
haematoxylin (Figs. 12-16).

The parasite is attached to the basal part of the rostrum of the host, where it forms a pronounced
ridge on the carapace. The external part of one of the parasites is a mass of stalks with trophomeres and
gonomeres with a larger diameter of about 4-6 mm. and a height of about 3-5 mm. (PI. XLI, fig. 3) ; the
corresponding dimensions of the external part of the other parasite (the sectioned specimen) are about
4 by 3-5 mm. (PI. XLI, fig. 4). In the external masses of each of the two parasites about fifty to seventy
trophomeres can be counted, though originally there must have been a considerably larger number, as
in Fig. 15 already parts of eighty-three trophomeres are visible, the majority of these being sections of
the stalks. Apparently a great number of trophomeres have become detached from their stalks after
preservation of the parasites.

At each side of the carina which forms the proximal part of the rostrum of the host there is a bundle
of slender stalks of various lengths, sometimes extending rather far in an anterior direction. At its
extremity each stalk passes into a trophomere of an elongate shape, more or less cylindrical with
a tapering proximal part. On the top of each trophomere there may occur one gonomere of elongatedly
oval shape, which may have a length of about o-6 mm., whilst the trophomere may be about twice as
long. The transverse diameter of the trophomeres and the gonomeres is from 0-15 to 0-25 mm.

The internal part of the parasite was studied in transverse sections of the rostral region of the host.
Drawings of three sections containing the internal part of the parasite are given here. The most anterior
(Fig. 12) is at a distance of 60 // from the following (Fig. 13), the latter at a distance of 170// from the
next figured section (Fig. 14). Moreover, part of a section not containing internal parts of the parasite
is drawn in Fig. 15. This section is at a distance of 330// from the one drawn in Fig. 12.

The series of sections begins at the posterior region of the part of the host sectioned, so that the
right side of the host is found at the left side of the figures.

In Fig. 12 at each side of the carina (the proximal part of the rostrum) there is a number of stalks,
of trophomeres and gonomeres. Some of the stalks are drawn with a double line, as they have a rather
thick cuticle ; they belong to the proximal portions of the external part of the'parasite. At the right side
of the basal part of the carina (left in the figure) the latter is pierced by a hole through which the
external part of the organ of fixation of the parasite protrudes. This external part here forms a short
tube which at its top divides into a number of stalks. Between the carina and the antennal gland of the
host (indicated by a broken line) there is an irregular mass of cuticular matter belonging to the
parasite ; this mass represents the proximal part of the root system. The figure further shows a number
of roots extending into the tissues of the host (the roots indicated with a rather heavy line).

Fig. 13 shows again at each side of the carina a number of stalks, of trophomeres and of gonomeres of
the parasite. The organ of fbcation in the region of this section attains its largest size. It is a more or
less irregularly globular organ, which in the figured section forms an excrescence penetrating through
a hole at the left side of the basal region of the carina (right in the figure). This excrescence is of
a similar shape to the one in Fig. 12; at its top it divides into a number of stalks. The organ of fixation
itself is covered with a rather thick wall, which in its lower part shows a peculiar structure that must
be considered to be homologous with the sieve plate as it occurs in Amallocystis fagei. Under this sieve
plate there is a dense mass of cuticular matter with a great number of openings ; it is a complicated

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 303

canal system with strong cuticular walls, or a mass of trabecular cuticular bars leaving openings between
themselves. In the figures this mass is indicated as the proximal part of the root system. From this
proximal part of the root system a large branch extends to the left (to the right in the figure), and

Fig 12. Transverse section of the rostral region of Pasiphaea acutifrons Bate with Amallocystis capillosus Page, ef, external part
of organ of fixation ; g, gonomere ; gl, antennal gland of host ; pr, proximal part of root system ; r, roots ; rs, rostrum of host ;
St, stalks. X 67.

at its end this branch divides into smaller roots which in the section of the figure show their cuticular
walls only. Another branch of the proximal root system is to be seen directly under the main mass.
This branch consists of cuticular matter with very small openings. A third branch of the proximal root
system, is visible in the lower part of the figure. In this branch the openings are large in comparison to
the cuticular matter. The figure further shows some roots with thin walls (though drawn with rather
heavy lines) in the vicinity of the antennal gland, at each side of the median plane.

304 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Fig. 14 shows again at each side of the carina sections of a number of stalks, of trophomeres and of
gonomeres. Here there is a second hole at the right side of the basal region of the carina (left in the
figure). Through this hole an excrescence of the organ of fixation protrudes, thereby becoming
external. At its top it divides into a number of stalks. One side of the internal part of the organ of

Fig. 13. Same specimen as Fig. 12, a slightly more posterior section. Letters as in Fig. 12.
In addition : /, organ of fixation ; s, sieve plate, x 67.

fixation shows the connexion with the proximal part of the root system, the complicated mass of
cuticular matter with numerous openings of various sizes. A few roots with thin walls are to be seen
in the tissues surrounding the organ of fixation.

In the sectioned specimen therefore the organ of fixation possesses one excrescence which at the
left side of the host pierces the basal part of the rostral carina, and two excrescences which at some
distance from each other independently traverse the cuticle at the right side of the basal part of the
rostral carina.

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 305

The sections in Figs. 12-14 show a comparatively small quantity of stalks and trophomeres and
gonomeres ; in a more anterior region of the host this number is considerably larger, as in the section
after which Fig. 15 was drawn. At the left side of this figure not all the external parts of the parasite
have been represented. The shrunken appearance of some of the trophomeres or gonomeres in all
probability is a result of the preservation of the material.

Fig. 14. Same specimen as Figs. 12 and 13, a slightly more posterior section than the one of Fig. 13. Letters as in Fig. 12.

In addition :/, organ of fixation, x 67.

The sieve plate of the sectioned specimen is shown on a larger scale in Fig. 16. Here a is a part of
the section shown in Fig. 13, and 6 is a part of a section between those of Figs. 13 and 14, at a distance
of 30/^ from the section of Fig. 14. Each of the two figures shows a distinct sieve plate, as distinct as
that found in A. fagei, but behind this sieve plate there is very little open space, as the part of the
parasite referred to here as the proximal part of the root system almost immediately joins here the
organ of fixation. This proximal part of the root system is a cuticular mass with comparatively irregular

3o6 DISCOVERY REPORTS

openings, or, more precisely, it is an intricate mass of trabecular cuticular matter which leaves but
little space between the bars and lamellae composing this cuticular mass. In Fig. 16 b the connexion
of the internal part of the organ of fixation with the root system through the sieve plate is more apparent
than in Fig. 16a.

Undoubtedly young specimens of A. capillosiis possess a sieve plate through which protoplasmatic
excrescences from the internal part of the organ of fixation penetrate into the tissues of the host.

Fig. 15. Same specimen as Figs. 12-14, transverse section of the rostral region slightly behind the base of the free rostrum.
Letters as in Fig. 12. In addition: t, trophomere. x 67.

During further development the increasing volume of the external part of the parasite causes a need
for a stronger fixation of the internal parts. As the functioning root system then has penetrated for
a comparatively long distance into the organs of the host, the proximal part of the root system then can
be added to the organ of fixation by the formation of additional cuticular matter. The sieve plate,
which in young stages must have formed an important part of the parasite, during growth of the
organism gradually must have lost its original function. Though in older stages it is no more of special
use to the parasite, the sieve plate has remained where at first it was formed.

Fage (1938) describes the lower surface of the organ of fixation of A. copillosus as having a rough
surface. In the figure (loc. cit., fig. 3) this is also indicated. Undoubtedly the specimens examined by
Fage had the same structure of the internal parts as the specimen described above. The rough

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 307

surface of the organ of fixation in Page's specimens in reality was the proximal part of the root
system with its intricate trabecular mass of cuticular matter, bringing about a pronouncedly uneven
surface of this part of the parasite. .

The six specimens of Pasiphaea tarda Kroyer from the Skagerrak infested with Amallocystis capdloms
Fage were all of the male sex. Curiously enough the two specimens of Pasiphaea acutifrons Bate from
the Strait of Magellan bearing the same parasite are both females. They do not show any mdication of
differences from normal females, as might be expected as a result of the parasitization. As, however, no
material of uninfested specimens of this rare species was available, it is not altogether certam that m
every respect they are of normal appearance.

Fig. x6. Amallocystis capUlosus Fage, specimen of Figs. X.-15. «. detail of fig. 13, further enlarged Mieve plate of section
between those of Figs. 13 and 14. /, organ of fixation; /.., proximal root system; ., sieve plate, x 190.

THE CHARACTERS OF THE SPECIES OF THE GENUS AMALLOCYSTIS
A synopsis of the characters of the described forms of the genus Amallocystis, based on data from the
literature and on those of the present paper, shows the foUowmg particulars.

(i) The parasite mentioned and figured by Bate (1888)

Hostandmannerofattachment:P««>W.m/a^a Bate, ventral surfaceofsecondabdommalsegnient.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres: Approximately fifty (?), in a bundle spreadmg from

a common centre. , ,. , • 1 • 1 * •

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres: Trophomeres elongately cyhndncal or conical, twice or

2| times as long as broad; gonomeres globular to oval.
Number of gonomeres on each trophomere: Three.

Dimension of gonomeres : Unknown.
Organ of fixation : Unknown.

(2) Amallocystis racemosus (Coutiere)

Host and manner of attachment: Pasiphaea tarda Kroyer, ventral surface of third abdominal segment.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres: About fifty, in a single bundle attached to a common
basal organ of fixation. Total length of the trophomeres with their gonomeres up to 4 mm.

O 21-2

3o8 DISCOVERY REPORTS

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres: Trophomeres elongately cylindrical, gonomeres oval, to
about twice as long as broad.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere. Up to seven.

Dimensions of gonomeres: Transverse diameter on an average ^ mm. (Coutiere, 1911c, text),
o-i8-o-3 mm. (Coutiere, 1911c, text-fig. i), 0-3-0-4 mm. (Coutiere, 1911c, pi. viii, fig. i).

Organ of fixation: A cylindrical hollow stalk terminating inside the host as a blunt cone.

(3) Amallocystis fascialus Fage

Hosts and manner of attachment: Gnoihophmisia zoea Will.-S., ventral surface of first abdominal
segment. Also on Gnathophaiisia ingem (Dohrn).

Number and arrangement of trophomeres: About 150, arranged in tufts of five or six, with short
stalks attached to the external part of the organ of fixation. Total length of the trophomeres with their
gonomeres 1-5 mm.

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres: Trophomeres cylindrical, gonomeres oval, the latter twice
as long as broad or slightly more elongated.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere : As a rule one, rarely two or three.

Dimensions of gonomeres: Transverse diameter 0-2 mm.

Organ of fixation : Showing a number of excrescences terminating with blunt extremities into the
tissues of the host; one excrescence much larger than the others, pointing in anterior direction of the
host.

(4) A?H(illocystis umbeUatus n.sp., type specimen

Host and manner of attachment : Hoplophoriis grimaldii Coutiere, ventral surface of first abdominal
segment.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres: About 750-1500 trophomeres in tufts of ten to twenty,
each tuft with a long slender stalk attached to external part of organ of fixation.

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres: Trophomeres conical to cylindrical, gonomeres globular, the
distal gonomere somewhat elongated.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere: Two or three (as a rule three).

Dimensions of gonomeres: Transverse diameter 165-225//.

Organ of fixation: External part broadened, dividing into the basal parts of the stalks. Internal part
more or less globular, with one long pointed excrescence extending in anterior direction of host.
External and internal parts of organ of fixation connected by a somewhat narrower neck. Between
proximal part of root system and organ of fixation a sieve plate.

(5) Amallocystis umbellattis n.sp., second specimen

Host and manner of attachment : Hoplophoriis novae-zeelandiae De Man, ventral surface of abdomen,
in integument joining first and second segments.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres : About 500, in tufts of ten to twenty, each tuft with
a long slender stalk attached to external part of organ of fixation.

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres: Trophomeres conical to cylindrical, gonomeres globular,
the distal gonomere somewhat elongated.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere : Two or three (as a rule three).

Dimensions of gonomeres: Transverse diameter 140-195//.

Organ of fixation : Not examined.

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 309

(6) Amallocystis capillosus Fage, type specimens

Host and manner of attachment : Pasiphaea tarda Kroyer, base of rostrum.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres : About fifty, in two bundles, at each side of the rostrum
of the host one.

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres : Trophomeres with long slender stalks, cylindrical or basal
part conical, length i-i -3 mm., diameter 0-25 mm. (Fage, 1938, text, 0-025 mm. ; ibid., fig. 2, 0-25 mm.).
Gonomeres cylindrical.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere : Not more than one.

Dimensions of gonomeres: Transverse diameter 0-25 mm. Length twice the breadth or more.

Organ of fixation : A hyaline plate with rough surface, in transverse position under the rostrum,
extending at each side into an excrescence penetrating through the cuticle of the host.

(7) Amallocystis capillosus Fage, specimens from the Discovery collections
Host and manner of attachment : Pasiphaea acutifrons Bate, base of rostrum.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres: About fifty to seventy (originally probably more),
arranged in two tufts each to one side of the rostrum.

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres : Trophomeres more or less cylindrical with a proximal part
tapering into the long slender stalk; gonomeres elongately oval. Trophomeres about twice as long as
gonomeres.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere: Not more than one.

Dimensions of gonomeres: Length about o-6 mm., transverse diameter from 0-15 to 0-25 mm.

Organ of fixation : Irregularly globular, in its upper part with excrescences penetrating through the
cuticle of the host, in its lower part possessing a sieve plate forming the connexion of the organ of
fixation with the proximal part of the root system.

(8) Amallocystis sp., Einarsson {Amallocystis fagei Boschma)

Hosts and manner of attachment: Thysanoessa inermis (Kroyer) and Th. rascliii (M. Sars), dorsal
surface of the carapace in the region of the genital gland or (exceptionally) in the region of the stomach.
As a rule more than one parasite on each host.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres: Numerous trophomeres (about thirty ?) spreading from
the external part of the organ of fixation.

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres : Trophomeres conical to cylindrical, gonomeres globular to

oval.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere : Up to nine (from one to ten constrictions in the sausage-
like elongations, Einarsson, loc. cit.).

Dimensions of gonomeres : Transverse diameter approximately 100/^ (measured in fig. 83 of Einarsson,

loc. cit.).

Organ of fixation : Consisting of an internal irregularly oval part and an external part divided into
the basal extremities of the trophomeres, the two parts connected by a rather narrow neck.

(9) Amallocystis fagei Boschma, specimens from the Discovery collections

Hosts and manner of attachment: Eiiphaiisia vallentitii Stebbing, E.frigida H. J. Hansen, E. recurva
H. J. Hansen, E. lucens H. J. Hansen, E. hemigibba H. J. Hansen, Thysanoessa gregaria G. O. Sars.
Dorsal surface of carapace in the region of the genital gland.

Number and arrangement of trophomeres : Parasites of Euphausia vallentini and E. frigida, thirty to
fifty; parasites of E. recurva, E. lucens, E. hemigibba and Thysanoessa gregaria, ten to fifteen. In a single
tuft spreading from the external part of the organ of fiixation.

3IO DISCOVERY REPORTS

Shape of trophomeres and gonomeres : Trophomeres conical to cylindrical, gonomeres more or less
globular, the distal gonomere often somewhat elongated.

Number of gonomeres on each trophomere : Up to seven.

Dimensions of gonomeres: Parasites of Euphausia valle?itini and E. frigida, transverse diameter
o- 1 6-0-33 mm.; parasites of E. hemigibba, E. recurva and Thysanoessa gregaria, transverse diameter
o- 1 3-0- 1 6 mm.

Organ of fixation : External part broadened, dividing into the basal parts of the stalks, internal part
globular or oval ; the two parts united by a neck which, as a rule, is rather narrow. In a specimen on
Th. gregaria the internal part of the organ of fixation has a pointed excrescence directed towards the
posterior region of the host. Sieve plate in the lower part of the organ of fixation.

The data compiled above show that the species of ArnaUocystis can easily be characterized by means
of their external parts only. These characters are the following.

ArnaUocystis fagei Boschma. Trophomeres each with a separate short stalk extending from the
external part of the organ of fixation. Trophomeres with rather numerous (up to seven or eight)
gonomeres, the latter of globular shape, not more than slightly longer than broad.

ArnaUocystis racemosiis Coutiere. Trophomeres each with a separate short stalk extending from the
external part of the organ of fixation. Trophomeres with rather numerous (up to seven) gonomeres,
the latter of oval shape, about twice as long as broad.

ArnaUocystis fasciatus Page. Trophomeres in tufts of five or six, each tuft with a short stalk attached
to the external part of the organ of fixation. Trophomeres with one, rarely with two or three gonomeres ;
the latter oval, twice as long as broad or slightly more elongated.

ArnaUocystis umbeUatiis n.sp. Trophomeres in tufts of ten to twenty, each tuft with a long stalk
attached to the external part of the organ of fixation. Trophomeres with two or three (usually three)
gonomeres of globular or slightly oval shape.

ArnaUocystis capiUosiis Fage. Trophomeres with long thin stalks, each more or less separately
originating from the external part of the organ of fixation. Trophomeres with one gonomere of
cylindrical shape. Gonomeres twice as long as broad or still more elongate.

Coutiere regarded the specimen mentioned by Bate, the parasite of Pasiphaea cristata Bate, as
a representative of his species ArnaUocystis racemosus, parasitic on Pasiphaea tarda Kroyer. The two
specimens, indeed, have much in common. Both show approximately the same number of trophomeres ;
they are attached to their hosts in approximately the same spot (Bate's specimen on the second ab-
dominal segment, Coutiere 's specimen on the third). The number of gonomeres occurring on the
trophomeres, however, is different in the two specimens. In Bate's specimen in both of his drawings
(Bate, 1888, pi. cxl, figs. 3,3') the trophomeres invariably bear three gonomeres, whilst in Coutiere's
specimen this number is variable, up to seven. It is, therefore, not altogether certain that the two
parasites really belong to the same species.

The two specimens of ArnaUocystis wnbeUatus are slightly different. The specimen on Hoplophorus
grimaldii Coutiere has a far greater number of trophomeres than the one on H. novae-zeelandiae De Man,
though this difference certainly does not point to a specific difference of the two. The host of the
larger specimen is about twice the size of the host of the smaller specimen, which may be the reason
for the more luxuriant development of the larger specimen. Further, it is not impossible that the
smaller specimen had not yet reached its full size. It is of minor importance that the diameter of the
trophomeres and the gonomeres in the smaller specimen is smaller than that found in the larger specimen.

Differences of this kind are of common occurrence in the various specimens of ArnaUocystis fagei.
In connexion with the size of the host this species shows a strong variation in the number of the

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 311

trophomeres and in the dimensions of the trophomeres and the gonomeres. Gonomeres of small
specimens may be less than half as long and broad as those of large specimens. The measurements
of specimens on Thysanoessa from Icelandic waters were taken from the figures in Einarsson's paper
(1945, fig. 836, c). If these measurements (o-i mm.) are correct the trophomeres and gonomeres of
these Icelandic specimens are still smaller than those of the parasites on Thysanoessa from the Antarctic
(o- 13-0- 1 6 mm.). For the present it must remain undecided whether the Arctic form really is specifically
the same as the Antarctic form. The available data point to a specific unity.

The specimens of Amallocystis capillosiis dealt with in the present paper correspond in all important
characters with the specimens described by Fage. The trophomeres and gonomeres have the same
shape and approximately the same dimensions. It is interesting that the specimen described in detail
in the present paper pierces one side of the base of the rostrum of its host in two separate places.
Undoubtedly normally there is one of these holes only at each side of the rostrum, as in the specimens
described by Fage.

THE GENERA OF THE FAMILY ELLOBIOPSIDAE
The data obtained in the examination of the three species of the genus Amallocystis dealt with in the
present paper give occasion for a comparison of these results with the data in the literature concerning
the other genera of the Ellobiopsidae. The most striking fact presenting itself is the similarity of the
genera Ellobiopsis and Amallocystis. With these two the genus Rhizellobiopsis seems to form one group.
The comparatively little-known genus Ellobiocystis appears to be rather distinct from the group of
three genera mentioned above, and the genus Parallobiopsis differs sufficiently from all the other genera
of the family for it to be regarded it as a distinct group by itself. The arguments for this division of the
family into different groups may be set forth in more detail.

In fully developed specimens of Ellobiopsis chattoni the external part may have a length of 700// and
a transverse diameter of 350//. Then the pear-shaped external part is divided into a smaller trophomere
and a larger gonomere (CauUery, 1910; Jepps, 1937), the gonomere being about twice as long as the
trophomere, or having at least twice the volume of the trophomere. The parasite is attached to one of
the anterior appendages of its host by a distinct organ of fixation which as a strong rod penetrates into
the appendage. Apparently it is not only an organ of fixation but has also the function of absorbing
the food.

The specimen of £". chattoni described and figured by Steuer (1928, ig^^b, 1933), and regarded by
him as an adult stage, shows a large pear-shaped trophomere capped by a much smaller globular
gonomere, the length of the trophomere being 3 1 1/<, that of the gonomere 1 1 1//. Moreover, in Steuer 's
specimen the groove between the gonomere and the trophomere is much more pronounced than in
Caullery's specimens. The specimens figured by Apstein (191 1) and by Willey (1920) show a small
gonomere separated by a distinct groove from the much larger trophomere; in these respects they
correspond with Steuer's specimen. The differences between the two forms possibly point to a specific
distinction. For the present this must remain undecided.

An undoubtedly specifically separate form is E. elongata Steuer (1932 c). When fully developed it
consists of a cylindrical trophomere with a length of 250//, and at the top of this trophomere are two
globular gonomeres with a diameter of 70-80//. Besides being much smaller than E. chattoni this
parasite is distinguished by its peculiar shape. As in E. chattoni the stalk penetrates into the
appendage of the host as a long thin organ of fixation.

The external part of E. chattoni, and even more distinctly that of E. elongata, closely corresponds
with one of the external excrescences of the species of the genus Amallocystis. Principally Amallocystis
is nothing but a compound Ellobiopsis, in which the organ of fixation has become more complicated

313 DISCOVERY REPORTS

to ensure a strong fixation into the host and to develop into a strongly divided organ for the absorption

of the food.

Amallocystis fagei, the species with the comparatively small number of trophomeres, is of a much
more simple structure than the other species of the genus. The more or less complicated structure of
the latter can be easily explained as modifications of the organization of A. fagei.

Rhizellobiopsis, the genus established by Hovassse (1926) for the parasite of the Annelid Nephthys
ciliata, described by Zachs (1923) as Ellobiopsis (?) eupraxiae, is very similar to Ellobiopsis. The body
consists of a rather large trophomere and a number of gonomeres (four in Zachs's figure). The distal
gonomere in the figured specimen shows a kind of sporulation reminiscent of that described by Jepps
(1937) in E. chattoni. Rhizellobiopsis diflFers from Ellobiopsis by its more or less dichotomously divided
root system, but in other respects it has a strong resemblance to the species of Ellobiopsis, especially to
E. elongata, in which two gonomeres develop on the top of the gonomere.

Of the various species described by Coutiere (1911c) in his genus Ellobiocystis, very little is known
besides their external shape. It seems to be certain that all these forms are simply attached to the
cuticle of their hosts without penetrating into it. They are, therefore, no real parasites, but appear to
lead a saprophytic mode of life.

Parallobiopsis coutieri Collin, which has been the subject of extensive studies by Hovasse (1926), is an
organism which differs in many respects from Ellobiopsis and from Amallocystis. This parasite is
attached to the cuticle of its host by a well-developed sucker. In the central part of this sucker the
cuticle of the host is pierced, and here a protoplasmatic excrescence of the parasite penetrates into the
tissues, thereby forming an organ for the absorption of food. The body of the parasite is divided by
transverse septa into up to eight or nine divisions, the basal of which is the trophomere. At the top of
the latter there are a few flat recently formed young gonomeres. Towards the free extremity the
gonomeres gradually become larger, so that the distal gonomere is longer than broad.

Various opinions have been expressed concerning the place of the Ellobiopsidae in the classification of
the Protozoa. Caullery (1910) was inclined to regard his genus Ellobiopsis as a parasitic Peridinean, and
with some doubt it is included in this group in Chatton's (1920) monograph of the parasitic Peridinea.
After Hovasse (1925 a) had found that the spores of Parallobiopsis are flagellispores, he advocated the
view that the Ellobiopsidae form a specialized group of the Flagellata. Afterwards also Steuer classified
the Ellobiopsidae among the Flagellata. An entirely different view was expressed by Jepps (1937,
p. 642): 'the information at present available seems to me to suggest a fungus relationship rather than
any other — although perhaps such speculation is at present unprofitable.'

In the present paper no results are given of cytological details which might point to the affinities of
the Ellobiopsidae with other groups of organisms. The particulars referred to above, however, might
indicate that the genera which now are included in the family Ellobiopsidae do not form an altogether
homogeneous group. It seems probable that especially Parallobiopsis is very little allied to Ellobiopsis
and Amallocystis, and, consequently, when it is a fact that Parallobiopsis belongs to the Flagellata it is
not yet certain that Ellobiopsis and Amallocystis too must be regarded as Flagellates. As long as no
particulars concerning the sporulation of the last-named genera of more definite value than those at
present available become known, no distinct indications in regard to their systematic position can be
put forward.

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE ELLOBIOPSIDAE

In its typical form Ellobiopsis chattoni Caullery was once collected at Banyuls-sur-mer in the Mediter-
ranean, and on several occasions in the region of the Firth of Clyde. If really all the parasites of this
genus consisting of one trophomere with one gonomere which were described or mentioned by various

ELLOBIOPSIDAE 313

authors belong to E. chatloni, the species has a more or less world-wide distribution, as shown on the
map in Steuer's (i932Z>) paper. E. elongata Steuer is known from one locality only, in the South
Atlantic in the South Georgia region.

The specimens belonging to the genus Ellobiocystis were all collected in the region from the Bay of
Biscay to the Azores. Parallobiopsis is known from the Mediterranean coastal waters of France
only. Rhizellobiopsis was found in the material of two stations of the expedition of Prof. Deruguine in
the White Sea. These seemingly restricted areas probably do not constitute the real regions of distribu-
tion of the genera mentioned here.

The available data concerning the distribution of the compound Ellobiopsidae seem to point to the
fact that all these are of world-wide occurrence.

Amallocystis racemosus (Coutiere) was found in the region to the north-east of Iceland. The EUo-
biopsid mentioned and figured by Bate, and regarded by Coutiere as belonging to A. racemosus, came
from the region of the Fiji Islands.

A.fasciatiis Fage is known from the Pacific (oflr New Zealand and the Fiji Islands), from the Atlantic,
and from the Indian Ocean.

A. capillosiis Fage is known to occur in the Skagerrak (Fage, 1938) and in the Strait of Magellan
(specimens dealt with in the present paper).

The two specimens of A. umbellahis n.sp. are both from the Atlantic, one from the tropical region,
east of Brazil, the other from the South Atlantic, west of Capetown.

The specimens oiA.fagei Boschma dealt with in the present paper were all collected in the southern
hemisphere and mostly in the Antarctic region. Some of them are from the South Atlantic : off South
Brazil (St. 712), off Patagonia (St. WS 770), and Scotia Sea and off South Georgia (St. 665, 748, 751,
766, 1056). Others are from the South Pacific: Bellingshausen Sea (St. 733), and about half-way
between New Zealand and Tierra del Fuego (St. 963, 965). Others again are from the South Indian
Ocean: south of Australia (St. 892), and south-west of Australia (St. 869, 871, 872). Amallocystis sp.,
reported upon by Einarsson (1945), occurring in the waters around Iceland, in all probability belongs
to A.fagei. It is probable that the specimen mentioned by Macdonald (1927) from Cumbrae Deep in
the Firth of Clyde also belonged to the same species. This species then would also have a large area of
distribution.

LITERATURE

Apstein, C, 191 1. Parasiten von Calanus finmarchicus. Wissensch. Meeresunters., Abt. Kiel, N.F., vol. xiii.

Bate, C. S., 1888. Report on the Crustacea Macrura collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the Years 1873-1876. Rep. Sci. Res.

H.M.S. Challenger, Zoology, vol. xxiv.
Boschma, H., 1948. Sur les organelles d'absorption chez line espece ^'Amallocystis (Protozoa, Ellobiopsidae). Proc. Kon. Ned.

Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam, vol. li.
Caullery, M., 1910. Ellobiopsis chattoni, n.g., n.sp. parasite de Calanus helgolandicus Claus, appartenant probablement aux

Peridiniens. Bull, scient. France Belgique, vol. xliv.
1912. Sur un parasite de Calanus helgolandicus Claus, appartenant probablement aux Peridiniens (Ellobiopsis chattoni

n.g., n.sp.). Verh. VIII. Intern. Zool.-Kongr. Graz, 1910.
Chatton, E., 191 1. Sur divers parasites des Copepodes pelagiques observes par M. Apstein. C.R. Acad. Sci., Pans, vol. cliii.

1920. Les Peridiniens parasites; morphologic, reproduction, ethologie. Arch. Zool. exp. gen., vol. Lix.

Collin, B., 1913. Sur un Ellobiopside nouveau, parasite des Nebalies (Parallobiopsis Coutieri n.g., n.sp.). C.R. Acad. Sci.,

Paris, vol. clvl
Coutiere, H., 191 i a. Sur les crevettes eucyphotes rccueillis en 1910 au moyen du filet Bouree, par la Princesse-Alice. C.R. Acad.

Sci., Paris, vol. clil

191 1 6. Sur les Ellobiopsis des crevettes bathy pelagiques. C.R. Acad. Sci., Paris, vol. clii.

191 1 c. Les Ellobiopsidae des crevettes bathy pelagiques. Bull, scient. France Belgique, vol. xlv.

. 1938. Sur les crevettes eucyphotes recueillis en 1910 au moyen du filet Bouree, par la Princesse Alice. Res. Camp, scient.

Albert ler, Monaco, fasc. 97.

314 DISCOVERY REPORTS

CouTiERE, H., 1940a. Sur les Ellobiopsis des crevettes bathypelagiques. Res. Camp, scient. Albert ler, Monaco, fasc. 103.

19406. Les Ellobiopsidae des crevettes bathypelagiques. Res. Camp, scient. Albert ler, Monaco, fasc. 103.

EiNARSSON, H., 1945. Euphausiacea. I. Northern Atlantic Species. Carlsberg Foundation Oceanogr. Exped., 1928-30.

Dana-Report, no. 27.
Page, L., 1936. Sur un Ellobiopside nouveau Amallocystis fasciatus gen. et sp. nov. parasite des Mysidaces bathypelagiques. Arch.

Zool. exp. gen., vol. Lxxviii, notes et revue.
1938. A propos d'un nouvel Ellobiopside, Amallocystis capillosus n.sp., parasite de Pasiphaea tarda Kroyer {Crust. Decap.).

Trav. Stat. Zoo!. Wimereux, vol. xiii.

1941. Mysidacea. Lophogastrida. I. Carlsberg Foundation Oceanogr. Exped., 1928-30. Dana-Report, no. 19.

1942. Mysidacea. Lophogastrida. II. Carlsberg Foundation Oceanogr. Exped., 1928-30. Dana-Report, no. 23.

HovASSE, R., I92sa. Les Ellobiopsides se propagent par flagellispores. C.R. Acad. Sci., Paris, vol. clxxxi.

19256. Etude cytologique du cycle evolutif de Parallobiopsis coutieri Collin. C.R. Soc. Biol., Paris, vol. xciii.

1926. 'Parallobiopsis Coutieri' Collin. Morphologie, cytologic, evolution, affinite des Ellobiopsides. Bull. Biol. France

Belgique, vol. LX.

Jepps, M. W., 1937. On the protozoan Parasites of Calanus finmarchicus in the Clyde Sea Area. Quart. Joum. Micr. Sci.,

vol. LXXIX.
LiJHE, M., 1912. Discussion on paper by Caullery (1912). Verb. VIII. Intern. Zool.-Kongr. Graz, 1910.
Macdonald, R., 1927. Food and Habits of Meganyctiphanes norvegica. Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U.K., n.s., vol. xiv.
Marshall, S. M., Nicholls, A. G. and Orr, A. P., 1934. On the Biology 0/ Calanus finmarchicus. V. Seasonal Distribution,

Size, Weight and Chemical Composition in Loch Striven in 1933, and their Relation to the Phytoplankton. Journ. Mar. Biol.

Assoc. U.K., n.s., vol. xix.
Mrazek, a., 1902. Arktische Copepoden. Fauna arctica, vol. n.

Reichenow, E., 1930. Parasitische Peridinea {einschliesslich Ellobiopsidae). Tierw. Nord- u. Ostsee, pt. 11 d 3.
Sars, M., 1868. Bidrag til Kundskab om Christianiafjordens Fauna. Nyt Magaz. Naturvid., vol. xv.
Scott, T., 1897. The Marine Fishes and Invertebrates of Loch Fyne. 15th Ann. Rep. Fish. Board Scotland, pt. 3, Scientific

Investigations.
Steuer, a., 1928. Ober Ellobiopsis Chattoni Caullery 1910, einen ectoparasitischen Flagellaten mariner Copepoden. Arch.

Protistenk., vol. LX.

1932a. tJber Ellobiopsis elongata n.sp. aus dem Siidatlantik. Note 1st. ital.-germ. Biol. mar. Rovigno d'Istria, no. 5.

19326. Copepoda. 6. Pleuromamma Giesbr. 1898 der Deutschen Tief see-Expedition. Wiss. Erg. Deut. Tiefsee-Exp.

'Valdivia' 1898-1899, vol. xxiv.

1933- Bericht iiber die Bearbeitung der Copepodengattung Pleuromamma Giesbr. 1898 der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition

''Valdivia' . Thalassia (Rovigno d'Istria), vol. I, no. 2.

Willey, a., 1920. Report on the Marine Copepoda collected during the Canadian Arctic Expedition. Rep. Canad. Arctic Exp.

1913-1918, vol. VIH.
Zachs, I., 1923. Sur un nouveau Ellobiopside— parasite du Nephtys ciliata Miill. Ellobiopsis (.') Eupraxiae n.sp. Trav. Soc.

Natural. Petrograd, vol. Lin.

PLATE XXXVIII

Amallocystis fagei Boschma

Figs. 1-3. Specimens on Euphausia vallentini Stebbing from St. WS
770. Side view of host, x 6.

Fig. 4. Specimen of fig. I. Dorsal view of host. x6.

Fig. 5. Specimen of fig. 2. Dorsal view of host, x 6.

Fig. 6. Specimen on Euphausia recurva H. J. Hansen from St. 712.
Side view of host, x 6.

Fig. 7. Specimen on Thysanoessa gregaria G. O. Sars from St. 965.
Side view of host, x 6.

Fig. 8. Specimen on Euphausia frigida H. J. Hansen from St. 751.
Side view of host, x 6.

Fig. 9. Specimen on Euphausia hemigihba H. J. Hansen from St. 872.
Side view of host, x 6.

Fig. 10. Specimen of fig. 2. x2i.

Fig. II. Specimen of fig. 8. x2i.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL XXV

PLATE XXXVIII

PLATE XXXIX

Transverse section of Euphausia vallentini Stebbing with AmaUocystis
fagei Boschma from St. WS 770. a, appendages of host ; /, organ
of fixation ; g, gonomere ; h, hepatopancreas of host ; i, intestine of
host ; m, musculature of host ; «, ventral nerve cord of host ; o, ovary
of host; p, protoplasmatic excrescences; s, sieve plate; t, tropho-
mere. x 50.

DISCOVERY lE^ORTS, VOL XXV

PLATE XXXI

4

Transve]

fagel Boscl

host ; m
of host; p,
mere, x 50

PLATE XX>nX

an of Euphausia rallentini Steb
■om St. WSJ770. «\apjie
atip;

h Atuallocystis

of host; /, organ

host; i, intestine of

cord of host ; o, ovary

sieve plate; t, tropho-

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL XXV

PLATE XXXIX

#

V

mm

*u

PLATE XL

Upper figure : longitudinal section of Euphaiisia vallentini Stebbing with
two specimens of Amallocystis fagei Boschma from St. WS 770.
X 61.

Lower figure: Part of next section of the same specimen.
X525. c, cuticle of host; e f, external part of organ of fixation;
/, organ of fixation; g, gonomere; h, hepatopancreas of host; ht,
heart of host ; m, musculature of host ; o, ovary of host ; p, proto-
plasmatic excrescences ; s, sieve plate ; si, stomach of host ; t, tropho-
mere.

DISCOVERY REPORTb. VOL XXV

PLATE XL

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL XXV

PLATE XL

PLATE XLI

Fig. I. Hoplophorus grimaldii Coutiere with Amallocystis umbellatus
n.sp. Slightly more than x 2.

Fig. 2. Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp. Same specimen, x 18.

Fig. 3. Rostral region of Pasiphaea acutifrons Bate with Amallocystis
capillosus Fage. Approximately x 14.

Fig. 4. Rostral region of Pasiphaea acutifrons Bate with Amallocystis
capillosus Fage. Sectioned specimen. Approximately x 14.

DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL XXV

PLATE XLI

C'

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

\%su.&di. by the Discovery Committee and Klational Institute of Oceanography
Vol. XXV, pp. i-vi

TITLE-PAGE AND LIST OF CONTENTS

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1953

Price one shilling and sixpence net

PUBLISHED BY

THE SYNDICS OF THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

London Office : Bentley House, n.w. i

American Branch : New York

Agents for Canada, India, and Pakistan : Macmillan

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge
(Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

[Discovery Reports. Vol. XXV, pp. 1-30, Plates I-IV, March 1948.]

ANTARCTIC PYRENOCARP LICHENS

By
I. MACKENZIE LAMB, D.Sc.

WOODS

HOLE,

MASS.

CONTENTS

Introduction page 3

Historical survey of lichenological work in the Antarctic 3

Geographical distribution 9

Ecology 10

Systematic account 11

List of Literature 28

Plates following page 30

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

Vol. XXV, pp. 1-30, plates I-IV

Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Qovemment of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands

ANTARCTIC PYRENOCARP LICHENS

I. Mackenzie Lamb, D.Sc.

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

1948

Price seven shillings and sixpence

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge

(Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

and published by the Cambridge University Press

(Cambridge, and Bentley House, London)

Agents for U.S.A., Canada, and India: Macmillan

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

Vol. XXV, pp. 31-38, plates V-XXII

Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of tfie Qovemment of the Dependencies of the Falklc^nd Islands

WHALE MARKING II

DISTRIBUTION OF BLUE, FIN AND HUMPBACK
WHALES MARKED FROM 1932 TO 1938

hy
George W. Rayner

[WOODS HOLE I

0CEAN06RAPHIC INblllUliQN |
JUN 22 1948 ,
WOODS HOLE, MASS.

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

1948

Price seven shillings and sixpence

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge

(Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

and published by the Cambridge University Press

{Cambridge, and Bentley House, London)

Agents for U.S.A., Canada, and India: Macmillan

[Discovery Reports. Vol. XXV, pp. 31-38, Plates V-XXII, May, 1948.]

WHALE MARKING II

DISTRIBUTION OF BLUE, FIN AND HUMPBACK
WHALES MARKED FROM 1932 TO 1938

By
GEORGE W. RAYNER

CONTENTS

Distribution of whales marked 33

I. Blue whales 35

II. Fin whales 36

III. Humpback whales 37

Plates V-XXII following page 38

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

Vol. XXV, pp. 39-106, plates XXIII-XXXI

Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Qovernment of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY
INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-39

H. F. P. Herdman, M.Sc.

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

1948

Price twenty'two shillings

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge

(Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

and published by the Cambridge University Press

{Cambridge, and Bentley House, London)

Agents for U.S.A., Canada, and India: Macmillan

7). C

[Discovery Reports. Vol. XXV, pp. 39-106, Plates XXIII-XXXI, September 1948.] — ^

SOUNDINGS TAKEN DURING THE DISCOVERY
INVESTIGATIONS, 1932-39

By
H. F. P. HERDMAN, M.Sc.

CONTENTS

Introduction page 41

Sounding equipment 42

Deep-water echo-sounding set 43

Shallow-water echo-sounding set 43

Correction of echo soundings 48

Difficulties of obtaining soundings 50

Slope correction and the condition of the ocean floor 52

Composition of the bottom 58

Terminology of submarine relief 60

The Scotia Arc 61

Detailed analysis of the sectors of the Scotia Arc 68

Tierra del Fuego to the Shag Rocks 68

South Georgia and the Shag Rocks 70

South Georgia to the South Sandwich Islands 71

South Sandwich Islands to the South Orkney Islands 72

South Orkneys to Clarence Island and the South Shetlands .... 74

Soundings during hydrographical surveys 77

South Orkneys Survey 78

South Shetlands Survey 79

Balleny Islands 82

Tristan da Cunha Group 83

Marion and Prince Edward Islands 84

Bouvet Island 84

Magellan Strait 84

Soundings off Antarctica in the meridian of Greenwich 85

The Continental shelf of Antarctica 86

Soundings in other localities 88

Discovery Bank 90

The Ross Sea 92

Kerguelen-Gaussberg ridge 94

Appendix I 95

Appendix II 98

References 102

Note on the plates 105

Plates XXIII-XXXI following page 105

r

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

Vol. XXV, pp. 107-112, plate XXXII

Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Qovernment of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands

ON THE REPRODUCTIVE ORGANS OF
HOLOZOA CYLINDRICA LESSON

Dr A. Arnback Christie-Linde

U^''- '

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

1949
Price two shillings

PUBLISHED BY

THE SYNDICS OF THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

London Office : Bentley House, N.w, i

American Branch: New York

Agents for Canada, India, and Pakistan : Macmillan

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge
(Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

[Discovery Reports. Vol. XXV, pp. 107-112, Plate XXXII, March 1949.]

ON THE REPRODUCTIVE ORGANS OF
HOLOZOA CYLINDRICA LESSON

By

Dr a. ARNBACK CHRISTIE-LINDE

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

Vol. XXV, pp. 113-142, plate XXXIII

Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Qovernment of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands

THE HABITS OF FIN WHALES

E. R. Gunther

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

1949

Price four shillings

1\ /

PUBLISHED BY

THE SYNDICS OF THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

London Office : Bentley House, N.w. i

American Branch : New York

Agents for Canada, India, and Pakistan : Macmillan

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge
(Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

[Discovery Reports. Vol. XXV, pp. ii3-i42> Plate XXXIII, July 1949.]

THE HABITS OF FIN WHALES

By
E. R. GUNTHER

CONTENTS

Introduction page 115

I. Appearance at the surface 116

Breaking surface to breathe 116

Breaking surface without breathing 118

Swimming 118

Frequency of blowing 118

The response of whales to marking , 122

Feeding 124

Gambols and eccentricities of behaviour 126

II. Movements beneath the surface 127

Breaking surface 127

The head, dorsal fin and caudal peduncle 129

III. Comparison with earlier accounts 131

Respiratory rhythm 132

Feeding 133

Gambols 133

Breeding habits 133

Intercommunication between whales 134

Asymmetrical pigmentation of Fin whales 135

Summary and Conclusions 135

References 135

Appendix. Tables 3 and 4 137

Plate XXXIII following page 142

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

Vol. XXV, pp. 143-280, plates XXXIV-XXXVII

Issued lo( the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the government of tfie' Dependencies of the Falkland Islands

STATION LIST

KKS. ^WILLIAM SCORESBY'

1931—1938

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1949

Price twenty-five shillings net

PUBLISHED BY
THE SYNDICS OF THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

London Office: Bentley House, n.w. i
American Branch: New York

Agents for Canada, India, and Pakistan : Macmillan

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge
{Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

o-C,

DISCOVERY
REPORTS

Vol. XXV, pp. 281-314, plates XXXVIII-XLI

Issued hy the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Qovemment of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands

ELLOBIOPSIDAE

by
Dr H. Boschma, F.M.L.S., C.M.Z.S.

CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS

1949
Price eight shillings and sixpence

PUBLISHED BY

THE SYNDICS OF THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

London Office : Bentley House, n.w. i

American Branch : New York

Agents for Canada, India, and Pakistan : Macmillan

Printed in Great Britain at the University Press, Cambridge
{Brooke Crutchley, University Printer)

[Discovery Reports. Vol. XXV, pp. 281-314, Plates XXXVIII-XLI, November 1949.]

ELLOBIOPSIDAE

By

Dr H. BOSCHMA, F.M.L.S., C.M.Z.S.

CONTENTS

Introduction .......

Review of the literature of the Ellobiopsidae
Amallocystis fagei Boschma .....

Amallocystis umbellatus n.sp. ....

Amallocystis capillosus Fage ....

The characters of the species of the genus Amallocystis
The genera of the family Ellobiopsidae
Geographical distribution of the Ellobiopsidae
Literature ........

Plates XXXVIII-XLI follomng page

PAGE

283

294

302

312
313
314

o